How long can I drive before I need to recharge the battery?

The battery has a nominal capacity of 78 kWh. A fully-charged battery gives you a projected range of up to 418km/208 miles* in mixed driving before you need to recharge. But your real-world range is also affected by your driving style and other circumstances, such as outdoor temperature, weather, wind, topography and roads. Other factors that impact range include how much electricity you use for car functions such as heating and cooling of the car. One way to improve range is to pre-condition your car during charging so it’s already at a comfortable temperature when you go. You can also add a heat pump that saves valuable energy. On a daily basis, you will probably fill up the battery whenever the car is parked where charging is possible – be it at home, at work or in the city. So range should not be an issue for everyday driving, provided that you have good access to charging. *Range according to the realistic WLTP and EPA driving cycles under controlled conditions for a new vehicle. Real-world range may vary. Figures are based on preliminary target. Final vehicle certification pending.

Can I use the pure electric XC40 Recharge for long-distance driving?

This pure electric compact SUV is perfectly suited for comfortable long-distance driving. And the battery’s high capacity with a projected range of up to 418km/208 miles* ensures you can do so without worrying about range. If you need to charge during the journey, you can do so at an AC charging station or DC fast-charging station. At a 150 kW DC fast charging station, it’s possible to charge the battery from zero to 80 per cent in approximately 40 minutes (or around 80–100 km range in 10 minutes) – just enough time to rest or have a meal during the trip.

What charging times can I expect when recharging at home?

- The charging time depends on the charging equipment you use and the electric installation at your home. The standard home charging cable with a household connector is primarily an auxiliary cable. Charging an empty battery to 100 per cent with this cable takes approximately 40–72 hours depending on market, at a charge rate of about 7–14 km range per hour. - For regular and considerably shorter charging times at home, we recommend a 3-phase 11 kW wallbox. This installation can give you approximately 8 hours charging time (from empty to 100 per cent), or around 50–60 km range per hour. - When charging at stations outside your home, the most probable situations are that you will top the battery during shorter periods of time, for example from 40 per cent to 80 per cent (11 kW AC gives around 50–60 km range per hour). And on longer trips, you may charge the car using fast-charging DC stations. At a 150 kW DC charging station, you can charge the battery from zero to around 80 per cent in approximately 40 minutes (or around 80–100 km range in 10 minutes). Just enough time to take a rest and have a meal. - Please note: Charging times will vary and are dependent on factors such as outdoor temperature, current battery temperature, charging equipment, battery condition and car condition.

What warranty does Volvo Cars have on the battery?

The Volvo Cars Warranty for the battery is 8 years or 160,000km, whichever occurs first, provided that the car and battery are maintained and used in accordance with Volvo Cars' recommendations.

Volvo XC40 Electric Recharge User Manual

XC40

OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We hope your Volvo will give you many years of happy motoring.

The vehicle is designed for the safety and comfort of you and your

passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the world's safest pas-

senger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable

safety and environmental requirements.

To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you

read the instructions and maintenance information contained in this

owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile

app (Volvo Manual) and on Volvo Cars support page

(support.volvocars.com).

We also encourage everyone to always use seat belts in this and

other vehicles. You should also not drive if you are under the influ-

ence of alcohol or medicines or if your ability to drive is for some

other reason impaired.

2
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner's information
16
Owner's Manual in the center display
17
Navigate in the Owner's Manual
in the center display
18
Owner's manual in mobile devices
20
Volvo Cars support site
21
Using the Owner's Manual
21
The Owner's Manual and the envi-
ronment
23
YOUR VOLVO
Contacting Volvo
26
Volvo ID
26
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
27
Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure
28
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
29
Sensus - connection and enter-
tainment
30
Software Updates
33
Data recording
33
Terms and Conditions for Services
35
Customer Privacy Policy
35
Important information on acces-
sories and extra equipment
36
Accessory installation
37
Connecting equipment to the
vehicle's data link connector
37
Technician certification
38
Viewing the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
39
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
39
Change of market when importing
or relocating
40
Driver distraction
41
SAFETY
Safety
44
Safety during pregnancy
45
Occupant safety
45
Reporting safety defects
46
Recall information
47
Whiplash Protection System
48
Seat belts
49
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts
50
Seat belt tensioners
52
Resetting the electric seat belt
tensioners*
53
Door and seat belt reminders
54
Airbags
55
Driver/passenger side front airbags
56
Occupant Classification System
59
Side airbags
63
Inflatable curtain
63
Safety mode
64
Starting and moving the vehicle
when it is in safety mode
65
Child safety
66
Child restraints
68
Infant seats
70
Convertible seats
72
Booster cushions
75
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3
 
Top tether anchors
76
Lower child seat attachment points
77
ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors
78
DISPLAYS AND VOICE
CONTROL
Displays and controls by the driver
in a left-hand drive vehicle
82
Instrument panel
84
Instrument panel settings
86
Fuel gauge
87
Trip computer
87
Displaying trip data in the instru-
ment panel
88
Resetting the trip odometer
89
Displaying trip statistics in the
center display
90
Trip statistics settings
90
Date and time
91
Ambient temperature sensor
92
Indicator and warning symbols
92
Instrument panel licenses
95
App menu in instrument panel
100
Handling the App menu in the
instrument panel
101
Messages in the instrument panel
102
Handling messages in the instru-
ment panel
103
Handling messages saved from
the instrument panel
104
Center display overview
106
Handling the center display
108
 
Activating and deactivating the
center display
111
Navigating in the center display's
views
111
Handling tiles in the center display
115
Function view in the center display
118
Moving apps and buttons in the
center display
120
Symbols in the center display sta-
tus bar
120
Using the center display keyboard
122
Changing keyboard language in
the center display
125
Entering characters, letters and
words by hand in the center display
125
Changing the appearance of the
center display
127
Turning off and adjusting the vol-
ume of the center display system
sounds
127
Changing system units of meas-
urement
128
Changing system language
128
Changing settings in the center
display's Top view
128
Opening contextual setting in the
center display
129
Resetting user data when the
vehicle changes owners
130

4
 
Resetting center display settings
130
Table of settings in the center display
131
Driver profiles
132
Selecting a driver profile
133
Changing a driver profile's name
133
Protecting a driver profile
134
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
134
Resetting driver profile settings
136
Messages in the center display
136
Handling messages in the center
display
137
Handling messages saved from
the center display
137
Voice Control
138
Use voice recognition
139
Voice control for cellular phones
141
Voice control for radio and media
142
Voice control settings
142
LIGHTING
Lighting control and panel
146
Adjusting light functions via the
center display
147
Parking lights
148
Daytime running lights
148
Low beams
149
Using high beam
150
Active high beam
151
Using turn signals
152
Active Bending Lights*
152
Front fog lights/corner illumination*
153
Rear fog light
154
Brake lights
155
Emergency brake lights
155
Hazard warning flashers
155
Using home safe lighting
156
Welcome Light
156
Interior Lighting
156
Adjusting interior lighting
158
WINDOWS, GLASS AND
MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
160
Pinch protection for windows and
sun curtains
160
Reset procedure for pinch protection
160
Power windows
161
Operating the power windows
161
Rearview/door mirrors
163
Adjusting the rearview mirror dim-
ming function
163
Adjusting the door mirrors
164
Panoramic roof*
165
Operating the panoramic roof*
167
Auto closing the panoramic roof*
sun curtain
169
Wiper blades and washer fluid
170
Using the windshield wipers
170
Using the rain sensor
171
Activating and deactivating the
rain sensor's memory function
172
Using the windshield and head-
light washers
173
Using the rear window wiper/washer
174
Using automatic rear window
wiping when backing up
175

5
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seats
178
Power* front seats
179
Adjusting the power* front seats
179
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
180
Using stored positions for seats
and mirrors
181
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
182
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
182
Folding down the rear seat backrests
183
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
185
Steering wheel controls and horn
186
Adjusting the steering wheel
187
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate
190
Climate zones
190
Climate control sensors
191
Perceived temperature
192
Climate control system voice
commands
192
Air quality
193
CleanZone*
194
Clean Zone Interior Package*
194
Interior Air Quality System*
195
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
195
Passenger compartment air filter
196
Air distribution
196
Adjusting air distribution
197
Opening, closing and directing air
vents
197
Air distribution options
198
Climate system controls
201
Activating and deactivating power
front seats*
203
Activating and deactivating the
heated front seat*
203
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear seats*
204
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
204
 
Activating and deactivating auto-
matic steering wheel heating*
205
Activating auto climate control
205
Activating and deactivating recir-
culation
206
Activating and deactivating the
recirculation timer setting
206
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
207
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
208
Automatically activating and deac-
tivating the heated rear window
and door mirrors
208
Setting the blower speed for the
front seats
209
Setting the temperature for the
front seats
210
Synchronize temperature
211
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
211
Parking climate*
212
Preconditioning*
212
Starting and stopping precondi-
tioning*
213
Preconditioning timer*
213
Adding and editing timer settings
for preconditioning*
214

6
 
Activating and deactivating pre-
conditioning timer*
215
Deleting preconditioning timer
settings*
215
Climate comfort retaining function*
216
Starting and switching off the cli-
mate retaining function when parking*
217
Parking climate symbols and mes-
sages*
218
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking
220
Lock indication
220
Lock confirmation settings
221
Remote key
222
Locking and unlocking using the
remote key
225
Settings for remote and inside
door unlock
226
Unlocking the tailgate using the
remote key
226
Remote key range
227
Replacing the remote key's battery
228
Ordering additional remote keys
232
Care Key – restricted remote key
232
Care Key settings
233
Detachable key blade
233
Locking and unlocking with
detachable key blade
234
Electronic immobilizer
236
Start and lock system type desig-
nations
236
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
238
Keyless locking and unlocking*
239
Keyless unlock settings*
240
Keyless tailgate unlock*
240
 
Antenna locations for the start
and lock system
241
Locking and unlocking from inside
the vehicle
242
Unlocking the tailgate from inside
the vehicle
243
Activating and deactivating child locks
243
Automatic locking when driving
244
Closing and locking the tailgate
using the buttons*
245
Setting maximum opening height
for the power tailgate*
247
Operating the tailgate with a foot
movement*
247
Private Locking
248
Activating and deactivating pri-
vate locking
249
Alarm
250
Arming and disarming the alarm
251

7
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver support systems
254
Speed-dependent steering wheel
resistance
254
Electronic Stability Control
255
Electronic Stability Control in
sport mode
256
Activating or deactivating Sport
mode for Electronic Stability Control
257
Electronic Stability Control sym-
bols and messages
258
Connected Safety
260
Activating or deactivating
Connected Safety
261
Connected Safety limitations
261
Road Sign Information*
262
Activating or deactivating Road
Sign Information*
263
Road Sign Information* display
263
Road Sign Information and
Sensus Navigation*
264
Speed limit and speed camera
warnings from Road Sign Information*
264
Activating or deactivating warn-
ings from Road Sign Information*
265
Road Sign Information* limitations
266
Cruise control
267
Selecting and activating cruise control
268
Deactivating cruise control
269
 
Cruise control standby mode
270
Adaptive Cruise Control*
270
Adaptive Cruise Control* controls
272
Adaptive Cruise Control* displays
272
Selecting and activating Adaptive
Cruise Control*
273
Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control*
274
Adaptive Cruise Control* standby
mode
275
Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
276
Switching between cruise control
and Adaptive Cruise Control* in
the center display
277
Symbols and messages for Adap-
tive Cruise Control*
278
Pilot Assist*
280
Pilot Assist* controls
282
Pilot Assist* displays
283
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
284
Deactivating Pilot Assist*
285
Pilot Assist* standby mode
286
Temporarily deactivating steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*
287
Pilot Assist* limitations
288
Pilot Assist* symbols and messages
290
Passing assistance*
292
 
Using passing assistance
292
Collision risk warning from driver
support
293
Switching target vehicles with
driver support
294
Adjusting set speed for driver support
294
Setting time interval to the vehicle
ahead
295
Drive modes when using time
interval to vehicle
297
Auto-hold braking with driver support
297
Lane Keeping Aid
298
Activating or deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid
300
Selecting type of assistance for
Lane Keeping Aid
301
Lane Keeping Aid limitations
301
Lane Keeping Aid symbols and
messages
302
Lane Keeping Aid display
304
City Safety™
305
City Safety sub-functions
306
Setting a warning distance for
City Safety
308
Detecting obstacles with City Safety
309
City Safety in crossing traffic
311
Limitations of City Safety in cross-
ing traffic
311

8
 
Automatic braking during delayed
evasive maneuvers with City Safety
312
City Safety braking for oncoming
vehicles
313
City Safety limitations
313
City Safety messages
317
Steering assistance at risk of collision
318
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance during collision risks
319
Run-Off Mitigation with steering
assistance
319
Steering assistance during colli-
sion risks from oncoming traffic
320
Steering assistance during colli-
sion risks from behind*
321
Steering assistance during colli-
sion risks limitations
322
Symbols and messages for steer-
ing assistance during collision risks
323
Rear Collision Warning*
324
Rear Collision Warning* limitations
324
BLIS*
325
Activating or deactivating BLIS
326
BLIS limitations
327
BLIS messages
328
Driver Alert Control
329
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
330
 
Selecting guidance to a rest area if
the Driver Alert Control warning
has been given
330
Driver Alert Control limitations
331
Cross Traffic Alert*
331
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*
332
Cross Traffic Alert* limitations
333
Cross Traffic Alert* messages
334
Park Assist*
335
Park Assist front, rear and sides*
336
Activating or deactivating Park Assist*
337
Park Assist limitations
338
Park Assist symbols and messages
339
Park Assist Camera*
340
Location and field of vision of Park
Assist Cameras*
341
Park Assist Camera trajectory lines*
343
Park Assist sensor field
345
Activating Park Assist Camera
346
Park Assist Camera symbols and
messages
348
Park Assist Pilot* 
350
Types of parking with Park Assist
Pilot*
351
Using Park Assist Pilot*
352
 
Leaving a parallel parking space
with Park Assist Pilot*
355
Park Assist Pilot* limitations 
355
Park Assist Pilot* messages
358
Radar sensor
359
Radar sensor type approval
360
Camera
362
Camera/radar sensor limitations
362
Recommended camera and radar
sensor maintenance
365
Camera and radar unit symbols
and messages
367

9
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the vehicle
370
Switching off the vehicle
372
Ignition modes
372
Selecting ignition mode
374
Brake functions
374
Brakes
375
Brake Assist System
376
Braking on wet roads
376
Braking on salted roads
377
Maintenance of the brake system
377
Parking brake
377
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
378
Settings for automatically activat-
ing the parking brake
379
Parking on a hill
380
Parking brake malfunction
380
Auto-hold brakes
381
Activating and deactivating Auto-
hold at a standstill
382
Hill Start Assist
382
Braking assist after a collision
383
Regenerative braking*
383
Transmission
383
Automatic transmission
384
 
Shifting gears with automatic
transmission
384
Using the steering wheel paddles*
to shift
386
Shiftlock
387
The kickdown function
387
The Launch function*
388
Automatic transmission symbols
and messages
388
All Wheel Drive (AWD)*
388
Drive modes*
389
Changing drive mode*
391
Eco drive mode
391
Activating and deactivating Eco
drive mode using the function button
393
Start/Stop function
394
Driving with the Start/Stop function
394
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
395
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
396
Leveling control* and suspension
398
Low Speed Control*
399
Activating and deactivating Low
Speed Control* using the function
button
399
Hill Descent Control*
400
 
Activating and deactivating Hill
Descent Control* using the func-
tion button
401
Economical driving
402
Preparing for a long trip
403
Winter driving
403
Driving through standing water
404
Opening/closing the fuel filler door
404
Refueling
405
Fuel
406
Octane rating
407
Emission controls
408
Overheating of engine and trans-
mission
409
Battery drain
410
Jump starting using another battery
410
Detachable towbar*
413
Driving with a trailer
414
Trailer Stability Assist*
416
Checking trailer lights
417
Towing using a towline
418
Attaching and removing the tow-
ing eyelet
419
Recovery
421
HomeLink
®
*
421
Programming HomeLink
®
*
422

10
 
Using HomeLink
®
*
424
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
424
Compass*
425
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
425
Calibrating the compass*
426
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Audio, media and Internet
428
Sound settings
428
Sound experience*
429
Apps
429
Download apps
430
Updating apps
431
Deleting apps
432
Radio
432
Starting the radio
433
Changing waveband and radio station
433
Searching for a radio station
434
Storing radio channels in the
Radio favorites app
435
Radio settings
435
RBDS
436
HD Radio™
436
Activating and deactivating the HD
Radio™
438
HD Radio™ sub-channels
438
HD Radio™ limitations
439
SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio*
440
Using SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio*
441
Settings for SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio*
442
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
*
444
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather
445
 
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
446
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel
447
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Sports
448
Media player
449
Playing media
450
Controlling and changing media
451
Media searches
452
Gracenote
®
453
Video
453
Playing video
454
Playing DivX
®
 
454
Video settings
454
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
455
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
455
Playing media via the USB port
455
Connecting a device via the USB port
456
Technical specifications for USB
devices
456
Compatible file formats for media
457
Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
*
458
Using Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
*
459
Settings for Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
*
461
Tips for using Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
*
461
Android Auto*
462

11
 
Using Android Auto*
463
Settings for Android Auto*
464
Tips for using Android Auto*
464
Phone
465
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
466
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
468
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
468
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone
468
Switch between phones con-
nected via Bluetooth
469
Disconnecting Bluetooth-con-
nected devices
469
Handling phone calls
469
Handling text messages
470
Text message settings
471
Managing the phone book
472
Phone settings
472
Settings for Bluetooth devices
473
Wireless phone charger*
473
Using the wireless phone charger*
474
Certificate for wireless charger
475
Internet-connected vehicle*
479
 
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a Bluetooth-connected
phone
480
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
480
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via vehicle modem (SIM card)
481
Vehicle modem settings
482
Sharing Internet from the vehicle
via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
483
No or poor Internet connection
484
Deleting Wi-Fi networks
484
Wi-Fi technology and security
485
Terms of use and data sharing
485
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
486
Data sharing for services
486
Hard disk storage space
487
License agreement for audio and
media
488
WHEELS AND TIRES
Tires
500
Tire direction of rotation
502
Tread wear indicator
503
Tire terminology
503
Tire sidewall designations
504
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
506
Checking tire pressure
507
Adjusting tire pressure
508
Recommended tire pressure
509
Tire pressure monitoring system*
509
Saving new reference values for
tire inflation pressure monitoring*
511
Viewing tire pressure status in the
center display*
512
Action when warned of low tire
pressure
513
Tire inflation pressure monitoring
system* messages
514
Changing a wheel
514
Tool kit
516
Jack*
517
Wheel bolts
517
Spare wheel
518
Handling the spare wheel
519
Snow tires
520
Snow chains
521

12
 
Tire sealing system
522
Using the tire sealing system
523
Inflate tires with the compressor
included in the tire sealing system
527
Determining the vehicle's permit-
ted weight
528
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
532
Tunnel console
533
Electrical outlets
534
Using the electrical outlets
534
Using the glove compartment
535
Sun visors
537
Cargo compartment
537
Loading recommendations
537
Roof loads and load carriers
538
Grocery bag holders
539
Load anchoring eyelets
540
Rear seat ski hatch*
540
Folding up the cargo compartment
floor
540
Removing the folding cargo com-
partment floor*
541
Installing and removing the cargo net*
542
Removing and storing the parcel shelf
544
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo's service program
548
Data transfer between vehicle and
workshop over Wi-Fi
550
Download Center
551
Handling system updates via
Download Center
551
Vehicle status
552
Scheduling service and repairs
553
Sending vehicle information to the
workshop
554
Hoisting the vehicle
555
Climate control system service
558
Opening and closing the hood
558
Engine compartment overview
559
Engine oil
560
Checking and filling engine oil
562
Coolant
563
Refilling coolant
563
Starter battery
565
Support battery
567
Battery symbols
569
Battery recycling
569
Fuses and fuseboxes
570
Replacing fuses
570
Fuses in the engine compartment
572

13
 
Fuses under the left front seat
578
Replacing bulbs
584
Location of exterior lights
585
Replacing rear turn signal bulbs
585
Replacing the brake light bulb
587
Replacing the rear fog light bulb
588
Bulb specifications
588
Cleaning the interior
589
Cleaning the center display
589
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
ceiling liner
590
Cleaning the seat belt
591
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
592
Cleaning leather upholstery*
592
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
593
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood surfaces
594
Cleaning the exterior
594
Polishing and waxing
595
Hand washing
596
Automatic car washes
597
High-pressure washing
598
Cleaning the wiper blades
599
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
599
 
Cleaning rims
600
Corrosion protection
601
Paintwork
601
Touching up minor paint damage
602
Color codes
603
Changing rear window wipers
603
Replacing windshield wiper blades
604
Putting the wiper blades in service
position
605
Filling washer fluid
606
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
610
Dimensions
613
Weights
615
Towing capacity and tongue weight
616
Engine specifications
617
Engine oil specifications
618
Transmission fluid specifications
618
Brake fluid specifications
619
Fuel tank volume
619
Air conditioning specifications
619
Approved tire pressure
621

INDEX

Index 623

OWNER'S INFORMATION

Owner's information

Owner's information is available in several

different formats, both digital and printed.

The Owner's Manual is available on the vehi-

cle's center display, as a mobile app and on

Volvo Cars' support website. There is also a

Quick Guide in the glove compartment, as

well as a supplement to the Owner's Manual

containing information about e.g. fuses, spec-

ifications, etc. A printed Owner's Manual can

be ordered.

Vehicle's center display

In the center display, pull

down Top view and tap

Owner's manual. This gives

you access to visual naviga-

tion with exterior and interior

images of the vehicle. The

information is searchable and

is divided into categories.

Mobile app

In App Store or Google Play,

search for "Volvo Manual".

Download the app to your

smartphone or tablet and

select your vehicle model.

The app contains instructive

videos and offers visual navi-

gation, including exterior and interior images

of the vehicle. The contents are searchable

and the sections are designed to be easy to

navigate.

Volvo Cars support site

Go to volvocars.com/support

and select your country.

Owner's Manuals are availa-

ble here for viewing online

and in PDF format. The sup-

port site also contains

instructive videos and addi-

tional information and assistance concerning

your vehicle and owning a Volvo. The website

is available on most markets.

Printed information

The glove compartment con-

tains a printed supplement to

the Owner's Manual

, which

contains information on fuses

and specifications as well as

a summary of important and

practical information.

There is also a printed Quick Guide with useful

information about the most commonly used

features and functions in your vehicle.

Other printed information may also be provi-

ded in the vehicle, depending on equipment

level, market, etc.

A printed Owner's Manual and accompanying

supplement can also be ordered. Contact a

Volvo retailer to order.

For markets without Owner's Manuals in the center display, a complete printed manual is provided along with the vehicle.

OWNER'S INFORMATION
}}
17
CAUTION
The driver is always responsible for operat-
ing the vehicle in a safe manner and adher-
ing to all applicable laws and regulations. It
is also important that the vehicle is oper-
ated, maintained and serviced according to
Volvo's recommendations provided in the
owner's information.
If the information in the center display dif-
fers from the printed information, the prin-
ted information always takes precedence.
NOTE
Changing languages in the center display
could mean that certain owner's informa-
tion will not comply with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not change to a
language you do not speak well, as it can
be difficult to find your way back through
the menu.
Related information
•
Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
•
Owner's manual in mobile devices
(p. 20)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
•
Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)
Owner's Manual in the center
display
A digital version of the Owner's Manual is
available in the vehicle's center display
2
.
The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed
from Top view and in certain cases, the con-
textual Owner's Manual can also be accessed
from Top view.
NOTE
The digital Owner's Manual is not available
during driving.
OWNER'S MANUAL
Top view with button for Owner's Manual.
To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Top
view in the center display and tap 
Owner's
manual.
The information in the Owner's Manual can be
accessed directly via the Owner's Manual
start page or via its Top menu.
2
Available in most markets.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

Contextual Owner's Manual

Top view with button for contextual Owner's Manual.

The contextual Owner's Manual is a shortcut

to an article in the Owner's Manual describing

the active function displayed on the screen.

When a contextual Owner's Manual is availa-

ble, it will be shown to the right of

Owner's

manual in Top view.

Tap the contextual Owner's Manual to open

an article in the Owner's Manual related to the

information displayed on the screen.

For example, tap

Navigation Manual to open

an article related to navigation.

Certain apps in the vehicle only. For downloa-

ded third-party apps, it is e.g. not possible to

access app-specific articles.

Related information

•

Navigate in the Owner's Manual in the

center display (p. 18)

•

Navigating in the center display's views

(p. 111)

•

Download apps (p. 430)

Navigate in the Owner's Manual in

the center display

The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed

from the center display's Top view. The con-

tents are searchable and the sections are

designed to be easy to navigate.

The Owner's Manual is accessed from Top view.

–

To open the Owner's Manual, pull down

Top view in the center display and tap

Owner's manual.

There are a number of ways to find informa-

tion in the Owner's Manual. The options can

be accessed from the Owner's Manual start

page and from the Top menu.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

}}

Opening the menu in the Top menu

–

Tap in the upper list in the Owner's

Manual.

> A menu will open, displaying different

options for finding information:

Start page

Tap the symbol to return to

the Owner's Manual start

page.

Featured articles

Tap the symbol to go to a

page with links to a selection

of useful articles about the

vehicle's more commonly

used features and functions.

The articles can also be

accessed via categories, but

have been collected here for quicker access.

Tap an article to read it in its entirety.

Exterior and interior hotspots

Exterior and interior over-

views of the vehicle. Hot-

spots are provided for certain

functions, components, etc.

Tap a hotspot to come to a

relevant article.

Press

Exterior or Interior.

> Exterior or interior images of the vehicle

are shown with hotspots. The hotspots

lead to articles about the corresponding

function, component, etc. Swipe the

screen horizontally to scroll between

the images.

2. Tap a hotspot.

> The title of a relevant article will be dis-

played.

3. Tap the title to open the article.

To go back, tap the left arrow.

Favorites

Tap the symbol to go to arti-

cles saved as favorites. Tap

an article to read it in its

entirety.

Saving or deleting favorite articles

Save an article as a favorite by tapping the

at the upper right when the article is open.

When an article has been saved as a favorite,

the star symbol will be filled in:

To remove an article from the list of favorites,

tap its star again.

Video

Tap the symbol to go to brief

instructive videos for various

functions in the vehicle.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

Information

Tap the symbol for informa-

tion about the current version

of the Owner's Manual in

your vehicle and other useful

information.

Using the search function in the Top

Tap in the Owner's Manual upper

menu. A keyboard will appear at the bot-

tom of the screen.

2. Enter a search word, e.g. "seat belt".

> Suggested articles and categories will

be displayed as characters are entered.

3. Tap the article or category to read it.

Related information

•

Owner's Manual in the center display

(p. 17)

•

Using the center display keyboard

(p. 122)

•

Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

Owner's manual in mobile devices

The Owner's Manual is available as a mobile

app

and can be downloaded from the App

Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for

both smartphones and tablets.

The Owner's Manual can be

downloaded as a mobile app

from the App Store or Google

Play. This QR code will take

you directly to the app. You

can also search for "Volvo

manual" in the App Store or

Google Play.

The app contains videos and exterior/interior

images of the vehicle. These images contain

hotspots for various functions, components,

etc., which lead directly to related information.

The contents are searchable and the sections

are designed to be easy to navigate.

The mobile app is available on both App Store and

Google Play.

Related information

•

Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

Certain mobile devices.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

}}

* Option/accessory.

Volvo Cars support site

Volvo Cars' website and support site contain

additional information about your vehicle.

Online support

Go to volvocars.com/support to visit the site.

The support site is available in most markets.

The site contains support for e.g. Internet-

based services and functions, Volvo On Call,

the navigation system* and apps. Videos and

step-by-step instructions explain various pro-

cedures, such as how to connect the vehicle

to the Internet via a cellular phone.

Downloadable information

Maps

For vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation

maps can be downloaded from the support

site.

Mobile apps

Beginning with model year 2014, the Owner's

Manual is available as an app for certain Volvo

models. The Volvo On Call app can also be

downloaded from the support site.

Owner's manuals in PDF format

Owner's Manuals are available for download-

ing in PDF format. Select the vehicle model

and year to download the desired manual.

Contact

Contact information for customer support and

your nearest Volvo retailer are available on the

support site.

Related information

•

Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

•

Volvo ID (p. 26)

Using the Owner's Manual

To get to know your new vehicle, read the

Owner's Manual before driving it for the first

time.

Reading your Owner's Manual is a way to

familiarize yourself with new features and

functions, get advice on how to handle your

vehicle in different situations, and to learn how

to take advantage of everything your Volvo has

to offer. Pay particular attention to the safety

warnings provided in the Owner's Manual.

The intention of this owner's information is to

explain all of the possible features, functions,

options and accessories included in a Volvo

vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or

guarantee that all of these features, functions

and options are included in every vehicle.

Some terminology used may not exactly

match terminology used in sales, marketing

and advertising materials.

Volvo continuously works to develop and

improve our products. Modifications can mean

that information, descriptions and illustrations

in the Owner's Manual differ from the equip-

ment in the vehicle. We reserve the right to

make changes without prior notice.

Do not remove this manual from the vehicle. If

a problem should occur, you will not have the

necessary information on where and how to

get professional assistance.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

* Option/accessory.

Option/accessory

In addition to standard equipment, the

Owner's Manual also describes options (fac-

tory-installed equipment) and certain accesso-

ries (extra retrofitted equipment).

All, at the time of publication known, options

and accessories are marked with an asterisk:

The equipment described in the Owner's Man-

ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may

be equipped differently depending on market

requirements and national or local laws and

regulations.

For more information on which equipment is

standard and which is an option or accessory,

please contact your Volvo retailer.

Decals

There are various types of decals affixed in the

vehicle to communicate important information

in a clear manner. The importance of these

decals is explained as follows, in descending

order of importance.

Risk of injury

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning field,

white text/image on a black message field.

Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a

warning of this type could result in serious

injury or death.

Risk of damage

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning field and message field.

Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a

warning of this type could result in damage.

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black message field.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner's Manual

do not claim to be exact reproductions of

those found in the vehicle. The purpose is

to show approximately how they look and

about where they are located. The informa-

tion that applies for your vehicle in particu-

lar is found on the decal on the vehicle.

OWNER'S INFORMATION

Illustrations, images and video clips

Illustrations, images and video clips used in

the Owner's Manual are sometimes generic

and are intended to provide an overview or an

example of a certain function or feature. They

may vary depending on equipment level and

market and may differ from the appearance of

your vehicle.

Related information

•

Owner's Manual in the center display

(p. 17)

•

Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 20)

•

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

The Owner's Manual and the

environment

The Owner's Manual is printed on paper from

responsibly managed forests.

The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)

sym-

bol certifies that the paper pulp in the printed

Owner's Manual comes from FSC

-certified

forests or other responsibly managed sources.

Related information

•

Drive-E

‒

purer driving pleasure (p. 28)

YOUR VOLVO

Contacting Volvo

Use the following contact information if you

would like to get in touch with Volvo in the

United States or Canada.

In the USA:

Volvo Car USA, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

18004581552

volvocars.com/us

In Canada:

Volvo Car Canada Ltd.

Customer Care Centre

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

18006638255

volvocars.com/ca

Volvo ID

Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives you

access to a range of services using a single

username and password.

NOTE

The available services can vary over time

and depend on equipment level and mar-

ket.

Examples of services:

•

Volvo On Call-app - check your vehicle

using your phone. You can check fuel

level, find the nearest gas station and lock

the vehicle remotely.

•

Send to Car – send addresses from online

map services directly to the vehicle.

•

Send a request for service and repairs

directly from the vehicle. The booking will

then be completed via email.

NOTE

If the username/password for a service

(e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, the change

will also automatically be applied to other

services.

The creation of a Volvo ID is initiated through

the Volvo On Call app or from the vehicle and

then completed by email.

When a Volvo ID is registered in the vehicle,

additional services are available. Multiple

Volvo IDs can be used for the same vehicle,

and multiple vehicles can be linked to the

same Volvo ID.

Related information

•

Creating and registering a Volvo ID

(p. 27)

•

Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553)

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.

Creating and registering a Volvo ID

A Volvo ID can be created in two ways. If your

Volvo ID was created with the Volvo On Call

app, the Volvo IDmust also be registered to

the vehicle to enable access to the Volvo ID

services.

Creating a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app

1. Download the Volvo ID app from

Download Center in the center display's

App view.

2. Start the app and register a personal email

address.

3. Follow the instructions that will be sent

automatically to this email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created and is

automatically registered to the vehicle.

The Volvo ID services can now be used.

Creating a Volvo ID using the Volvo On Call

app

1. Download the latest version of the Volvo

On Call app to your phone

2. Choose to create a Volvo ID.

3. The website for creating a Volvo ID will

open. Fill in the requested information.

4. Check the box to accept the terms and

conditions.

5. Press the button to create your Volvo ID.

6. An email will be sent to the address you

have provided. Click on the link in the

email to activate your Volvo ID.

> Your Volvo ID is now ready to be used.

Registering your Volvo ID to the

vehicle

If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo

On Call app, follow these steps to register the

ID to the vehicle:

1. If you have not already done so, download

the Volvo ID app from

Download Center

in the center display's App view.

NOTE

To download apps the vehicle must be

connected to the internet.

2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/

email address.

3. Follow the instructions that will be auto-

matically sent to the email address con-

nected to your Volvo ID.

> Your Volvo ID has now been registered

to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services

can now be used.

Related information

•

Volvo ID (p. 26)

•

Download apps (p. 430)

•

Handling system updates via Download

Center (p. 551)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

Vehicles with Volvo On Call.

Can be downloaded from e.g. the Apple App Store or Google Play.

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.

Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure

Volvo is committed to the well-being of its

customers. As a natural part of this commit-

ment, we care about the environment in

which we all live. Concern for the environ-

ment means an everyday involvement in

reducing our environmental impact.

Volvo's environmental activities are based on a

holistic view, which means we consider the

overall environmental impact of a product

throughout its complete life cycle. In this con-

text, design, production, product use, and

recycling are all important considerations. In

production, Volvo has partly or completely

phased out several chemicals including CFCs,

lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and

reduced the number of chemicals used in our

plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce

into production a three-way catalytic converter

with a Lambda sond, now called the heated

oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of

this highly efficient system reduces emissions

of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the

exhaust pipe by approximately 95 - 99% and

the search to eliminate the remaining emis-

sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile

manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for

the air conditioning system of all models as far

back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-

tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are

bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

continuous environmental refinement of con-

ventional gasoline-powered internal combus-

tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at

advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-

ner in the work to lessen the vehicle's impact

on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's

environmental impact, you can:

•

Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-

omy with improperly inflated tires.

•

Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•

Drive at a constant speed whenever possi-

ble.

•

See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for inspec-

tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

cator) light illuminates, or stays on after

the vehicle has started.

•

Properly dispose of any vehicle-related

waste such as used motor oil, used batter-

ies, brake pads, etc.

•

When cleaning your vehicle, please use

genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo

car care products are formulated to be

environmentally friendly.

Related information

•

Economical driving (p. 402)

•

Starting and stopping preconditioning*

(p. 213)

•

The Owner's Manual and the environment

(p. 23)

•

Air quality (p. 193)

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.

IntelliSafe – driver support and

safety

IntelliSafe is Volvo Cars' philosophy regarding

vehicle safety. IntelliSafe consists of a num-

ber of systems

that are designed to help

make driving safer, prevent accidents and

protect passengers and other road users.

WARNING

The functions are supplementary aids –

they cannot manage all situations in all

conditions.

The driver is always responsible for ensur-

ing that the vehicle is driven in a safe man-

ner and in accordance with applicable traf-

fic rules and regulations.

Support

IntelliSafe has the following functions

designed to help the driver operate the vehicle

more safely.

•

Active high beam

•

Tunnel detection

•

Pilot Assist

•

Cross Traffic Alert*

•

Blind Spot Information*

•

Park Assist*

•

Park Assist Pilot*

•

Park Assist Camera*

•

Road Sign Information*

•

Electronic Stability Control

•

Roll Stability Control

•

Cruise control

•

Adaptive Cruise Control*

•

Rear Collision Warning

•

Driver Alert Control

•

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

Prevention

IntelliSafe has the following functions

designed to help the driver prevent accidents.

•

City Safety

•

Distance Alert*

•

Lane Keeping Aid

•

Collision Avoidance

Protection

IntelliSafe has the following interacting func-

tions to help protect the driver and passengers

in certain situations in the event of an acci-

dent.

•

Whiplash Protection System

•

Seat belt with seat belt tensioner

•

Airbags

NOTE

Read the individual parts about each sys-

tem to fully understand the functions and

be notified of important warnings.

Related information

•

Active high beam (p. 151)

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

Some of these systems are standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, vehicle model and model year.

All Wheel Drive

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.

Sensus - connection and

entertainment

Sensus makes it possible to use apps and

turn your vehicle into a Wi-Fi hotspot.

This is Sensus

Sensus provides an intelligent interface and

Internet connection to the digital world. An

intuitive navigation structure offers access to

relevant assistance, information and entertain-

ment when it is needed, without distracting

the driver.

Sensus includes all of the solutions in the vehi-

cle related to entertainment, Internet connec-

tion and navigation*, and serves as the user

interface between the driver and the vehicle.

Sensus is what makes communication

between you, the vehicle and the world

around you possible.

Information when it's needed, where

it's needed

The vehicle's displays present the right infor-

mation at the right time. Information is pre-

sented in different displays depending on how

it should be prioritized by the driver.

YOUR VOLVO

}}

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritized.

Instrument panel

The instrument panel displays information

such as speed, incoming phone calls or the

track currently playing. It is controlled using

the steering wheel keypads.

Center display

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.

Many of the vehicle's main functions are con-

trolled from the center display, a touchscreen

that reacts to taps and other gestures. This

minimizes the number of physical buttons and

controls needed in the vehicle. The screen can

also be operated while wearing gloves.

The center display is used to control e.g. the

climate and entertainment systems and to

adjust the power seats*. The information pre-

sented in the center display can be handled by

the driver or by someone else in the vehicle.

Voice control system

The voice control system ena-

bles the driver to control cer-

tain vehicle functions without

taking their hands off the

wheel. The system can

understand natural speech.

Use voice commands to e.g.

play a song, make a phone call, increase the

temperature in the passenger compartment or

have a text message read aloud.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Center display overview (p. 106)

•

Voice Control (p. 138)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi

hotspot (tethering) (p. 483)

YOUR VOLVO

}}

Software Updates

So that you as a Volvo customer shall have

the best possible experience from your car,

Volvo is continuously developing the systems

in the cars and the services that you are

offered.

The software in your Volvo will be updated to

the latest version when the vehicle is serviced

at an authorized Volvo retailer. With the latest

software update, you can take advantage of

available improvements, including those that

came with previous software updates.

For more information on available updates and

answers to frequently asked questions, visit

volvocars.com/support.

NOTE

Functionality after updating may vary

depending on market, model, model year

and options.

Related information

•

Sensus - connection and entertainment

(p. 30)

•

Handling system updates via Download

Center (p. 551)

Data recording

As part of Volvo's commitment to safety and

quality, certain information is recorded regar-

ding vehicle operation, functionality and inci-

dents.

US market only:

EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data

Recorder" (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle's systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record

data related to vehicle dynamics and safety

systems for a short period of time, typically 30

seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•

How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

•

Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•

How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

•

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying data

routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they

have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

ASDR

This vehicle is equipped with an Active Safety

Data Recorder (ASDR). This data recorder can

record information related to the usage of the

car, functional errors and active safety

actuations (e.g. auto brake). The information

saved is used by technicians for service and

maintenance to diagnose and repair possible

faults that has occurred in the vehicle and to

fulfil certain legal requirements. The registered

data can also, in congregated form, be used

for research- and product development –

purposes to continuously improve the safety

and quality of Volvo Cars. For more

information contact your local Volvo retailer.

YOUR VOLVO

Canadian market only:

This vehicle is equipped with an “Event Data

Recorder” (EDR). The main purpose of the

EDR is to register and record data in traffic

accidents or accident-like situations, e.g. if an

airbag deploys or if the vehicle hits an obstacle

in the road. This data is recorded in order to

help understand how the vehicle's systems

perform in these types of situations. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, usually 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

data in traffic accidents or accident-like situa-

tions such as:

•

How the various systems in the vehicle

performed;

•

Whether the driver and passenger seat

belts were tightened/buckled;

•

The driver's use of the accelerator/brake

pedal;

•

How fast the vehicle was moving.

This data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which traffic

accidents and injuries occur. The EDR records

data only if a non-trivial accident situation

occurs. EDR does not record any data during

normal driving conditions. The system also

never registers data on who is driving the vehi-

cle or the geographical location of the acci-

dent or near-accident. However, other parties,

such as law enforcement, could combine the

EDR data with the type of personally identifia-

ble information that is routinely acquired dur-

ing an accident investigation. Special equip-

ment and access to either the vehicle or the

EDR is required to read this recorded data.

In addition to the EDR, the vehicle is equipped

with a number of computers that continuously

control and monitor the vehicle's performance.

These computers may record data during nor-

mal driving conditions, particularly if they

detect a fault relating to the vehicle's opera-

tion and functionality or upon activation of the

vehicle's active driver support functions (e.g.

City Safety or the auto-brake function).

Some of this recorded data is required by

technicians performing service and mainte-

nance in order to diagnose and rectify any

faults that may have occurred in the vehicle.

The recorded information is also needed to

enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regula-

tory requirements. Information registered in

the vehicle is stored in its computers until the

vehicle is serviced or repaired.

In addition to the above, the recorded informa-

tion may be used in aggregated form for

research and product development purposes

in order to continuously improve the safety

and quality of Volvo vehicles.

Volvo will not provide this information to any

third parties without the vehicle owner's con-

sent. However, national legislation and regula-

tions may require Volvo to disclose this type of

information to law enforcement or other

authorities that can claim a legal right to the

information. Special technical equipment,

which Volvo and workshops that have entered

agreements with Volvo have access to, is

required to read and interpret the recorded

data. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that

information provided to Volvo in conjunction

with service and maintenance is stored and

handled securely and in compliance with

applicable legal requirements. For more infor-

mation, please contact a Volvo retailer.

Vehicle Connectivity Module (VCM

High)

Vehicles equipped with VCM High can collect

data on the vehicle's safety functions as well

as other functions in the vehicle. This data is

collected for product development, quality fol-

low-up, safety work and to improve and moni-

tor the vehicle's quality and its safety func-

tions. Data is also collected in order to man-

age Volvo Cars' warranty commitments and to

comply with legal requirements related to

engine emission data.

YOUR VOLVO
35
NOTE
When collecting data, Volvo may use a
small portion of the vehicle's data plan, up
to 10 MB a month.
Related information
•
Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
•
Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 39)
Terms and Conditions for Services
Volvo offers services that help enhance the
vehicle's safety and comfort.
These services comprise everything from
assistance in emergencies to navigation and
various maintenance services.
Before using the services, it is important to
read support information about terms and
conditions for the services at volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 35)
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
privacy of everyone who visits our websites.
This policy refers to the handling of customer
data and personal information. The purpose is
to give current, past and potential customers a
general understanding of:
•
The circumstances in which we collect
and process your personal data.
•
The types of personal data we collect.
•
Why we collect your personal data.
•
How we process your personal data.
For more information on the policy, search for
support information on volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485)
•
Terms and Conditions for Services (p. 35)
•
Data recording (p. 33)

YOUR VOLVO

Important information on

accessories and extra equipment

Incorrectly connected or installed accessories

or extra equipment may have an adverse

effect on the vehicle's electronics.

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories,

and that accessory installations be performed

only by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician. Certain accessories only work

when the associated software is installed in

the vehicle's computer system.

The equipment described in the Owner's Man-

ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may

be equipped differently depending on market

requirements and national or local laws and

regulations.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please

note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal require-

ments. For more information on which equip-

ment is standard and which is an option or

accessory, please contact your Volvo retailer.

NOTE

Do not export your Volvo to another coun-

try before investigating that country's

applicable safety and exhaust emission

requirements. In some cases it may be dif-

ficult or impossible to comply with these

requirements. Modifications to the emis-

sion control system(s) may render your

Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in

the U.S., Canada and other countries.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as

air bag modules, seat belt tensioners,

adaptive steering columns, and button cell

batteries may contain Perchlorate material.

Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

WARNING

The driver is always responsible for operat-

ing the vehicle in a safe manner and for

complying with current statutes and regu-

lations.

It is also essential to maintain and service

the vehicle according to Volvo's recom-

mendations as stated in the owner's infor-

mation and the service and warranty book-

let.

If the on-board information differs from the

printed owner's manual, the printed infor-

mation always takes precedence.

Related information

•

Accessory installation (p. 37)

•

Connecting equipment to the vehicle's

data link connector (p. 37)

•

Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

YOUR VOLVO

}}

Accessory installation

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso-

ries, and that accessory installations be per-

formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician. Certain functions only

work when the associated software is instal-

led in the vehicle's computer system.

•

Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the perform-

ance, safety, and emission systems in your

vehicle. Additionally, a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician knows where

accessories may and may not be safely

installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please

consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before installing any acces-

sory in or on your vehicle.

•

Accessories that have not been approved

by Volvo may or may not be specifically

tested for compatibility with your vehicle.

•

Any of your vehicle's performance and

safety systems could be adversely affec-

ted if you install accessories that Volvo

has not tested, or if you allow accessories

to be installed by someone unfamiliar with

your vehicle.

•

Damage caused by unapproved or

improperly installed accessories may not

be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warranty

information. Volvo assumes no responsi-

bility for death, injury, or expenses that

may result from the installation of non-

genuine accessories.

Related information

•

Important information on accessories and

extra equipment (p. 36)

Connecting equipment to the

vehicle's data link connector

Incorrectly connected or installed software or

diagnostic tools may have an adverse effect

on the vehicle's electronics.

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners

use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories,

and that accessory installations be performed

only by a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician. Certain accessories only work

when the associated software is installed in

the vehicle's computer system.

On-board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket under the dash-

board on the driver's side.

YOUR VOLVO

NOTE

Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the

consequences of connecting non-author-

ized equipment to the On-board

Diagnostic (OBDII) socket. This socket

should only be used by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician.

Type approval

USA

FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII06

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

Canada

IC: 20839ACUII06

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Related information

•

Important information on accessories and

extra equipment (p. 36)

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo

supports certification by the National Insti-

tute for Automotive Service Excellence

(A.S.E.).

Certified technicians have demonstrated a

high degree of competence in specific areas.

Besides passing exams, each technician must

also have worked in the field for two or more

years before a certificate is issued. These pro-

fessional technicians are best able to analyze

vehicle problems and perform the necessary

maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at

peak operating condition.

YOUR VOLVO

}}

Viewing the Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN)

When contacting a Volvo retailer, about e.g.

your Volvo On Call subscription, your Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN

) may be needed.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Proceed to

System System

Information

Vehicle Identification

Number

> The vehicle identification number will

be displayed.

The VIN can also be found:

•

on the first page of the Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet

•

on the vehicle's registration card

•

by looking at the dashboard through the

vehicle's windshield.

The VIN has a similar location on all models.

Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Volvo is one of the leading companies for car

safety.

Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles

designed to help protect vehicle occupants in

the event of a collision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a

collision. This energy absorption system

including, but not limited to, structural compo-

nents such as bumper reinforcement bars,

bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender

aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels

must work together to maintain cabin integrity

and protect the vehicle occupants.

The supplemental restraint system including

but not limited to air bags, side curtain air

bags, and deployment sensors work together

with the above components to provide proper

timing for air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not

support the use of aftermarket, alternative or

anything other than original Volvo parts for

collision repair.

Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo-

approved replacement glass. The use of after-

market glass, particularly a windshield, can

have an adverse effect on collision avoidance

and advanced lighting systems.

Vehicle Identification Number

YOUR VOLVO

In addition Volvo does not support the use or

re-use of structural components from an exist-

ing vehicle that has been previously damaged.

Although these parts may appear equivalent, it

is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ-

ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part

has been damaged as a result of a prior colli-

sion. The quality of these used parts may also

have been affected due to environmental

exposure.

Related information

•

Data recording (p. 33)

Change of market when importing

or relocating

If you import a vehicle or move to another

country, it is important that you register the

vehicle in the new market to help ensure that

online services work correctly, that the vehi-

cle meets local laws and regulations, etc.

Visit an authorized Volvo retailer

Visit an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance

registering the vehicle in the new market.

If you do not do this then you may experience

that apps, Volvo On Call

, software downloads

and other online services are affected and do

not work correctly.

Creating a new Volvo ID in your new home

market

When you relocate to another country you

should create a Volvo ID in the new country.

If you have already created a Volvo ID in

another country and want to use the same

email address, you must first delete your Volvo

ID in the region you originally created it. You

can also create a new Volvo ID with another

email address.

For vehicles with Volvo On Call

Download the Volvo On Call app from the

country the vehicle will be used in and link the

app to your vehicle.

NOTE

Visit an authorized Volvo retailer if you

have imported or relocated with your vehi-

cle to a new country.

Available services may vary depending on

market and vehicle model.

NOTE

If the vehicle is exported to another market,

Volvo is not responsible for any adapta-

tions to the vehicle in order to meet appli-

cable requirements or laws in the country

of import. For more information, see the

Warranty and Service Records Information

booklet or contact your Volvo workshop.

Related information

•

Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553)

Applicable only to markets that have access to Volvo On Call.

YOUR VOLVO

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything

possible to ensure his or her own safety and

the safety of passengers in the vehicle and

others sharing the roadway. Part of this

responsibility is avoiding distractions, includ-

ing performing activities that are not directly

related to controlling the vehicle in the driving

environment.

Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with

feature-rich entertainment and communica-

tion systems. These include hands-free cellular

telephones, navigation systems, and multipur-

pose audio systems. You may also own other

portable electronic devices for your own con-

venience. When used properly and safely, they

enrich the driving experience. Improperly used,

any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide

the following warning that reflects the strong

Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these

devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way

that distracts you from the task of driving

safely. Distraction can lead to a serious acci-

dent. In addition to this general warning, we

offer the following guidance regarding specific

new features that may be found in your vehi-

cle:

WARNING

•

Never use a hand-held cellular tele-

phone while driving. Some jurisdictions

prohibit cellular telephone use by a

driver while the vehicle is moving.

•

If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-

gation system, set and make changes

to your travel itinerary only with the

vehicle parked.

•

Never program your audio system

while the vehicle is moving. Program

radio presets with the vehicle parked,

and use your programmed presets to

make radio use quicker and simpler.

•

Never use portable computers or per-

sonal digital assistants while the vehi-

cle is moving.

Related information

•

Audio, media and Internet (p. 428)

SAFETY

SAFETY
44
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with a number of
safety systems that work together to help
protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in
the event of an accident.
The vehicle is equipped with a number of sen-
sors that may react in the event of an accident
and activate different safety systems, such as
the airbag system and seat belt tensioners.
Depending on the specific conditions of the
accident, e.g. collisions at certain angles, over-
turning or swerving, the systems react differ-
ently to help provide good protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems
such as the Whiplash Protection System. The
vehicle is also built so that a large part of the
force of a collision is distributed to the vehi-
cle's members, pillars, floor, roof and other
parts of the body.
After an accident, the vehicle's safety mode
may be activated if any important function in
the vehicle has been damaged.
Warning symbol in the instrument
panel
The warning symbol in the instru-
ment panel illuminates when the
vehicle's electrical system is in igni-
tion mode II. The symbol will go out
after approx. 6 seconds if no faults are
detected in the vehicle's safety systems.
WARNING
If the warning symbol remains illuminated
or switches on while driving and the mes-
sage 
SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is displayed in the instrument
panel, this indicates that something in the
safety system is not functioning properly.
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
ized Volvo workshop for repairs as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Never attempt to alter or repair any of the
vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incor-
rectly performed repairs to any system
could impair function and lead to serious
injury. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorized Volvo workshop.
If this dedicated warning symbol is
not functioning, the general warning
symbol will illuminate instead and
the same message will be displayed
in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 45)
•
Occupant safety (p. 45)
•
Reporting safety defects (p. 46)
•
Recall information (p. 47)
•
Seat belts (p. 49)
•
Airbags (p. 55)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 48)
•
Safety mode (p. 64)
•
Child safety (p. 66)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory.

Safety during pregnancy

It is important that seat belts are worn cor-

rectly during pregnancy and that pregnant

drivers adjust their seating position accord-

ingly.

Seat belt

The seat belt should fit closely against the

shoulder, with the diagonal section between

the breasts and to the side of the stomach.

The lap section of the seat belt should lie flat

over the thighs and as far as possible under

the stomach. Never let it ride upward. Remove

unnecessary slack and make sure the seat belt

fits as close as possible to the body. Make

sure there are no twists in the seat belt.

Seating position

As pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust the seat and steering wheel to a

position that allows them to retain full control

of the vehicle (which means they should be

able to easily reach the steering wheel and

foot pedals). Try to maintain as much distance

as possible between the stomach and the

steering wheel.

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Seat belts (p. 49)

•

Manual front seats (p. 178)

•

Power* front seats (p. 179)

Occupant safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.

Volvo's concern for safety

Our concern for safety dates back to 1927

when the first Volvo rolled off the production

line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention),

safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact

zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long

before it was fashionable or required by gov-

ernment regulation.

We will not compromise our commitment to

safety. We continue to seek out new safety

features and to refine those already in our

vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate

hearing your suggestions about improving

automobile safety. We also want to know if

you ever have a safety concern with your vehi-

cle. Call us in the U.S. at: 18004581552 or

in Canada at: 18006638255.

SAFETY

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how

old you are but rather on:

•

How well you see.

•

Your ability to concentrate.

•

How quickly you make decisions under

stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to

help you cope with the ever changing traffic

environment.

•

Never drink and drive.

•

If you are taking any medication, consult

your physician about its potential effects

on your driving abilities.

•

Take a driver-retraining course.

•

Have your eyes checked regularly.

•

Keep your windshield and headlights

clean.

•

Replace wiper blades when they start to

leave streaks.

•

Take into account the traffic, road, and

weather conditions, particularly with

regard to stopping distance.

•

Never text while driving.

•

Refrain from using or minimize the use of

a cell phone while driving.

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Reporting safety defects (p. 46)

•

Recall information (p. 47)

Reporting safety defects

The following information will help you report

any perceived safety-related defects in your

vehicle.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying Volvo Car USA, LLC. If

NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a

recall and remedy campaign. How-

ever, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your retailer, or Volvo

Car USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA,

you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline tollfree at

18883274236

SAFETY
}}
47
(TTY: 18004249153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-
portation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov, where you
can also enter your vehicle's VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number) to
see if it has any open recalls.
Volvo strongly recommends that if
your vehicle is covered under a serv-
ice campaign, safety or emission
recall or similar action, it should be
completed as soon as possible.
Please check with your local retailer
or Volvo Car USA, LLC if your vehicle
is covered under these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1888DASH2DOT
(18883274236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Car
Canada Ltd.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
18003330510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 9904500
Fax: 18199943372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z
0A1
Related information
•
Safety (p. 44)
•
Occupant safety (p. 45)
•
Recall information (p. 47)
•
Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) (p. 39)
Recall information
On our website, click the "Owner" tab in the
upper left-hand side of the screen and then
click on the heading "Recall Information".
Enter the vehicle identification number (VIN),
which can be found at the bottom of the wind-
shield. If your vehicle has any open Recalls,
they will be displayed on this page.
You can also enter the Vehicle Identification
Number in the search field on the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration's
(NHTSA) website at: www.nhtsa.gov.
Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for
your vehicle, please contact your authorized
Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to
answer your questions, please contact Volvo
Customer Relations at 8006638255, Mon-
day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
EST or volvocars.com/ca. You may also write
us at:
Volvo Car Canada Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
www.tc.gc.ca

SAFETY

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Reporting safety defects (p. 46)

•

Occupant safety (p. 45)

Whiplash Protection System

The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is

designed to help reduce the risk of whiplash-

type injuries. The system consists of energy

absorbing backrests and seat cushions as

well as specially designed head restraints in

the front seats.

WHIPS is activated in the event of a rear-end

collision and adapted to the angle and speed

of the collision and to the characteristics of

the colliding vehicle.

When WHIPS is activated, the front seat

backrests move rearward and the seat cush-

ions move downward to change the seating

positions of the driver and front seat passen-

ger. This movement helps absorb some of the

forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

WHIPS is a supplement to the seat belt.

Always wear your seat belt.

WARNING

Do not attempt to alter or repair the seat or

WHIPS on your own. Volvo recommends

contacting an authorized Volvo workshop.

If the front seats have been subjected to

severe stress, e.g. in a collision, the seats

must be replaced. Even if the seats appear

undamaged, some of their protective prop-

erties may have been lost.

Do not place any objects on the floor behind or under

the front seats or on the rear seat that could prevent

WHIPS from functioning correctly.

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory.

WARNING

Do not squeeze box-like cargo between the

rear seat cushion and the front seat back-

rest.

If the rear seat backrests are folded down,

cargo must be secured to prevent it from

sliding forward against the front seat back-

rests in the event of a collision.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down or if a

rear-facing child restraint is being used in

the rear seat, the seat in front must be

moved forward so that it does not come

into contact with the backrest or child

restraint.

Seating position

For WHIPS to provide good protection, the

driver and passenger must be seated correctly

and the system's function must not be impe-

ded in any way.

Set the front seat to the correct seating posi-

tion before starting to drive.

The driver and the front seat passenger should

sit in the center of the seat with their heads as

close as possible to the head restraints.

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Manual front seats (p. 178)

•

Power* front seats (p. 179)

•

Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)

Seat belts

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-

pants in your vehicle. Children should be

properly restrained using an infant seat,

adjustable child seat or booster cushion as

determined by age, weight and height.

Most states and provinces make it mandatory

for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are in

good condition. Use water and a mild deter-

gent for cleaning. Check the seat belt mecha-

nism's function as follows: attach the seat belt

and pull rapidly on the strap.

SAFETY

WARNING

•

Never repair the belt yourself. Repairs

should only be performed by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Any device used to induce slack into

the shoulder belt portion of the three-

point belt system will have a detrimen-

tal effect on the amount of protection

available in the event of a collision.

•

The seat back should not be tilted too

far back. The shoulder belt must be

taut in order to function properly.

•

Do not use any type of child restraint in

the front passenger seat. We recom-

mend that children who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with

the seat belt properly fastened.

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Seat belt tensioners (p. 52)

•

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts

(p. 50)

•

Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54)

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts

Make sure that all passengers have buckled

their seat belts before starting to drive.

Buckling seat belts

1. Pull out the belt slowly and make sure it is

not twisted or damaged.

NOTE

The seat belt is equipped with a seat belt

retractor that will lock up in the following

situations:

•

if the belt is pulled out too quickly.

•

during braking and acceleration.

•

if the vehicle is leaning excessively.

•

when driving in turns.

•

if the automatic locking retractor/emer-

gency locking retractor (ALRELR) is

activated. Each seat belt (except for the

driver's) is equipped with an ALR func-

tion, which is designed to keep the seat

belt taut when installing a child

restraint. ALR is activated when the seat

belt is pulled out as far as possible. If

this is done, a sound from the seat belt

retractor will be audible, which is nor-

mal. The seat belt can now only be fed

into the retractor, not pulled out. This

function is automatically disabled when

the seat belt is unbuckled and fully

retracted.

SAFETY

}}

2. Buckle the seat belt by pushing the latch

plate into the receptacle.

> A distinct "click" indicates that the belt

is locked into place.

WARNING

Always insert the seat belt latch plate into

the belt buckle on the correct side. Failure

to do so could cause the seat belts and belt

buckles to malfunction in a collision. There

is a risk of serious injury.

3. The height of the seat belts in the front

seats can be adjusted.

Press the button on the seat belt holder

and move the belt up or down.

Position the belt as high as possible with-

out it chafing against the neck.

The belt should be positioned closely over the shoul-

der (against the collarbone, not down over the arm).

4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt

over the hips by pulling the diagonal sec-

tion upward toward the shoulder.

The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned

low on the hips (not against the abdomen).

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than one

occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion

of the belt under the arm, behind the back

or otherwise out of position. Such use

could cause injury in the event of an acci-

dent. As seat belts lose much of their

strength when exposed to violent stretch-

ing, they should be replaced after any colli-

sion, even if they appear to be undamaged.

WARNING

Do not use clips or fasten the belts around

hooks or other parts of the interior. This will

prevent the seat belt from fitting properly.

WARNING

Never damage the seat belts and never

insert any foreign objects into the belt

buckle. This may cause the seat belts and

belt buckles to malfunction in a collision.

There is a risk of serious injury.

Unbuckling seat belts

1. Press the red button on the seat belt

receptacle and make sure the seat belt

retracts fully into the retractor slot.

2. If it does not fully retract, guide the belt

manually into the slot and make sure it

does not hang loose.

Related information

•

Seat belts (p. 49)

•

Seat belt tensioners (p. 52)

•

Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54)

Seat belt tensioners

The vehicle is equipped with standard and

electric* seat belt tensioners that can help

tension the seat belt in a critical situation or

collision.

Standard seat belt tensioners

The seat belts on the front seats and rear out-

board seats are equipped with standard seat

belt tensioners.

In a collision of sufficiently violent force, the

seat belt tensioners will tension the seat belts

in order to more effectively restrain the occu-

pants.

Electric seat belt tensioners*

The driver's and front passenger's seat belts

are equipped with electric seat belt tensioners.

The seat belt tensioners interact and can be

activated in conjunction with the City Safety

and Rear Collision Warning driver support sys-

tems. In critical situations, such as if the vehi-

cle brakes suddenly, begins to skid or runs off

the road (e.g if the vehicle rolls into a ditch,

lifts off the ground or hits an obstacle in the

road), or if there is a risk of collision, the seat

belts can be pulled taut by the seat belt ten-

sioner's electric motor.

The electric seat belt tensioner helps to posi-

tion the occupant more effectively in the seat,

which reduces the risk of the occupant strik-

ing the interior of the passenger compartment

SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
53
and improves the effect of other safety sys-
tems such as the airbags.
When a critical situation has passed, the seat
belt and the electric seat belt tensioner are
reset automatically. However, they can also be
reset manually.
CAUTION
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
passenger-side electric seat belt tensioner
may also be deactivated.
WARNING
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat
belt on your own. Volvo recommends con-
tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
If the seat belt has been exposed to
extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seat belt must be
replaced. Even if the seat belt appears
undamaged, some of its protective proper-
ties may have been lost. Also replace the
seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new
seat belt must be type approved and
intended for the same seating position as
the replaced seat belt.
Related information
•
Seat belts (p. 49)
•
Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 50)
•
Resetting the electric seat belt tensioners*
(p. 53)
•
City Safety™ (p. 305)
•
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)
Resetting the electric seat belt
tensioners*
The electric seat belt tensioners are designed
to be reset automatically, but if the seat belt
remains taut it can be reset manually.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
2. Unbuckle the seat belt and then rebuckle
it.
> The seat belt and the electric seat belt
tensioner will be reset.
WARNING
Never attempt to alter or repair the seat
belt on your own. Volvo recommends con-
tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.
If the seat belt has been exposed to
extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seat belt must be
replaced. Even if the seat belt appears
undamaged, some of its protective proper-
ties may have been lost. Also replace the
seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new
seat belt must be type approved and
intended for the same seating position as
the replaced seat belt.
Related information
•
Seat belt tensioners (p. 52)
•
Seat belts (p. 49)

SAFETY

Door and seat belt reminders

This system is intended to remind occupants

to buckle their seat belts and to alert the

driver if a door, hood or other opening (trunk,

sunroof, etc.) is open.

Graphics in the instrument panel

Graphics in the instrument panel with various types

of warnings. The warning colors for the doors/tail-

gate vary depending on the vehicle's speed.

The instrument panel graphic shows the seats

where seat belts are buckled and not buckled.

The same graphic also indicates if the hood,

tailgate or any door is open.

Confirm the graphic by briefly pressing the O

button on the right-side steering wheel key-

pad.

Seat belt reminder

Reminder light in ceiling console.

A seat belt reminder light illuminates in the

ceiling console and a warning symbol is dis-

played in the instrument panel.

The audible reminder varies depending on the

vehicle's speed, driving time and distance

driven.

A seat belt status graphic in the instrument

panel indicates when the driver's or a pas-

senger's seat belt is buckled or unbuckled.

Child seats are not included in the seat belt

reminder system.

Front seats

An audible signal and an indicator light remind

unbuckled occupants to fasten their seat

belts.

Rear seat

The rear seat belt reminder has two functions:

•

To indicate which seat belts are buckled in

the rear seats. This will also be displayed

in an instrument panel graphic.

•

To provide audio and visual reminders if

any seat belt in the rear seat is removed

while the vehicle is in motion. The

reminder will stop when the seat belt has

been rebuckled.

Door/hood/tailgate and fuel filler door

reminder

If the hood, tailgate, fuel filler door or any door

is not properly closed, this will be indicated by

a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the

vehicle safely and close the open door, hood,

etc.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed

under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the

information symbol will illuminate in

the instrument panel.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed

above approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the

warning symbol will illuminate in the

instrument panel.

Related information

•

Seat belts (p. 49)

•

Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 50)

SAFETY

Airbags

The vehicle is equipped with airbags and

inflatable curtains for the driver and passen-

gers.

WARNING

•

If the airbag warning light stays on

after the engine has started or if it illu-

minates while you are driving, have the

vehicle inspected by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician as

soon as possible.

•

Never attempt to alter or repair any of

the vehicle's safety systems yourself.

Incorrectly performed repairs to any

system could impair function and lead

to serious injury. All work on these sys-

tems should be performed by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has become water-damaged

in any way (e.g., soaked floor mats/stand-

ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do

not attempt to start the engine. This may

cause airbag deployment, which could

result in serious injury. Volvo recommends

towing the vehicle directly to an authorized

Volvo workshop.

Before attempting to tow the vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10

minutes and disconnect the battery.

2. Follow the instructions for manually

overriding the shiftlock system.

Deployed airbags

WARNING

If any of the airbags have deployed:

•

Do not attempt to drive the vehicle.

Have it towed to an authorized work-

shop.

•

If necessary, seek medical attention.

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Driver/passenger side front airbags

(p. 56)

•

Side airbags (p. 63)

•

Inflatable curtain (p. 63)

SAFETY

Driver/passenger side front

airbags

As a supplement to the seat belts, the vehicle

is equipped with driver and passenger side

front airbags.

Driver/passenger side front airbags.

In a frontal collision, the airbags help protect

the driver's and passenger's head, neck, face

and chest and the driver's knees and legs.

A collision of a sufficiently violent force will

trigger the sensors and one or more airbags

will inflate. The airbag helps cushion the initial

impact of the collision for the passenger. The

airbag deflates when compressed by the colli-

sion. A small amount of powder will also be

released from the airbag. This may appear to

be smoke and is normal. The entire process,

from inflation to deflation of the airbag, occurs

within tenths of a second.

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on

the circumstances of the accident and

whether or not the seat belt is used. This

applies to all belt positions.

There may therefore be accident situations

in which only one (or none) of the airbags

are deployed. The sensors monitor the

impact of the collision and react accord-

ingly to deploy one, several or no airbags.

WARNING

The seat belt and the airbag work together.

If the seat belt is not used or is used incor-

rectly, the airbag may not provide the

intended protection in a collision.

To help prevent injury in the event the air-

bag is deployed, passengers should sit as

upright as possible, with their feet on the

floor and their backs against the seat back-

rest.

WARNING

Volvo recommends contacting an author-

ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly

performed repairs to the airbag system

could impair function and lead to serious

injury.

The front airbag system

The front airbag system includes gas genera-

tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-

tion sensors that activate the gas generators,

causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro-

gen gas.

As the movement of the seats' occupants

compresses the airbags, some of the gas is

expelled at a controlled rate to provide better

cushioning. The belt tensioners minimize slack

in the seat belts and are activated for occu-

pants wearing their seat belts. The entire proc-

ess, from inflation to deflation of the airbag,

occurs within tenths of a second.

The location of the front airbags is indicated

by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering

wheel pad and above the glove compartment,

and by decals on both sun visors and on the

front and far right side of the dash.

The driver's side front airbag is folded and

located in the steering wheel hub.

The knee airbag is folded on the underside of

the dashboard on the driver's side. The text

AIRBAG is embossed on the panel.

The passenger's side front airbag is folded

behind a panel located above the glove com-

partment.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

•

The airbags in the vehicle are designed

to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a

replacement for-the three-point seat

belts. For maximum protection, wear

seat belts at all times. Be aware that no

system can prevent all possible injuries

that may occur in an accident.

•

Never drive with your hands on the

steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•

The front airbags are designed to help

prevent serious injury. Deployment

occurs very quickly and with considera-

ble force. During normal deployment

and depending on variables such as

seating position, one may experience

abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other

injuries as a result of deployment of

one or both of the airbags.

•

When installing any accessory equip-

ment, make sure that the front airbag

system is not damaged. Any interfer-

ence in the system could cause mal-

function.

Front airbag deployment

•

The front airbags are designed to deploy

during certain frontal or front-angular colli-

sions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-

ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and

object impacted. The airbags may also

deploy in certain non-frontal collisions

where rapid deceleration occurs.

•

The airbag system's sensors, which trigger

the front airbags, are designed to deter-

mine if the collision is powerful enough to

activate the belt tensioners and/or the air-

bags.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the

front airbags.

•

If the collision involves a nonrigid object

(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed

object at a low speed, the front airbags

will not necessarily deploy.

•

Front airbags do not normally deploy in a

side impact collision, in a collision from

the rear or in a rollover situation.

•

The amount of damage to the bodywork

does not reliably indicate if the airbags

should have deployed or not.

NOTE

•

Deployment of front airbags occurs

only one time during an accident. In a

collision where deployment occurs, the

airbags and seat belt tensioners acti-

vate. Some noise occurs and a small

amount of powder is released. The

release of the powder may appear as

smoke-like matter. This is a normal

characteristic and does not indicate

fire.

•

Volvo's front airbags use special sen-

sors that are integrated with the front

seat buckles. The point at which the

airbag deploys is determined by

whether or not the seat belt is being

used, as well as the severity of the col-

lision.

•

Collisions can occur where only one of

the airbags deploys. If the impact is

less severe, but severe enough to pres-

ent a clear injury risk, the airbags are

triggered at partial capacity. If the

impact is more severe, the airbags are

triggered at full capacity.

SAFETY

WARNING

•

Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that occupants under 140 cm (4 feet

7 inches) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with

the seat belt fastened. See also the

Occupant Classification System infor-

mation.

•

Never drive with the airbags deployed.

The fact that they hang out can impair

the steering of your vehicle. Other

safety systems can also be damaged.

•

The smoke and dust formed when the

airbags are deployed can cause skin

and eye irritation in the event of pro-

longed exposure.

Should you have questions about any compo-

nent in the SRS system, please contact a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician

or Volvo customer support:

In the United States

Volvo Car USA, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

18004581552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Car Canada Ltd.

Customer Care Centre

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

18006638255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Airbag decals

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors.

Passenger's side airbag decal.

WARNING

•

Children must never be allowed in the

front passenger's seat.

•

Occupants in the front passenger's

seat must never sit on the edge of the

seat, sit leaning toward the instrument

panel or otherwise sit out of position.

•

The occupant's back must be as

upright as comfort allows and be

against the seat back with the seat belt

properly fastened.

•

Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on

the dash, seat or out of the window.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

•

No objects or accessory equipment,

e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed

on, attached to, or installed near the air

bag cover (the area above the glove

compartment) or the area affected by

airbag deployment.

•

There should be no loose articles, such

as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or

dashboard area.

•

Never try to open the airbag cover on

the steering wheel or the passenger's

side dashboard. This should only be

done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle's occu-

pants.

Related information

•

Airbags (p. 55)

•

Occupant Classification System (p. 59)

Occupant Classification System

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is

designed to meet the regulatory require-

ments of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to

disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side

front airbag under certain conditions.

OCS indicator light.

The front passenger-side airbag is either ena-

bled or disabled depending on the classifica-

tion of the passenger in the front passenger

seat.

Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and

recommends that ALL children up to and

including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat

and are restrained in a suitable manner appro-

priate to their height and weight. This is

strongly recommended for children in rear-fac-

ing child seats.

Classifica-

tion of pas-

sengers in

front pas-

senger seat

OCS indica-

tor light sta-

tus

Passeng-

er's side

front air-

bag status

The passen-

ger is classi-

fied as an

adult.

OCS indica-

tor light is

not lit.

Enabled

The passen-

ger is classi-

fied as a

small child in

a front-facing

child seat.

The OCS

indicator

light is lit or

not lit

depending

on several

parameters

that deter-

mine the

most suitable

status.

Enabled or

disabled

depending

on several

parameters

that deter-

mine the

most suita-

ble status.

The passen-

ger is classi-

fied as a

small child in

a rear-facing

child seat.

OCS indica-

tor light is lit.

Disabled

The passen-

ger seat is

empty.

OCS indica-

tor light is lit.

Disabled

SAFETY

Occupant Classification System

function

OCS works in combination with sensors in the

front passenger seat. The sensors are

intended to detect the presence, and classifi-

cation of, an occupant sitting correctly and

determine whether the front passenger airbag

should be enabled (able to be deployed) or

disabled (cannot be deployed).

The OCS uses an indicator light with the text

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF, which will illu-

minate and stay on to remind you that the

passenger's side front airbag is disabled. The

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is

located in the ceiling console near the bracket

for the rearview mirror.

Always pay attention that the status of the

indicator light shows the correct classification

both before and while driving when the front

passenger seat is occupied.

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OCS

indicator light will illuminate for several

seconds while the system performs a self-

diagnostic test. The indicator light will then

go out or remain illuminated, depending on

the classification of the passenger in the

front passenger seat.

If a malfunction is detected in the

system, the OCS indicator light will

remain illuminated and the SRS

warning symbol will be shown in the

instrument panel along with a text message.

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected and indi-

cated as described, be aware that the pas-

senger's side front airbag will not deploy in

the event of a collision. If this occurs, have

the airbag system and Occupant Classifi-

cation System checked by a workshop as

soon as possible. Volvo recommends con-

tacting an authorized Volvo workshop.

Classification of adult

To help ensure accurate classification when a

person of adult size is sitting in the front pas-

senger seat, the passenger must:

•

be wearing their seat belt

•

sit normally in the seat, in the center of the

seat cushion

•

sit upright in the seat with their shoulders

against the backrest

•

have their legs comfortably extended with

their feet on the floor.

Correct seating position.

Example of incorrect seating position - the passenger

must not have slid forward on the seat cushion.

SAFETY

}}

Example of incorrect seating position - the passenger

must be seated with their feet on the floor.

Example of incorrect seating position - the passenger

must not fold the backrest to a lying position.

Remember the following when an adult sits in

the front passenger seat:

•

The passenger must never get up from the

seat cushion using the armrest in the door

or center console, by pushing their feet

against the floor or by pushing against the

backrest.

•

The passenger must never sit on the side

of the seat cushion, slide forward on the

seat cushion or fold the backrest to a lying

position.

•

The passenger must never wear wet or

thick clothing, e.g. ski wear or padded gar-

ments.

•

Never place any objects between the pas-

senger and the seat cushion, e.g. pillows,

heating blankets or ordinary blankets, seat

liners or mats.

•

Never place a radio transmitter (e.g. hunt-

ing radio or walkie-talkie) or device that is

being charged (e.g. cellular phone, tablet

or computer) on or under the seat cushion.

Never let anyone sitting on the passenger

seat use a radio transmitter or device that

is being charged.

WARNING

Failure to follow the above instructions

could adversely affect the Occupant Classi-

fication System functions and result in

death or serious injury.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front

passenger's seat, but the OCS indicator lamp

is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting

properly in the seat.

If this occurs, turn off the vehicle and ask the

person to follow the above instructions for

accurate classification. Restart the vehicle and

have the person remain in this position for

about two minutes. This will allow the system

to detect that person and enable the passeng-

er's frontal airbag.

If the OCS indicator lamp remains on even

after this, the person should be advised to ride

in the rear seat.

This may indicate restrictions in the OCS clas-

sification ability, e.g. that the person is too

light to be classified as an adult. It does not

need to indicate an OCS error.

Classification of child

Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and

recommends that ALL children up to and

including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat.

This is strongly recommended for children in

rear-facing child seats.

If a child in a child restraint is placed in the

front passenger seat, the child restraint must

be installed according to the manufacturer's

instructions to help ensure accurate classifica-

tion.

SAFETY

Remember the following if a child in a child

seat sits in the front passenger seat:

•

Never place any items or accessories on

the passenger seat, between the child

seat and the seat cushion or near to the

seat cushion.

•

Never place a radio transmitter (e.g. hunt-

ing radio or walkie-talkie) or device that is

being charged (e.g. cellular phone, tablet

or computer) on the seat cushion. Never

let anyone sitting on the passenger seat

use a radio transmitter or device that is

being charged.

•

Never place wet clothing or fluids on the

passenger seat.

•

Always correctly position the child seat so

that the entire lower section of the child

seat rests against the seat cushion.

•

Always place a front-facing child seat as

far back as possible against the seat back.

WARNING

Failure to follow the above instructions

could adversely affect the Occupant Classi-

fication System functions and result in

death or serious injury.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle

in any way to accommodate a disability, for

example by altering or adapting the driver's or

front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-

tems, please contact Volvo at:

In the United States

Volvo Car USA, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

18004581552

In Canada

Volvo Car Canada Ltd.

Customer Care Centre

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

18006638255

WARNING

Never attempt to open, remove or repair

any components in the OCS system. Volvo

recommends contacting an authorized

Volvo workshop. Incorrectly performed

repairs to the OCS system could impair

function and lead to serious injury.

The front passenger's seat should not be

modified in any way. This could affect the

function of the OCS system.

Related information

•

Driver/passenger side front airbags (p. 56)

SAFETY

}}

Side airbags

The side airbags, on the driver's and passen-

ger sides, protect the chest and hip in a colli-

sion.

The side airbags are located in the front seats'

outer backrest frames and help protect the

driver and front seat passenger.

A collision of a sufficiently violent force will

trigger the sensors and one or more side air-

bags will inflate. The side airbags inflate

between the seat occupant and the door panel

to help cushion the initial impact of the colli-

sion. The airbag deflates when compressed by

the collision. The side airbags are normally

only deployed on the side of the vehicle

impacted by the collision.

WARNING

Volvo recommends contacting an author-

ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly

performed repairs to the side airbag sys-

tem could impair function and lead to seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

Do not place any objects in the area

between the outer edges of the seats and

the door panels, as this could impair the

function of the side airbags.

Volvo recommends only using seat covers

approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could

prevent the side airbags from functioning

properly.

WARNING

The side airbag is a supplement to the seat

belt. Always wear your seat belt.

Related information

•

Airbags (p. 55)

Inflatable curtain

The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),

helps to prevent the driver and passengers

from striking their heads on the inside of the

vehicle during a collision.

The inflatable curtains are installed along both

sides of the inside of the roof and help protect

occupants in the vehicle's outer seats. IC

AIRBAG is embossed on the panels.

A collision of a sufficiently violent force will

trigger the sensors and the inflatable curtain

will inflate.

SAFETY

WARNING

Volvo recommends contacting an author-

ized Volvo workshop for repair. Incorrectly

performed repairs to the inflatable curtain

system could impair function and lead to

serious injury.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy objects in the

handle in the ceiling. The hooks are only

intended for lightweight garments (not for

hard objects such as umbrellas).

Never screw or mount anything to the vehi-

cle's headlining, door pillars or side panels.

This could impair the intended protective

properties. Volvo recommends only using

Volvo original parts that are approved for

placement in these areas.

WARNING

If objects are loaded higher than the upper

edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm

(4 in.) space between the objects and the

window. Objects placed closer to this

could impede the function of the inflatable

curtain concealed inside the headlining.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to

the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.

Related information

•

Airbags (p. 55)

Safety mode

Safety mode is a feature that is triggered

after a collision if there is potential damage to

an important function in the vehicle, such as

the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety

systems, the brake system, etc.

If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,

the text

Safety mode See Owner's manual

may appear in the instrument panel along with

the warning symbol if the panel is undamaged

and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.

The message indicates that one or more of the

vehicle's functions may be reduced.

WARNING

Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you

smell fuel fumes when the message

Safety

mode See Owner's manual is displayed

in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle

immediately.

If safety mode has been set, it may be possi-

ble to reset the system in order to start and

move the vehicle a short distance, for exam-

ple, if it is blocking traffic.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

Never attempt to perform repairs or reset

electrical components on your own after

the vehicle has been in safety mode. This

could result in injury or prevent the vehicle

from functioning properly. Volvo recom-

mends having the vehicle inspected and

reset to normal operating status by an

authorized Volvo workshop after

Safety

mode See Owner's manual has been dis-

played.

WARNING

When the vehicle is in safety mode, it

should not be towed behind another vehi-

cle. It should be towed from the site on a

tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the

vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo

workshop.

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Starting and moving the vehicle when it is

in safety mode (p. 65)

•

Recovery (p. 421)

Starting and moving the vehicle

when it is in safety mode

If safety mode has been set, it may be possi-

ble to reset the system in order to start and

move the vehicle a short distance, for exam-

ple, if it is blocking traffic.

Starting the vehicle when it is in safety

mode

1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly

for fuel leakage. Make sure you do not

detect any gasoline fumes.

If the damage to the vehicle is minor and

there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may

attempt to start the engine.

WARNING

Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you

smell fuel fumes when the message

Safety

mode See Owner's manual is displayed

in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle

immediately.

2. Switch off the ignition.

3. Then try to start the vehicle.

> The vehicle's electrical system will per-

form a system check and then attempt

to reset to normal operating mode.

CAUTION

If the message Safety mode See

Owner's manual is still displayed, the

vehicle should not be driven or towed

behind another vehicle. If the vehicle needs

to be moved, it must be towed on a tow

truck. Even if no damage is apparent, there

may be hidden damage that could make

the vehicle impossible to control.

Moving the vehicle when it is in safety

mode

If the message

Normal mode The car is

now in normal mode is displayed after

attempting to start the engine, the vehicle

may be moved carefully from its present

position if, for example, it is blocking traf-

fic.

2. Do not move the vehicle farther than abso-

lutely necessary.

SAFETY

WARNING

When the vehicle is in safety mode, it

should not be towed behind another vehi-

cle. It should be towed from the site on a

tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the

vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo

workshop.

Related information

•

Safety mode (p. 64)

•

Starting the vehicle (p. 370)

•

Recovery (p. 421)

Child safety

Children should always be seated safely

when traveling in the vehicle.

General information

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint

systems for all occupants including children.

Remember that, regardless of age and size, a

child should always be properly restrained in a

vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX

LATCH attachments, which make it more con-

venient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children are

designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap

belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

Such child restraint systems can help protect

children in vehicles in the event of an accident

only if they are used properly. However, chil-

dren could be endangered in a crash if the

child restraints are not properly secured in the

vehicle. Failure to follow the installation

instructions for your child restraint can result

in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a

sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable

substitute for a child restraint system. In an

accident, a child held in a person's arms can

be crushed between the vehicle's interior and

an unrestrained person. The child could also

be injured by striking the interior, or by being

ejected from the vehicle during a sudden

maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-

pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on

the seat. Other occupants should also be

properly restrained to help reduce the chance

of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-

erning how and where children should be car-

ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist-

ing in your state or province. Recent accident

statistics have shown that children are safer in

rear seating positions than front seating posi-

tions when properly restrained. A child

restraint system can help protect a child in a

vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting

a child restraint system:

It should have a label certifying that it meets

applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213) - or in Canada,

CMVSS 213.

Make sure the child restraint system is

approved for the child's height, weight and

development - the label required by the stand-

ard or regulation, or instructions for infant

restraints, typically provide this information.

In using any child restraint system, we urge

you to carefully look over the instructions that

are provided with the restraint. Be sure you

understand them and can use the device prop-

erly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child

restraint system can result in increased inju-

SAFETY

}}

ries for both the infant or child and other occu-

pants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safety

seat, you should use the rear seat with the

standard seat belt fastened. The best way to

help protect the child here is to place the child

on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly

located on the hips. Legislation in your state or

province may mandate the use of a child seat

or cushion in combination with the seat belt,

depending on the child's age and/or size.

Please check local regulations.

A specially designed and tested booster cush-

ion and backrest can be obtained from your

Volvo retailer. See also the article "Integrated

booster cushion."

WARNING

•

Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children under 140 cm (4 feet

7 inches) in height who have outgrown

these devices sit in the rear seat with

the seat belt fastened.

•

On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure to these high temperatures

for even a short period of time can

cause heat-related injury or death.

Small children are particularly at risk.

Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle.

Child seats should always be registered.

Volvo's recommendations

Why does Volvo believe that no child should

sit in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite sim-

ple really. A front airbag is a very powerful

device designed, by law, to help protect an

adult.

Because of the size of the airbag and its speed

of inflation, a child should never be placed in

the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-

ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo

has been an innovator in the field of safety

since it was founded. And we have no inten-

tion of resting on our laurels. But we need

your help. Please remember to put your chil-

dren in the back seat, and buckle them up.

WARNING

A child restraint should never be reused if:

•

The vehicle has been involved in a colli-

sion, no matter how minor

•

Its history is unknown

•

It is older than the manufacturer's expi-

ration date

Volvo has some very specific

recommendations

•

Always wear your seat belt.

•

Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety

device which, when used with a three-

point seat belt can help reduce serious

injuries during certain types of accidents.

Volvo recommends that you do not dis-

connect the airbag system in your vehicle.

•

Volvo strongly recommends that everyone

in the vehicle be properly restrained.

•

Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations

and recommends that ALL children up to

and including 12 years of age sit in the rear

seat. This is strongly recommended for

children in rear-facing child seats.

•

Drive safely!

SAFETY

Related information

•

Safety (p. 44)

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Activating and deactivating child locks

(p. 243)

Child restraints

Suitable child restraints should always be

used when children travel in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint

systems: infant seats, convertible seats and

booster cushions. They are classified accord-

ing to the child's age and size.

The child restraint should be secured using a

three-point seat belt, ISOFIXLATCH anchors

or top tether anchors.

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag - not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the

severity of an accident were to cause the

airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious

injury or death to a child seated in this

position.

SAFETY

}}

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-

turer's instructions for detailed information

on securing the restraint.

WARNING

•

When not in use, keep the child

restraint system secured or remove it

from the passenger compartment to

help prevent it from injuring passen-

gers in the event of a sudden stop or

collision.

•

A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing, prop-

erly restrained, as long as possible.

NOTE

Prolonged installation and use of the child

restraint may damage the vehicle's interior.

Volvo recommends using the kick guard

accessory to help protect the vehicle's

interior.

Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR

ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, each

seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-

ped with a locking mechanism to help keep

the seat belt taut.

When attaching the seat belt to a child

seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat

according to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the

buckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut

around the child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will be

audible at this time and is normal. The belt will

now be locked in place. This function is auto-

matically disabled when the seat belt is

unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend that

children who have outgrown these devices

sit in the rear seat with the seat belt prop-

erly fastened.

Child restraint registration and recalls

Child restraints could be recalled for safety

reasons. You must register your child restraint

to be reached in a recall. To stay informed

about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill

||
SAFETY
70
out and return the registration card that
comes with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily
available in both the U.S. and Canada. For
recall information in the U.S., call the U.S.
Government's Auto Safety Hotline at
18004249393 or go to http://www-
odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/
register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit
Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
menu.htm.
Related information
•
Child safety (p. 66)
•
Infant seats (p. 70)
•
Convertible seats (p. 72)
•
Booster cushions (p. 75)
•
Top tether anchors (p. 76)
•
Lower child seat attachment points
(p. 77)
•
ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)
Infant seats
Suitable child restraints should always be
used when children (depending on their age/
size) are seated in the vehicle.
Securing an infant seat with a seat
belt
Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's
seat
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer's instructions.
Route the seat belt through the infant seat.
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.

SAFETY

}}

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag - not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the

severity of an accident were to cause the

airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious

injury or death to a child seated in this

position.

Fasten the seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the belt's

automatic locking function.

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled

and allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the

seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound

from the seat belt retractor's automatic

locking function will be audible at this time

and is normal. The seat belt should now be

locked in place.

Check that the infant seat is properly secured.

6. Press and pull the infant seat along the

direction of the seat belt to check that it is

properly held in place by the seat belt.

SAFETY

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any

direction along the seat belt path.

When installing infant seats in the rear seat, Volvo

recommends maintaining a distance of at least

50 mm (2 inches) from the front-most part of the

infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling

the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Related information

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Convertible seats (p. 72)

•

Booster cushions (p. 75)

•

Top tether anchors (p. 76)

•

Lower child seat attachment points

(p. 77)

•

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

Convertible seats

Suitable child restraints should always be

used when children (depending on their age/

size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing a convertible seat with a seat

belt

Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-

senger's seat.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-

ward or rearward-facing position, depending

on the age and size of the child.

SAFETY

}}

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat.

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-

ble for the child's age and size. See the

convertible seat manufacturer's recom-

mendations.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

WARNING

•

A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing, prop-

erly restrained, as long as possible.

•

Convertible child seats should be instal-

led in the rear seat only.

•

A rear-facing convertible seat should not

be positioned behind the driver's seat

unless there is adequate space for safe

installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat

according to the child restraint manufac-

turer's instructions.

Fasten the seat belt.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the belt's

automatic locking function.

SAFETY

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled

and allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,

let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A

sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-

matic locking function will be audible at

this time and is normal. The seat belt

should now be locked in place.

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt.

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along

the seat belt path to ensure that it is held

securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any

direction along the seat belt path.

The convertible seat can be removed by

unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract

completely.

Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag - not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the

severity of an accident were to cause the

airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious

injury or death to a child seated in this

position.

Related information

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Infant seats (p. 70)

•

Booster cushions (p. 75)

•

Top tether anchors (p. 76)

•

Lower child seat attachment points

(p. 77)

•

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

SAFETY

Booster cushions

Suitable child restraints should always be

used when children (depending on their age/

size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing a booster cushion

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion.

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-

dren who have outgrown convertible seats.

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on the

booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or

around the cushion according to the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

Positioning the seat belt.

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and

fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•

The hip section of the three-point seat

belt must fit snugly across the child's

hips, not across the stomach.

•

The shoulder section of the three-point

seat belt should be positioned across

the chest and shoulder.

•

The shoulder belt must never be placed

behind the child's back or under the

arm.

Related information

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Convertible seats (p. 72)

•

Infant seats (p. 70)

•

Top tether anchors (p. 76)

•

Lower child seat attachment points

(p. 77)

•

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

SAFETY

Top tether anchors

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint

top tether anchorages for all three seating

positions in the rear seat. They are located on

the rear side of the backrests.

Child restraint anchorages

Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of

the rear seat backrests. There is no symbol for the

center anchor position.

Securing a child seat

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Route the top tether strap under the head

restraint and attach it to the anchor.

3. Attach the strap for the lower tether

anchors in the lower ISOFIXLATCH

attachment points. If the child restraint is

not equipped with straps for the lower

tether anchors, or if the child restraint is

used on the center seating position, follow

the instructions for attaching a child

restraint using the automatic locking seat

belt.

4. Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions for information on securing the

child seat.

NOTE

If the vehicle is equipped with a parcel

shelf, this must be removed before a child

seat can be attached in the tether anchors.

WARNING

•

Always refer to the recommendations

made by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

•

Volvo recommends that the top tether

anchors be used when installing a for-

ward-facing child restraint.

•

Never route a top tether strap over the

top of the head restraint. The strap

should be routed beneath the head

restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses. The anchorages are not able

to withstand excessive forces on them

in the event of collision if full harness

seat belts or adult seat belts are instal-

led to them. An adult who uses a belt

anchored in a child restraint anchorage

runs a great risk of suffering severe

injuries should a collision occur.

•

Do not install rear speakers that require

the removal of the top tether anchors

or interfere with the proper use of the

top tether strap.

SAFETY

Related information

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Lower child seat attachment points

(p. 77)

•

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

Lower child seat attachment points

The rear seats are equipped with lower child

seat attachment points.

The lower child seat attachment points are

intended for use with certain rear-facing child

restraints.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions when attaching a child seat to the

lower child seat attachment points.

Location of child seat attachment

points

Location of child seat attachment points in the rear

seat.

The child seat attachment points in the rear

seat are located on the rear section of the

front seat floor rails.

Related information

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Top tether anchors (p. 76)

•

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

SAFETY

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIXLATCH-equipped

child seats are located in the rear, outboard

seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.

Using the ISOFIXLATCH lower child

seat anchors

Location of the ISOFIXLATCH anchors

Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the

ISOFIXLATCH anchor positions as shown. To

access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion

and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow

your child seat manufacturer's installation

instructions, and use both ISOFIXLATCH

lower anchors and top tethers whenever pos-

sible.

To access the anchors

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down

the seat cushion and locate the anchors

by feel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the child

restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX

LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIXLATCH anchors conform to

FMVSSCMVSS standards. Always refer

to the child restraint system's manual for

weight and size ratings.

NOTE

•

The rear center seat is not equipped

with ISOFIXLATCH lower tether

anchors. If a child restraint is used in

this seat, attach the restraint's upper

anchor strap (if equipped with these)

to the top tether anchor point for this

strap and secure the child restraint

with the vehicle's center seat belt.

•

Always follow your child seat manufac-

turer's installation instructions, and use

both ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors

and top tethers whenever possible.

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX

LATCH lower anchors

WARNING

•

Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-

rectly to the anchor (see the illustra-

tion). If the attachment is not correctly

fastened, the child restraint may not be

properly secured in the event of a colli-

sion.

•

The ISOFIXLATCH lower child

restraint anchors are only intended for

use with child seats positioned in the

outboard seating positions. These

anchors are not certified for use with

any child restraint that is positioned in

the center seating position. When

securing a child restraint in the center

seating position, use only the vehicle's

center seat belt.

SAFETY

Related information

•

Child restraints (p. 68)

•

Top tether anchors (p. 76)

•

ISOFIXLATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

Displays and controls by the driver

in a left-hand drive vehicle

The overviews show the location of the vehi-

cle's displays and controls.

Steering wheel and dashboard

Parking lights, daytime running lights, low

beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog

lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog

light, trip computer reset

Steering wheel paddles* for manual shift-

ing of automatic transmission

Instrument panel

Wipers and washers, rain sensor*

Right-side steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

Horn

Left-side steering wheel keypad

Display lighting, unlocking/locking*/clos-

ing* the trunk lid/tailgate

Ceiling console

Front reading lights and courtesy lighting

Panoramic roof*

Ceiling console display ON CALL button

HomeLink

Center and tunnel console

Center display

Start button

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,

media, drive mode button*

Electrical outlet, USB port, wireless phone

charger*

Gear selector

Parking brake

Auto-hold brakes

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

Driver's door

Memory for power front seat*, door mirror

settings

Central locking, power windows, door mir-

rors, electric child locks*

Hood open

Controls for front seat

Related information

•

Manual front seats (p. 178)

•

Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)

•

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Starting the vehicle (p. 370)

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Center display overview (p. 106)

•

Transmission (p. 383)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

Instrument panel

The instrument panel displays information

related to the vehicle and driving.

The instrument panel contains gauges, indica-

tors and monitoring and warning symbols.

What is shown in the instrument panel varies

depending on the equipment, settings and

functions currently active.

The instrument panel is activated as soon as a

door is opened, i.e. in ignition mode 0. The

panel will power down after a short period of

time if it is not used. To reactivate it, do one of

the following:

•

Depress the brake pedal.

•

Activate ignition mode I.

•

Open one of the doors.

WARNING

If the instrument panel turns off, does not

activate when the ignition is switched on,

or part/all of the panel cannot be read, do

not drive the vehicle. Consult a workshop

immediately. Volvo recommends an

authorized Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the instrument panel is not functioning

properly, information about brakes, airbags

or other safety-related systems may not be

displayed. The driver will then not be able

to check the status of the vehicle systems

or receive relevant warnings and informa-

tion.

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model.

Location in the instrument panel:

Left side In the center Right side

Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols

Tachometer/ECO gauge

Trip odometer Ambient temperature sensor Gear indicator

Odometer

Clock Drive Mode

Cruise control/speed limiter information Message (also graphics in some cases) Fuel gauge

Road sign information*

Door and seat belt status Start/Stop function status

– Media player Distance to empty tank

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

Left side In the center Right side

–

Navigation system map*

Current fuel consumption

– Phone App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad)

– Voice Control –

–

Compass

–

Depends on selected drive mode.

Total distance.

Dynamic symbol

Dynamic symbol in basic

mode.

In the center of the instrument panel is a

dynamic symbol that changes appearance

according to the type of message displayed.

The severity of the control or warning symbol

is indicated by a red or amber-colored marking

around the symbol.

Example with indicator symbol.

An animation may be used to change the sym-

bol into a graphic image to depict the location

of a problem or to clarify information.

Related information

•

Instrument panel settings (p. 86)

•

Indicator and warning symbols (p. 92)

•

Trip computer (p. 87)

•

Messages in the instrument panel

(p. 102)

•

Handling the App menu in the instrument

panel (p. 101)

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

Instrument panel settings

Display settings for the instrument panel can

be set in the instrument panel's App menu

and in the center display's Settings menu.

Settings via instrument panel's app

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model.

The app menu will open and can be controlled

using the right-side steering wheel keypad.

The app menu can be used to set what infor-

mation will be displayed in the instrument

panel

•

trip computer

•

media player

•

phone

•

navigation system*.

Settings via center display

Selecting type of information

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Displays Driver Display

Information

3. Select a background:

•

Show no information in the

background

•

Show information for current

playing media

•

Show navigation even if no route is

set

Select theme

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Displays Display

Themes

3. Select a theme (appearance) for the

instrument panel:

•

Glass

•

Minimalistic

•

Performance

•

Chrome Rings

Select language

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

System System Languages and

Units

System Language to select lan-

guage.

> A change made here will affect the lan-

guage in all displays.

The settings are personal and saved automati-

cally in the active driver profile.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Handling the App menu in the instrument

panel (p. 101)

•

Changing settings in the center display's

Top view (p. 128)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows

the fuel level in the tank.

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model.

The beige area in the fuel gauge indicates the

amount of fuel left in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, the fuel pump sym-

bol will illuminate with an amber-colored light.

The trip computer also indicates the approxi-

mate distance that can be driven on the fuel

remaining in the tank.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Refueling (p. 405)

•

Fuel tank volume (p. 619)

Trip computer

The vehicle's trip computer registers data

while driving such as mileage, fuel consump-

tion and average speed.

To help promote fuel-efficient driving, data is

recorded on both current and average fuel

consumption. Data from the trip computer can

be displayed in the instrument panel.

Example of trip computer information in the instru-

ment panel. The illustration is generic - details may

vary according to vehicle model.

The trip computer includes the following

gauges:

•

Trip odometer

•

Odometer

•

Current fuel consumption

•

Distance to empty tank

•

Tourist - alternative speedometer

Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be

changed via system settings in the center dis-

play.

Trip odometer

There are two trip odometers: TM and TA.

TM can be reset manually and TA is reset

automatically if the vehicle is not used for four

hours.

During a drive, the trip odometer registers

data on:

•

Mileage

•

Driving time

•

Average speed

•

Average fuel consumption

The readings since the trip odometer's last

reset are displayed.

Odometer

The odometer records the vehicle's total mile-

age. This reading cannot be reset.

Current fuel consumption

This gauge shows the vehicle's fuel consump-

tion at that moment. The reading is updated

about once a second.

Distance to empty tank

The trip computer calculates the dis-

tance that can be driven on the fuel

remaining in the tank.

||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
88
This calculation is based on average fuel con-
sumption during the last 30 km (20 miles)
and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the gauge displays "----", there is not
enough fuel remaining to calculate the remain-
ing mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
The information will change based on your
driving style.
An economical driving style will generally
increase how far you can drive on a certain
amount of fuel.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it
easier to drive in countries where speed limit
signs are shown in a different measurement
unit than the one shown in the vehicle's
gauges.
When used, the digital speed is displayed in
the opposite unit to that shown in the analog
speedometer. If mph is used in the analog
speedometer, the equivalent speed in km/h
will be shown in the digital speedometer.
Related information
•
Displaying trip data in the instrument
panel (p. 88)
•
Resetting the trip odometer (p. 89)
•
Displaying trip statistics in the center dis-
play (p. 90)
•
Instrument panel (p. 84)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 128)
Displaying trip data in the
instrument panel
Data recorded and calculated by the trip
computer can be displayed on the instrument
panel.
This data is stored in a trip computer app. You
can choose which information the instrument
panel will display in the app menu.
Open and navigate in the app menu
1
 using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

1. Open the app menu in the instrument

panel by pressing (1).

(The App menu cannot be opened while

there is an unacknowledged message in

the instrument panel. The message must

be acknowledged by pressing the O but-

ton (4) before the App menu can be

opened).

2. Navigate to the trip computer app by mov-

ing left or right using (2).

> The top four menu rows show meas-

ured values for trip odometer TM. The

next four menu rows show measured

values for trip odometer TA. Scroll up or

down in the list using (3).

3. Scroll down to the option buttons to

choose which information to show in the

instrument panel:

•

Odometer

•

Distance to empty tank

•

Tourist (alternative speedometer)

•

Mileage for trip odometer TM, TA or no

display of mileage

•

Current fuel consumption, average fuel

consumption for TM or TA, or no dis-

play of fuel consumption

Select or clear a selection using the O but-

ton (4). The change will apply immedi-

ately.

Related information

•

Trip computer (p. 87)

•

Resetting the trip odometer (p. 89)

Resetting the trip odometer

Resetting the trip odometer using the left-

side steering wheel lever.

–

Reset all information in trip odometer TM

(i.e. mileage, average fuel consumption,

average speed and driving time) by press-

ing and holding the RESET button on the

left-hand steering wheel lever.

Pressing the RESET button only resets

the distance driven.

The TA trip odometer can not be manually

reset. It resets automatically if the vehicle is

not used for four hours or more.

Related information

•

Trip computer (p. 87)

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Displaying trip statistics in the

center display

Trip computer statistics can be displayed

graphically in the center display, providing an

overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient

driving.

Open the Driver

performance app in the App

view to display trip statistics.

Each bar in the graph repre-

sents a driving distance of 1

kilometers, 10 kilometers or

100 kilometers (or miles). The bars are added

from the right as you drive. The bar at the far

right shows the data for the current trip.

Average fuel consumption and total driving

time are calculated from the most recent reset

of the trip statistics.

Trip computer statistics

Related information

•

Trip statistics settings (p. 90)

•

Trip computer (p. 87)

Trip statistics settings

Trip statistics settings can be reset or

adjusted.

Open the

Driver performance app in the

App view to display trip statistics.

Tap

Preferences to

•

change the graph scale. Select 1, 10 or

100 km/miles for the bar.

•

reset data after each trip. Performed

when the vehicle remains stationary for

more than 4 hours.

•

reset data for current trip.

Trip statistics, calculated average con-

sumption, and total driving time are

always reset simultaneously.

Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be

changed via system settings in the center dis-

play.

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Related information

•

Displaying trip statistics in the center dis-

play (p. 90)

•

Trip computer (p. 87)

•

Resetting the trip odometer (p. 89)

Date and time

The clock is displayed in both the instrument

panel and the center display.

Location of clock

Certain messages and other information may

obscure the clock in the instrument panel.

In the center display, the clock is located on

the upper right-hand side in the status bar.

Settings for date and time

–

Select Settings System Date and

Time

in the center display's Top view to

change settings for time and date format.

Adjust the date and time by tapping the

up or down arrows on the touchscreen.

Automatic time for vehicles with GPS

When the vehicle is equipped with a naviga-

tion system,

Auto Time is also available. The

time zone will then be automatically set to the

vehicle's location. In some navigation systems,

the current location must also be set to deter-

mine the correct time zone. If

Auto Time is

not selected, the time and date can be

adjusted using the up and down arrows on the

touchscreen.

Daylight savings time

In some countries, the Auto Daylight Saving

Time setting can be selected to automatically

change to daylight savings time. For other

countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting

can be selected manually.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Changing settings in the center display's

Top view (p. 128)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Ambient temperature sensor

The ambient temperature is shown in the

instrument panel.

The sensor detects the temperature outside

the vehicle.

If the vehicle has been stationary, the sensor

reading may be higher than the actual tem-

perature.

When the ambient temperature is

between –5 °C and +2 °C (23 °F

and 36 °F), a snowflake symbol will

illuminate to alert the driver of the

risk of slippery conditions.

Change the measurement standard for the

temperature sensor etc. via system settings in

the center display's Top view.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Changing system units of measurement

(p. 128)

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols alert the

driver that a function is active, that a symbol

is working, or that an error or serious fault

has occurred.

Red symbols

WARNING

The red warning symbol illumi-

nates to indicate that a fault has

been detected that could affect

safety or driveability. An explana-

tory message will be simultane-

ously displayed in the instrument

panel.

The warning symbol may also

illuminate in combination with

other symbols.

Seat belt reminder

Lights up or flashes when a

someone in the vehicle has not

fastened their seat belt.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

Airbags

A fault has been detected in one

of the vehicle's safety systems.

Read the message in the instru-

ment panel and contact a work-

shop. Volvo recommends con-

tacting an authorized Volvo

workshop.

Fault in brake system

A fault has occurred in the brake

system.

Read the message in the instru-

ment panel and contact a work-

shop. Volvo recommends con-

tacting an authorized Volvo

workshop.

Parking brake

Steady glow: the parking brake is

activated.

Flashing: a fault has occurred in

the parking brake. Read the mes-

sage in the instrument panel.

Fault in electrical system

A fault has occurred in the elec-

trical system.

Read the message in the instru-

ment panel and contact a work-

shop. Volvo recommends con-

tacting an authorized Volvo

workshop.

High engine temperature

The engine's temperature is too

high. Read the message in the

instrument panel.

Collision risk

City Safety warns the driver if

there is a risk of a collision with

another vehicle, pedestrian,

cyclist or large animal.

Low oil pressure

The engine's oil pressure is too

low. Stop the engine immedi-

ately and check the engine oil

level. Add oil if necessary.

If this symbol lights up and the

oil level is normal, read the mes-

sage in the instrument panel and

contact a workshop. Volvo rec-

ommends contacting an author-

ized Volvo workshop.

Canadian models.

US models.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Amber symbols

Information

A problem has occurred in one of

the vehicle's systems. Read the

message in the instrument panel.

The information symbol may also

illuminate in combination with

other symbols.

Fault in brake system

A fault has occurred in the brake

system. Read the message in the

instrument panel.

Fault in ABS system

The system is not functioning

properly. The vehicle's regular

brakes will still work, but without

the ABS function.

Emission control system

Fault in emission control system.

Have the vehicle checked by a

workshop. Volvo recommends

contacting an authorized Volvo

workshop.

Rear fog light

Rear fog light on.

Tire pressure system

Tire pressure low.

If there is a fault in the tire pres-

sure system, the symbol will first

flash for approximately 1 minute

and then glow steadily. This may

occur if the system cannot detect

or alert the driver of low tire pres-

sure as intended.

Fault in headlight system

A fault has occurred in the head-

light system. Read the message

in the instrument panel.

Lane Keeping Aid

Lane Keeping Aid is alerting/

intervening.

Stability system

Steady glow: a fault has occurred

in the system.

Flashing: the system is working.

Stability system, Sport mode

Sport mode is activated.

Blue symbols

Active high beam

Active high beam is activated

and on.

High beams

High beams on.

Green symbols

Auto-hold brake

The function is activated and the

brakes or the parking brake are

being used.

Front fog light

Front fog light on.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

Parking lights

Parking lights on.

Left/right turn signals

Turn signal in use.

White/gray symbols

Active high beam

Active high beam is activated but

not on.

Preconditioning

Engine and passenger compart-

ment heater/air conditioning is

preconditioning the vehicle.

Lane Keeping Aid

White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid

is on and lane marker lines are

detected.

Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid

is on but no lane marker lines are

detected.

Rain sensor

The rain sensor is activated.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

Instrument panel licenses

A license is an agreement on the right to con-

duct a certain activity or the right to use

someone else's right according to terms and

conditions specified in the agreement. The

following text is Volvo's agreement with the

manufacturer or developer.

Freetype Project License

3rd Party Software Disclaimers and License

Agreements Confidential ID 0600004004

39 / 75 Revision 06.00A, 20150609

by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner

Lemberg.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Introduction

The FreeType Project is distributed in several

archive packages; some of them may contain,

in addition to the FreeType font engine,

various tools and contributions which rely on,

or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license

applies to all files found in such packages, and

which do not fall under their own explicit

license. The license affects thus the FreeType

font engine, the test programs, documentation

and makefiles, at the very least. This license

was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG

(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all

encourage inclusion and use of free software

in commercial and freeware products alike. As

a consequence, its main points are that: o We

don't promise that this software works.

However, we will be interested in any kind of

bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use

this software for whatever you want, in parts

or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-

free' usage) o You may not pretend that you

wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts

of it, in a program, you must acknowledge

somewhere in your documentation that you

have used the FreeType code. (`credits') We

specifically permit and encourage the

inclusion of this software, with or without

modifications, in commercial products. We

disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType

Project and assume no liability related to The

FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked

us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer

to use in compliance with this license. We

thus encourage you to use the following text:

2013 The FreeType Project

Legal Terms

0. Definitions – Throughout this license, the

terms `package', `FreeType Project', and

`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files

originally distributed by the authors (David

Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg)

as the `FreeType Project', be they named as

alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the

licensee, or person using the project, where

`using' is a generic term including compiling

the project's source code as well as linking it

to form a `program' or `executable'. This

program is referred to as `a program using the

FreeType engine'. This license applies to all

files distributed in the original FreeType

Project, including all source code, binaries and

documentation, unless otherwise stated in the

file in its original, unmodified form as

distributed in the original archive. If you are

unsure whether or not a particular file is

covered by this license, you must contact us

to verify this. The FreeType Project is

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All

rights reserved except as specified below.

1. No Warranty – THE FREETYPE PROJECT

IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY

OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE

AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY

THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF

THE FREETYPE PROJECT. '

2. Redistribution – This license grants a

worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and

irrevocable right and license to use, execute,

perform, compile, display, copy, create

derivative works of, distribute and sublicense

the FreeType Project (in both source and

object code forms) and derivative works

thereof for any purpose; and to authorize

others to exercise some or all of the rights

granted herein, subject to the following

conditions: o Redistribution of source code

must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT')

unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes

to the original files must be clearly indicated in

accompanying documentation. The copyright

notices of the unaltered, original files must be

preserved in all copies of source files. o

Redistribution in binary form must provide a

disclaimer that states that the software is

based in part of the work of the FreeType

Team, in the distribution documentation. We

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

also encourage you to put an URL to the

FreeType web page in your documentation,

though this isn't mandatory. These conditions

apply to any software derived from or based

on the FreeType Project, not just the

unmodified files. If you use our work, you must

acknowledge us. However, no fee need be

paid to us.

3. Advertising – Neither the FreeType authors

and contributors nor you shall use the name of

the other for commercial, advertising, or

promotional purposes without specific prior

written permission. We suggest, but do not

require, that you use one or more of the

following phrases to refer to this software in

your documentation or advertising materials:

`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',

`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.

As you have not signed this license, you are

not required to accept it. However, as the

FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only

this license, or another one contracted with

the authors, grants you the right to use,

distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using,

distributing, or modifying the FreeType

Project, you indicate that you understand and

accept all the terms of this license.

4. Contacts – There are two mailing lists

related to FreeType: o [email protected].

Discusses general use and applications of

FreeType, as well as future and wanted

additions to the library and distribution. If you

are looking for support, start in this list if you

haven't found anything to help you in the

documentation. o freetype-

[email protected]. Discusses bugs, as well

as engine internals, design issues, specific

licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be

found at http://www.freetype.org

HarfBuzz / UCDN License

•

Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)

•

International

•

2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat,

Inc.

•

Werner Lemberg

For full copyright notices consult the individual

files in the package. Permission is hereby

granted, without written agreement and

without license or royalty fees, to use, copy,

modify, and distribute this software and its

documentation for any purpose, provided that

the above copyright notice and the following

two paragraphs appear in all copies of this

software. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF

THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS

DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY

DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE

PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS"

BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS

NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE

MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES,

ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Libunibreak License

This library is released under an open-source

licence, the zlib/libpng licence. Please check

the file LICENCE for details. Apart from using

the algorithm, part of the code is derived from

the data provided under http://

www.unicode.org/Public. And the Unicode

www.unicode.org/copyright.html

LICENSE:

•

•

dot hacohen at samsung dot com>

This software is provided 'as-is', without any

express or implied warranty. In no event will

the author be held liable for any damages

arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this

software for any purpose, including

commercial applications, and to alter it and

redistribute it freely, subject to the following

restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be

misrepresented; you must not claim that

you wrote the original software. If you use

this software in a product, an

acknowledgement in the product

documentation would be appreciated but

is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly

marked as such, and must not be

misrepresented as being the original

software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered

from any source distribution.

Unicode Inc. License Agreement

EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE, INC. LICENSE

AGREEMENT - DATA FILES AND

SOFTWARE Unicode Data Files include all

data files under the directories http://

www.unicode.org/Public/, http://

www.unicode.org/reports/, and http://

www.unicode.org/cldr/data/ . Unicode

Software includes any source code published

in the Unicode Standard or under the

directories http://www.unicode.org/Public/,

http://www.unicode.org/reports/, and http://

www.unicode.org/cldr/data/. NOTICE TO

USER: Carefully read the following legal

agreement. BY DOWNLOADING,

INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE

USING UNICODE INC.'S DATA FILES ("DATA

FILES"), ANDOR SOFTWARE

("SOFTWARE"), YOU UNEQUIVOCALLY

ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY,

ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF

THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE,

DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY,

DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE DATA FILES OR

SOFTWARE. COPYRIGHT AND

Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://

www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission

is hereby granted, free of charge, to any

person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data

files and any associated documentation (the

"Data Files") or Unicode software and any

associated documentation (the "Software") to

deal in the Data Files or Software without

restriction, including without limitation the

rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,

distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files

or Software, and to permit persons to whom

the Data Files or Software are furnished to do

so, provided that (a) the above copyright

notice(s) and this permission notice appear

with all copies of the Data Files or Software,

(b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this

permission notice appear in associated

documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in

each modified Data File or in the Software as

well as in the documentation associated with

the Data File(s) or Software that the data or

software has been modified. THE DATA FILES

AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS",

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY

DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING

FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,

WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS

ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR

SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this

notice, the name of a copyright holder shall

not be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other dealings in

these Data Files or Software without prior

written authorization of the copyright holder.

ZLIB Data Compression Library License

Agreement

Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without

any express or implied warranty. In no event

will the authors be held liable for any damages

arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this

software for any purpose, including

commercial applications, and to alter it and

redistribute it freely, subject to the following

restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be

misrepresented; you must not claim that

you wrote the original software. If you use

this software in a product, an

acknowledgment in the product

documentation would be appreciated but

is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly

marked as such, and must not be

misrepresented as being the original

software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered

from any source distribution.

Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler [email protected]

[email protected] If you use the zlib

library in a product, we would appreciate *not*

receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The

sources are provided for free but without

warranty of any kind. The library has been

entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark

Adler; it does not include third-party code. If

you redistribute modified sources, we would

appreciate that you include in the file

ChangeLog history information documenting

your changes. Please read the FAQ for more

information on the distribution of modified

source versions.

GLEW License (Modified BSD License)

The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library

•

<milan.ikits@ieee org>

•

Magallon <[email protected]>

•

Redistribution and use in source and binary

forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following

conditions are met: Redistributions of source

code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form

must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution. * The

name of the author may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software

without specific prior written permission. THIS

SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT

OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

100

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

App menu in instrument panel

The App menu in the instrument panel pro-

vides quick access to commonly used func-

tions for certain apps.

The illustration is generic.

The App menu in the instrument panel can be

used instead of the center display and is then

controlled using the right-side steering wheel

keypad. The app menu makes it easier to

switch between different apps or functions

within the apps without having to let go of the

steering wheel.

App menu functions

Different apps provide access to different

types of functions. The following apps and

their functions can be controlled from the App

menu:

App Functions

Trip com-

puter

Select a trip odometer,

change instrument panel dis-

play settings, etc.

Media

player

Select active source for

media player.

Phone Call a contact from the call

list.

Navigation Guide to destination, etc.

Related information

•

Instrument panel (p. 84)

•

Center display overview (p. 106)

•

Handling the App menu in the instrument

panel (p. 101)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

101

Handling the App menu in the

instrument panel

The App menu in the instrument panel is con-

trolled using the right-side steering wheel

keypad.

App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad. The

illustration is generic.

Open/close

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

Opening and closing the app menu

–

Tap open/close (1).

> The App men opens/closes.

NOTE

The App menu cannot be opened while

there is an unacknowledged message in

the instrument panel. The message must

be acknowledged before the App menu

can be opened.

The App menu turns off automatically after a

period of inactivity or after certain selections

are made.

Navigating and making selections in

the App menu

1. Navigate between apps by tapping left or

right (2).

> Functions for the previous/next app will

be shown in the App menu.

2. Scroll through the functions for the

selected app using the up or down arrows

(3).

3. Confirm or make a selection for the func-

tion by pressing confirm (4).

> The function will be activated and, for

some selections, the App menu will

then close.

The next time the App menu is opened, the

functions for the most recently selected app

will be displayed automatically.

Related information

•

App menu in instrument panel (p. 100)

•

Messages in the instrument panel

(p. 102)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

102

Messages in the instrument panel

The instrument panel shows messages in

certain circumstances to inform or assist the

driver.

Example of message in an 8-inch instrument panel.

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model.

Example of message in the instrument panel. The

illustration is generic - details may vary according to

vehicle model.

High-priority messages for the driver are dis-

played in the instrument panel.

The messages may appear in different parts of

the instrument panel depending on what other

information is currently being displayed. The

message will disappear from the instrument

panel after a short period of time or after it has

been acknowledged or any required action has

been taken. Messages that need to be saved

are stored in the

Car Status app, which can

be opened from the App view in the center

display.

The message may be shown along with

graphics, symbols or buttons to e.g. acknowl-

edge the message or accept a request.

Service messages

The following table lists a selection of impor-

tant service messages and what they mean.

Message Meaning

Stop safely

Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage - contact a

workshop

Turn off

engine

Stop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage - contact a

workshop

Service urgent

Drive to work-

shop

Contact a workshop

have the vehicle inspec-

ted immediately.

Service

required

Contact a workshop

have the vehicle inspec-

ted as soon as possible.

Regular main-

tenance

Book time for

maintenance

Time for service - contact

a workshop

. Shown

before the next service

date.

Regular main-

tenance

Time for main-

tenance

Time for service - contact

a workshop

. Shown on

the next service date.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

103

Message Meaning

Regular main-

tenance

Maintenance

overdue

Time for service - contact

a workshop

. Shown

when the date for service

has passed.

Temporarily

off

A function has been tem-

porarily deactivated and

will be reactivated auto-

matically while driving or

after the engine is restar-

ted.

Part of message, shown along with information on the loca-

tion of the problem.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

Handling messages in the instrument

panel (p. 103)

•

Handling messages saved from the instru-

ment panel (p. 104)

•

Messages in the center display (p. 136)

Handling messages in the

instrument panel

Messages in the instrument panel are con-

trolled using the right-side steering wheel

keypad.

Examples of messages in the instrument panel

and

the right-side steering wheel keypad.

Examples of messages in the instrument panel

and

the right-side steering wheel keypad. The illustration

is generic - details may vary according to vehicle

model.

Left/right

Confirm

Some messages in the instrument panel con-

tain one or more buttons for e.g. confirming

the message or accepting a request.

With 8" instrument panel.

With 12" instrument panel.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

104

Handling new messages

For messages with buttons:

1. Navigate between the buttons by tapping

left or right (1).

2. Confirm your selection by pressing con-

firm (2).

> The message will disappear from the

instrument panel.

For messages without buttons:

–

Close the message by pressing confirm

(2) or let the message automatically time-

out after a short period.

> The message will disappear from the

instrument panel.

Messages that need to be saved are stored in

the

Car Status app, which can be opened

from the App view in the center display. The

message Vehicle message stored in Car

Status app will simultaneously appear in the

center display.

Related information

•

Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102)

•

Handling messages saved from the instru-

ment panel (p. 104)

•

Messages in the center display (p. 136)

Handling messages saved from the

instrument panel

Messages saved from the instrument panel

and center displays are handled in the center

display.

Saved messages can be viewed in the Car Status

app.

The messages displayed in

the instrument panel that

need to be saved are stored

in the

Car Status app in the

center display. The message

Vehicle message stored in

Car Status app will simulta-

neously appear in the center display.

Reading saved messages

To read a saved message immediately:

–

Tap the button to the right of the message

Vehicle message stored in Car Status

app in the center display.

> The saved message will be displayed in

the

Car Status app.

To read saved messages at a later time:

Open the

Car Status app from App view

in the center display.

> The app will open in the bottom tile of

Home view.

Select the

Messages tab in the app.

> A list of saved messages will be dis-

played.

3. Tap a message to expand/minimize it.

> More information about the message

will appear in the list and the image to

the left of the app will display informa-

tion about the message in graphic form.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

105

Handling saved messages

In expanded form, some messages have two

buttons available for booking service or read-

ing the Owner's Manual.

Booking service for saved messages:

–

With the message in expanded form, tap

Request appoint./Call to make

Appointment

for assistance booking

service.

With

Request appoint.: The

Appointments tab will open in the app

and create a request for a service/repair

appointment.

With

Call to make Appointment: The

phone app will open and call a service

center to make an appointment for

service or repairs.

Reading the Owner's Manual for saved mes-

sages:

–

With the message in expanded form, tap

Owner's manual to read relevant infor-

mation about the message in the Owner's

Manual.

> The Owner's Manual will open in the

center display and provide information

related to the message.

Saved messages in the app are automatically

deleted each time the engine is started.

Related information

•

Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102)

•

Handling messages in the instrument

panel (p. 103)

•

Messages in the center display (p. 136)

Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

106

Center display overview

Many of the vehicle's functions can be con-

trolled from the center display. The center

display and its possibilities are presented

below.

Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access Function or App view

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
107
Function view ‒ vehicle functions that can
be activated or deactivated with one tap.
Certain functions, called "trigger func-
tions", open windows with settings
options. One example is the 
Camera.
Home view ‒ the initial view displayed
when the screen is turned on.
App view ‒ shows downloaded apps
(third-party apps) as well as apps for inte-
grated functions, such as 
FM radio. Tap
an app icon to open that app.
Status bar ‒ current vehicle activities are
shown at the top of the screen. Network
and connection information is shown to
the left of the status bar. Media-related
information, the clock and information
about background activities are shown to
the right.
Top view ‒ pull the tab down to open Top
view. From here, you can access 
Settings,
Owner's manual, Profile and messages
stored in the vehicle. In certain cases, con-
textual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings)
and the contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual) can also be accessed
in Top view.
Navigation ‒ takes you to map navigation
with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap the tile
to expand it.
Media ‒ most recently used media-related
apps. Tap the tile to expand it.
Phone ‒ used to access phone-related
functions. Tap the tile to expand it.
Fourth tile ‒ most recently used apps or
vehicle functions not associated with the
other tiles. Tap the tile to expand it.
Climate row - information and direct inter-
action to set temperature and seat heating
for example*. Tap the symbol in the center
of the climate bar to open Climate view
and additional setting options.
NOTE
The climate system can be used to cool
down the media system in the center dis-
play if needed. In these cases, the message
Climate system Cooling the
infotainment system will be shown in the
instrument panel.
Related information
•
Handling the center display (p. 108)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
•
Function view in the center display
(p. 118)
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 120)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Opening contextual setting in the center
display (p. 129)
•
Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
•
Media player (p. 449)
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Climate system controls (p. 201)
•
Turning off and adjusting the volume of
the center display system sounds (p. 127)
•
Changing the appearance of the center
display (p. 127)
•
Changing system language (p. 128)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 128)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Messages in the center display (p. 136)
6
In right-hand drive vehicles, these views are mirror images of the ones shown here.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

108

Handling the center display

Many of the vehicle's functions and features

can be controlled and adjusted from the cen-

ter display. The center display is a

touchscreen that reacts to taps and other

gestures.

Using the center display's

touchscreen

The screen reacts differently depending on

whether it is touched by dragging, swiping or

tapping. It is possible to e.g. move between

different views, mark objects and scroll in a

list by touching the screen in various ways.

An infrared light curtain just above the surface

of the screen enables the screen to detect

when a finger is directly in front of the screen.

This technology makes it possible to use the

screen even while wearing gloves.

Two people can interact with the screen at the

same time, e.g. to adjust climate system set-

tings for both the driver and passenger sides.

CAUTION

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as

this could cause scratches.

The following table presents the various pro-

cedures for using the screen:

Procedure Gesture Result

Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.

Double-tap. Zooms in on a digital object, such as a map.

Press and hold. Grabs hold of an object so it can be moved. Can be used to move apps or points on a map. Press and hold

your finger on the screen and drag the object to the desired position.

Tap once with two

fingers.

Zooms out from a digital object, such as a map.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

109

Procedure Gesture Result

Drag Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or points on a

map. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen.

Swipe Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Drag horizontally or vertically over the

screen.

Note that touching the upper part of the screen could cause Top view to open.

Stretch Zooms in.

Pinch Zooms out.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

110

Returning to Home view from another

view

1. Briefly press the home button below the

center display.

> The most recent Home view mode will

be displayed.

2. Press briefly again.

> All of the Home view's tiles will return

to standard mode.

NOTE

In Home view's standard mode – short

press on the Home button. An animation

describing access to the various views is

shown on the screen.

Scrolling in lists, articles or views

A scroll indicator is displayed on the screen

when it is possible to scroll up or down in the

view. Swipe down/up anywhere in the view.

The scroll indicator will be shown in the center dis-

play when it is possible to scroll in the view.

Using the center display controls

Temperature control.

Digital controls are available for many of the

vehicle's functions. For example, to set the

temperature:

•

drag the control to the desired tempera-

ture,

•

tap

+ or − to raise or lower the tempera-

ture by degrees, or

•

tap the desired temperature on the con-

trol.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the center dis-

play (p. 111)

•

Moving apps and buttons in the center

display (p. 120)

•

Using the center display keyboard

(p. 122)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

111

Activating and deactivating the

center display

The center display can be temporarily

switched off and reactivated using the home

button under the screen.

Center display's home button.

When the home button is used, the screen will

go dark and the touchscreen no longer reacts

to touch. The climate bar will remain visible.

All functions connected to the screen continue

to operate, such as climate, audio, guiding*

and apps. The center display screen can be

cleaned when the display is dimmed. The dim-

ming function can also be used to darken the

screen so it is not a distraction while driving.

1. Press and hold the button beneath the

screen.

> The screen will go dark (the climate bar

will remain visible). All functions con-

nected to the screen continue to oper-

ate.

2. To reactivate the screen, briefly press the

Home button.

> The view that was displayed before the

screen was turned off will be displayed

again.

NOTE

The screen cannot be turned off when a

prompt to perform an action is being dis-

played on the screen.

NOTE

The center display is turned off automati-

cally when the engine is off and the driver's

door is opened.

Related information

•

Cleaning the center display (p. 589)

•

Changing the appearance of the center

display (p. 127)

•

Center display overview (p. 106)

Navigating in the center display's

views

There are five different basic views in the cen-

ter display: Home view, Top view, Climate

view, App view and Function view. The

screen is automatically activated when the

driver's door is opened.

Home view

Home view is the view displayed when the

screen is activated. It consists of four tiles:

Navigation, Media, Phone and a fourth tile.

An app or vehicle function selected from the

App or Function views will start in the respec-

tive tile in Home view.

FM radio, for example,

will start in the Media tile.

The extra tile displays the most recently used

app or vehicle function that is not related to

the other three tiles.

The tiles display brief information about the

respective apps.

NOTE

When the vehicle is started, information on

the current status of apps will be displayed

in the respective tile in Home view.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

112

NOTE

In Home view's standard mode – short

press on the Home button. An animation

describing access to the various views is

shown on the screen.

NOTE

When the vehicle is moving:

•

Certain functions (e.g. using the center

display's keyboard) may be deacti-

vated.

•

Certain texts (e.g. those generated by

apps) will be shortened to three rows.

Tap the

Read out button to have the

entire message read aloud.

•

Text messages will be shortened to

one row. Tap the

Read out button to

have the entire message read aloud.

Status bar

Current vehicle activities are shown at the top

of the screen in the status bar. Network and

connection information is shown to the left of

the status bar. Media-related information, the

clock and information about background activ-

ities are shown to the right.

Top view

Top view when expanded.

There is a tab in the center of the status bar at

the top of the screen. Open Top view by tap-

ping the tab or by dragging/swiping from the

top of the screen downward.

Top view always provides access to:

•

Settings

•

Owner's manual

•

Profile

•

The vehicle's stored messages.

In certain cases, Top view provides access to:

•

Contextual setting (e.g.

Navigation

Settings). Change settings directly in Top

view when an app (e.g. navigation) is

being used.

•

Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.

Navigation Manual). Access articles in

the digital Owner's Manual related to the

content shown on the screen, directly in

Top view.

To exit Top view, tap the screen outside Top

view, press the Home button or tap the screen

at the bottom of Top view and swipe upward.

The views behind will become visible again

and can be used.

NOTE

The top view is not available at start-up/

shutdown or when a message is being

shown on the screen. Similarly, it is not

available when the climate view is shown.

Climate view

The climate bar is always visible at the bottom

of the screen. The most common climate set-

tings can be made directly there, such as set-

ting temperature and seat heating*.

Tap the symbol in the center of the

climate bar to open Climate view

and access additional climate sys-

tem settings.

Tap the symbol to close Climate

view and return to a previous view.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

113

App view

App view showing the vehicle's apps.

Swipe the screen from right to left

to access

the App view from the Home view. This view

displays downloaded apps (third-party apps)

as well as apps for integrated functions, such

FM radio. Brief information will be dis-

played directly in App view for certain apps,

such as unread text messages for Messages.

Tap an app to open it. It will then be opened in

its associated tile, e.g.

Media.

Depending on the number of apps, it is possi-

ble to scroll down in App view. This is done by

sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards.

To return to Home view, swipe the screen

from left to right

or press the Home button.

Function view

Function view with buttons for various vehicle func-

tions.

Swipe the screen from left to right

to access

Function view from Home view. From Func-

tion view, you can activate or deactivate vari-

ous vehicle functions such as

BLIS*, Lane

Keeping Aid

* and Park Assist*.

Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
114
If there are many functions, you can also scroll
downward through the view. This is done by
sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards.
Unlike in App view, where you tap an app to
open it, in Function view, tapping a function
activates or deactivates it. Certain functions
(trigger functions) open in their own window
when tapped.
To return to Home view, swipe the screen
from right to left
7
 or press the Home button.
Related information
•
Handling tiles in the center display
(p. 115)
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 120)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Opening contextual setting in the center
display (p. 129)
•
Owner's Manual in the center display
(p. 17)
•
Driver profiles (p. 132)
•
Climate system controls (p. 201)
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Function view in the center display
(p. 118)
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
7
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

115

Handling tiles in the center display

Home view consists of four tiles:

Navigation,

Media, Phone and a fourth tile. These views

can be expanded.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

116

Expanding a tile from standard mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the center display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

117

Expanding a tile:

–

For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:

Tap the screen anywhere in the tile. When

a tile is expanded, the extra tile in Home

view will be temporarily hidden. The other

two tiles will be minimized and only show

certain information. When the extra tile is

tapped, the other three tiles are minimized

and only certain information is displayed.

Expanded view provides access to the

basic functions of the respective apps.

Closing an expanded tile:

–

The tile can be closed in three different

ways:

•

Tap the top section of the expanded

tile.

•

Tap another tile (it will then be opened

in expanded mode instead).

•

Press briefly on the Home button under

the center display.

Opening or closing a tile in full-screen

mode

The fourth tile

and tile for Navigation can be

opened in full-screen mode to show additional

information and possible settings.

When a tile is opened in full-screen mode, no

information from the other tiles is displayed.

In expanded mode, open the

app in full-screen mode. Tap

the symbol.

To return to expanded mode,

tap the symbol or press the

Home button under the

screen.

Center display's home button.

You can always press the Home button to

return to Home view. To return to Home

view's standard view from full-screen mode,

press the Home button twice.

Related information

•

Handling the center display (p. 108)

•

Activating and deactivating the center dis-

play (p. 111)

•

Navigating in the center display's views

(p. 111)

Does not apply to all apps or vehicle functions opened via the fourth tile.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

118

Function view in the center display

Function view, which is one of the center dis-

play's basic views, contains all of the vehi-

cle's function buttons. From the Home view,

navigate to Function view by swiping from

left to right over the screen

Different types of buttons

There are three different types of buttons for

vehicle functions; see below:

Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected

Function buttons Have On/Off modes.

When a function is active, an LED indicator light will illuminate to the left of the button's

icon. Press the button to turn the function on or off.

Most buttons in Function view

are function buttons.

Trigger buttons Do not have On/Off modes.

Pressing a trigger button opens a window for the function. This can be, for example, a win-

dow to change seat position.

•

Camera

•

Headrest Fold

Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes.

Similar to function buttons, but have an extra mode for parking scanning.

•

Park In

•

Park Out

Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

119

Button modes

When a function or parking button's LED indi-

cator is green, the function is activated (on).

For some functions, an additional text explain-

ing the function will be shown when the func-

tion is initially activated. The text will be dis-

played for a few seconds and then the button

will be displayed with the LED indicator illumi-

nated.

For

Lane Keeping Aid, for example, the text

Works only at certain speeds will be dis-

played when the button is pressed.

Press the button once briefly to activate or

deactivate the function.

The function is deactivated when the LED

indicator light is switched off.

A warning triangle in the right-hand section of

the button indicates that something is not

working correctly.

Related information

•

Handling the center display (p. 108)

•

Navigating in the center display's views

(p. 111)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

120

Moving apps and buttons in the

center display

The apps and buttons for vehicle functions

can be moved and organized in the App and

Function views.

1. Swipe from right to left

to access App

view or swipe from left to right

to access

Function view.

2. Press and hold an app or button.

> The app or button will change size and

become slightly transparent. It can then

be moved.

3. Drag the app or button to an available

position in the view.

A maximum of 48 rows can be used to posi-

tion apps or buttons. To move an app or but-

ton outside the visible view, drag it to the bot-

tom of the view. New rows will be added and

the app or button can be placed in one of

these.

Apps or buttons placed below the view's nor-

mal display will not be visible on the screen.

Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the

view to display information outside the view.

NOTE

Hide the apps that are rarely or never used

by moving them far down, outside of the

visible view. This makes it easier to find the

apps used more frequently.

NOTE

Apps and vehicle function buttons cannot

be situated at spots already in use.

Related information

•

Function view in the center display (p. 118)

•

Apps (p. 429)

•

Handling the center display (p. 108)

Symbols in the center display

status bar

Overview of symbols displayed in the center

display status bar.

The status bar shows current vehicle activities

and in certain cases, also their status. Due to

the limited space in the status bar, not all sym-

bols will be displayed at all times.

Symbol Meaning

Connected to the Internet.

Roaming activated.

Cell phone network signal

strength.

Bluetooth device connected.

Bluetooth activated but no

device connected.

Information sent to and from

GPS.

Connected to Wi-Fi network.

Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
121
Symbol Meaning
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hot-
spot). This means that the vehi-
cle shares an available Internet
connection.
Vehicle modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Phone is wirelessly charging.
Action in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
A
Audio source being played.
Audio source paused.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News broadcasts from current
radio station.
B
Symbol Meaning
Traffic information being
received.
B
Clock.
A
Only hybrid models.
B
Not available in all markets.
Related information
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
•
Messages in the center display (p. 136)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 456)
•
Wireless phone charger* (p. 473)
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Date and time (p. 91)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

122

Using the center display keyboard

You can use the keyboard in the center dis-

play to enter characters or to switch to hand-

writing mode to "write" letters and charac-

ters on the screen.

The keyboard can be used to enter characters

(letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) to e.g. send

text messages from the vehicle, enter pass-

words or search for information in the digital

Owner's Manual.

The keyboard will only appear when it is possi-

ble to enter text on the screen.

NOTE

The keyboard cannot be used while the

vehicle is moving.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

123

The illustration shows an overview of some of the buttons that may be shown on the keyboard. The appearance may vary depending on language settings and the context

in which the keyboard is used.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

124

Row showing suggestions for words or

characters

. The suggested words change

as new letters are entered. Scroll through

the list of suggested words by tapping the

right or left arrows. Tap a suggestion to

select it. Please note that this function is

not available in all languages. When

unavailable, this row will not be shown on

the keyboard.

Available characters are adapted to the

language selected for the keyboard (see

number 7 below). Tap a character to enter

it.

Different buttons are displayed here

depending on the context in which the

keyboard is used, e.g. @ to enter an email

address or the return key to start a new

line.

This button hides the keyboard. In cases

where this is not possible, the button will

not be displayed.

Used to enter uppercase letters. Tap once

to enter one uppercase letter and then

continue with lowercase letters. Tap twice

for caps lock (all text will be entered in

uppercase letters). Tap again to return the

keyboard to lowercase letters. In this

mode, the first letter after a period, excla-

mation point or question mark will be

automatically entered in uppercase form.

The first letter entered in text fields will

also be uppercase. In text fields intended

for names or addresses, each word will be

automatically started with an uppercase

letter. In text fields intended for pass-

words, website addresses or email

addresses, all letters will automatically be

lowercase unless uppercase is selected.

Used to enter numbers. The number key-

board (2) will then be displayed. Tap

, which is shown instead of in

number mode, to return to the keyboard

with letters, or

to display the key-

board with special characters.

Used to change the keyboard language,

e.g. EN. The available characters and word

suggestions (1) vary depending on the

selected language. In order to toggle

between keyboard languages, the lan-

guages must first be added under Set-

tings.

Space bar.

Delete. Tap to delete characters one at a

time. Press and hold to delete multiple

characters quickly.

Used to change to handwriting mode.

Tap the confirm button over the keyboard (not

shown in illustration) once to confirm the text

that has been entered. The button's appear-

ance differs depending on the context.

Variants of letters or characters

Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can

be entered by pressing and holding the letter

or character. A box containing possible vari-

ants of the letter or character will appear. Tap

the desired variant. If no variant is selected,

the original letter/character will be used.

Related information

•

Changing keyboard language in the center

display (p. 125)

•

Entering characters, letters and words by

hand in the center display (p. 125)

•

Handling the center display (p. 108)

•

Handling text messages (p. 470)

For Asian languages.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

125

Changing keyboard language in

the center display

In order to toggle between keyboard lan-

guages, the languages must first be added

under

Settings.

Adding or deleting languages in

Settings

The keyboard is automatically set to the same

language as the system language. The key-

board language can be manually changed

without affecting the system language.

1. Tap Settings in Top view.

2. Tap

System System Languages and

Units

Keyboard Layouts.

3. Select one or more languages in the list.

> It is now possible to toggle between

the selected languages using the key-

board.

If no language has been selected under

Settings, the keyboard will remain in the

same language as the vehicle's system lan-

guage.

Toggling between keyboard languages

If more than one language

has been selected in

Settings, the button in the

keyboard can be used to

switch between the different

languages.

To toggle between keyboard languages from

the list:

1. Press and hold the button.

> A list will appear.

2. Select the desired language. If more than

four languages have been selected under

Settings, you can scroll through the list

shown on the keyboard.

> The keyboard and word suggestions

will be adapted to the selected lan-

guage.

To change keyboard language without display-

ing the list:

–

Tap the button.

> The keyboard layout will change to the

next language in the list without dis-

playing the list.

Related information

•

Changing system language (p. 128)

•

Using the center display keyboard (p. 122)

Entering characters, letters and

words by hand in the center

display

Characters, letters and words can be entered

in the center display by handwriting them on

the touchscreen.

Tap the button on the center

display's keyboard to switch

from the keyboard to hand-

writing mode.

Space for entering characters/letters/

words/parts of words.

Text field displaying suggested characters

or words

as they are written on the

screen (1).

Certain system languages only.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

126

Suggestions for characters/letters/words/

parts of words. You can scroll through the

list.

Space bar. Blank spaces can be created

by writing a dash (‒) in the field for hand-

written letters (1). See "Writing blank

spaces in free-text fields" below.

Delete. Tap once to erase one character/

letter at a time. Wait a moment before

tapping again to erase the next character,

letter etc.

Return to the standard keyboard layout.

Switch off/on screen tap sounds.

Hide the keyboard. In cases where this is

not possible, the button will not be dis-

played.

Change language for text input.

Handwriting characters/letters/words

1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts

of a word in the field for handwritten let-

ters (1). Write the word or part of the word

vertically or horizontally.

> A number of suggestions for charac-

ters, letters or words will be displayed

(3). The most likely will be shown at the

top of the list.

CAUTION

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as

this could cause scratches.

2. The character/letter/word will be entered

automatically after a short pause if no

other action is taken.

> The character/letter/word at the top of

the list will be used. Tap one of the

other characters/letters/words in the

list to use it instead.

Erasing/changing handwritten characters/

letters

Erase text in the text field (2) by swiping over the

handwriting field (1).

–

Characters/letters can be erased or

changed in several ways:

•

Tap the desired letter or word in the list

(3).

•

Tap the delete button (5) to erase the

letter and start again.

•

Swipe horizontally from right to left

over the handwriting field (1). Erase

several letters at once by swiping over

the area several times.

•

Tap the X box in the text field (2) to

erase all written text.

For Arabic keyboards, swipe in the other direction. Swiping from right to left will create a blank space.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
127
New lines in free-text fields in handwriting
mode
Create a new line by drawing above the characters in
the handwriting field as shown in the illustration
14
.
Writing blank spaces in free-text fields
Make a blank space by drawing a line from left to
right
15
.
Related information
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 122)
Changing the appearance of the
center display
The appearance of the center display can be
changed by selecting a different theme.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap 
My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Select a theme, e.g. 
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
In addition to these themes, you can also
choose between 
Normal and Bright. In
Normal, the background of the screen is dark
and the text is light. This option is the default
setting for all themes. If the bright version is
selected, the background will be light and the
text will be dark. This option can, for example,
make the screen easier to see in bright day-
light conditions.
These alternatives are always available for
selection and are not affected by the ambient
lighting.
Related information
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Activating and deactivating the center dis-
play (p. 111)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
Turning off and adjusting the
volume of the center display
system sounds
The volume of the center display system
sounds can be adjusted or turned off com-
pletely.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap 
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Pull the control under 
Touch Sounds to
adjust the volume or turn off screen tap
sounds. Pull the control to the desired
sound level.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Sound settings (p. 428)
14
For Arabic keyboards, draw the same character, but in mirror image.
15
For Arabic keyboards, draw the line from right to left.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
128
Changing system units of
measurement
Unit settings are adjusted in the 
Settings
menu in the center display.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Proceed to 
System System
Languages and Units
Units of
Measurement
.
3. Choose a measurement standard:
•
Metric - kilometers, liters and degrees
Celsius.
•
Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
•
US - miles, gallons and degrees Fah-
renheit.
> The units in the instrument panel and
center display are changed.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Changing system language (p. 128)
Changing system language
Language settings are adjusted in the
Settings menu in the center display.
NOTE
Changing languages in the center display
could mean that certain owner's informa-
tion will not comply with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not change to a
language you do not speak well, as it can
be difficult to find your way back through
the menu.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Proceed to 
System System
Languages and Units
.
3.
Select 
System Language.
A voice control symbol indicates that the
language can be used for voice com-
mands.
> The language in the instrument panel
and center display is changed.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Changing system units of measurement
(p. 128)
Changing settings in the center
display's Top view
You can change settings and information for
many of the vehicle's functions via the center
display.
1. Open Top view by tapping the tab at the
top of the screen or by dragging/swiping
from the top of the screen downward.
2.
Tap 
Settings to open the Settings menu.
Top view with Settings button.
3. Tap one of the categories and sub-catego-
ries to navigate to the desired setting.
4. Change the setting(s). Different types of
settings are changed in different ways.
> Changes are saved immediately.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
129
A sub-category in the Settings menu with various
possible settings; has a multi-selection button and
radio buttons.
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 130)
•
Table of settings in the center display
(p. 131)
Opening contextual setting in the
center display
Most of the settings for the vehicle's basic
apps can be changed directly in Top view in
the center display via contextual settings.
Top view with button for contextual settings.
Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing
specific settings related to the active function
displayed on the screen. Apps that are factory-
installed in your vehicle, e.g. 
FM radio and
USB, are part of Sensus and are used to con-
trol the vehicle's integrated functions. The set-
tings for these apps can be changed directly
via contextual setting in Top view.
When contextual setting is available:
1. Pull down Top view when an app is in
expanded form, e.g. 
Navigation.
2.
Tap 
Navigation Settings.
> The navigation settings page will open.
3. Change the desired settings and confirm.
Tap 
Close or press the Home button under
the center display to close Settings view.
Most of the vehicle's basic apps have this con-
textual setting option, but not all.
Third-party apps
Third-party apps are apps that are not factory-
installed in the vehicle's system, but can be
downloaded, e.g. 
Volvo ID. Settings for these
apps are changed in the apps themselves, not
in Top view.
Related information
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 130)
•
Download apps (p. 430)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

130

Resetting user data when the

vehicle changes owners

If the vehicle changes owners, all user data

and system settings should be reset to fac-

tory defaults.

Vehicle settings can be reset at different lev-

els. Reset all user data and system settings to

their original factory defaults when the vehicle

changes owner. It is also important to change

the owner of the Volvo On Call service.

Related information

•

Resetting center display settings (p. 130)

•

Resetting driver profile settings (p. 136)

Resetting center display settings

All settings made in the center display's Set-

tings menu can be reset to default values.

Two types of reset

There are two types of reset in the Settings

menu:

•

Factory Reset- erases all data and files

and resets all settings to factory default.

•

Reset Personal Settings- erases per-

sonal data and resets personalized set-

tings to factory default.

Resetting settings

Follow these instructions to reset the settings.

NOTE

Factory Reset is only possible when the

vehicle is stationary.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Proceed to

System Factory Reset.

3. Select the type of reset you would like to

do.

> A pop-up window will appear.

Tap

OK to confirm the reset.

For Reset Personal Settings, confirm

the reset by tapping Reset for the active

profile or Reset for all profiles.

> The selected settings will be reset.

Related information

•

Center display overview (p. 106)

•

Changing settings in the center display's

Top view (p. 128)

•

Table of settings in the center display

(p. 131)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

131

Table of settings in the center

display

The center display's Settings menu has a

number of main categories and sub-catego-

ries that contain settings and information for

many of the vehicle's features and functions.

There are seven main categories: My Car,

Sound, Navigation, Media,

Communication, Climate and System.

Each category, in turn, contains a number of

sub-categories and possible settings. The

table below shows the first level of sub-cate-

gories. The possible settings for a function or

an area are described in more detail in their

respective sections of the Owner's Manual.

Some settings are personal, which means that

they can be saved to a

Driver Profiles. Others

are global, which means that they are not

linked to a driver profile.

My Car

Sub-categories

Displays

IntelliSafe

Drive Preferences

/Individual Drive

Mode

Lights and Lighting

Mirrors and Convenience

Sub-categories

Locking

Parking Brake and Suspension

Wipers

Sound

Sub-categories

Tone

Balance

System Volumes

Navigation

Sub-categories

Map

Route and Guidance

Traffic

Media

Sub-categories

AMFM Radio

SiriusXM

SiriusXM Travel Link

Sub-categories

Gracenote®

Video

Communication

Sub-categories

Phone

Text Messages

Android Auto

Apple CarPlay*

Bluetooth Devices

Wi-Fi

Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot

Vehicle Modem Internet

Volvo On Call

Volvo Service Networks

Climate

The Climate main category does not have any

sub-categories.

||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
132
System
Sub-categories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and Data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control
*
Factory Reset
System Information
Related information
•
Center display overview (p. 106)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Resetting center display settings (p. 130)
Driver profiles
Many of the vehicle's settings can be cus-
tomized to the driver's personal preferences
and saved in one or more driver profiles.
These personal settings are automatically
saved in the active driver profile. Each key can
be linked to one driver profile. When the linked
key is used, the vehicle is customized to the
specific settings of that driver profile.
Which settings are saved in driver
profiles?
Many of the settings made in the vehicle will
be automatically stored in the active driver
profile if the profile is not protected. The vehi-
cle has settings that can be made either per-
sonal or global. The personal settings are
saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, among other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation*, audio and media sys-
tem, language and voice control.
Some settings are global settings. These set-
tings can be changed but are not saved to a
specific driver profile. Changes to global set-
tings affect all profiles.
Global settings
Global settings do not change when driver
profiles are changed. They remain the same
regardless of which driver profile is currently
active.
Keyboard layout is an example of a global set-
ting. If driver profile X is used to add additional
keyboard languages, these languages will also
be available for driver profile Y. The settings
for keyboard layout are not saved to a specific
driver profile - the settings are global.
Personal settings
If driver profile X has been used to e.g., set the
brightness for the center display, driver profile
Y will not be affected by this setting. It will
only be saved to driver profile X because
brightness setting is a personal setting.
Related information
•
Selecting a driver profile (p. 133)
•
Changing a driver profile's name (p. 133)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 134)
•
Protecting a driver profile (p. 134)
•
Resetting driver profile settings (p. 136)
•
Table of settings in the center display
(p. 131)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
133
Selecting a driver profile
When the center display starts up, the
selected driver profile will be shown at the
top of the screen. The most recently used
driver profile will be active the next time the
vehicle is unlocked. A different driver profile
can be selected once the vehicle has been
unlocked. However, if the remote key has
been linked to a driver profile, this profile will
be used instead.
There are three options for switching between
driver profiles.
Option 1:
1. Tap the name of the driver profile shown
at the top of the center display when the
display starts up.
> A list will appear, showing driver pro-
files that can be selected.
2. Select desired driver profile.
3.
Tap 
Confirm.
> The driver profile has now been
selected and the system will load the
settings stored in that profile.
Option 2:
1. Pull down Top view in the center display.
2.
Tap 
Profile.
> The same list as in option 1 will be dis-
played.
3. Select desired driver profile.
4.
Tap 
Confirm.
> The driver profile has now been
selected and the system will load the
settings stored in that profile.
Option 3:
1. Pull down Top view in the center display.
2.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
3. Tap 
System Driver Profiles.
> A list will appear, showing driver pro-
files that can be selected.
4. Select desired driver profile.
> The driver profile has now been
selected and the system will load the
settings stored in that profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 132)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
•
Changing a driver profile's name (p. 133)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 134)
Changing a driver profile's name
It is possible to change the names of the dif-
ferent driver profiles used in the vehicle.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap 
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select 
Edit Profile.
> A menu will open in which the driver
profile can be changed.
4.
Tap the 
Profile Name box.
> A keyboard will be displayed and can
be used to change the name. Tap 
to close the keyboard.
5.
Save the name change by pressing 
Back
or Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
Profile names may not begin with a space.
If a space is entered first, the profile name
will not be saved.
Related information
•
Selecting a driver profile (p. 133)
•
Using the center display keyboard (p. 122)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

134

Protecting a driver profile

It may not always be desirable to store set-

tings made in the vehicle to the active driver

profile. In these instances, the driver profile

can be protected.

NOTE

Protecting a driver profile is only possible

when the vehicle is stationary.

To protect a driver profile:

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

2. Tap

System Driver Profiles.

Select

Edit Profile.

> A menu will open in which the driver

profile can be changed.

Tap

Protect Profile to protect the profile.

5. Confirm your selection to protect the pro-

file by tapping

Back/Close.

> When the profile is protected, settings

made in the vehicle will not be auto-

matically stored to the profile. The

changes must instead be saved man-

ually under

Settings System

Driver Profiles Edit Profile by tap-

ping

Save current settings to the

profile. If the profile is not protected,

the settings will be automatically stored

to the profile.

Related information

•

Driver profiles (p. 132)

Linking a remote key to a driver

profile

A remote key can be linked to a driver profile.

This driver profile and all of its settings will

then automatically be selected every time the

vehicle is used with that particular remote

key.

The first time the remote key is used, it is not

linked to any specific driver profile. The

Guest

profile is automatically activated when the

ignition is switched on.

A driver profile can also be selected manually

without linking it to any key. When the vehicle

is unlocked, the last active driver profile will be

activated. If the key has ever been linked to a

driver profile, it is not necessary to manually

select a driver profile when using that particu-

lar key.

Linking a remote key to a specific

driver profile

NOTE

A remote key can only be connected to a

driver profile when the vehicle is stationary.

First select the profile you would like to link to

the key (if that profile is not already active).

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

135

The active profile can then be linked to the

key.

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

2. Tap

System Driver Profiles.

3. Mark the desired profile. The display will

return to Home view. The

Guest profile

cannot be linked to a remote key.

4. Pull down Top view again and tap

Settings System Driver Profiles

Edit Profile.

Select

Connect key to link the profile with

the key. A driver profile can only be linked

to the key currently being used in the vehi-

cle. If there are any other keys in the vehi-

cle, More than one key is found, put the

key you want to connect on backup

reader will be displayed.

Location of the backup key reader in the storage

compartment.

When

Profile connected to key is dis-

played, the key and driver profile have

been linked.

Tap OK.

> The key used is now linked to the driver

profile and will remain so as long as the

Connect key box is not deselected.

Related information

•

Driver profiles (p. 132)

•

Changing a driver profile's name (p. 133)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

136

Resetting driver profile settings

Settings that have been saved for one or

more driver profiles can be reset when the

vehicle is stationary.

NOTE

Factory Reset is only possible when the

vehicle is stationary.

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap System Factory Reset Reset

Personal Settings

Select option

Reset for the active

profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel.

Related information

•

Driver profiles (p. 132)

•

Resetting center display settings (p. 130)

Messages in the center display

The center display shows messages in certain

circumstances to inform or assist the driver.

Example of message in the center display's Top view.

Messages with lower priority for the driver are

shown in the center display.

Most of the messages are shown in the center

display's status bar. The message will disap-

pear from the status bar after a short period of

time or after the required action has been

taken. Messages that need to be saved are

stored in Top view in the center display.

The message may be shown along with

graphics, symbols or a button to e.g. activate/

deactivate a function connected to the mes-

sage.

Pop-up messages

Messages are sometimes shown as pop-up

windows. Pop-up messages have a higher pri-

ority than messages shown in the status bar

and require acknowledgment/action before

they disappear.

Related information

•

Handling messages in the center display

(p. 137)

•

Handling messages saved from the center

display (p. 137)

•

Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

137

Handling messages in the center

display

Messages in the center display are handled in

the center display's views.

Example of message in the center display's Top view.

Some messages in the center display have a

button (or several buttons in a pop-up mes-

sage) to e.g. activate/deactivate a function

related to the message.

Handling new messages

For messages with buttons:

–

Tap the button to perform the action or let

the message automatically time-out after

a short period.

> The message will disappear from the

status bar.

For messages without buttons:

–

Close the message by tapping it or let the

message automatically time-out after a

short period.

> The message will disappear from the

status bar.

Messages that need to be saved are stored in

Top view in the center display.

Related information

•

Messages in the center display (p. 136)

•

Handling messages saved from the center

display (p. 137)

•

Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102)

Handling messages saved from the

center display

Messages saved from the instrument panel

and center displays are handled in the center

display.

Examples of saved messages and possible selections

in Top view.

Messages that have been shown in the center

display and that need to be saved are stored in

the center display's Top view.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

138

Reading saved messages

1. Open Top view in the center display.

> A list of saved messages will be dis-

played. Messages with an arrow to the

right can be expanded.

2. Tap a message to expand/minimize it.

> More information about the message

will appear in the list and the image to

the left of the app will display informa-

tion about the message in graphic form.

Handling saved messages

Some messages have a button to e.g. acti-

vate/deactivate a function related to the mes-

sage.

–

Tap the button to perform the action.

Saved messages in Top view are automatically

deleted when the ignition is switched off.

Related information

•

Messages in the center display (p. 136)

•

Handling messages in the center display

(p. 137)

•

Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102)

Voice Control

Voice control

allows you to control func-

tions in the vehicle, e.g. the climate control

system, radio or a Bluetooth-connected

phone, using spoken commands. In vehicles

equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the navi-

gation system can also be controlled using

voice commands.

What is voice control?

Voice control is a driver support function that

can simplify the use of various commands in

your vehicle. It works in general like a regular

application in which you input information in a

set order in order to perform a task, but

instead of typing on a keypad, you use voice

commands. It can therefore be a good idea to

familiarize yourself with how, and in what

order, a voice command should be spoken to

get the desired result.

You can control certain infotainment and cli-

mate control functions through the voice con-

trol system by using voice commands. The

system can respond verbally and by displaying

information in the instrument panel.

WARNING

The driver is always responsible for ensur-

ing that the vehicle is operated in a safe

manner and that all applicable traffic regu-

lations are followed.

Voice control microphone

System updates

The voice control system is continuously

improved. It is recommended to always have

the latest version installed.

Download updates at volvocars.com/support.

Certain markets only.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

139

NOTE

Not all system languages support voice

control. If a language supports voice con-

trol, it is marked with a

symbol in the

list of available system languages. Read

more about where the information is found

in the section on voice control settings.

Related information

•

Use voice recognition (p. 139)

•

Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)

•

Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)

•

Climate control system voice commands

(p. 192)

•

Voice control settings (p. 142)

Use voice recognition

Starting voice control

Voice commands are given

through a "dialog" with the

voice control system. Press

the button for voice control

on the right-side steering

wheel keypad to activate the

system and initiate a voice

command dialog. When you press the button,

a beep will sound and the voice control sym-

bol will appear in the instrument panel.

This shows that the system has begun listen-

ing and you can now begin speaking com-

mands. As soon as you start speaking, the

system will be trained to recognize and under-

stand your voice. This takes several seconds

and is done automatically, which means that

you don't need to manually initiate any voice

training.

These may include:

•

Wait until after the tone, and then speak in

your normal voice at a normal speed.

•

Do not speak while the system is respond-

ing (the system is unable to process com-

mands during this time).

•

Avoid background noises in the passenger

compartment by keeping doors, windows

and the panoramic roof* closed.

NOTE

Not all system languages support voice

control. If a language supports voice con-

trol, it is marked with a

symbol in the

list of available system languages. Read

more about where the information is found

in the section on voice control settings.

Generally, the system will listen for a basic

command that is then followed by more

detailed commands specifying what you want

the system to do.

To change the audio volume of the system,

turn the volume knob while the voice is speak-

ing. It is possible to use other buttons while

voice commands are being given. However,

because other audio is silenced during dialog

with the system, it is not possible to perform

any functions connected to audio using the

buttons.

Certain markets only.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

140

Canceling voice control

To cancel voice control, do one of the follow-

ing:

•

Briefly press

and say "Cancel".

•

Press and hold the steering wheel key-

pad's voice command button

until

two audible signals are given. This cancels

voice control even when the system is

speaking.

Voice control will also be canceled if you do

not respond during a dialog. The system will

first ask three times for a response and if the

response is still not given, voice control will be

automatically canceled.

To speed up communication and skip prompts

from the system, press the voice control but-

ton

on the steering wheel keypad. This

will interrupt the system's response and you

can say the next command.

Voice command examples

Tap .

Say "

Call [First name] [Last name]

[number category]", e.g. "Call Robyn

Smith cellular".

> The system will call the selected con-

tact from the phone book. If the contact

has several phone numbers (e.g. home,

cell, work), the right category must also

be given.

Commands/phrases

The following commands can usually be used

in any situation:

•

Repeat" - repeats the most recent voice

command in the current dialog.

•

Cancel" - cancels the dialog.

•

Help" - initiates a help dialog. The sys-

tem responds with commands that can be

used in the current situation, an instruc-

tion or an example.

Commands for specific functions, such as

phone and audio, are described in the sections

related to that function.

Numbers

Number commands can be given in different

ways depending on the function to be con-

trolled:

•

Phone numbers and zip codes should be

given by stating each number individually,

e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four,

three" (03122443).

•

Addresses can be given by stating each

number individually or in a group, e.g.

"two, two" or "twenty-two" (22). For Eng-

lish and Dutch language settings, groups

of numbers can also be said in sequence,

e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22).

For English, double or triple digits can also

be used, e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers

in the range 02300 can be used.

•

Frequencies can be given as "ninety-eight

point eight" (98.8), "one hundred four

point two" or "hundred and four point

two" (104.2).

Speech rate and repeat mode

The speed at which the system speaks can be

adjusted.

With repeat mode on, the system will repeat

what you have said.

To change the speech rate or activate/deacti-

vate repeat mode:

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap System Voice Control and select

settings.

•

Repeat Voice Command

•

Speech Rate

Note that this only cancels the dialog when the system is not speaking. To do this, press and hold

until you hear two beeps.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
141
Related information
•
Voice Control (p. 138)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 192)
•
Voice control settings (p. 142)
Voice control for cellular phones
19
Call a contact in the phone book, have a text
message read aloud or dictate short mes-
sages using voice commands to a Bluetooth-
connected phone.
To access a contact in the phone book, the
voice command must contain the contact
information entered in the phone book. If a
contact, e.g. 
Robyn Smith, has several phone
numbers listed in the phone book, a number
category such as 
home or cellular can also be
specified, i.e. "
Call Robyn Smith cellular".
Tap 
 and say one of the following com-
mands:
•
"
Call [contact]" - call the selected con-
tact from the phone book.
•
"
Call [phone number]" - call a phone
number.
•
"
Recent calls" - display the list of recent
calls.
•
"
Read message" - read a text message
aloud. If there are several messages,
select the message to read aloud.
•
"
Message to [contact]" – the user is
prompted to dictate a short message. The
message will then be read aloud and the
user can choose to send or re-dictate the
message. The vehicle must be connected
to the Internet to access this function.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
control. If a language supports voice con-
trol, it is marked with a 
 symbol in the
list of available system languages. Read
more about where the information is found
in the section on voice control settings.
Related information
•
Voice Control (p. 138)
•
Use voice recognition (p. 139)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 192)
•
Voice control settings (p. 142)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
19
Certain markets only.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

142

Voice control for radio and media

Voice commands for the radio and media

players are shown below.

Tap and say one of the following com-

mands:

•

Media" - initiates a dialog for media and

radio and displays examples of com-

mands.

•

Play [artist]" - plays music by the

selected artist.

•

Play [song title]" - plays the selected

song.

•

Play [song title] from [album]" - plays

the selected song from the selected

album.

•

Play [radio station]" - starts the

selected radio station.

•

Tune to [frequency]" - tunes to the

selected radio frequency in the currently

active waveband. If no radio source is

active, the FM band will be started as

default.

•

Tune to [frequency] [waveband]" -

tunes to the selected radio frequency on

the selected waveband.

•

Radio" - starts FM radio.

•

Radio FM" - starts FM radio.

•

Radio AM" - starts AM radio.

•

SiriusXM" - starts SiriusXM radio*

•

USB" - starts playback from USB.

•

iPod" - starts playback from iPod.

•

Bluetooth" - starts playback from a

Bluetooth-connected media source.

•

Similar music" - plays music from a

USB-connected device with music similar

to that currently playing.

NOTE

Not all system languages support voice

control. If a language supports voice con-

trol, it is marked with a

symbol in the

list of available system languages. Read

more about where the information is found

in the section on voice control settings.

Related information

•

Voice Control (p. 138)

•

Use voice recognition (p. 139)

•

Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)

•

Climate control system voice commands

(p. 192)

•

Voice control settings (p. 142)

Voice control settings

Settings for the voice control system are

made here.

Settings System Voice Control

Settings can be personalized in the following

areas:

•

Repeat Voice Command

•

Gender

•

Speech Rate

Sound settings

Select sound settings under:

Settings Sound System Volumes

Voice Control

Language settings

The voice control system is not available for all

languages. The languages available for voice

commands are indicated by the

icon in

the list of languages.

Changing the language here will also change

the language in the menus, messages and

help texts.

Settings System System Languages

and Units System Language

Certain markets only.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

143

Related information

•

Voice Control (p. 138)

•

Use voice recognition (p. 139)

•

Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)

•

Climate control system voice commands

(p. 192)

•

Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)

•

Sound settings (p. 428)

•

Changing system language (p. 128)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.

146

Lighting control and panel

The lighting panel and controls can be used

to adjust both exterior and interior lighting.

The lighting ring on the left-side steering

wheel lever can be used to activate and

adjust the exterior lighting. The brightness of

the interior lighting can be adjusted using the

thumb wheel on the dashboard.

Exterior lighting

Lighting ring position.

When the vehicle's ignition is in mode II, the

lighting ring positions have the following func-

tions:

Position Meaning

US: Daytime running lights and

parking lights are off.

Canada: Daytime running lights

and parking lights are on.

High beam flash can be used.

Parking lights when the vehicle

is parked.

US: Daytime running lights are

off.

Canada: Daytime running lights

are on.

High beam flash can be used.

Low beams and parking lights.

High beams can be activated.

High beam flash can be used.

Position Meaning

Daytime running lights and

parking lights in daylight condi-

tions.

Low beams and parking lights in

weak daylight or dark conditions

or when the front fog lights*

and/or rear fog light are acti-

vated.

Active high beam can be acti-

vated.

High beams can be activated

when low beams are on.

High beam flash can be used.

Active high beams on/off.

US models only: Daytime running lights and parking lights

can be deactivated in the center display.

NOTE

Volvo recommends use of Daytime

Running Lights in the US. Its use is man-

datory in Canada.

Volvo recommends using position when

the vehicle is in motion.

LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
147
WARNING
The vehicle lighting system cannot in all sit-
uations determine when the daylight is too
weak or not strong enough, e.g. when
there is fog or rain.
The driver is always responsible for driving
the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the
traffic conditions and as specified by appli-
cable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting interior bright-
ness.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 147)
•
Interior Lighting (p. 156)
•
Parking lights (p. 148)
•
Using turn signals (p. 152)
•
Using high beam (p. 150)
•
Low beams (p. 149)
•
Front fog lights/corner illumination*
(p. 153)
•
Rear fog light (p. 154)
•
Active Bending Lights* (p. 152)
•
Brake lights (p. 155)
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 155)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 155)
Adjusting light functions via the
center display
A number of light functions can be adjusted
and activated via the center display. These
include active high beams, home safe lighting
and approach lighting.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap 
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select 
Exterior Lights or Interior
Lighting and then select the function that
you would like to adjust.
Related information
•
Lighting control and panel (p. 146)
•
Active high beam (p. 151)
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 156)
•
Welcome Light (p. 156)
•
Using turn signals (p. 152)
•
Changing settings in the center display's
Top view (p. 128)
•
Function view in the center display (p. 118)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.

148

Parking lights

The parking lights can be used to help other

road users see the vehicle if it is stopped or

parked. Use the lighting ring on the steering

wheel lever to turn on the parking lights.

Lighting ring in the parking light position.

Turn the lighting ring to the position to

turn on the parking lights (the license plate

lighting will also illuminate).

Canadian models: If the ignition is in the II

position, the daytime running lights will illumi-

nate instead of the front parking lights. With

the lighting ring in this position, the parking

lights will remain on regardless of what posi-

tion the ignition is in.

US models: When

mode is selected,

the daytime running lights can be deactivated

in the center display. The parking lights will

also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark

conditions, the parking lights and low beams

will be illuminated.

In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also

illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert

following traffic. This happens regardless of

what position the lighting ring or ignition is in.

Related information

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

Daytime running lights

The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient

lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in

the

position, the daytime running lights

will always be activated when the ignition is

in mode II. In weak daylight or dark condi-

tions, the headlights automatically switch to

low beams.

Lighting ring in AUTO position.

With the steering wheel lever's lighting ring in

the

position, the daytime running lights

(DRL

) will illuminate when the vehicle is

driven in daylight conditions. The headlights

will switch automatically from daytime run-

ning lights to low beams in weak daylight or

dark conditions. The headlights will also

switch to low beams if the front fog lights*

and/or rear fog light are activated.

LIGHTING

}}

* Option/accessory.

149

US models: When

mode is selected,

the daytime running lights can be deactivated

in the center display. The parking lights will

also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark

conditions, the parking lights and low beams

will be illuminated.

US models: With the lighting ring in the

or position, the daytime running lights

will be off.

Canadian models: With the lighting ring in

the

or position, the daytime run-

ning lights will be on.

NOTE

Volvo recommends use of Daytime

Running Lights in the US. Its use is man-

datory in Canada.

WARNING

The system is an energy saving aid – it

cannot in all situations determine when the

daylight is too weak or not strong enough,

e.g. when there is fog or rain.

The driver is always responsible for driving

the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the

traffic conditions and as specified by appli-

cable traffic regulations.

Related information

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

•

Low beams (p. 149)

Low beams

When driving with the lighting ring in the

position, low beam will be automati-

cally activated in weak daylight or dark condi-

tions, when the ignition is in the II position.

Lighting ring in AUTO position.

With the lighting ring in the position, the

low beams will be automatically activated if:

•

the front fog lights* are activated

•

the rear fog light is activated

•

the rear and front fog lights are activated.

With the lighting ring in the

position,

low beams will always be on when the ignition

is in the II position.

Daytime Running Lights

LIGHTING

150

Tunnel detection

The vehicle will detect if it enters a tunnel and

shift from daytime running lights to low

beams.

Note that the left-hand steering wheel lever

must be in

position for tunnel detection

to work.

Related information

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

•

Daytime running lights (p. 148)

Using high beam

High beam is operated via the left-hand

steering wheel lever. High beam is the vehi-

cle's strongest lighting and should be used

when driving in dark conditions, provided it

does not blind other road users, to improve

visibility.

Steering wheel lever with lighting ring.

High beam flash

Move the steering wheel lever slightly

backward to the high beam flash mode.

The high beams will illuminate until the

lever is released.

High beams

The high beams can be activated when

the lighting ring is in mode

. Activate high beams by moving the

steering wheel lever forward.

Deactivate by moving the steering wheel

lever backward.

When the high beams are activated, the

symbol will be illuminated in the instrument

panel.

Related information

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Active high beam (p. 151)

When the low beams are on.

LIGHTING

151

Active high beam

Active high beams is a function that uses

camera sensors in the upper edge of the

windshield to detect the headlights of

approaching vehicles or the taillights of the

vehicle directly ahead. When either of these

is detected, the vehicle's headlights will auto-

matically switch from high beams to low

beams.

Active high beams is indicated by the symbol.

This function can be used in dark conditions

when the vehicle's speed is approx. 20 km/h

(approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can

also detect street lighting. When the camera

sensor no longer detects an approaching vehi-

cle or a vehicle ahead, the headlights will

return to high beams after a second or two.

Activating active high beams

Active high beams can be activated and deac-

tivated by turning the lighting ring on the left-

side steering wheel lever to position

The lighting ring will then return to

When active high beams are activated, a white

symbol will be displayed in the instru-

ment panel. When high beams are on, the

symbol will be blue.

If active high beams are deactivated when the

high beams are on, the headlights will auto-

matically switch to low beams.

Limitations for active high beams

The camera sensor on which the function is

based has limitations.

If this symbol and the message

Active High Beam Temporarily

unavailable is displayed in the

instrument panel, switching

between high and low beams must be done

manually. The

symbol will go out when

the message is displayed.

The same applies if this symbol

along with the message

Windscreen sensor Sensor

blocked, see Owner's manual is

displayed.

Active high beams may be temporarily unavail-

able in certain situations, e.g. heavy fog or

rain. When active high beams become availa-

ble again, or the windshield sensors are no

longer blocked, the message will disappear

and the

symbol will be displayed.

WARNING

Automatic high beam is an aid in using the

best possible light based on prevailing con-

ditions.

The driver is always responsible for man-

ually switching between high and low

beam when traffic situations or weather

conditions require this.

Related information

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Using high beam (p. 150)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.

152

Using turn signals

The vehicle's turn signals are controlled using

the left-side steering wheel lever. The turn

signals flash three times or continuously,

depending on how far up or down the lever is

moved.

Turn signals.

Triple flash indicator

Move the steering wheel lever up or down

to the first position and release. The turn

signals will flash three times. If the func-

tion is deactivated via the center display,

the signals will flash once.

NOTE

•

This automatic flashing sequence can

be interrupted by immediately moving

the lever in the opposite direction.

•

If the turn signal indicator flashes more

quickly than normal, refer to the mes-

sage in the instrument panel.

Continuous flashing sequence

Move the lever up or down as far as possi-

ble.

The lever will stop in its end position and can

be moved back manually or automatically by

moving the steering wheel.

Related information

•

Hazard warning flashers (p. 155)

•

Adjusting light functions via the center

display (p. 147)

•

Replacing rear turn signal bulbs (p. 585)

Active Bending Lights*

Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to

help provide extra illumination in curves and

intersections. Depending on equipment level,

vehicles with LED

headlights* may be equip-

ped with Active Bending Lights.

Headlight pattern with function deactivated (left) and

activated (right).

Active Bending Lights follow the movement of

the steering wheel to help provide extra illumi-

nation in curves and intersections, helping to

improve visibility for the driver.

The function is automatically activated when

the engine is started. If a fault is detected in

the system, the

symbol will illuminate in

the instrument panel and a message will be

displayed.

LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LIGHTING

}}

* Option/accessory.

153

The function is only active in weak daylight or

dark conditions and only when the vehicle is

moving and the low beams are on.

Deactivating/activating the function

The function is activated as the default factory

setting and can be activated and deactivated

in the center display's Function view:

Tap the

Active Bending

Lights button.

Related information

•

Adjusting light functions via the center

display (p. 147)

•

Front fog lights/corner illumination*

(p. 153)

Front fog lights/corner

illumination*

The fog lights can be activated manually

when driving in fog and are activated auto-

matically when backing up to help augment

the backup light.

If the vehicle is equipped with corner illumi-

nation*, the fog lights are activated automati-

cally in weak daylight or dark conditions to

illuminate the area diagonally in front of the

vehicle.

Front fog lights button.

The front fog lights can be turned on when the

ignition is in mode II and the lighting ring is in

position

, or .

Tap the button to activate or deactivate the

function. The

symbol in the instrument

panel comes on when the front fog lights are

on.

The front fog lights turn off automatically

when the ignition is switched off or when the

lighting ring is in position

NOTE

Regulations concerning fog light use vary

from country to country.

Cornering illumination*

The front fog lamps can include the cornering

lights function, which temporarily illuminates

the area diagonally in front of the car in the

direction the steering wheel is turned on a

sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the

direction indicators.

The function is activated in weak daylight or

dark conditions when the lighting ring is in

or mode and the vehicle speed is

less than about 30 km/h (about 20 mph).

Both cornering illumination are also illumi-

nated as a complement to the taillights when

reversing.

The function is activated as the default factory

setting and can be activated and deactivated

using the center display.

Related information

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

•

Rear fog light (p. 154)

LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
154
•
Active Bending Lights* (p. 152)
•
Adjusting light functions via the center
display (p. 147)
Rear fog light
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than ordinary taillights and should only be
used to help other road users see the vehicle
when visibility is reduced by conditions such
as fog, snow, smoke or dust.
Rear fog light button.
The fog lights are located on the right and left
sides of the rear of the vehicle.
The rear fog light can only be used when:
•
ignition mode II is active and the lighting
ring is in position 
 or 
•
the lighting ring is in the 
 position
and the front fog lights are on.
Press the button to switch on/off. The 
symbol in the instrument panel illuminates
when the rear fog light is on.
The rear fog light turns off automatically when:
•
the ignition is off or the lighting ring is in
the 
 position.
•
the lighting ring is in the 
 position
and the front fog lights are turned off.
NOTE
Regulations concerning rear fog light use
vary from country to country.
Related information
•
Lighting control and panel (p. 146)
•
Front fog lights/corner illumination*
(p. 153)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
•
Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 588)

LIGHTING
155
Brake lights
The brake lights are automatically illuminated
when braking.
The brake lights are illuminated when the
brake pedal is depressed and when the brakes
are automatically applied by a driver support
system.
Related information
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 155)
•
Brake functions (p. 374)
•
Replacing the brake light bulb (p. 587)
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
Emergency brake lights
The emergency brake lights are activated to
warn following vehicles of hard braking.
This function causes an additional taillight on
each side of the vehicle to illuminate.
The emergency brake lights are activated in
the event of hard braking or if the ABS system
is activated and the vehicle is traveling at a
high speed.
After the driver decelerates to a low speed and
then releases the brake, the brake lights
resume their normal brightness.
Related information
•
Brake lights (p. 155)
•
Brakes (p. 375)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 155)
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by all of the vehicle's turn signals being
activated at the same time. The function can
be used to warn about a traffic hazard.
Hazard warning flashers button.
Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
NOTE
Regulations concerning the use of hazard
warning flashers may vary from country to
country.
Related information
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 155)
•
Using turn signals (p. 152)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.

156

Using home safe lighting

Some of the exterior lights remain on to illu-

minate the area around the vehicle. This is

called home safe lighting.

To activate home safe lighting:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Push the left-side steering wheel lever

toward the dashboard and release.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

> A symbol in the instrument panel illumi-

nates to indicate that the function is

activated and exterior lighting switches

on: Parking lights, headlights, license

plate lighting and outer door handle

lighting*.

The length of time home safe lighting remains

illuminated can be set in the center display.

Related information

•

Adjusting light functions via the center

display (p. 147)

•

Welcome Light (p. 156)

Welcome Light

Approach lighting is activated when the vehi-

cle is unlocked and can be used to provide

light as you walk toward the vehicle.

The function is activated when the remote key

is used for unlocking. The parking lights, ceil-

ing lights, footwell lights and trunk/cargo

compartment lights are activated in daylight

conditions. In weak daylight or dark condi-

tions, the license plate lighting and outer door

handle lighting* will also be activated, with the

light directed toward the ground.

If no door is opened, the lights will remain illu-

minated for approx. 2 minutes. If a door is

opened while the function is activated, the

interior lighting and outer door handle lighting*

will remain on for a longer period of time.

This function can be activated and deactivated

in the center display.

Related information

•

Adjusting light functions via the center

display (p. 147)

•

Using home safe lighting (p. 156)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

Interior Lighting

The passenger compartment is equipped

with several different types of lighting, e.g.

general lighting, adjustable ambient lighting

and reading lights.

All lighting in the passenger compartment can

be turned on and off manually within

5 minutes after:

•

the engine has been switched off and the

ignition is in mode 0.

•

the vehicle is unlocked but has not been

started.

Front ceiling lighting

The controls in the ceiling console for the front read-

ing lights and courtesy lighting.

Reading light left side

Passenger compartment lighting

LIGHTING

}}

* Option/accessory.

157

Courtesy lighting auto switch

Reading light right side

Reading lights

The reading lights on the right and left sides

are switched on and off by briefly pressing the

buttons in the ceiling console. To adjust the

brightness, press and hold the button.

Passenger compartment lighting

Briefly press the button in the ceiling console

to switch on or off the footwell lighting and

ceiling lighting.

Courtesy lighting auto switch

Activate the auto switch by briefly pressing

the AUTO button in the ceiling console. With

Auto activated, the indicator light in the button

and the courtesy lighting come on and are

turned off as follows.

Courtesy lighting is switched on when:

•

The vehicle is unlocked

•

The vehicle is switched off

•

A side door is opened.

Courtesy lighting is switched off when:

•

The vehicle is locked

•

The engine is started

•

A side door is closed

•

A side door has been open for approx.

2 minutes.

Rear roof lighting*

Reading lights are located in the rear section

of the vehicle and can also be used as passen-

ger compartment lighting.

Reading lights over the rear seat.

In vehicles with panoramic roofs*, there are two lamp

units, one on each side of the ceiling.

Briefly press the button on the light to turn on

or off the reading lights. To adjust the bright-

ness, press and hold the button.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting comes on or

goes off when the glove compartment is

opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting*

The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off

when the cover over the mirror is opened or

closed.

Ground lighting*

The ground lighting comes on or goes off

when a door is opened or closed.

Cargo compartment lighting

The cargo compartment lighting comes on or

goes off when the cargo compartment is

opened or closed.

Ambient Lighting

The ambient lighting comes on when the

doors are opened and goes out when the vehi-

cle is locked. Ambient lighting brightness can

be adjusted in the center display and also fine-

tuned using the thumb wheel in the dash-

board.

Mood lighting*

The vehicle is equipped with LEDs that pro-

vide faint lighting in various colors. This light-

ing is on when the engine is running. Mood

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.

158

lighting can be adjusted in the center display

and also fine-tuned using the thumb wheel in

the dashboard.

Lighting in the door storage

compartments

Lighting in the door storage compartments

comes on when the doors are opened and

goes out when the vehicle is locked. The

brightness can be adjusted using the thumb

wheel in the dashboard.

Lighting in the tunnel console's front

cup holder

The lighting in front console cup holders

switches on when the vehicle is unlocked and

off when the vehicle is locked. The brightness

can be adjusted using the thumb wheel in the

dashboard.

Related information

•

Adjusting interior lighting (p. 158)

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

•

Passenger compartment interior (p. 532)

Adjusting interior lighting

Illumination in the vehicle varies depending

on ignition mode. The interior lighting can be

adjusted with a thumb wheel in the dash-

board and certain light functions can also be

adjusted via the center display.

The thumb wheel on the

dashboard to the left of the

steering wheel can be used

to adjust the brightness of

the display lighting, instru-

ment lighting, ambient light-

ing and mood lighting*.

Adjust ambient decor lighting

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

2. Tap

My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting.

3. Choose from among the following set-

tings:

•

Under

Ambient Light Intensity, select

Off, Low or High.

•

Under

Ambient Light Level, select

Reduced or Full.

Adjusting mood lighting*

The vehicle is equipped with several LEDs that

provide faint lighting in various colors. This

lighting is on when the engine is running.

Changing the brightness

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

2. Tap

My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood

Lighting

Under

Interior Mood Light Intensity,

select Off, Low or High.

Changing the color of the light

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

2. Tap

My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood

Lighting

Choose

By Temperature or By Color to

change the color of the light.

By Temperature is selected, the light

will change according to the temperature

set for the passenger compartment.

By Color is selected, the subcategory

Theme Colors can be used to make fur-

ther adjustments.

Related information

•

Interior Lighting (p. 156)

•

Adjusting light functions via the center

display (p. 147)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
160
Windows, glass and mirrors
The vehicle is equipped with several different
types of windows, glass and mirrors. Some of
the windows in the car are laminated.
The windshield has laminated glass. Lamina-
ted glass is also available as on option for
some other glass surfaces. Laminated glass is
reinforced, which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved soundproofing
in the passenger compartment.
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
The symbol shows the windows containing lamina-
ted glass.
1
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 160)
•
Panoramic roof* (p. 165)
•
Power windows (p. 161)
•
Rearview/door mirrors (p. 163)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 208)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun curtains
All power windows and sun curtains* have a
pinch protection function that is triggered if
anything blocks them while they are opening
or closing.
If pinch protection is activated, movement will
stop and then retract automatically to approx.
50 mm (2 inches) from the point at which it
was blocked (or to full ventilation position).
It is still possible to override pinch protection
when closing is interrupted (e.g. due to ice) by
pressing and holding down the control in the
same direction.
If there is any problem with the pinch protec-
tion, a rest procedure can be tested.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
function for automatic opening and closing
must be reset to function correctly. A reset
is required in order for the pinch protection
to work.
Related information
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 160)
•
Operating the power windows (p. 161)
•
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 167)
Reset procedure for pinch
protection
If you experience any problems with the elec-
trical functions for the power windows, you
can try to perform a reset.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
function for automatic opening and closing
must be reset to function correctly. A reset
is required in order for the pinch protection
to work.
Consult a workshop if you experience any
problems with the panoramic roof.
2
Resetting a power window
1. Start with the window in the closed posi-
tion.
2. Then move the control in manual mode
three times upward toward the closed
position.
> The system will be automatically acti-
vated.
If the problem persists, contact a workshop.
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 160)
•
Operating the power windows (p. 161)
1
Does not apply to windshield and panoramic roof*, which are always laminated and therefore do not have this symbol.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory.

161

Power windows

Every door has a control panel for the power

windows. The driver's door has controls for

operating all windows and for activating the

child safety locks.

Driver's door control panel.

Electric child safety locks* that deactivate

the controls in the rear doors to prevent

the doors or windows from being opened

from the inside.

Rear window controls.

Front window controls.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects can

be trapped by the moving parts.

•

Always operate the windows with cau-

tion.

•

Do not allow children to play with the

operating controls.

•

Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.

•

Remember to always cut the current to

the power windows by setting the

vehicle's electrical system to ignition

mode 0 and then taking the key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

•

Never stick objects or body parts out

through the windows, even if the vehi-

cle electrical system is completely

turned off.

Related information

•

Operating the power windows (p. 161)

•

Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-

tains (p. 160)

•

Reset procedure for pinch protection

(p. 160)

Operating the power windows

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. The control

panels in the other doors can be used to

operate that particular door.

The power windows have pinch protection. If

there is any problem with the pinch protection,

a rest procedure can be tested.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects can

be trapped by the moving parts.

•

Always operate the windows with cau-

tion.

•

Do not allow children to play with the

operating controls.

•

Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.

•

Remember to always cut the current to

the power windows by setting the

vehicle's electrical system to ignition

mode 0 and then taking the key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

•

Never stick objects or body parts out

through the windows, even if the vehi-

cle electrical system is completely

turned off.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
162
Operating the power windows.
Operating manually. Move one of the con-
trols slightly up or down. The power win-
dows go up or down while the control is
held in position.
Operating with automatic controls. Move
one of the controls up or down to its end
position and release it. The window moves
automatically to its fully closed/open posi-
tion.
To use the power windows, the ignition must
be in at least mode I or II. After the ignition
has been switched off, the power windows
can be operated for several minutes or until a
door is opened. Only one control can be oper-
ated at a time.
It can also be operated using keyless opening*
with the door handle.
WARNING
Make sure that no child or other passenger
comes into contact with the windows as
they are closing with keyless closing*.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise heard when the rear windows are
open is to also open the front windows
slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
over approx. 180 km/h (ca 112 mph), but
they can be closed.
The driver is always responsible for follow-
ing applicable traffic regulations.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate the win-
dows in low temperatures.
Related information
•
Power windows (p. 161)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 160)
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 160)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote
key (p. 225)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
163
Rearview/door mirrors
The rearview mirror and door mirrors can be
used to improve the driver's visibility behind
the vehicle.
Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror is equipped with Home-
Link*, auto-dim* and compass*.
The rearview mirror can be adjusted manually.
Door mirrors
WARNING
The door mirror on the passenger side is
curved to improve visibility. Objects in the
mirror may appear farther away than they
actually are.
The joystick in the drivers' door control panel
is used to adjust the position of the door mir-
rors.
There are also several automatic settings that
can also be connected to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.
Related information
•
HomeLink
®
* (p. 421)
•
Compass* (p. 425)
•
Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming
function (p. 163)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 208)
Adjusting the rearview mirror
dimming function
Bright light entering the vehicle from behind,
e.g. from the headlights of following vehicles,
could reflect in the rearview mirror and door
mirrors and cause a glare. Use the dimming
function when light from behind is distract-
ing.
Auto-dim
If bright light enters the vehicle from behind,
the door mirrors will automatically dim when it
is dark outside or when lighting conditions are
low, for example when driving in tunnels.
Auto-dim is always active when the engine is
running, except when reverse gear is engaged.
NOTE
Adjustments to the sensitivity level will not
be noticeable immediately but will instead
take effect after a short period of time.
The sensitivity level for dimming will affect
both the rearview mirror and door mirrors.
To change the dimming sensitivity level:
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap 
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Under 
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.

164

The rearview mirror has two sensors - one

pointing forward and one pointing rearward -

which work together to identify and eliminate

glare. The forward-pointing sensor monitors

ambient light, while the rearward-pointing

sensor monitors light from the headlights of

following vehicles.

For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto-

dim, the rearview mirror must also be equip-

ped with auto-dim.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a

parking permit, transponder, sunshade or

objects on the seats or in the cargo com-

partment in a way that prevents light from

reaching the sensors, the auto-dim func-

tion in the door and rearview mirrors will

be reduced.

Related information

•

Rearview/door mirrors (p. 163)

•

Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164)

Adjusting the door mirrors

To improve visibility to the rear, the door mir-

rors need to be adjusted to the driver's height

and seating position.

There are several automatic settings that can

also be connected to the memory function

buttons for the power seat*.

Controls used for door mirrors

Door mirror controls.

The joystick in the drivers' door control panel

is used to adjust the position of the door mir-

rors. The ignition must be in at least mode I.

1. Press the L button for the left door mirror

or R for the right door mirror. The button

will light up.

2. Adjust the position using the joystick

located between the buttons.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light in

the button will go out.

Automatically folding door mirrors*

The door mirrors can be automatically folded

when driving or parking in tight spaces.

1. Press the L and R buttons at the same

time.

2. Release the buttons after about 1 second.

The mirrors will automatically stop when

they are completely folded in.

Open the mirrors by pressing L and R at the

same time. The mirrors will automatically stop

when they reach the last-used setting.

Resetting the mirrors' position

A mirror that has been moved out of position

manually (e.g. hit or bumped into) must be

electrically returned to its original position for

automatic folding* to function properly.

1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and R

buttons at the same time.

2. Open them again by pressing the L and R

buttons at the same time.

3. Repeat the above procedure as needed.

The mirrors return to their original positions.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory.

165

Tilting when parking

The door mirrors can be tilted down to help

give the driver a better view along the sides of

the vehicle, e.g. of the curb when parking.

–

Select reverse gear and press the L or R

mirror button.

Please note that the button may need to be

pressed twice depending on settings. When

the door mirror is tilted down, the light in the

button will flash. When reverse gear is

engaged, the door mirrors will automatically

start to move after 3 seconds and will reach

their original position after about 8 seconds.

Automatically tilting when parking

With this setting, the door mirrors will auto-

matically tilt down when reverse gear is

engaged. The folded position is preset and

cannot be adjusted.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

Under

Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,

select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to

activate/deactivate and to select which

mirror to tilt.

To immediately return the door mirrors to their

original position, press the L or R button

twice.

Automatic folding when the vehicle is

locked*

In the center display, you can set the door mir-

rors to retract/extend automatically when the

vehicle is locked/unlocked with the key.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

Select

Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-

vate/deactivate.

NOTE

If the door mirrors are folded in manually

using the L and R buttons and then the

vehicle is locked, the mirrors will not auto-

matically fold out when the vehicle is

unlocked, even if this preference has been

set. In this case, the mirrors must be folded

out manually.

Related information

•

Rearview/door mirrors (p. 163)

•

Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming

function (p. 163)

•

Storing positions for seats and mirrors

(p. 180)

•

Activating and deactivating the heated

rear window and door mirrors (p. 208)

Panoramic roof*

The panoramic roof is divided into two glass

sections. The front section can be opened

vertically at the rear edge (ventilation posi-

tion) or horizontally (open position). The rear

section cannot be moved.

The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and

sun curtain made of perforated fabric (located

beneath the glass sections) for extra protec-

tion in e.g. bright sunlight.

The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper-

ated using the controls in the ceiling.

To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur-

tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II.

Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons*.

||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
166
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects can
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
operating controls.
•
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
•
Remember to always cut the current to
the power windows by setting the
vehicle's electrical system to ignition
mode 0 and then taking the key with
you when leaving the vehicle.
•
Never stick objects or body parts out
through the windows, even if the vehi-
cle electrical system is completely
turned off.
CAUTION
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are installed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the pan-
oramic roof.
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Be careful not to
scratch any surfaces or damage the
trim.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
is frozen in place.
Wind blocker
The panoramic roof is equipped with a wind
blocker that folds up when the roof is open.
Related information
•
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 167)
•
Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur-
tain (p. 169)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 160)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote
key (p. 225)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory.

167

Operating the panoramic roof*

The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper-

ated using a control in the ceiling panel, and

both are equipped with pinch protection.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects can

be trapped by the moving parts.

•

Always operate the windows with cau-

tion.

•

Do not allow children to play with the

operating controls.

•

Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.

•

Remember to always cut the current to

the power windows by setting the

vehicle's electrical system to ignition

mode 0 and then taking the key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

•

Never stick objects or body parts out

through the windows, even if the vehi-

cle electrical system is completely

turned off.

CAUTION

•

Do not open the panoramic roof when

load carriers are installed.

•

Never place heavy objects on the pan-

oramic roof.

CAUTION

•

Remove ice and snow before opening

the panoramic roof. Be careful not to

scratch any surfaces or damage the

trim.

•

Do not operate the panoramic roof if it

is frozen in place.

To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur-

tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II.

It can also be operated using keyless opening*

with the door handle.

WARNING

Make sure that no child or other passenger

comes into contact with the windows as

they are closing with keyless closing*.

CAUTION

Check that the panoramic roof is properly

closed when closing.

The movement of the roof will stop if the con-

trol is released during manual operation or

when the glass has reached the comfort

fully open/closed position. The movement of

both the panoramic roof and the sun curtain is

also stopped if the control in the ceiling is

operated again in the direction opposite that

of the current direction of movement.

The panoramic roof and sun curtain are also

equipped with pinch protection. If there is any

problem with the pinch protection, a rest pro-

cedure can be tested.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun curtain must

be completely open before the panoramic

roof can be opened. For the reverse proce-

dure, the panoramic roof must be com-

pletely closed before the sun curtain can

be completely closed.

NOTE

It may not be possible to operate the win-

dows in low temperatures.

The comfort position is a position which helps keep wind and resonance sounds to a comfortably low level.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.

168

Opening and closing ventilation

position

Ventilation position, rear edge raised.

Open by pushing the control upward

once.

Close by pushing the control downward

once.

When ventilation mode is selected, the rear

edge of the front section of the roof is raised.

If the sun curtain is fully closed when ventila-

tion position is selected, it will automatically

open approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).

If the panoramic roof is closed from the venti-

lation position, the sun curtain will also auto-

matically close.

Fully opening and closing the

panoramic roof with the control in the

ceiling

Operation, manual mode

Operation, automatic mode

Manual operation

1. To open the sun curtain, pull the control

backward to the manual open mode.

2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort

position, pull the control backward a sec-

ond time to the manual opening position.

3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the

control backward a third time to the man-

ual opening position.

Close by repeating the above procedure in

reverse - push the control forward/down to

the manual closing position.

Auto operation

1. To open the sun curtain to the fully open

position, pull the control backward to the

auto open mode and release.

2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort

position, pull the control backward a sec-

ond time to the automatic opening posi-

tion and release.

3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the

control backward a third time to the auto-

matic opening position and release.

Close by repeating the above procedure in

reverse - push the control forward/down to

the auto close position.

Automatic operation - rapid opening or

closing

The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be

opened or closed simultaneously:

–

Open - press the control backward twice

to the automatic operation position and

release.

–

Close - press the control forward/down

twice to the automatic operation position

and release.

Related information

•

Panoramic roof* (p. 165)

•

Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur-

tain (p. 169)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
169
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 160)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote
key (p. 225)
Auto closing the panoramic roof*
sun curtain
With this function, the sun curtain closes
automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has
been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This
is done to lower the passenger compartment
temperature and protect the upholstery
against being bleached by the sun.
The function is deactivated as the default fac-
tory setting and can be activated or deacti-
vated using the center display.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap 
My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun curtain also closes when all win-
dows are closed with keyless closing*.
Related information
•
Panoramic roof* (p. 165)
•
Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 167)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun cur-
tains (p. 160)
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote
key (p. 225)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
170
Wiper blades and washer fluid
The wipers and the washer fluid are designed
to improve visibility and the headlight pat-
tern.
The washer nozzles are heated* automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.
When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
washer fluid remaining, a message to refill will
appear in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
Using the windshield wipers
The windshield wipers are designed to clean
the windshield. The right-side steering wheel
lever is used to adjust windshield wiper set-
tings.
Right-hand steering wheel lever.
The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen-
sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed.
Single sweep
Move the lever down and release for a
single sweep.
Wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to turn off
the windshield wipers.
Interval wipers
Move the lever upward to put the wip-
ers in interval wiping mode. Set the
number of sweeps per time unit with the
thumb wheel when interval wipers are
selected.
Continuous wipers
Move the lever upward for the wipers
to operate at normal speed.
Move the lever upward again for the
wipers to operate at high speed.
CAUTION
Before activating the wipers, make sure
that the wiper blades are not frozen in
place and that any snow or ice on the
windshield and rear window has been
scraped away.
CAUTION
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
clean the windshield. The windshield must
be wet when the windshield wipers are
working.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
171
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
Using the rain sensor
The rain sensor monitors the amount of water
on the windshield and automatically starts
the windshield wipers. Rain sensor sensitivity
can be adjusted using the thumb wheel on
the right-hand steering wheel lever.
Right-hand steering wheel lever.
Rain sensor button
Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper
speed
When the rain sensor is activated, the 
rain sensor symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel.
Activating the rain sensor
When the rain sensor is activated, the engine
must be running or the ignition in mode I or II
while the windshield wiper lever is in position
0 or in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button 
.
Move the lever downward for an extra wiper
sweep.
Turn the thumb wheel upward for increased
sensitivity and downward for decreased sensi-
tivity. The wipers will make one extra sweep
when the thumb wheel is turned upward.
Deactivate the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
 rain sensor button or moving the lever
upward to another wiper mode.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in
ignition mode 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
The rain sensor is also automatically deacti-
vated when the wiper blades are put in the
service position. The rain sensor will reactivate
when service mode is switched off.
CAUTION
The windshield wipers may start inadver-
tently and be damaged in automatic car
washes. Deactivate the rain sensor when
the engine is running or when the ignition
is in mode I or II. The symbol in the instru-
ment panel will go out.

||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
172
Related information
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
Activating and deactivating the
rain sensor's memory function
The rain sensor monitors the amount of water
on the windshield and automatically starts
the windshield wipers.
When the memory function is activated, the
rain sensor button does not need to be
pressed every time the vehicle is started:
1.
Tap 
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap 
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select 
Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
173
Using the windshield and
headlight washers
The windshield and headlight washers are
designed to clean the windshield and head-
lights. Use the right-side steering wheel lever
to start the windshield and headlight wash-
ers.
Starting the windshield and headlight
washers
Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever.
–
Move the right-hand steering wheel lever
toward the steering wheel to start the
windshield and headlight washers.
> After the lever is released, the wipers
make several extra sweeps.
CAUTION
Avoid activating the washer system when
it is frozen or the fluid reservoir is empty.
Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the
pump.
Headlight washer*
To save washer fluid, the headlights are
washed automatically according to a defined
interval when the headlights are on.
Reduced washing
When there is about 1 liter (1 qt) of washer
fluid left in the reservoir and the 
Washer fluid
Level low, refill message is displayed in the
instrument panel together with the   sym-
bol, the washer fluid supply to the headlights
is cut off. This is to prioritize windshield clean-
ing and visibility through it. The headlights are
only washed if high or low beam is on.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
174
Using the rear window wiper/
washer
The rear window washer/wiper is designed to
clean the rear window. Use the right-side
steering wheel lever to start and control the
wiper/washer.
Activating the rear window wiper/
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped
with overheating protection that switches
off the motor if it becomes overheated. The
rear window wiper can be operated again
after a cooling-down period.
Select   for interval rear window
wiper.
Select   for continuous rear window
wiper.
–
Move the right-side steering wheel lever
forward to wash/wipe the rear window.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
175
Using automatic rear window
wiping when backing up
If reverse gear is engaged while the wind-
shield wipers are on, the rear window wipers
will start. This function is deactivated when a
different gear is selected.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view in the center
display.
2. Tap 
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select 
Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deac-
tivate automatic rear window wiping
when backing up.
If the rear window wipers are already in con-
tinuous wiper mode, no change will be made
when reverse gear is engaged.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
178
Manual front seats
The front seats can be adjusted in a number
of different ways to help enhance your seat-
ing comfort.
Move the seat forward/backing by lifting
the handle and moving the seat to a suita-
ble distance from the steering wheel and
pedals. Check to make sure the seat is
securely locked into place after its setting
has been changed.
Change the length of the seat cushion* by
pulling up the lever and moving the cush-
ion forward/backward.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion* by moving the control up/down.
1
Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the
button up/down/forward/rearward.
Raise/lower the seat by moving the lever
up/down.
Change the backrest tilt by turning the
knob on the backrest.
The head restraint can be adjusted up or
down by pressing the button and manually
moving the head restraint to the desired
position.
WARNING
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rear-
ward as comfort and control allow.
•
Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Related information
•
Power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 181)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 182)
1
Only applies to the driver's seat.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
179
Power* front seats
The front seats can be adjusted in a number
of different ways to help enhance your seat-
ing comfort. The power seat can be moved
forward/backward and up/down. The front
edge of the seat cushion can be raised/
lowered and the tilt of the backrest can be
adjusted. Lumbar support* can be adjusted
up/down/forward/rearward. The length of the
seat cushion can be adjusted manually*.
The seats can be adjusted when the engine is
running and for a certain period of time after
the door has been unlocked without the
engine running. They can also be adjusted for
a short period after the engine is turned off.
CAUTION
The power seats have an overload protec-
tor that is triggered if a seat is blocked by
any object. If this occurs, remove the
object and attempt to adjust the seat
again.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 178)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 181)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 182)
Adjusting the power* front seats
Set the desired seating position using the
controls on the front seat cushion. Activate
lumbar support* by pressing the four-way
control.
Activate and use the lumbar support con-
trol by pressing the four-way control
upwards/downwards/forwards/back-
wards.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion by moving the control up/down.
Raise/lower the seat by moving the con-
trol up/down.
Move the seat forward/rearward by mov-
ing the control forward/rearward.
Change the backrest tilt by moving the
control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/rearward/up/
down) can be performed at a time.

||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
180
The front seat backrests cannot be folded
down completely.
The head restraint can be adjusted up or
down by pressing the button and manually
moving the head restraint to the desired
position.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 178)
•
Power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 181)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 182)
Storing positions for seats and
mirrors
Adjustment settings for the power* seat and
door mirrors can be stored in the memory
buttons.
Two different positions for the power* seat
and the door mirrors can be stored using the
memory buttons. The buttons are located on
the inside of either one or both* front doors.
Button M for storing a setting.
Memory button.
Memory button.
Storing positions
1. Adjust the seat and door mirrors to the
desired position.
2. Press and hold the M button. The indica-
tor light in the button will illuminate.
3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in
the memory button, an audio signal will
sound and the indicator light in the M
button will go out.
If none of the memory buttons are pressed
within three seconds, the M button will go out
and no position will be stored.
The seats or door mirrors must be readjusted
before a new memory position can be set.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 178)
•
Power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 181)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
181
Using stored positions for seats
and mirrors
If the positions for the power* seat and door
mirrors have been stored, they can be acti-
vated using the memory buttons.
Using a stored position
A stored position can be used with the front
door open or closed:
Front door open
–
Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1
(
) or 2 ( ). The power seats and door
mirrors will move and stop at the positions
stored in that button.
Front door closed
–
Press and hold one of the memory buttons
(1 (
) or 2 ( ) until the seat and door
mirrors stop in the positions stored in that
memory button.
If the memory button is released, the seat and
door mirrors will stop moving.
WARNING
•
This list point needs to be translated
exactly to: "Because the driver's seat
can be adjusted with the ignition off,
children should never be left unatten-
ded in the vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOP-
PED at any time by pressing any but-
ton on the power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
•
The seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rear-
ward as comfort and control allow.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 178)
•
Power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 182)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
182
Adjusting* front seat cushion
length
The length of the seat cushion can be
adjusted to increase comfort.
Control for adjusting seat cushion.
1.
Grasp the   handle on the front of the
seat and pull upward.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure the
seat cushion locks into position.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 178)
•
Power
*
 front seats (p. 179)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 181)
•
Adjusting front seat lumbar support*
(p. 182)
Adjusting front seat lumbar
support*
Use the control on the side of the seat cush-
ion to adjust the lumbar support.
The four-way button is located on the side of the seat
cushion.
Four-way lumbar support is adjusted using the
four-way button (the round one) located on
the side of the seat cushion. The lumbar sup-
port can be adjusted forward/backward and
up/down.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
183
Adjusting lumbar support
•
Press the four-way button up 
/down 
to move the lumbar support upward/
downward.
•
Press the front part 
 of the four-way
button to increase lumbar support.
•
Press the rear part 
 of the four-way but-
ton to decrease lumbar support.
Related information
•
Manual front seats (p. 178)
•
Power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)
•
Storing positions for seats and mirrors
(p. 180)
•
Using stored positions for seats and mir-
rors (p. 181)
•
Adjusting* front seat cushion length
(p. 182)
Folding down the rear seat
backrests
The rear seat backrest is split into two sec-
tions. The two sections can be folded forward
individually.
WARNING
•
Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into
position before driving. Use caution
when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled
or careless adjustments could lead to
injury.
•
Long objects must always be securely
tied down to help prevent injury or
damage in the event of sudden brak-
ing.
•
Always turn off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading or
unloading the vehicle.
•
Put the gear selector in P to help pre-
vent the gear selector from being inad-
vertently moved.
CAUTION
When the backrest is folded down, make
sure there are no objects in the rear seat,
and the seat belts are not buckled. Other-
wise there is a risk of damage to the
upholstery.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.

184

CAUTION

The armrest* in the center seat must be

raised before the seat backrest is folded

down.

The ski hatch* must be closed before the

seat backrest is folded down.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for-

ward and/or the backrest adjusted so that

the rear seat backrests can be fully low-

ered.

Folding down the backrests

The vehicle must be stationary and at least

one of the rear doors must be open before a

backrest can be folded down.

Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied

and that there are no objects on the seat.

Push down the center seat's head

restraint manually.

Pull the handle in the vehicle's left or right

rear seat backrest forward to fold down

the left or right section of the rear seat.

3. The backrest lock will release and the

backrest will automatically fold down to

the horizontal position.

Folding up the backrest

To fold up the backrest to the upright position

manually:

1. Move the backrest upward/rearward.

2. Press the backrest until it locks into posi-

tion.

3. Fold up the head restraints manually.

4. Adjust the center head restraint if neces-

sary.

WARNING

When the backrest is restored to an

upright position, the red indicator should

no longer be visible. If it is still visible, the

backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Make sure that the rear seat backrest and

head restraint are locked securely in place

after the seat is folded up.

The head restraints at the outer seats must

always be raised when there is a passenger

in one of these spots of the rear seat.

Related information

•

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

(p. 185)

•

Private Locking (p. 248)

•

Activating and deactivating private locking

(p. 249)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory.

185

Adjusting the rear seat head

restraints

Adjust the center head restraint in the rear

seat to the seat occupant's height. Fold down

the outboard head restraints* to improve rear

visibility.

Adjusting the center seat head

restraint

The center head restraint should be adjusted

to suit the passenger's height. The entire back

of the head should be covered if possible.

Manually move the restraint up or down as

needed.

To lower the restraint, push and hold the but-

ton (see illustration) while carefully lowering

the head restraint.

WARNING

The center seat head restraint must be in

its lowest position when the seat is not

occupied. When the center seat is occu-

pied, the head restraint must be correctly

adjusted to the passenger's height, cover-

ing the entire back of the head if possible.

Folding the rear seat outboard head

restraints using the center display*

The outer head restraints can be folded via the

center display's function view. The head

restraint can be folded down when the vehicle

is in ignition mode 0.

Tap the Headrest Fold but-

ton to activate/deactivate

folding.

Manually push the head restraint until it clicks

into position.

WARNING

Do not lower the head restraint if there are

passengers in any of the rear seats.

WARNING

The head restraint must be locked in the

upright position after it has been folded up.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.

186

Related information

•

Folding down the rear seat backrests

(p. 183)

Steering wheel controls and horn

The steering wheel has a horn and controls

for e.g. driver support systems and voice con-

trol.

Steering wheel keypads and paddles*.

Driver support system controls.

Paddle* for manually shifting gears (auto-

matic transmission).

Controls for voice commands, accessing

menus and messages, and handling

phone calls.

Horn

The horn is located in the center of the steering

wheel.

Related information

•

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)

Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Alert* and Pilot Assist.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.

187

Adjusting the steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to various

positions.

The steering wheel's reach and height can be

adjusted.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and ensure it

locks into position before driving. Never

adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Steering wheel adjuster lever.

1. Move the lever forward to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

3. Pull the lever back to lock the steering

wheel into place. If the lever is difficult to

move, press or lift the steering wheel

lightly while pulling the lever.

Related information

•

Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 186)

•

Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179)

•

Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-

tance (p. 254)

CLIMATE CONTROL

CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
190
Climate
The vehicle is equipped with electronic cli-
mate control. The climate system cools, heats
and dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
All of the climate system functions are con-
trolled from the center display and the buttons
on the center console.
Certain rear seat functions can also be con-
trolled from the climate controls* on the rear
of the tunnel console.
NOTE
The climate system can be used to cool
down the media system in the center dis-
play if needed. In these cases, the message
Climate system Cooling the
infotainment system will be shown in the
instrument panel.
Related information
•
Climate zones (p. 190)
•
Climate control sensors (p. 191)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 192)
•
Climate control system voice commands
(p. 192)
•
Parking climate* (p. 212)
•
Air quality (p. 193)
•
Air distribution (p. 196)
•
Climate system controls (p. 201)
Climate zones
The vehicle is divided into climate zones to
make it possible to set different temperatures
for different parts of the passenger compart-
ment.
1-zone climate system
Climate zones with 1-zone climate system.
In 1-zone climate systems, the passenger
compartment temperature is set jointly for the
left and right sides of the vehicle.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

191

2-zone climate system*

Climate zones with 2-zone climate system.

In 2-zone climate systems, the passenger

compartment temperature can be set sepa-

rately for the left and right sides of the vehicle.

Related information

•

Climate (p. 190)

Climate control sensors

The climate system has a number of sensors

to help regulate the climate settings in the

vehicle. Do not cover or block the sensors

with clothing or other objects.

Location of the sensors

Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the

dashboard.

Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror

console.

Ambient temperature sensor - in the right-

side door mirror.

Passenger compartment temperature sen-

sor - near the buttons in the center con-

sole.

On vehicles equipped with the Interior Air

Quality System*, there is also an air quality

sensor in the climate system's air intake.

Related information

•

Climate (p. 190)

•

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

192

Perceived temperature

The climate control system regulates the cli-

mate in the passenger compartment based

on perceived temperature, not actual tem-

perature.

The selected passenger compartment tem-

perature is based on the physical perception of

the current ambient temperature, airflow

speed, humidity, sunlight in the passenger

compartment, etc.

The system has a sunlight sensor that detects

which side of the vehicle the sunlight is shin-

ing on and adjusts the temperature accord-

ingly. This means that the temperature of the

air coming out of the vents may be different

for the left and right sides, even if the tem-

perature setting is the same for both sides.

Related information

•

Climate (p. 190)

Climate control system voice

commands

Voice commands can be used for the climate

control system to e.g. change temperature,

activate seat heating* or change blower

speed.

Tap and say one of the following com-

mands:

•

Climate" - starts a command dialog for

climate controls and provides examples of

commands that can be used.

•

Set temperature to X degrees" - sets

desired temperature.

•

Raise temperature"/"Lower

temperature" - raises/lowers the set tem-

perature.

•

Sync temperature" - synchronizes the

temperature* for all climate zones in the

vehicle with the temperature set for the

driver's side.

•

Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the

desired air vent.

•

Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" -

closes the desired air vent.

•

Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" -

changes blower speed to

Max/Off.

•

Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -

raises/lowers the set blower speed.

•

Turn on auto" - activates automatic cli-

mate control.

•

Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -

activates/deactivates air conditioning.

•

Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -

activates/deactivates air recirculation.

•

Turn on defroster "/"Turn off

defroster" - activates/deactivates win-

dow and door mirror defrosting.

•

Turn on max defroster"/"Turn off max

defroster" - activates/deactivates max

defroster.

•

Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear

defroster" - Activates/deactivates heated

rear window and door mirrors.

•

Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn

steering wheel heat off" - activates/

deactivates heated steering wheel*.

•

Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower

steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the

level of steering wheel heating*.

•

Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"

- activates/deactivates seat heating*.

•

Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -

raises/lowers the level of seat heating*.

Certain markets only.

CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
193
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice
control. If a language supports voice con-
trol, it is marked with a 
 symbol in the
list of available system languages. Read
more about where the information is found
in the section on voice control settings.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 190)
•
Voice Control (p. 138)
•
Use voice recognition (p. 139)
•
Voice control settings (p. 142)
Air quality
The materials used in the passenger compart-
ment and air filtering system have been
selected to ensure a high level of air quality in
the passenger compartment.
Materials used in the passenger
compartment
The materials in the passenger compartment
are designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with asthma or allergies.
The materials have been developed and tested
to reduce dust in the passenger compartment
and make it easier to keep clean.
The mats in both the passenger compartment
and cargo compartment can be easily
removed for cleaning.
Use Volvo-recommended cleaning agents and
car care products to clean the interior.
Air filtering systems
In addition to the passenger compartment air
filter, the vehicle is also equipped with other
air cleaning systems that help you maintain
high air quality in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 190)
•
CleanZone* (p. 194)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196)

CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
194
CleanZone*
The CleanZone function monitors the condi-
tions affecting good air quality in the passen-
ger compartment and indicates whether they
are fulfilled or not.
The indicator is shown in the center dis-
play's Climate view.
The indicator is shown in the climate bar
when Climate view is not open.
If the conditions are not met, the text 
Clean
Zone will be shown in white. When all the
conditions are met, the text will change to
blue.
The following conditions must be met:
•
All doors and tailgate are closed.
•
All side windows and panoramic roof* are
closed.
•
The Interior Air Quality System* is acti-
vated.
•
The blower is activated.
•
Air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
CleanZone does not indicate that the air
quality is good, but only that the conditions
for good air quality have been met.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 193)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196)
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) is a series
of modifications that filters even more allergy
and asthma-inducing substances and other
pollutants from the passenger compartment.
CZIP includes the following:
•
An enhanced function that starts the
blower when the vehicle is unlocked using
the remote key. The blower will then fill
the passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and
switches off automatically after a period of
time or when one of the passenger com-
partment doors is opened. The amount of
time the blower runs gradually decreases
due to reduced need up until the vehicle is
4 years old.
•
The fully automatic Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 193)
•
CleanZone* (p. 194)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)
•
Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

195

Interior Air Quality System*

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully

automatic air quality system that removes

gases and particles to reduce odors and con-

taminants in the passenger compartment.

IAQS is part of the Clean Zone Interior

Package (CZIP) and removes air contaminants

such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitric oxides

and ground-level ozone.

If the system's air quality sensors detect con-

taminants in the outside air, the air intake

closes and air recirculation is activated.

NOTE

To ensure optimal air quality in the passen-

ger compartment, the air quality sensor

should always be engaged.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to

prevent fogging.

In the event of fogging, use the defroster

functions for the windshield, side windows

and rear window.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the air quality

sensor* (p. 195)

•

Air quality (p. 193)

•

CleanZone* (p. 194)

•

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194)

•

Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196)

Activating and deactivating the air

quality sensor*

The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto-

mated Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).

The air quality sensor can be switched on or

off.

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

Tap Climate.

Select

Air Quality Sensor to activate/

deactivate the air quality sensor.

Related information

•

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)

CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
196
Passenger compartment air filter
All air entering the passenger compartment
through the climate control system intake is
filtered.
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
To maintain the high performance of the cli-
mate control system, the filter must be
replaced regularly. Follow Volvo's service
schedule for recommended replacement inter-
vals. When driving in areas with a lot of smog,
dust, etc., the filter may need to be changed
more frequently.
NOTE
There are two types of passenger compart-
ment filters. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is installed.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 193)
•
CleanZone* (p. 194)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)
Air distribution
The climate system distributes incoming air
through a number of vents in the passenger
compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution
When the auto-climate feature is on, air distri-
bution is regulated automatically. Air distribu-
tion can also be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Certain air vents in the vehicle are adjustable,
which means they can be opened/closed and
the direction of the air flow from the vent can
be adjusted.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment.
With 1-zone climate system - four on
dashboard.
2-zone climate system* - two additional
vents on the rear side of the tunnel con-
sole.
NOTE
At low ambient temperatures, no air is dis-
tributed from the adjustable air vent noz-
zles at the rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 190)
•
Adjusting air distribution (p. 197)
•
Opening, closing and directing air vents
(p. 197)
•
Air distribution options (p. 198)

CLIMATE CONTROL

197

Adjusting air distribution

Air distribution can be adjusted manually if

needed.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Air distribution buttons in Climate view.

Air distribution - windshield defrost vents

Air distribution - dashboard and center

console air vents

Air distribution - floor air vents

Tap one or more air distribution buttons to

open/close the airflow for that vent.

> The air distribution changes and the

buttons will light up or go out.

Related information

•

Air distribution (p. 196)

•

Opening, closing and directing air vents

(p. 197)

•

Air distribution options (p. 198)

Opening, closing and directing air

vents

Some of the air vents in the passenger com-

partment can be individually opened, closed

and directed.

Misting can be eliminated by directing the

outer air vents towards the door windows.

Direct the outer air vents into the passenger

compartment to maintain a comfortable tem-

perature in warm weather.

Opening and closing the air vents

–

Turn the knob in the center of the air vent

to open/close airflow from the vent.

When the mark on the knob is vertical, the

airflow is strongest.

Directing air flow

–

Move the lever in the center of the air vent

horizontally or vertically to direct the air-

flow from the vent.

Related information

•

Air distribution (p. 196)

•

Adjusting air distribution (p. 197)

•

Air distribution options (p. 198)

CLIMATE CONTROL

198

Air distribution options

Air distribution can be adjusted manually if

needed. The following options are available.

Air distribution Purpose

If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system will revert to automatic mode.

Main airflow from defroster vents. Some airflow from other

vents.

Helps remove ice and condensation in cold and humid weather

(blower speed should not be set too low).

Main airflow from dashboard vents. Some airflow from other

vents.

Provides effective cooling in warm weather.

Main airflow from floor vents. Some airflow from other vents. Provides heating or cooling in footwell areas.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

199

Air distribution Purpose

Main airflow from defroster and dashboard vents. Some air-

flow from other vents.

Provides a comfortable climate in warm and dry weather.

Main airflow from defroster and floor vents. Some airflow from

other vents.

Provides a comfortable climate and effective defogging in cold

and humid weather.

Main airflow from dashboard and floor vents. Some airflow

from other vents.

Provides a comfortable climate in sunny, cool weather.

Main airflow from defroster, dashboard and floor vents. Provides balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

CLIMATE CONTROL

200

Related information

•

Air distribution (p. 196)

•

Opening, closing and directing air vents

(p. 197)

•

Adjusting air distribution (p. 197)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

201

Climate system controls

The climate system functions are controlled

from physical buttons on the center console,

the center display, and the climate panel on

the rear side of the tunnel console*.

Physical buttons in the center console

Button for max defroster.

Button for heated rear window and door

mirrors.

Climate bar in the center display

The most common climate system functions

can be controlled from the climate bar.

Climate row with 2-zone climate. Climate row with

1-zone climate has certain differences in terms of

control locations.

Temperature controls for driver and pas-

senger side.

Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver

and front passenger seat, as well as

heated steering wheel*.

Button for opening Climate view. The

graphic in the button shows activated cli-

mate system settings.

Climate view in the center display

Tap the symbol in the center of the

climate bar to open Climate view.

Depending on equipment level, Climate view

may be divided into several tabs. Toggle

between the tabs by swiping the screen to the

left/right or by tapping the desired heading.

With 1-zone climate, the control is located to the right of the center button.

With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.

||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
202
Main climate
In addition to the functions in the climate bar,
other main climate system functions can be
controlled from the 
Main climate tab.
Max, Rear – Controls for defrosting win-
dows and door mirrors.
AC - Air conditioning controls.
Recirc - Air recirculation controls.
Air distribution controls.
Blower control.
AUTO - Automatic climate control.
Parking climate*
Parking climate functions can be controlled
from the 
Parking climate tab.
Climate controls on the rear side of
the tunnel console*
If the vehicle is equipped with heated rear
seats*, there are physical buttons on the rear
side of the tunnel console to control this func-
tion.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 190)
•
Activating and deactivating power front
seats* (p. 203)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seats* (p. 204)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 204)
•
Activating auto climate control (p. 205)
•
Activating and deactivating recirculation
(p. 206)
•
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 207)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 208)
•
Setting the blower speed for the front
seats (p. 209)
•
Synchronize temperature (p. 211)
•
Activating and deactivating air condition-
ing (p. 211)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

203

Activating and deactivating power

front seats*

The seats can be heated for added comfort

for the driver and passengers in cold weather.

1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel

and seat button in the center display's cli-

mate bar to open the controls for steering

wheel and seat heating.

If the vehicle is not equipped with ventila-

ted seats or heated steering wheel (for the

driver's side), the button for seat heating is

directly accessible in the climate bar.

2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to

select one of the four levels:

Off, High,

Medium or Low.

> The level is changed and the set level is

displayed in the button.

WARNING

Heated seats should not be used by people

who have difficulty detecting temperature

increases due to nerve damage or numb-

ness or who for another reason may have

difficulty operating the controls for seat

heating.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

•

Activating and deactivating the heated

front seat* (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating the

heated front seat*

The seats can be heated for added comfort

for the driver and passengers in cold weather.

Seat heating can be set to automatically acti-

vate when the engine is started. When set to

automatically activate, heating will be turned

on at low ambient temperatures.

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

Tap

Climate.

Select

Auto Driver Seat Heating Level

and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level

to activate/deactivate automatic start of

heated driver's and passenger seat.

> An "A" will be displayed next to the rel-

evant seat heating button in the climate

bar when auto start has been activated.

Select

Low, Medium or High to select

level after the function has been activated.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

•

Activating and deactivating power front

seats* (p. 203)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

204

Activating and deactivating the

heated rear seats*

The seats can be heated for added comfort

for the driver and passengers in cold weather.

Activating and deactivating the heated

rear seats from the rear seat

Buttons for seat heating on the rear side of the tun-

nel console.

–

Press repeatedly on the left or right seat

heating buttons on the rear side of the

tunnel console to select one of four levels:

Off, High, Medium or Low.

> The level is changed and the indicator

lights in the button display the level.

WARNING

Heated seats should not be used by people

who have difficulty detecting temperature

increases due to nerve damage or numb-

ness or who for another reason may have

difficulty operating the controls for seat

heating.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

Activating and deactivating the

heated steering wheel*

The steering wheel can be heated for added

comfort in cold weather.

1. Tap the driver's side steering wheel and

seat button in the climate bar in the center

display to open the controls for steering

wheel and seat heating.

If the vehicle is not equipped with heated

or ventilated seats, the button for steering

wheel heating is directly accessible in the

climate bar.

2. Tap the steering wheel heating button

repeatedly to select one of the four levels:

Off, High, Medium or Low.

> The level is changed and the set level is

displayed in the button.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

•

Activating and deactivating automatic

steering wheel heating* (p. 205)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

205

Activating and deactivating

automatic steering wheel heating*

The steering wheel can be heated for added

comfort in cold weather.

Steering wheel heating can be set to automat-

ically activate when the engine is started.

When set to automatically activate, heating

will be turned on at low ambient tempera-

tures.

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

Tap

Climate.

Select

Auto Steering Wheel Heating

Level to activate/deactivate automatic

start of heated steering wheel.

> An "A" will be displayed next to the

heated steering wheel button in the cli-

mate bar when auto start has been

activated.

Select

Low, Medium or High to select

level after the function has been activated.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the heated

steering wheel* (p. 204)

Activating auto climate control

If auto climate control is activated, several cli-

mate system functions are controlled auto-

matically.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Tap or press and hold

AUTO Climate/>

•

Tap - air recirculation, air conditioning

and air distribution are controlled auto-

matically.

•

Press and hold - air recirculation, air

conditioning and air distribution are

controlled automatically. Temperature

and blower speed are changed to

standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and

speed

> Auto climate mode is activated and the

button lights up.

NOTE

It is possible to change the temperature

and blower speed without deactivating

automatic climate control. Automatic cli-

mate control is deactivated when the air

distribution is changed manually or when

the max defroster is activated.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

CLIMATE CONTROL

206

Activating and deactivating

recirculation

The climate system's recirculation function

helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes,

etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com-

partment.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Tap

Recirc.

> Air recirculation is activated/deacti-

vated and the button lights up/goes

out.

CAUTION

If the air in the vehicle is recirculated too

long, there is a risk of fogging on the inside

of the windows.

NOTE

Recirculation cannot be activated when the

max defroster is on.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

•

Activating and deactivating the recircula-

tion timer setting (p. 206)

Activating and deactivating the

recirculation timer setting

The climate system's recirculation function

helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes,

etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com-

partment.

When the recirculation timer is activated, air

recirculation will switch off automatically after

20 minutes.

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

Tap Climate.

Tap

Recirculation Timer to activate/

deactivate the recirculation timer.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating recirculation

(p. 206)

CLIMATE CONTROL

207

Activating and deactivating max

defroster

Max defroster is used to quickly remove con-

densation and ice from windows.

Max defroster deactivates automatic climate

control and air recirculation, activates the air

conditioning, and changes blower speed to

and temperature to HI.

NOTE

The volume increases when the blower

speed is changed to

When max defroster is deactivated, the cli-

mate system reverts to the previous settings.

Activating and deactivating max

defroster from the center console

A button in the center console offers quick

access to the max defroster.

Button in center console.

–

Tap the button.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated

and the button lights up/goes out.

Activating and deactivating max

defroster from the center display

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Tap

Max.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated

and the button lights up/goes out.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

CLIMATE CONTROL

208

Activating and deactivating the

heated rear window and door

mirrors

The heated rear window and door mirrors are

used to quickly remove condensation and ice

from the glass.

Activating and deactivating the heated

rear window and door mirrors from

the center console

A button in the center console offers quick

access to the heated rear window and door

mirrors functions.

Button in center console.

–

Tap the button.

> Heated windows and door mirrors are

activated and the button lights up/goes

out.

Activating and deactivating the heated

rear window and door mirrors from

the center display

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Tap

Rear.

> Heated windows and door mirrors are

activated and the button lights up/goes

out.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

•

Automatically activating and deactivating

the heated rear window and door mirrors

(p. 208)

Automatically activating and

deactivating the heated rear

window and door mirrors

The heated rear window and door mirrors are

used to quickly remove condensation and ice

from the glass.

It is possible to select whether rear window

and door mirror heating should be automati-

cally activated or deactivated when the engine

is started. With automatic start activated,

heating will be activated when there is a risk

of ice or condensation on the windows or mir-

rors. Heating is automatically switched off

when the window or door mirror is sufficiently

warm and the condensation or ice is gone.

Tap

Settings in the Top view in the center

display.

Tap Climate.

Select

Auto Rear Defroster to activate/

deactivate automatic rear window and

door heating.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the heated

rear window and door mirrors (p. 208)

CLIMATE CONTROL

209

Setting the blower speed for the

front seats

The blower can be set to several different

automatically controlled speeds for the front

seat.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Blower control buttons in Climate view.

Tap the desired blower speed:

Off, 1-5 or

Max.

> The blower speed will be changed and

the buttons for the set speed will light

up.

CAUTION

The air conditioning will not engage if the

blower is turned off completely, which may

cause fogging on the inside of the win-

dows.

NOTE

The climate system automatically adapts

airflow as needed within the set blower

speed, which means that airflow speed

may vary slightly within the same blower

speed.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.

CLIMATE CONTROL

210

Setting the temperature for the

front seats

The temperature can be set to the desired

number of degrees for the front seat climate

zones.

Temperature buttons in the climate bar.

1. Tap the left- or right-side temperature but-

tons in the center display's climate bar to

open the control.

Temperature control.

2. Set the temperature by doing one of the

following:

•

dragging the control to the desired

temperature, or

•

tapping

+− to raise/lower the tempera-

ture.

> The temperature will be set and the

button will display the new tempera-

ture.

NOTE

Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by

choosing a higher/lower temperature than

the desired temperature.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.

With 1-zone climate, the temperature button is to the right of the center button.

With 1-zone climate, the control is horizontal instead of vertical.

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

211

Synchronize temperature

The temperature in the different climate

zones of the vehicle can be synchronized

with the temperature set for the driver's side.

Synchronization button on the driver's side tempera-

ture control.

1. Tap the driver's side temperature button in

the center display's climate bar to open

the control.

Tap

Synchronize temperature.

> The temperature for all of the vehicle's

climate zones will be synchronized with

the one set for the driver's side and the

synchronization symbol will be dis-

played next to the temperature button.

Synchronization is stopped with another press

Synchronize temperature or by changing

the temperature setting for a climate zone

other than the driver's.

Related information

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

Activating and deactivating air

conditioning

The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies

incoming air as needed.

When the air conditioning is activated, it will

be switched on and off automatically by the

climate system as needed.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Tap

AC.

> Air conditioning is activated/deacti-

vated and the button lights up/goes

out.

NOTE

For optimal air conditioning function, close

all the side windows and the panoramic

roof*.

Not available with 1-zone climate system.

||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
212
NOTE
The air conditioning cannot be activated
when the fan speed is set to 
Off.
Related information
•
Climate system controls (p. 201)
Parking climate*
Parking climate is an umbrella term for vari-
ous functions that improve the passenger
compartment climate when the vehicle is
parked, e.g. preconditioning.
Parking climate functions are con-
trolled from the 
Parking climate tab
in the center display's Climate view.
Tap the symbol in the center of the
climate bar to open Climate view.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 190)
•
Preconditioning* (p. 212)
•
Climate comfort retaining function*
(p. 216)
•
Parking climate symbols and messages*
(p. 218)
Preconditioning*
Preconditioning is a climate function that, if
possible, attempts to achieve a comfortable
temperature in the passenger compartment
before driving.
Preconditioning can be started immediately or
started at a preset time using a timer.
In warm weather, the climate system venti-
lates the passenger compartment by blowing
air in from outside. The function cannot heat
the passenger compartment.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the vehicle works to reach a
comfortable temperature and not the tem-
perature set in the climate system.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 212)
•
Starting and stopping preconditioning*
(p. 213)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)

CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
213
Starting and stopping
preconditioning*
Preconditioning ventilates the passenger
compartment, if possible, before driving. The
function can be started in the center display
or from a cellular phone.
Starting and stopping from the vehicle
1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate
bar to open Climate view in the center dis-
play.
2.
Select the 
Parking climate tab.
3.
Tap 
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning starts/stops and the
button lights up/goes out.
NOTE
The vehicle doors and windows should be
closed during preconditioning of the pas-
senger compartment.
Starting from app
A device with the Volvo On Call* app can be
used to start preconditioning or check set-
tings. Preconditioning ventilates the passen-
ger compartment by blowing in air from out-
side.
The passenger compartment can also be pre-
conditioned using the Engine Remote Start
(ERS)
9
 function using the Volvo On Call* app.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 212)
•
Preconditioning* (p. 212)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)
Preconditioning timer*
The timer can be set to finish preconditioning
at a predetermined time.
The timer can store up to 8 preset times for
•
a time on a particular date
•
a time on one or more days of the week,
with or without the repeat function.
Related information
•
Preconditioning* (p. 212)
•
Adding and editing timer settings for pre-
conditioning* (p. 214)
•
Activating and deactivating precondition-
ing timer* (p. 215)
•
Deleting preconditioning timer settings*
(p. 215)
9
Certain markets only.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

214

Adding and editing timer settings

for preconditioning*

The preconditioning timer can store up to 8

preset timer settings.

Adding a timer setting

Button for adding a timer setting in the Parking

climate tab in Climate view.

1. Open Climate view in the center display.

Select the

Parking climate tab.

Tap

Add timer.

> A pop-up window will appear.

NOTE

It is not possible to add a time setting if

there are already 8 settings for the timer.

Delete a time setting to be able to add a

new one.

Tap

Date to set a time for a specific date.

Tap Days to set a time for one or more

days of the week.

With

Days: Activate/deactivate the repeat

function by selecting/deselecting the

Repeat weekly checkbox.

With

Date: Select a date for precondition-

ing by scrolling in the date list using the

arrows.

With

Days: Select days of the week for

preconditioning by tapping the buttons for

the days.

6. Set the time at which preconditioning

should be completed by scrolling using

the arrows in the clock.

Tap

Confirm to add a timer setting.

> The timer setting will be added to the

list and activated.

Editing the timer setting

1. Open Climate view in the center display.

Select the

Parking climate tab.

3. Tap the timer setting you would like to

change.

> A pop-up window will appear.

4. To edit a timer setting, follow the proce-

dures described under the heading "Add-

ing a timer setting" above.

Related information

•

Preconditioning* (p. 212)

•

Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)

•

Activating and deactivating precondition-

ing timer* (p. 215)

•

Deleting preconditioning timer settings*

(p. 215)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory.

215

Activating and deactivating

preconditioning timer*

Timer settings in the preconditioning timer

can be activated or deactivated as needed.

Timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in Climate

view.

1. Open Climate view in the center display.

Select the

Parking climate tab.

3. Activate/deactivate a timer setting by tap-

ping the timer button to the right of the

setting.

> The timer is activated/deactivated and

the button lights up/goes out.

Related information

•

Preconditioning* (p. 212)

•

Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)

•

Adding and editing timer settings for pre-

conditioning* (p. 214)

•

Deleting preconditioning timer settings*

(p. 215)

Deleting preconditioning timer

settings*

A preconditioning timer setting that is no

longer needed can be deleted.

The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in

the Parking climate tab in Climate view.

1. Open Climate view in the center display.

Select the

Parking climate tab.

Tap

Edit list.

4. Tap the editing icon to the right in the list.

The icon will change to the text

Delete.

Tap

Delete to confirm.

> The timer setting will be deleted from

the list.

||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
216
Related information
•
Preconditioning* (p. 212)
•
Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)
•
Adding and editing timer settings for pre-
conditioning* (p. 214)
•
Activating and deactivating precondition-
ing timer* (p. 215)
Climate comfort retaining
function*
The climate in the passenger compartment
can be maintained when the vehicle is
parked, e.g. if the engine is turned off but the
driver or passengers remain in the vehicle.
This function can only be direct-started from
the center display.
The function utilizes several of the vehicle's
systems:
•
Residual heat from the engine is used to
help heat the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature.
•
In warm weather, the ventilation system
cools the passenger compartment by
blowing air in from outside.
NOTE
Climate comfort maintenance will be deac-
tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out-
side in order to avoid using residual engine
heat unnecessarily. This function is
intended to be used to maintain climate
comfort when the driver or a passenger
remains in the vehicle after the engine is
turned off.
The climate comfort retaining function is
limited in duration in cold weather depend-
ing on the amount of residual warmth
available.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 212)
•
Starting and switching off the climate
retaining function when parking* (p. 217)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

217

Starting and switching off the

climate retaining function when

parking*

The climate retaining function maintains the

climate settings in the vehicle after the

engine has been switched off. The function

can be activated in the center display.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate

bar to open Climate view in the center dis-

play.

Select the

Parking climate tab.

Tap

Keep climate comfort.

> The climate comfort retaining function

will be activated/deactivated and the

button light will go on/off.

NOTE

Maintained climate comfort is not possible

when there is not sufficient residual engine

heat to maintain the climate settings in the

passenger compartment, or if the outside

temperature is above approximately 20 °C

(68 °F).

NOTE

Climate comfort maintenance will be deac-

tivated if the vehicle is locked from the out-

side in order to avoid using residual engine

heat unnecessarily. This function is

intended to be used to maintain climate

comfort when the driver or a passenger

remains in the vehicle after the engine is

turned off.

The climate comfort retaining function is

limited in duration in cold weather depend-

ing on the amount of residual warmth

available.

Related information

•

Climate comfort retaining function*

(p. 216)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.

218

Parking climate symbols and

messages*

A number of symbols and messages related

to parking climate may be displayed in the

instrument panel.

Messages related to parking climate can also

be displayed in a device that has the Volvo On

Call* app.

Symbol Message Meaning

Parking climate

Service required

Parking climate is not functioning properly. Contact a workshop

to have the system checked as soon as

possible.

Parking climate

Temporarily unavailable

Parking climate is temporarily not functioning properly. If the problem persists, contact a workshop

to have

the system checked.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

Parking climate* (p. 212)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

220

Locking and unlocking

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in

several different ways.

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked

•

using the buttons on the remote key

•

with the detachable key blade (if the bat-

tery in the remote key is discharged)

•

keyless* (Passive Entry), the remote key

must be within range

•

from inside the vehicle using the lock con-

trols in the doors

•

remote door unlocking with Volvo On Call.

There are also several types of remote keys

that can be used.

For vehicles equipped with keyless locking

and unlocking*, a smaller, lighter and button-

less key is provided (Key Tag).

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking using the remote

key (p. 225)

•

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)

•

Locking and unlocking from inside the

vehicle (p. 242)

•

Private Locking (p. 248)

•

Alarm (p. 250)

Lock indication

The turn signals will flash when the vehicle is

locked or unlocked.

Exterior confirmation

Locking

•

The turn signals will flash once and the

door mirrors will fold in

to confirm the

vehicle is locked.

Unlocking

•

The turn signals will flash twice and the

door mirrors will fold out

to confirm the

vehicle is unlocked.

The tailgate, hood and all doors must be

closed for confirmation to be given. If only the

driver's door is closed when the vehicle is

locked

, the vehicle will be locked but the turn

signals will only flash to indicate locking when

all doors and the tailgate and hood have been

closed.

Lock and alarm indicators on the

dashboard

The locks and alarm indicator will display the

status of the locking system:

•

One long flash indicates locking.

•

When the vehicle is locked, this will be

indicated by short, pulsating flashes.

•

Rapid flashing after disabling the alarm

indicates that the alarm has been trig-

gered.

Only vehicles with power folding mirrors.

Does not apply to vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

221

Lock button indicators

Front door

Lock buttons with indicator lights in front door.

Illuminated indicator lights in both front door

lock buttons indicate that all doors are locked.

If any door is opened, the lights in both doors

will go out.

Rear door*

Lock button with indicator light in rear door.

Illuminated indicator lights in each door indi-

cate that that particular door is locked. If any

door is unlocked and opened, the indicator

light in that door will go out. The lights in the

other doors will remain illuminated.

Other indicators

The approach lighting and home safe lighting

functions may be activated when locking and

unlocking.

Related information

•

Lock confirmation settings (p. 221)

•

Locking and unlocking (p. 220)

•

Welcome Light (p. 156)

•

Using home safe lighting (p. 156)

Lock confirmation settings

Settings for how the vehicle confirms locking

and unlocking can be adjusted in the center

display's Settings menu.

To change the locking response settings:

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Locking.

Tap

Visible Locking Feedback to select

when the vehicle should provide a visible

response:

•

Lock

•

Unlock

•

Both

Or turn off the function by marking Off .

4. Select to receive an audible response

when locking the vehicle by marking

Audible Locking Feedback.

To change the settings for folding door mir-

rors* when locking:

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

Select

Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-

vate or deactivate the function.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

222

Related information

•

Lock indication (p. 220)

Remote key

The remote key is used to lock and unlock

doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler door. The

remote key must be in the vehicle in order to

start the engine.

Remote key

, Care Key and button-less key (Key

Tag)*.

The remote key is not physically used to start

the ignition because the vehicle is standard-

equipped with keyless start (Passive Start).

The key only needs to be in the front section of

the passenger compartment.

For vehicles equipped with keyless locking

and unlocking (Passive Entry)*, the engine can

be started with the key anywhere in the vehi-

cle. A smaller, lighter and button-less key (Key

Tag) is also provided.

The remote keys can be linked to different

driver profiles to store personal settings in the

vehicle.

WARNING

The remote key contains a button cell bat-

tery. Keep new and used batteries out of

the reach of children. If batteries are swal-

lowed, they can cause serious injury.

If any damage is detected, e.g. if the bat-

tery cover cannot be closed properly, do

not use the product. Keep defective prod-

ucts out of the reach of children.

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

223

Remote key buttons

The remote key has four buttons, one on the left side

and three on the right.

Locking - Press once to lock the doors,

tailgate and fuel filler door and arm the

alarm.

Press and hold to close all windows.

Unlocking - Press once to unlock the

doors, tailgate and fuel filler door and dis-

arm the alarm.

Press and hold to open all windows at the

same time. This total airing function can

be used to e.g. quickly air out the vehicle

in hot weather.

Tailgate - Unlock and disarm the tailgate

only. On vehicles equipped with the power

tailgate*, press and hold to automatically

open the tailgate. Press and hold to close

an open tailgate (an audible warning sig-

nal will be given).

Panic alarm - Used to attract attention in

emergency situations. Press and hold the

button for at least 3 seconds or press

twice within 3 seconds to activate the

turn signals and horn. To deactivate, wait

at least 5 seconds and press the button

again. If no action is taken, the panic alarm

will deactivate automatically after 3

minutes.

WARNING

If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure

that power to the power windows and pan-

oramic roof* is cut off by always taking the

remote key with you when you leave the

vehicle.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote

key in the vehicle.

•

If the remote key or key tag is left in

the vehicle, it will be deactivated when

the vehicle is locked and the alarm set

using another valid key. The key will be

reactivated when the vehicle is

unlocked.

•

If the remote key or Care Key is left in

the vehicle, it will be deactivated even

if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On

Call, and will be reactivated when the

vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call

or another valid key.

Button-less key (Key Tag)*

The button-less key

provided with the keyless

locking and unlocking function works in the

same way as the regular remote key for key-

less start, locking and unlocking. The key is

waterproof up to a depth of approx. 10 meters

(30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It does not

have a detachable key blade and its battery

cannot be replaced.

Care Key - restricted remote key

A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a

maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This limit

Also called sport key.

||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
224
is intended to promote safe use of the vehicle,
e.g. when it is loaned out.
Interference
Electromagnetic fields or obstructing objects
may interfere with the remote key's functions
for keyless start and keyless locking and
unlocking*.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote key near metal
objects or electronic devices, e.g. cell
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers – pref-
erably no closer than 1015 cm (46 in.).
If you experience interference, use the remote
key's detachable blade to unlock the vehicle
and then place the remote key in the backup
reader in the tunnel console storage compart-
ment to disarm the alarm and start the vehicle.
NOTE
When the remote key is placed in the
backup reader in the storage compart-
ment, make sure that no other vehicle
keys, metal objects or electronic devices
(e.g. cellular phones, tablets, laptops or
chargers) are also placed there. Multiple
vehicle keys close to each other in the stor-
age compartment can disrupt their func-
tionality.
WARNING
California Proposition 65
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-
cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-
oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 370)
•
Locking and unlocking using the remote
key (p. 225)
•
Remote key range (p. 227)
•
Replacing the remote key's battery
(p. 228)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 233)
•
Care Key – restricted remote key (p. 232)
•
Electronic immobilizer (p. 236)
•
Linking a remote key to a driver profile
(p. 134)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

225

Locking and unlocking using the

remote key

All doors, tailgate and fuel filler door can be

locked and unlocked simultaneously using

the buttons on the remote key.

Locking with remote key

The illustration is generic - details may vary accord-

ing to vehicle model.

–

Press the button on the remote key to

lock the vehicle.

To activate the locking sequence, the driver's

door must be closed

. If any of the other doors

or the tailgate are open, they will be locked

and the alarm will be armed once they are

closed.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote

key in the vehicle.

•

If the remote key or key tag is left in

the vehicle, it will be deactivated when

the vehicle is locked and the alarm set

using another valid key. The key will be

reactivated when the vehicle is

unlocked.

•

If the remote key or Care Key is left in

the vehicle, it will be deactivated even

if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On

Call, and will be reactivated when the

vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call

or another valid key.

Locking when the tailgate is open

NOTE

If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is

still open, make sure that the remote key is

not left in the cargo compartment when

the tailgate is closed and the entire vehicle

is locked

Unlocking with remote key

–

Press the button on the remote key to

unlock the vehicle.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or tailgate are opened

within two minutes after being unlocked, they

will automatically relock. This function reduces

the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle

unlocked.

Remote key not working

NOTE

Move closer to the vehicle and try to

unlock it again.

If the remote key is not working to lock or

unlock the vehicle, its battery may be dis-

charged. Use the detachable key blade to

lock/unlock the driver's door instead.

Related information

•

Settings for remote and inside door unlock

(p. 226)

•

Unlocking the tailgate using the remote

key (p. 226)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, all side doors must be closed.

If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

226

•

Replacing the remote key's battery

(p. 228)

•

Locking and unlocking with detachable

key blade (p. 234)

Settings for remote and inside

door unlock

Several different sequences are available for

remote unlocking.

To change this setting:

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Locking Remote and

Interior Unlock

3. Select alternative:

•

All Doors – unlocks all doors at the

same time.

•

Single Door – unlocks the driver's

door. Press the remote key unlock but-

ton twice to unlock all doors.

The settings made here also affect central

locking using the inside door handle.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking using the remote

key (p. 225)

•

Locking and unlocking from inside the

vehicle (p. 242)

Unlocking the tailgate using the

remote key

The remote key can be used to unlock the

tailgate while keeping the rest of the vehicle

locked.

Press the button on the remote key.

> The tailgate will be unlocked but remain

closed.

The side doors remain locked and

armed. The lock and alarm indicator on

the dashboard will go out to indicate

that the vehicle is no longer fully

locked.

Press lightly on the rubberized pressure

plate under the tailgate handle to open

the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened

within 2 minutes, it will be relocked and

the alarm armed.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

227

With the optional power tailgate* -

Hold and press (about 1.5 seconds) the

button on the remote key

> The tailgate will unlock and open. How-

ever, the side doors will remain locked

and armed.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking using the remote

key (p. 225)

Remote key range

In order to function correctly, the remote key

must be within a certain distance from the

vehicle.

Manual use

The remote key's functions for e.g. locking and

unlocking, which are activated by pressing

or , have a range of approx. 20 meters

(65 feet) from the vehicle.

If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer

and try again.

Keyless* use

For keyless use, a remote key or the Key Tag

must be within the shaded areas shown in the

illustration, i.e. a semicircle with a radius of

approx. 1.5 meter (5 feet) along the sides of

the vehicle or approx. 1 meter (3 feet) from the

tailgate.

NOTE

The functions of the remote control key

can be disrupted by ambient radio waves,

buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

The vehicle can always be locked/unlocked

using the key blade.

If the remote key is removed from the

vehicle

If the remote key is removed from

the vehicle while the engine is run-

ning, the warning message

Vehicle

key not found Removed from

vehicle will be displayed in the instrument

panel and an audible signal will sound when

the last door is closed.

The message will disappear when the key is

returned to the vehicle and the O button on

the right-side steering wheel keypad is

pressed or when the last door is closed again.

Related information

•

Remote key (p. 222)

•

Antenna locations for the start and lock

system (p. 241)

•

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*

(p. 238)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

228

Replacing the remote key's battery

The battery in the remote key must be

replaced when it is discharged.

NOTE

All batteries have a limited service life and

must eventually be replaced (does not

apply for Key Tag). The battery's service life

varies depending on how often the

vehicle/key is used.

The remote key battery should be replaced if

•

the information symbol illuminates and the

message

Vehicle key bat. low is dis-

played in the instrument panel

•

the locks do not react after several

attempts to lock or unlock the vehicle

using the remote key within approx.

20 meter (65 feet) from the vehicle.

NOTE

Move closer to the vehicle and try to

unlock it again.

The battery in the smaller key without but-

tons

(the Key Tag) cannot be replaced. A new

key can be ordered from an authorized Volvo

workshop.

CAUTION

An end-of-life Key Tag must be turned in to

an authorized Volvo workshop. The key

must be deleted from the vehicle because

it can still be used to start the vehicle via

backup start.

Opening the key and replacing the

battery

Hold the remote key with the front side

(with the Volvo logo) facing up and move

the button on the key ring section to the

right. Slide the front cover slightly upward.

The cover will loosen and can be

removed from the key.

Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

229

Turn the key over, move the button to

the side and slide the rear cover slightly

upward.

The cover will loosen and can be

removed from the key.

Use a screwdriver or similar object to turn

the battery cover counterclockwise so the

markers point to OPEN.

Remove the cover carefully by pressing

e.g. a fingernail into the indentation.

Pry the cover up.

The battery's positive side (+) faces

upward. Carefully pry out the battery as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Avoid touching new batteries and their

contact surfaces with your fingers as this

will impair their function.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

230

Insert a new battery with the positive side

(+) facing upward. Do not touch the con-

tact surfaces of the remote key battery.

Place the edge of the battery down-

ward into the holder. Slide the battery for-

ward until it locks into place under the two

plastic catches.

Press the battery downward until it

locks into place under the upper black

plastic catch.

NOTE

Use batteries with the designation

CR2032, 3 V.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that batteries used in

the remote control key satisfy UN Manual

of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section

38.3. The factory installed batteries and

batteries replaced by an authorized Volvo

workshop satisfy the above criterion.

Replace the battery cover and turn it

clockwise until it points to CLOSE.

Put the rear cover back into position

and press it down until it clicks into place.

Slide the cover back.

> A second click indicates that the cover

is correctly positioned and locked into

place.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

231

Turn the remote key over and press the

front cover down until it clicks into place.

Slide the cover back.

> An additional click indicates that the

cover is correctly in place.

WARNING

Make sure the battery is positioned cor-

rectly with the right polarity. If the remote

key will not be used for a prolonged period

of time, remove the battery to avoid battery

leakage and damage. Wear protective

gloves when handling damaged batteries,

as batteries that are damaged or leaking

can cause corrosive damage in contact

with the skin.

•

Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-

dren.

•

Do not leave batteries lying out where

they could be swallowed by children or

pets.

•

Never disassemble, short-circuit or

place a battery into open fire.

•

Do not charge non-rechargeable bat-

teries, as this could cause an explosion.

Check the remote key for damage before

using it. If any damage is detected, e.g. if

the battery cover cannot be closed prop-

erly, do not use the product. Keep defec-

tive products out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Be sure to dispose of end-of-life batteries

in a way that protects the environment.

WARNING

California Proposition 65

Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-

senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-

cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-

oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine

except as necessary, service your vehicle in

a well ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-

vehicle.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking with detachable

key blade (p. 234)

•

Starting the vehicle (p. 370)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

232

Ordering additional remote keys

Two remote keys are provided with the vehi-

cle. One Key Tag is also included if the vehi-

cle is equipped with keyless locking/unlock-

ing*. Additional keys can be ordered.

A total of 12 keys can be programmed and

used for the same vehicle. An additional driver

profile will be added for each new remote key.

This also applies to the key tag.

Loss of a remote key

If you lose your remote key, you can order a

replacement from a workshop - an authorized

Volvo workshop is recommended. Bring the

other remaining remote keys to the workshop.

As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost

remote key must be erased from the system.

The current number of keys registered for the

vehicle can be checked via driver profiles in

the center display's Top view. Select Settings

System Driver Profiles.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you order a new or

duplicate remote key from an authorized

Volvo workshop.

You can also obtain additional or duplicate

remote keys from certain independent

repair facilities and locksmiths that are

qualified to make remote keys. Each key

must be programmed to work with your

vehicle.

A list of independent repair facilities and/or

locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut

and code replacement keys can be found:

•

at volvocars.com

•

by calling Volvo Customer Care

18004581552.

Related information

•

Remote key (p. 222)

Care Key – restricted remote key

A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a

maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This

limit is intended to promote safe use of the

vehicle, e.g. when it is loaned out.

A maximum vehicle speed can be defined for a

Care Key. Otherwise, the Red Key functions in

the same way as a standard remote key.

This restriction is intended to help reduce the

risk of accidents and help the driver feel more

secure when handing over the vehicle to e.g. a

young driver, parking attendant or workshop.

Ordering a Care Key

One or more Care Key can be ordered from a

Volvo retailer. A total of twelve keys can be

programmed and used for the same vehicle.

Up to ten may be restricted keys, but at least

two must be standard remote keys.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

233

Care Key limitations

The key is linked to a specific Care Key driver

profile, and when it is active the key's settings

cannot be changed. It is also not possible to

switch to another driver profile, as this

requires a regular remote key.

The driver profile is activated when the vehicle

is unlocked using a Care Key without a regular

remote key nearby.

NOTE

If the vehicle changes owners, the vehicle

must be locked and then unlocked for a

new driver profile to be activated.

Setting options

The following limitations are available:

•

speed range: 50180 km/h (30112 mph)

•

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

Symbol Meaning

Speed limitation is active.

Related information

•

Care Key settings (p. 233)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

Care Key settings

Change maximum speed for a Care Key via

the center display.

1. Unlock the vehicle using a regular remote

key.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

3. Tap

System Driver Profiles Care

Key

4. Adjust desired settings.

Related information

•

Care Key – restricted remote key (p. 232)

Detachable key blade

The remote key contains a detachable metal

key blade that can be used to activate a num-

ber of functions and preform certain actions.

A Volvo workshop can provide you with the

key blade's unique code, which is recom-

mended in case you need to order a new key

blade.

Using the detachable key blade

The detachable key blade can be used to

•

manually open the left-side front door if

central locking cannot be activated with

the remote key

•

emergency lock all doors

•

activate/deactivate the rear door mechani-

cal child locks.

The button-less key

does not have a detacha-

ble key blade. If needed, use the standard

remote key's detachable key blade.

Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

234

Detaching the key blade

Hold the remote key with the front side

(with the Volvo logo) facing up and move

the button on the key ring section to the

right. Slide the front cover slightly upward.

The cover will loosen and can be

removed from the key.

Remove the key blade by pulling it up.

Put the key blade back into its designated

spot in the remote key after use.

Replace the cover by pressing it down

until it clicks into place.

Slide the cover back.

> An additional click indicates that the

cover is correctly in place.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking with detachable

key blade (p. 234)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

Locking and unlocking with

detachable key blade

The detachable key blade can be used to

unlock the vehicle from the outside, e.g. if the

battery in the remote key is discharged.

Unlocking

Pull the front left-hand door handle to its

end position to access the lock cylinder.

Put the key in the lock cylinder.

Turn the key clockwise 45 degrees so that

the key blade is pointing straight rear-

ward.

Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its

original position. Remove the key from the

lock cylinder and release the handle so

that it returns to its original position

against the vehicle.

5. Pull the door handle.

> The door will open.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

235

NOTE

When the door is unlocked using the

detachable key blade and then opened, the

alarm will be triggered. The alarm must be

deactivated manually; see separate sec-

tion.

Locking

The left-hand front door can be locked by

inserting the detachable key into the door's

lock cylinder.

The other doors have lock mechanisms in the

side of the door that must be pushed in using

the key blade. The door will then be locked

mechanically and cannot be opened from the

outside.

The doors can still be opened from inside.

Manual door lock. This is not the child lock.

1. Remove the detachable key blade from

the remote key.

2. Insert the key blade into the opening for

the lock mechanism.

3. Push in the key until it stops, about 12 mm

(0.5 inch).

The door can be opened from both the

outside and the inside.

The door cannot be opened from the out-

side. To return to position A, open the door

using the inside door handle.

NOTE

•

The door's lock controls only lock that

specific door, not all doors simultane-

ously.

•

A manually locked rear door with acti-

vated child lock cannot be opened

from either the outside or the inside.

The door can only be unlocked using

the buttons on the key, the central

locking button, the keyless locking sys-

tem* or Volvo On Call.

Related information

•

Detachable key blade (p. 233)

•

Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 251)

•

Starting the vehicle (p. 370)

•

Replacing the remote key's battery

(p. 228)

•

Remote key (p. 222)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

236

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobilizer is a start inhibitor

that helps prevent the vehicle from being

started by an unauthorized person.

The vehicle can only be started with the right

remote key.

The following instrument panel error mes-

sages are related to the electronic immobil-

izer:

Symbol Message Meaning

Vehicle key

not found

See

Owner's

manual

Remote key not

recognized during

start. Place the

remote key on the

key symbol in the

storage compart-

ment and try to

start the vehicle

again.

Remote immobilizer with tracking

system

The vehicle is equipped with a system that

makes it possible to track and locate the vehi-

cle and to remotely activate the immobilizer to

prevent the vehicle from being started. Con-

tact your nearest Volvo retailer for more infor-

mation and assistance activating the system.

The following instrument panel error mes-

sages are related to the remote immobilizer

with tracking system:

Symbol Message Meaning

Remotely

immobilised

Vehicle not

possible to

start

The remote

immobilizer with

tracking system

is activated. The

vehicle cannot

be started. Con-

tact Volvo On

Call Service

Center.

Related information

•

Remote key (p. 222)

•

Ordering additional remote keys (p. 232)

Start and lock system type

designations

The following information contains type des-

ignations for the start and lock system.

Alarm system

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

Canada IC: 4405ADA 5823(3)

This device is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Remote keys (Passive Entry*/Passive

Start)

USA

Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGO-

HUF8423MS

Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432MS

Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

237

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Canada

Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008CHUF8423MS

Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008CHUF8432MS

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils

radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est

autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

Immobilizer and Passive Entry*/

Passive Start systems

USAFCC ID: LTQVO3134

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

(2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any changes or modification not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate

this equipment.

Canada-IC:3659AVO3134

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Related information

•

Remote key (p. 222)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

238

Keyless and touch-sensitive

surfaces*

With the keyless locking and unlocking func-

tion, the remote key only needs to be within

range, e.g. in a pocket or bag. The vehicle can

then be locked or unlocked by touching the

pressure-sensitive surface on the door han-

dle.

Pressure-sensitive surfaces

Door handle

There are indentations on the outside of the

outer door handles for locking, and pressure-

sensitive surfaces on the inside of the handles

for unlocking.

Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking

Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking

NOTE

It is important that only one pressure-sen-

sitive surface is activated at a time. If the

handle is grasped at the same time as the

lock area is pressed, there is a risk that

double commands may be sent. This may

cause the requested action (locking/

unlocking) to be delayed or not performed

at all.

Tailgate handle

The tailgate handle has a rubberized pressure

plate that can only be used for unlocking.

NOTE

Please be aware that the system could be

activated in a car wash if the remote key is

within range.

Related information

•

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)

•

Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 240)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

239

Keyless locking and unlocking*

With keyless locking and unlocking, touching

the pressure-sensitive indentation on the

door handle will lock or unlock the vehicle.

NOTE

One of the vehicle's remote keys must be

within range for locking and unlocking to

be possible.

Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking

Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking

NOTE

Please be aware that the system could be

activated in a car wash if the remote key is

within range.

Keyless locking

All of the doors have to be closed before the

vehicle can be locked. However, the tailgate

can be open when a door handle is used for

locking.

–

Touch the marked area on the outside of

one of the door handles after the door is

closed. Or press the

button on the

lower edge of the tailgate before it is

closed.

> The lock indicator light on the dash-

board will flash to confirm that the vehi-

cle is locked.

To close all door windows at the same time -

place your finger on the pressure-sensitive

indentation on the outside of the door handle

and hold it there until the side windows have

closed.

Locking when the tailgate is open

If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still

open, make sure that the remote key is not left

in the cargo compartment when the tailgate is

closed.

NOTE

If the key is detected in the vehicle, the tail-

gate will not lock when it is closed.

Keyless unlocking

–

To unlock, grasp a door handle or lightly

press the rubberized button on the under-

side of the tailgate handle.

> The lock indicator light on the dash-

board will stop flashing to confirm that

the vehicle is unlocked.

The rubberized button on the tailgate can only be

used for unlocking.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or tailgate are opened

within two minutes after being unlocked, they

will automatically relock. This function reduces

the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle

unlocked.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

240

Related information

•

Keyless unlock settings* (p. 240)

•

Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 240)

•

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*

(p. 238)

Keyless unlock settings*

Several different sequences are available for

keyless unlocking.

To change this setting:

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

My Car Locking Keyless

Unlock

3. Select alternative:

•

All Doors – unlocks all doors at the

same time.

•

Single Door – unlocks the selected

door.

Related information

•

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)

•

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*

(p. 238)

Keyless tailgate unlock*

With keyless locking and unlocking, the tail-

gate can be unlocked by lightly touching the

rubberized button on the tailgate handle.

NOTE

One of the vehicle's remote keys must be

within range behind the vehicle for unlock-

ing to be possible.

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic

locking mechanism.

To open:

1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate

on the underside of the tailgate handle.

> The lock will disengage.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
241
2. Lift the outer handle to open the tailgate.
CAUTION
•
Only light pressure on the rubberized
pressure plate is necessary to release
the tailgate's locking mechanism.
•
Use the handle to lift the tailgate and do
not apply force to the rubberized pres-
sure plate. Too much force can damage
the pressure plate's electrical connec-
tions.
Hands-free unlocking of the tailgate is also
possible using a foot movement under the rear
bumper; see the separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehi-
cle through the cargo compartment.
Related information
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 238)
•
Remote key range (p. 227)
•
Operating the tailgate with a foot move-
ment* (p. 247)
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
The antennas for the keyless start system and
keyless locking system* are integrated in the
vehicle.
Location of the antennas:
In the storage compartment in the tunnel
console
In the upper front section of the left-side
rear door
10
In the upper front section of the right-side
rear door
10
In the cargo compartment
10
WARNING
Individuals with an implanted pacemaker
should not allow the pacemaker to come
closer than 22 cm (9 in.) to the Keyless
system antennas. The aim of this is to pre-
vent disturbances between the pacemaker
and the Keyless system.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 238)
•
Remote key range (p. 227)
10
Only in vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

242

Locking and unlocking from inside

the vehicle

The doors and tailgate can be locked and

unlocked from inside the vehicle using the

central lock buttons in the front doors.

Central locking

Button with indicator light for locking and unlocking

in front door.

Unlocking using the front door buttons

–

Press the button to unlock all side

doors and the tailgate.

Alternative unlocking method

Alternative unlocking method using side door open-

ing handle

–

Pull either of the side door inside opening

handles and release.

> Depending on the remote key settings,

either all doors will be unlocked or just

the selected door will be unlocked and

opened.

To change this setting, tap

Settings

My Car Locking Remote and

Interior Unlock

in the Top view of the

center display.

Locking using the front door buttons

–

Press the button (both front doors

must be closed).

> All doors and the tailgate will lock.

Locking using the rear door button*

Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in

rear door.

The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock

that particular door.

Unlocking the rear door

1. Pull the opening handle to unlock the rear

door.

2. Pull the opening handle again to open the

rear door

The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

If the child lock is not activated.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

243

Related information

•

Settings for remote and inside door unlock

(p. 226)

•

Unlocking the tailgate from inside the

vehicle (p. 243)

•

Activating and deactivating child locks

(p. 243)

Unlocking the tailgate from inside

the vehicle

The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside

using the button on the dashboard.

–

Press the button on the dashboard.

> The tailgate will unlock and can be

opened from the outside by pressing

the rubberized button on the handle.

With the optional power tailgate*:

–

Press and hold the button on the

dashboard.

> The tailgate will open.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking from inside the

vehicle (p. 242)

Activating and deactivating child

locks

The child locks help prevent the rear doors

from being able to be opened from the inside.

The child lock can be either manual or elec-

tric*.

Manual child lock

Manual child lock. This is not the manual door lock.

–

Use the detachable key blade in the

remote key to turn the control.

The door cannot be opened from the

inside.

The door can be opened from both the

outside and the inside.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

244

NOTE

•

The door's knob control only locks that

specific door, not both rear doors

simultaneously.

•

There are no manual child locks on

models equipped with electronic child

locks.

Electric child lock*

The electric child lock can be activated and

deactivated in any ignition mode higher than

0. The lock can be activated and deactivated

up to 2 minutes after the ignition is turned off

if no door has been opened.

Button for activation and deactivation.

•

Light on – lock is activated.

•

Light off – lock is deactivated.

When the child lock is activated, the rear:

•

windows can only be opened using the

buttons in the driver's door.

•

the rear doors cannot be opened from the

inside.

If the child lock is activated when the vehicle

is switched off, it will remain activated the

next time the vehicle is started.

Symbols and messages

Symbol Message Meaning

Rear child

lock Acti-

vated

The child lock is

activated.

Rear child

lock Deacti-

vated

The child lock is

deactivated.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking from inside the

vehicle (p. 242)

•

Detachable key blade (p. 233)

Automatic locking when driving

The doors and tailgate will automatically lock

when the vehicle begins to move.

Related information

•

Locking and unlocking from inside the

vehicle (p. 242)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

245

Closing and locking the tailgate

using the buttons*

The buttons on the underside of the tailgate

can be used to close and lock the vehicle

automatically.

Location of button(s) on underside of tailgate.

CAUTION

When operating the tailgate manually,

open and close it slowly. If you encounter

resistance, do not use force. This could

lead to damage and loss of function.

Closing

–

Press the button on the underside of

the tailgate.

> The tailgate will close automatically and

remain unlocked.

NOTE

•

The button remains active 24 hours

after the tailgate was opened. After this

time, the tailgate must be closed man-

ually.

•

If the tailgate has been open for more

than 30 minutes, it will automatically

close slowly.

Locking

Press the button on the underside of

the tailgate.

Close the trunk lid manually.

The tailgate and doors will lock

Closing and locking

–

Press the button on the underside of

the tailgate.

> The tailgate closes automatically and

the vehicle locks

NOTE

•

One of the vehicle's remote keys must

be within range for locking and unlock-

ing to be possible.

•

When the keyless locking or closing*

functions are used, three audible signals

will sound if the key is not detected

close enough to the tailgate.

Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.

Vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking.

All doors must be closed for the vehicle to lock.

Vehicles with keyless locking/unlocking and power-operated tailgate.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

246

Interrupting closing

•

Press the button on the dashboard.

•

Press the button on the remote key.

•

Press the close button on the underside of

the tailgate

•

Press the rubberized pressure plate on the

underside of the tailgate's outer handle.

•

Using a foot movement*.

Tailgate movement is interrupted and stops.

The tailgate can then be opened or closed

manually.

If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it

will open the next time it is activated.

Pinch protection

If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough

force to prevent it from opening or closing,

pinch protection will be activated.

•

When opening - the tailgate will stop

moving and an audible signal will sound.

•

When closing - the tailgate will stop, a

long audible signal will sound and the tail-

gate will return to the programmed maxi-

mum opening position.

WARNING

Be aware of the risk of injury when opening

and closing.

Before opening or closing, make sure that

no one is near the tailgate's range of

motion. Serious injury could occur.

Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Preloaded springs

Preloaded springs for the power tailgate.

WARNING

Do not attempt to open or access the pre-

loaded springs in the power tailgate struts.

They are preloaded with high pressure and

can cause injury if opened.

Related information

•

Setting maximum opening height for the

power tailgate* (p. 247)

•

Operating the tailgate with a foot move-

ment* (p. 247)

•

Remote key range (p. 227)

Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory.

247

Setting maximum opening height

for the power tailgate*

The tailgate can be set to stop opening at a

certain height, for example if the tailgate

needs to be opened in a garage with a low

ceiling.

Setting maximum opening height

1. Open the tailgate manually to the desired

opening height.

Press the

button on the lower edge of

the tailgate and hold it for about

3 seconds.

> Two audio signals will sound to indicate

that the position has been stored.

NOTE

It is not possible to program an opening

position lower than half-open tailgate.

Resetting maximum opening position

1. Open the tailgate manually to the fully

open position.

Press the button on the lower edge of

the tailgate and hold it for about

3 seconds.

> Two audio signals will sound to indicate

that the stored position has been

erased.

NOTE

•

If the system has been working contin-

uously for a prolonged period of time, it

will be switched off to avoid overload.

It can be used again after approxi-

mately 2 minutes.

Operating the tailgate with a foot

movement*

To make it easier to operate the tailgate when

your hands are full, it can be opened and

closed by moving your foot in a forward kick-

ing motion under the rear bumper.

The sensor is located to the left of center under the

rear bumper.

One of the vehicle's remote keys must be

within range behind the vehicle, approx.

1 meter (3 feet), for opening and closing to be

possible. This applies even if the vehicle is

unlocked in order to prevent the trunk lid from

inadvertently opening e.g. at a car wash.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.

248

Foot movement operation

Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area.

–

Make one forward kicking motion with

your foot under the left section of the rear

bumper. Take a step back. Do not touch

the bumper.

> A brief audible signal will be heard

when opening or closing is activated -

the tailgate will open/close.

If several opening attempts have been made

without the remote key in range behind the

vehicle, foot movement operation will not be

available for a short period of time.

Do not keep your foot under the vehicle in a

kicking motion. This may prevent activation.

Interrupting opening or closing with a foot

movement

–

Make one forward kicking motion while

the tailgate is opening or closing to stop

its movement.

The remote key does not need to be within

range of the vehicle to interrupt opening or

closing of the tailgate.

If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it

will open the next time it is activated.

NOTE

There is a risk of reduced or lost function if

there are large amounts of snow, ice, dirt,

etc. on the rear bumper. Make sure to keep

the bumper clean.

NOTE

Please note that the system could be inad-

vertently activated in a car wash or similar

if the remote key is within range.

Related information

•

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*

(p. 238)

•

Remote key range (p. 227)

Private Locking

The tailgate can be locked using the private

locking function to prevent it from being

opened, e.g. when the vehicle is left at a

workshop or with a valet.

The function button for pri-

vate locking is located in the

center display's Function

view. Depending on the cur-

rent status of the lock,

Private Locking Unlocked

or Private Locking Locked

will be displayed.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating private locking

(p. 249)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

249

Activating and deactivating private

locking

Private locking is activated using the function

button in the center display and a PIN code.

NOTE

For the valet lock function to be activated

the car must be in at least ignition mode I.

Two codes are used for private locking:

•

A security code, which is created the first

time the function is used.

•

A PIN code, which is changed each time

the function is activated.

Entering security code before initial

use

The first time the function is used, a security

code must be selected. This code can then be

used to deactivate private locking if the

selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost.

The security code functions as a PUK (secur-

ity) code for all PIN codes used for private

locking.

Save the security code in a safe place.

To create a security code:

1. Tap the button for private locking in Func-

tion view.

> A pop-up window will appear.

2. Enter the desired security code and press

Confirm.

> The security code is saved. The private

locking function is now ready for activa-

tion.

Activating private locking

1. Tap the button for private locking in Func-

tion view.

> A pop-up window will appear.

2. Enter the code you would like to use to

unlock the tailgate and tap

Confirm.

> The tailgate will lock. A green indicator

light will illuminate next to the button in

Function view to confirm locked status.

Deactivating private locking

1. Tap the button for private locking in Func-

tion view.

> A pop-up window will appear.

2. Enter the code used for locking and tap

Confirm.

> The tailgate will unlock. The green indi-

cator light next to the button in Func-

tion view will go out to confirm

unlocked status.

Forgotten PIN code

If you have forgotten your PIN code or entered

it incorrectly more than three times, the secur-

ity code can be used to deactivate private

locking.

If the vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call

or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will

be automatically deactivated.

Forgotten security code

If you have forgotten your security code, con-

tact an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance

deactivating private locking.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

250

Related information

•

Private Locking (p. 248)

Alarm

The alarm emits sound and light signals if

anyone without a valid remote key attempts

to break into the vehicle or interferes with the

start battery or alarm siren.

Alarm indicator

A red indicator light on the dashboard shows

the status of the alarm:

•

Indicator off - the alarm is disarmed.

•

Indicator flashes once every two seconds -

the alarm is armed.

•

The indicator flashes quickly after the

alarm has been disabled for up to

30 seconds or until the ignition is put in I

mode – the alarm has been triggered.

When armed, the alarm will be triggered if:

•

the hood, tailgate or any door is opened.

•

a battery cable is disconnected.

•

the alarm siren is disconnected.

Alarm signals

The following occurs if the alarm is triggered:

•

A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until

the alarm is turned off.

•

The hazard warning flashers will flash for

5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.

If the reason the alarm was triggered is not

rectified, the alarm cycle will repeat up to 10

times

Symbols and messages

Symbol Message Meaning

Alarm sys-

tem failure

Service

required

Contact a work-

shop ‒ an

authorized Volvo

workshop is rec-

ommended.

Certain markets only.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

251

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter any of the

components in the alarm system yourself.

Any such attempt could affect the terms

and conditions of your insurance policy.

Related information

•

Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 251)

Arming and disarming the alarm

The alarm is armed when the vehicle is

locked and disarmed when the vehicle is

unlocked. The alarm can also be disarmed

without a functioning key.

Arming and disarming the alarm

The alarm is armed when the vehicle is locked

and disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked.

Disarming the alarm without a functioning

remote key

The vehicle can be unlocked and disarmed

even if the remote key is not functioning e.g. if

the battery is discharged.

1. Open the driver's door using the detacha-

ble key blade.

> This will trigger the alarm.

Place the remote key on the key symbol in

the backup reader in the tunnel console's

storage compartment.

3. Press the start button.

> The alarm will be disarmed.

Turning off a triggered alarm

–

Press the unlock button on the remote key

or set the vehicle to ignition mode I by

pressing the start button.

Related information

•

Alarm (p. 250)

DRIVER SUPPORT

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
254
Driver support systems
The vehicle is equipped with a number of
driver support systems that can provide the
driver with active or passive assistance in var-
ious situations.
The systems can, for example, help the driver:
•
maintain a set speed
•
maintain a set time interval to the vehicle
ahead
•
help prevent a collision by warning the
driver and applying the brakes
•
park the vehicle.
Some of the systems are standard and others
are options. This also varies from market to
market.
Related information
•
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
(p. 29)
•
Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-
tance (p. 254)
•
Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)
•
Connected Safety (p. 260)
•
City Safety™ (p. 305)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 262)
•
Cruise control (p. 267)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Passing assistance* (p. 292)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298)
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 318)
•
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)
•
BLIS* (p. 325)
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 329)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331)
•
Park Assist* (p. 335)
•
Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)
•
Radar sensor (p. 359)
•
Camera (p. 362)
Speed-dependent steering wheel
resistance
Speed-dependent power steering increases
the steering wheel resistance in pace with
the vehicle's speed, which can help give the
driver an enhanced feeling of control and sta-
bility. Steering is stiffer on highways. When
parking and at low speeds, it will be easier to
move the steering wheel.
Reduced power
In rare situations, the power steering may
need to work at reduced power and the steer-
ing wheel may then feel more difficult to
move. This may happen when the power
steering becomes too hot and needs to be
temporarily cooled. It can also happen if there
is a disturbance in power supply.
If there is reduced power, the
message 
Power steering
Assistance temporarily
reduced and this symbol are
shown in the instrument
panel.
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
and systems with steering assistance are not
available.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

255

WARNING

If the temperature rises too high, the power

steering may be forced to switch off com-

pletely. In such a situation, the driver dis-

play shows the message

Power steering

failure Stop safely along with a symbol.

Changing the level of steering wheel

resistance*

In INDIVIDUAL drive mode, the level of steer-

ing wheel resistance can be adjusted.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Select

My Car Drive Modes

Steering Force.

Steering wheel resistance settings can only be

accessed if the vehicle is stationary or is mov-

ing straight ahead at a low speed.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

Electronic Stability Control

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC

) func-

tion helps the driver avoid skidding and

improves the vehicle's directional stability.

This symbol will be displayed

in the instrument panel when

the system is intervening.

When the system has inter-

vened to apply the brakes, a

pulsing sound may be heard

and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly

than expected when the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

The system consists of the following sub-func-

tions:

•

Stability control

•

Spin control and active yaw control

•

Engine drag control

•

Trailer Stability Assist

•

Roll Stability Control

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Stability control

This function helps control the driving and

braking force of each individual wheel in an

attempt to stabilize the vehicle.

Spin control and active yaw control

This function is active at low speeds and

brakes the wheels that are spinning to transfer

Electronic Stability Control

Also called traction control.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

256

additional power to wheels that are not spin-

ning.

This function can also help prevent the wheels

from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating.

Engine drag control

Engine drag control (EDC

) can help prevent

inadvertent wheel lock, e.g. after downshifting

or using engine braking when driving at low

speeds on a slippery surface.

Inadvertent wheel lock while driving could

impair the driver's ability to steer the vehicle.

Trailer Stability Assist*

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA

) is designed to

help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer if

the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway.

NOTE

Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC

Sport Mode is activated.

Roll Stability Control

This function helps reduce the risk of a rollover

in the event of e.g. a sudden evasive maneuver

or if the vehicle begins to skid. The system

monitors the lateral angle at which the vehicle

is leaning and registers any changes. Using

this information, the system calculates the

likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent

risk of a rollover, Electronic Stability Control is

activated, engine torque is reduced and brakes

are applied to one or more of the wheels until

the vehicle has regained stability.

WARNING

The vehicle’s stability systems help

improve vehicle safety but do not replace

the driver’s responsibility for operating the

vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving

style should always be adapted to the cur-

rent road, traffic and weather conditions.

Posted speed limits should always be

respected.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Activating or deactivating Sport mode for

Electronic Stability Control (p. 257)

•

Electronic Stability Control symbols and

messages (p. 258)

•

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416)

Electronic Stability Control in sport

mode

The stability system (ESC

) is always acti-

vated and cannot be switched off. However,

the driver can select

ESC Sport Mode,

which offers more active driving characteris-

tics.

With the ESC Sport Mode sub-function

selected, intervention from the system is

reduced and more lateral movement is permit-

ted, giving the driver more control of the vehi-

cle than usual.

When

ESC Sport Mode is selected, the func-

tion may seem to be disabled even though it

continues to assist the driver.

NOTE

When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the

trailer stabilizer (TSA

) is switched off.

ESC Sport Mode also helps provide more

traction, even if the vehicle gets stuck or is

driving on a loose surface such as deep snow

or loose sand.

Engine Drag Control

Trailer Stability Assist is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original towbar.

Trailer Stability Assist

Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

257

Related information

•

Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)

•

Activating or deactivating Sport mode for

Electronic Stability Control (p. 257)

•

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416)

Activating or deactivating Sport

mode for Electronic Stability

Control

The stability system (ESC

) is always acti-

vated and cannot be switched off. However,

the driver can select Sport mode, which

offers more active driving characteristics.

Activate or deactivate the

function using this button in

the center display's Function

view.

•

Illuminated button indicator light – the

function is activated.

•

Extinguished button indicator light – the

function is deactivated.

When

ESC Sport Mode is

activated, this symbol will

illuminate with a steady glow

in the instrument panel. It will

remain on until the driver

deactivates the function or

until the engine is turned off.

The system will return to normal mode the

next time the engine is started.

The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be

selected when any of the following functions

are activated:

•

Cruise control

•

Adaptive Cruise Control*

•

Pilot Assist*

Related information

•

Electronic Stability Control in sport mode

(p. 256)

•

Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)

Trailer Stability Assist

Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

258

Electronic Stability Control

symbols and messages

A number of symbols and messages related

to Electronic Stability Control (ESC

) may be

displayed in the instrument panel. Several

examples are provided below.

Symbol Message Meaning

Steady glow for approx. 2 seconds System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light The system is actively operating.

Steady glow Sport mode is activated. NOTE! The system is not deactivated in this mode, but has parti-

ally reduced functionality.

Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

259

Symbol Message Meaning

ESC

Temporarily off

The system's functionality has been temporarily reduced due to high brake system tempera-

tures. The function will be automatically reactivated when the brakes have cooled.

ESC

Service required

The system is not functioning properly. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine

and then restart it.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒

an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

260

Connected Safety

Connected Safety communicates information

between your vehicle and other vehicles via

the Internet

. The function is designed to

notify the driver of any hazardous road condi-

tions ahead.

The function can notify the driver if another

vehicle further down the road has activated its

hazard warning flashers or detected slippery

road conditions. You will also be notified if

your own vehicle detects slippery road condi-

tions.

Connected Safety can assist the driver with

the following:

•

Hazard warning flashers alert

•

Slippery road alerts

Connected Safety communication between

vehicles only works for vehicles that are equip-

ped with the function and have it activated.

Hazard warning flashers alert

If your vehicle's hazard warning flashers are

activated, information on this can be sent to

other vehicles approaching your location.

When your vehicle

approaches a vehicle with its

hazard warning flashers on,

this symbol will appear in the

instrument panel.

Slippery road alerts

If your own car detects reduced friction

between your tires and the road, information

on this can be sent to vehicles approaching

your own car's position.

As the vehicle approaches

the area affected, this symbol

will be displayed in the instru-

ment panel to alert the driver

of slippery road conditions.

Drivers of other vehicles

receiving information via

Connected Safety will receive similar notifica-

tions as they approach the area.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Activating or deactivating Connected

Safety (p. 261)

•

Connected Safety limitations (p. 261)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

Not available in all markets.

There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

261

Activating or deactivating

Connected Safety

For Connected Safety to be able to share

information about road conditions with other

drivers, the function must be activated. If you

do not wish to share information, the function

can be deactivated.

Activate or deactivate the

function using this button in

the center display's Function

view.

•

Illuminated button indicator light – the

function is activated.

•

Extinguished button indicator light – the

function is deactivated.

At activation, the driver must accept the spe-

cial terms and conditions shown in the display

before an Internet connection

can be estab-

lished. The driver must, for example, accept

that data is sent from the vehicle using the

driver's cellular phone.

Even when your vehicle is not connected to

the Internet, you will still be notified if the sys-

tem in your own vehicle detects slippery road

conditions. For Connected Safety to function

at full capacity, your vehicle needs to be con-

nected to the Internet.

Related information

•

Connected Safety (p. 260)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

Connected Safety limitations (p. 261)

Connected Safety limitations

Information on vehicles with activated hazard

warning flashers or which have detected slip-

pery road conditions is not always communi-

cated between all vehicles in the affected

area.

This may be the case if:

•

No or insufficient Internet connection.

•

The maneuvers (steering wheel move-

ments, acceleration or braking) made by

the vehicles on slippery surfaces are too

weak for friction between the tires and

road to be detected.

•

Vehicles that have detected slippery road

conditions or activated hazard warning

flashers have not activated the function.

•

Vehicles that have detected slippery road

conditions or activated hazard warning

flashers are not equipped with the func-

tion.

•

Insufficient GPS/satellite navigation may

prevent warnings.

•

Slippery road conditions were detected or

hazard warning flashers were activated on

a road that is not registered in the Volvo

Cars database.

•

Connected Safety is not developed on all

markets and does not cover all areas. Con-

There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

262

sult a Volvo retailer for more information

on covered areas.

WARNING

•

In certain situations, the function may

give false warnings of slippery road

conditions.

•

The function cannot always detect

other vehicles with activated hazard

warning factors or detect all stretches

of road with slippery conditions.

Related information

•

Connected Safety (p. 260)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

Road Sign Information*

The Road Sign Information (RSI

) function

can help the driver observe speed-related

road signs.

Examples of signs that can be detected

If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will

be displayed in the instrument panel.

There are also subfunctions for Road Sign

Information (RSI

) that can alert the driver if

the speed limit has been exceeded or if there

are speed cameras nearby.

NOTE

In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-

tion* function is only available in combina-

tion with Sensus Navigation*.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Road Sign Information

Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just some examples.

Road Sign Information

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
263
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Activating or deactivating Road Sign Infor-
mation* (p. 263)
•
Road Sign Information* display (p. 263)
•
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation* (p. 264)
•
Speed limit and speed camera warnings
from Road Sign Information* (p. 264)
•
Road Sign Information* limitations
(p. 266)
Activating or deactivating Road
Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information (RSI
16
) function is
optional – the driver can choose to have the
function activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the center display's Function
view.
•
Illuminated button indicator light – the
function is activated.
•
Extinguished button indicator light – the
function is deactivated.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 262)
•
Road Sign Information* limitations
(p. 266)
Road Sign Information* display
Road Sign Information (RSI
17
) displays road
signs in different ways depending on the sign
and situation.
Example
18
 of registered speed information.
When the function has registered a speed
limit sign, the sign will be displayed as a sym-
bol in the instrument panel and a colored
marking will be shown in the speedometer's
speed scale.
If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, speed-related information will
also be retrieved from map data, which means
that the instrument panel can display or
change information about speed limits even if
the vehicle has not passed a speed-related
sign.
16
Road Sign Information
17
Road Sign Information
18
Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

264

Signs for "School" and "Children

playing"

If the warning sign "School"

or "Children playing" is

included in the satellite navi-

gator's map data

, a symbol

of this type will be displayed

in the instrument panel.

Related information

•

Road Sign Information* (p. 262)

•

Road Sign Information* limitations

(p. 266)

Road Sign Information and Sensus

Navigation*

If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus

Navigation*, speed-related information will be

provided in the following situations:

•

In cases where the speed limit is given

indirectly, e.g. signs for highways or other

major roads.

•

If a previously detected speed sign is

deemed to be no longer valid and no new

sign has been passed.

NOTE

In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-

tion* function is only available in combina-

tion with Sensus Navigation*.

NOTE

If a downloaded third-party app is used for

navigation, there is no support for speed-

related information.

Related information

•

Road Sign Information* (p. 262)

Speed limit and speed camera

warnings from Road Sign

Information*

There are subfunctions for Road Sign Infor-

mation (RSI

) that can alert the driver if the

speed limit has been exceeded or if there are

speed cameras nearby.

Example of speed camera and speed limit informa-

tion in the instrument panel

Speed limit warning

When Speed Warning is acti-

vated, the symbol for the cur-

rent speed limit in the instru-

ment panel

will flash tem-

porarily if that speed is excee-

ded.

Only vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.

Road Sign Information

Road signs differ by market – the illustration shown here is just an example.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

265

The driver can be alerted if the vehicle is

exceeding a detected speed limit and is

approaching a speed camera.

Speed Limit Warning warns the driver if the

vehicle's speed has exceeded the applicable

speed limit or the stored maximum speed. The

warning will be repeated once after

about 30 seconds in that speed limit area if

the driver does not slow down.

An additional warning will not be provided

unless the vehicle's speed is reduced by at

least 5 km/h (3 mph) and then exceeds the

speed limit again or the vehicle enters a new/

different speed limit area.

NOTE

For an audible alert to be provided if the

speed is exceeded, the

Speed Limit

Warning function must be activated and

the Road Sign Audio Warning sub-func-

tion must be On. Audible alerts are provi-

ded if the vehicle's speed exceeds the

speed displayed by Road Sign Information

in the instrument panel.

Speed camera warning

Vehicles equipped with Road

Sign Information and Sensus

Navigation can provide infor-

mation on upcoming speed

cameras in the instrument

panel

If the vehicle exceeds a detected speed limit

with the

Speed Limit Warning function acti-

vated, the driver is given a speed warning

when the vehicle is approaching a speed cam-

era if the navigation map for the vehicle's cur-

rent location contains information on speed

cameras.

NOTE

It is possible to receive an audible alert for

speed cameras regardless of the vehicle's

speed and whether or not the speed limit is

exceeded, even if the

Road Sign Audio

Warning function is deactivated.

Related information

•

Road Sign Information* (p. 262)

•

Activating or deactivating warnings from

Road Sign Information* (p. 265)

•

Road Sign Information* limitations

(p. 266)

Activating or deactivating

warnings from Road Sign

Information*

The Road Sign Information (RSI

) subfunc-

tion

Speed Limit Warning is optional – the

driver can choose to have the subfunction

activated or deactivated.

Activating Speed Warning

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the center

display's Top view.

Select

Speed Limit Warning.

> The function is activated and a speed

limit selector is displayed.

Adjusting the Speed Warning limit

The driver can adjust the settings to be alerted

at a higher speed than the posted speed limit.

1. Select

Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the center

display's Top view.

Select

Speed Limit Warning.

> The function is activated and a speed

limit selector is displayed.

Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.

Road Sign Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

266

3. Tap the up/down arrows on the screen to

adjust the speed at which the Speed

Warning will be given.

Please note that the set

warning limit will not be used

when a speed camera symbol

is displayed in the instrument

panel.

Activating audible alert for Speed

Warning

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the center

display's Top view.

Select/deselect Road Sign Audio

Warning to activate/deactivate the audi-

ble alert.

When

Road Sign Audio Warning is acti-

vated, the driver will also be alerted if the vehi-

cle is approaching a one-way/"no-entry" road

or entrance.

Activating speed camera alerts

If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus

Navigation* and map data contains informa-

tion on speed cameras, the driver can choose

to receive an audible alert if the vehicle is

approaching a speed camera.

1. Select

Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the center

display's Top view.

Select/deselect

Speed Camera Audio

Warning to activate/deactivate the speed

camera audible alert.

Related information

•

Road Sign Information* (p. 262)

•

Speed limit and speed camera warnings

from Road Sign Information* (p. 264)

•

Road Sign Information* limitations

(p. 266)

Road Sign Information* limitations

Road Sign Information (RSI

) functionality

may be reduced in certain situations.

The function could have reduced functionality

due to e.g.:

•

faded road signs

•

signs located in a curve in the road

•

twisted or damaged signs

•

signs positioned high above the road

•

fully/partially obstructed or poorly posi-

tioned signs

•

signs partially or fully covered by frost,

snow and/or dirt

•

digital road maps

that are outdated,

incorrect or do not contain speed informa-

tion

NOTE

In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa-

tion* function is only available in combina-

tion with Sensus Navigation*.

Road Sign Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

267

NOTE

Certain types of bike carriers that are con-

nected to the trailer socket may be inter-

preted as a connected trailer by the RSI

function. In such cases, the instrument

panel may indicate incorrect speed infor-

mation.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Related information

•

Road Sign Information* (p. 262)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Cruise control

Cruise Control (CC

) can help the driver

maintain an even speed to provide a more

relaxing driving experience on highways and

long, straight roads with even traffic flows.

Function buttons and symbols

: Activates Cruise Control from

standby mode and resumes the set speed

: Increases the set speed

: From standby mode – activates

Cruise Control and sets the current speed

: From active mode – deactivates/

puts Cruise Control in standby mode

: Reduces the set speed

Marker for set speed

The vehicle's current speed

Set speed

NOTE

In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise

Control*(ACC

), it is possible to switch

between Cruise Control and Adaptive

Cruise Control.

Vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*.

Map data and speed information is not available for all areas.

Cruise Control

Adaptive Cruise Control

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
268
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
•
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Using engine braking instead of
applying the brakes
Cruise Control regulates speed by lightly
applying the brakes. On downgrades, it can
sometimes be desirable to roll a bit faster and
let speed be reduced instead by engine brak-
ing alone. The driver can temporarily disen-
gage the Cruise Control braking function.
To disengage CC:
–
Press the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and then release it.
> Cruise Control will automatically disen-
gage the automatic brake function and
speed will only be reduced using the
engine braking function.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 268)
•
Deactivating cruise control (p. 269)
•
Cruise control standby mode (p. 270)
•
Adjusting set speed for driver support
(p. 294)
•
Switching between cruise control and
Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-
play (p. 277)
Selecting and activating cruise
control
The Cruise Control (CC
29
) function must be
selected and activated in order to regulate
speed.
In order to start Cruise Control from standby
mode, the vehicle's current speed must be
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the
steering wheel keypad and scroll to the
cruise control symbol 
 (4).
> Gray symbol – cruise control is in
standby mode.
29
Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
269
2.
When cruise control is selected, press 
(2) on the steering wheel keypad to acti-
vate.
> White symbol – cruise control starts
and the current speed is stored as the
maximum speed. The lowest speed
that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph).
Reactivating cruise control to the last
stored speed
–
When cruise control is selected, press 
on the steering wheel keypad to activate.
> The Cruise Control marking in the
instrument panel will change from
GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will
then return to the most recently set
speed.
WARNING
A noticeable increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the 
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 267)
•
Deactivating cruise control (p. 269)
•
Cruise control standby mode (p. 270)
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control (CC
30
) can be deactivated and
switched off.
1.
Press the   button on the steering
wheel (2).
> The symbol and markings turn gray –
cruise control goes into standby mode.
2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the
steering wheel to select another function.
> The cruise control symbol and marking
(4) in the instrument panel will go out
and the stored maximum speed will be
erased.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 267)
•
Switching between cruise control and
Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-
play (p. 277)
•
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 268)
•
Cruise control standby mode (p. 270)
30
Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

270

Cruise control standby mode

Cruise control (CC

) can be deactivated and

put in standby mode. This may happen auto-

matically or be due to driver intervention.

Standby mode means that the function is

selected in the instrument panel but not acti-

vated. In standby mode, cruise control will not

regulate speed.

Standby mode due to action by the

driver

Cruise control will be deactivated and put in

standby mode if any of the following occurs:

•

The brakes are applied.

•

The gear selector is moved to N.

•

The vehicle is driven faster than the set

speed for more than 1 minute.

The driver must then control the vehicle's

speed.

Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-

cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will

return to the set speed when the accelerator

pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode

The function may automatically go into

standby mode if one of the following occurs:

•

The wheels lose traction.

•

The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.

•

The temperature in the brake system

becomes too high.

•

The vehicle's speed goes below 30 km/h

(20 mph).

The driver must then control the vehicle's

speed.

Related information

•

Cruise control (p. 267)

•

Selecting and activating cruise control

(p. 268)

•

Deactivating cruise control (p. 269)

Adaptive Cruise Control*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC

) can help the

driver to maintain a constant speed, com-

bined with a preset time interval to the vehi-

cle in front.

The camera/radar sensor measures the distance to

the vehicle ahead.

Adaptive Cruise Control can help provide a

more relaxed driving experience on long trips

on highways or long, straight roads with even

traffic flows.

The driver sets a speed and a time interval to

the vehicle ahead. If the camera/radar sensor

detects a slower-moving vehicle ahead, your

vehicle's speed will be automatically adapted

according to the set time interval to that vehi-

Cruise Control

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
271
cle. When there are no longer slower-moving
vehicles ahead, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control is designed to:
•
smoothly regulate speed. The driver must
apply the brakes in situations requiring
immediate braking. For example, when
there are great differences in speed
between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead
brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the
radar sensor, braking may occur unexpect-
edly or not at all.
•
follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane
and maintain a time interval to that vehicle
set by the driver. If the radar sensor does
not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead
maintain the speed set by the driver. This
will also happen if the speed of the vehicle
ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi-
cle.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
•
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
CAUTION
Only a workshop may perform mainte-
nance on driver support components – an
authorized Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* controls (p. 272)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* displays (p. 272)
•
Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control* (p. 273)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
(p. 276)
•
Symbols and messages for Adaptive
Cruise Control* (p. 278)
•
Collision risk warning from driver support
(p. 293)
•
Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead
(p. 295)
•
Adjusting set speed for driver support
(p. 294)
•
Auto-hold braking with driver support
(p. 297)
•
Switching target vehicles with driver sup-
port (p. 294)
•
Passing assistance* (p. 292)
•
Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

272

Adaptive Cruise Control*

controls

A summary of how Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC

) is controlled using the left-side steer-

ing wheel keypad and how the function is

shown in the display.

: From standby mode - activates and

sets the current speed

: From active mode - deactivates/

puts in standby mode

: Activates the function from standby

mode and resumes the set speed

: Increases the set speed

: Reduces the set speed

Increases the time interval to the vehicle

ahead

Reduces the time interval to the vehicle

ahead

Target vehicle indicator: the function has

detected and is following a target vehicle

using the set time interval

Symbol for time interval to the vehicle

ahead

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations

(p. 276)

Adaptive Cruise Control*

displays

The following illustrations show how Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC

) can appear in the

various displays in different situations.

Speed

Speed indicators

Set speed

Speed of the vehicle ahead

The current speed of your vehicle

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Adaptive Cruise Control

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

273

Time interval

Adaptive Cruise Control will

only regulate the time interval

to the vehicle ahead when

the distance symbol shows

two vehicles. A speed interval

will be marked at the same

time.

When driving

In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor-

mation* (RSI

) indicates that the maximum

permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).

The previous illustration shows that Adaptive

Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of

110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no target

vehicle ahead to follow.

The previous illustration shows that Adaptive

Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of

110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target

vehicle ahead, which is traveling at the same

speed.

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations

(p. 276)

Selecting and activating Adaptive

Cruise Control*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC

) must first be

selected and then activated before it can reg-

ulate speed and distance.

To start the function:

•

The driver's seat belt must be buckled and

the driver's door must be closed.

•

There must be a vehicle ahead (target

vehicle) within a reasonable distance or

Adaptive Cruise Control

Road Sign Information

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

274

your vehicle's current speed must be at

least 15 km/h (9 mph).

1. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) button on the

steering wheel keypad and scroll to the

Adaptive Cruise Control symbol

(4).

> Gray symbol – Adaptive Cruise Control

is in standby mode.

When Speed Limiter is selected, press

(1) on the steering wheel keypad to

activate.

> White symbol – Speed Limiter starts

and the current speed is stored as the

maximum speed.

Reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control

to the last stored speed

–

When Adaptive Cruise Control is selected,

press

on the steering wheel keypad to

activate.

> The Cruise Control marking in the

instrument panel will change from

GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will

then return to the most recently set

speed.

WARNING

A noticeable increase in speed may follow

when the speed is resumed with the

steering wheel button.

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control*

(p. 274)

•

Switching between cruise control and

Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-

play (p. 277)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations

(p. 276)

Deactivating Adaptive Cruise

Control*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC

) can be deac-

tivated and switched off.

Press the button on the steering

wheel (1).

> The symbol and markings turn gray –

Adaptive Cruise Control goes into

standby mode. The time interval indica-

tor light and any symbols for the target

vehicle will go out.

Adaptive Cruise Control

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

275

2. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) buttons on the

steering wheel to select another function.

> The Adaptive Cruise Control symbol

and marking (4) in the instrument panel

will go out and the stored maximum

speed will be erased.

WARNING

•

If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby

mode, the driver must intervene and

regulate both speed and distance to

the vehicle ahead.

•

If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi-

cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol is in standby mode, the driver can

be warned of the short distance by the

Distance Alert* function.

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise

Control* (p. 273)

•

Switching between cruise control and

Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-

play (p. 277)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations

(p. 276)

Adaptive Cruise Control*

standby

mode

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC

) can be deac-

tivated and put in standby mode. This may

happen automatically or be due to driver

intervention.

Standby mode means that the function is

selected in the instrument panel but not acti-

vated. In standby mode, Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol will not regulate speed or distance to the

vehicle ahead.

Standby mode due to action by the

driver

Adaptive Cruise Control will be deactivated

and put in standby mode if any of the follow-

ing occurs:

•

The brakes are applied.

•

The gear selector is moved to N.

•

The vehicle is driven faster than the set

speed for more than 1 minute.

Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-

cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will

return to the set speed when the accelerator

pedal is released.

WARNING

•

If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby

mode, the driver must intervene and

regulate both speed and distance to

the vehicle ahead.

•

If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi-

cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol is in standby mode, the driver can

be warned of the short distance by the

Distance Alert* function.

Automatic standby mode

WARNING

With automatic standby mode, the driver is

warned by an acoustic signal and a mes-

sage on the instrument panel.

•

The driver must then regulate vehicle

speed, apply the brakes if necessary,

and maintain a safe distance to other

vehicles.

The function may automatically go into

standby mode if one of the following occurs:

•

One of the systems that Adaptive Cruise

Control is dependent on stops working,

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Adaptive Cruise Control

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
276
such as Electronic Stability Control
(ESC
45
).
•
The driver opens the door.
•
The driver unbuckles the seat belt.
•
The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
•
One or more of the wheels lose traction.
•
The brake temperature is high.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The camera and radar unit is covered by
snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar
waves are blocked).
•
Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and ACC cannot determine if the
vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is
another object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so
that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)
•
Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control* (p. 273)
•
Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control*
(p. 274)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
(p. 276)
Adaptive Cruise Control*
46
limitations
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
47
) may have
limited functionality in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy loads
Adaptive Cruise Control is primarily intended
to be driven on flat roads. The function may
not be able to maintain the correct time inter-
val to the vehicle ahead when driving down
steep hills. The driver should be extra attentive
and prepared to apply the brakes.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control if the vehi-
cle is carrying a heavy load or towing a trailer.
Drive mode unavailable
The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
if Adaptive Cruise Control is activated.
WARNING
•
This is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system fails
to detect a vehicle ahead.
•
The function does not brake for people
or animals and does not brake for small
vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy-
cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low
trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta-
tionary vehicles and objects.
•
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
intersections, on slippery surfaces,
with a lot of water or slush on the road,
in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads, or on on/off ramps.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)
•
Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)
45
Electronic Stability Control
46
Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

277

Switching between cruise control

and Adaptive Cruise Control*

the center display

When the regular cruise control (CC

) is

selected in the instrument panel, you can

switch to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC

) in

the center display's Function view.

Activate or deactivate the

function using this button in

the center display's Function

view.

•

GREEN button indicator light – Adaptive

Cruise Control is deactivated and the reg-

ular cruise control is in standby mode.

•

GRAY button indicator light – regular

cruise control is deactivated and the

Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby

mode.

A symbol in the instrument panel indicates

which cruise control system is active

Cruise control

(CC)

Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)

A A

WHITE symbol: The function is active. GRAY symbol:

Standby mode

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Cruise control (p. 267)

Adaptive Cruise Control

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Cruise Control

Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

278

Symbols and messages for

Adaptive Cruise Control*

A number of symbols and messages relating

to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC

) can be

viewed via the instrument panel.

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

279

Symbol Message Meaning

The symbol is WHITE The vehicle is maintaining the stored speed.

Adaptive Cruise Contr.

Unavailable

The symbol is GRAY

Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode.

Adaptive Cruise Contr.

Service required

The symbol is GRAY

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo

workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒

an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

280

Pilot Assist*

Pilot Assist can help the driver keep the vehi-

cle in the current traffic lane and maintain an

even speed and a set time interval to the

vehicle ahead.

Get to know Pilot Assist

The camera/radar sensor monitors the distance to

the vehicle ahead and detects lane markings.

Camera and radar sensor

Distance monitor

Lane marker line monitors

Pilot Assist helps to steer the vehicle, and you

may need to drive a few miles with Pilot Assist

before you feel completely at home with the

function. It is important to be familiar with all

of the function's applications and limitations in

order to take advantage of all it has to offer.

The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended

for use on highways and other major roads

where it can help provide a more comfortable

and relaxing driving experience.

The driver sets the desired speed and distance

to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors the

distance to the vehicle ahead and the traffic

lane's side markers using the camera. The sys-

tem maintains the set time interval to the vehi-

cle ahead by automatically adjusting your vehi-

cle's speed and keeps your vehicle in its lane

by providing steering assistance.

Pilot Assist regulates speed by accelerating

and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit

a slight sound when they are being used to

adjust speed.

Pilot Assist is designed to:

•

smoothly regulate speed. The driver must

apply the brakes in situations requiring

immediate braking. For example, when

there are great differences in speed

between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead

brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the

camera and radar sensor, braking may

occur unexpectedly or not at all.

•

follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane

and maintain a time interval to that vehicle

set by the driver. If the radar sensor does

not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead

maintain the speed set by the driver. This

will also happen if the speed of the vehicle

ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi-

cle.

The vehicle's position in the traffic

lane

When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it attempts to

position the vehicle halfway between the visi-

ble lane marking lines. For a smoother drive, it

is a good idea to allow the vehicle to find a

good position. The driver can always adjust

the position him/herself by increasing steering

input. It is important for the driver to make

sure the vehicle is positioned safely in the lane.

If Pilot Assist does not position the vehicle

appropriately in the lane, the driver should turn

off Pilot Assist or switch to Adaptive Cruise

Control*.

Steering assistance

The color of the steering

wheel symbol indicates the

current status of steering

assistance:

• GREEN indicates that

steering assistance is active

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

281

• GRAY (as shown in illustration) indicates that

steering assistance is deactivated.

Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on

monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead

and the traffic lane's side marker lines. The

driver can override Pilot Assist's steering rec-

ommendations at any time and steer in

another direction, e.g. to change lanes or avoid

obstacles on the road.

If the camera/radar sensor cannot detect the

lane's side marker lines or if Pilot Assist is

unable for some other reason to clearly inter-

pret the lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily

deactivate steering assistance until it can once

again interpret the lane markings. However,

the speed and distance warnings will remain

active. The driver will be alerted by slight

vibrations in the steering wheel that the func-

tion has been temporarily deactivated.

WARNING

Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically

and resumes working without prior notice.

In curves and forks in the road

Pilot Assist is designed to interact with the

driver. The driver should never wait for steer-

ing assistance from Pilot Assist, but instead

should always be ready to increase his or her

own steering efforts, particularly in curves.

When the vehicle is approaching an off-ramp

or a fork in the road, the driver should steer

toward the desired lane so that Pilot Assist

can detect the desired direction of travel.

Hands on the steering wheel

Pilot Assist only functions if the driver's hands

are on the steering wheel. It is also important

for the driver to always continue to be active

and alert when driving since Pilot Assist is

unable to read all situations and may toggle

between off and on without prior warning.

If Pilot Assist detects that the

driver's hands are not on the

steering wheel, the system

will provide a symbol and a

text message in the instru-

ment panel to instruct the

driver to actively steer the

vehicle.

If the driver's hands are still detected on the

steering wheel after a few seconds have

passed, the instructions to actively steer the

vehicle will be repeated, accompanied by an

audible signal.

If Pilot Assist still does not detect the driver's

hands on the steering wheel after a few more

seconds have passed, the audible signal will

become intense and the steering function will

switch off. Pilot Assist must then be reactiva-

ted by pressing the

button on the steering

wheel.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

CAUTION

Only a workshop may perform mainte-

nance on driver support components – an

authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*

(p. 284)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
282
•
Pilot Assist* displays (p. 283)
•
Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)
•
Pilot Assist* symbols and messages
(p. 290)
•
Pilot Assist* controls (p. 282)
•
Collision risk warning from driver support
(p. 293)
•
Switching target vehicles with driver sup-
port (p. 294)
•
Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead
(p. 295)
•
Adjusting set speed for driver support
(p. 294)
•
Auto-hold braking with driver support
(p. 297)
•
Passing assistance* (p. 292)
•
Contacting Volvo (p. 26)
Pilot Assist*
54
 controls
A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled
using the right-side steering wheel keypad
and how the function is shown in the display.
Function buttons and symbols.
▶: Switches from Adaptive Cruise Control*
to Pilot Assist
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and sets the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
puts Pilot Assist in standby mode
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the set speed and time
interval
: Increases the set speed
: Reduces the set speed
Increases the time interval to the vehicle
ahead
Reduces the time interval to the vehicle
ahead
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to Adaptive
Cruise Control
Function symbol
Symbols for target vehicle
Symbol for time interval to the vehicle
ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
54
Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

283

Pilot Assist*

displays

The following illustrations show how Pilot

Assist can appear in the various displays in

different situations.

Speed

Speed indicators.

Set speed

Speed of the vehicle ahead

The current speed of your vehicle

Time interval

Pilot Assist will only regulate

the time interval to the vehi-

cle ahead when the distance

symbol shows a vehicle (1)

over the steering wheel sym-

bol.

Pilot Assist's steering assistance is only active

when the steering wheel symbol (2) changes

from GRAY to GREEN.

When driving

In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor-

mation (RSI

) indicates that the maximum

permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).

The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h

(68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle

ahead to follow.

Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis-

tance because it cannot detect the lane's side

marking lines.

The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h

(68 mph) and is following a target vehicle

ahead that is traveling at the same speed.

Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis-

tance because it cannot detect the lane's side

marking lines.

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

Road Sign Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

284

The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h

(68 mph) and is following a target vehicle

ahead that is traveling at the same speed.

In this example, Pilot Assist will also provide

steering assistance because it can detect the

lane's side marking lines.

The previous illustration shows that Pilot

Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h

(68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle

ahead to follow.

Pilot Assist will provide steering assistance

because it can detect the lane's side marking

lines.

Related information

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

•

Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)

Selecting and activating Pilot

Assist*

Pilot Assist must first be selected and then

activated before it can regulate speed and

distance and provide steering assistance.

A green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is

providing steering assistance.

To start Pilot Assist.

•

The driver's seat belt must be buckled and

the driver's door must be closed.

•

The side markings of the lane must be

clearly visible and detected by the vehicle.

•

There must be a vehicle ahead (target

vehicle) within a reasonable distance or

your vehicle's current speed must be at

least 15 km/h (9 mph).

•

The speed must not exceed 140 km/h (87

mph).

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

285

•

The driver must keep their hands on the

steering wheel.

•

There must be a vehicle ahead (target

vehicle) within a reasonable distance or

your vehicle's current speed must be at

least 15 km/h (9 mph).

1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the

steering wheel keypad and scroll to the

Pilot Assist symbol

(4).

> Gray symbol – Pilot Assist is in standby

mode.

When Pilot Assist is selected, press

(2) on the steering wheel keypad to acti-

vate.

> White symbol – Pilot Assist starts and

the current speed is stored as the maxi-

mum speed.

Reactivating Pilot Assist to the last

stored speed

–

When Pilot Assist is selected, press

on the steering wheel keypad to activate.

> The Cruise Control marking in the

instrument panel will change from

GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will

then return to the most recently set

speed.

WARNING

A noticeable increase in speed may follow

when the speed is resumed with the

steering wheel button.

Related information

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

•

Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 285)

•

Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)

Deactivating Pilot Assist*

Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched

off.

A green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is

providing steering assistance.

Press the button on the steering

wheel (2).

> The symbol and markings turn gray –

Pilot Assist goes into standby mode.

The time interval indicator light and any

symbols for the target vehicle will go

out.

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
286
2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the
steering wheel to select another function.
> The Pilot Assist symbol and marking (4)
in the instrument panel will go out and
the stored maximum speed will be
erased.
WARNING
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer and
regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
•
If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi-
cle ahead when Pilot Assist is in
standby mode, the driver is instead
warned of the short distance by the
Distance Alert* function.
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)
•
Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise
Control* (p. 273)
•
Switching between cruise control and
Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis-
play (p. 277)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations
(p. 276)
•
Temporarily deactivating steering assis-
tance with Pilot Assist* (p. 287)
Pilot Assist*
59
 standby mode
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and put in
standby mode. This may happen automati-
cally or be due to driver intervention.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the instrument panel but not acti-
vated. In standby mode, Pilot Assist will not
regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle
ahead or provide steering assistance.
Standby mode due to action by the
driver
Pilot Assist will be deactivated and put in
standby mode if any of the following occurs:
•
The brakes are applied.
•
The gear selector is moved to N.
•
A turn signal is used for more than
1 minute.
•
The vehicle is driven faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.
Automatic standby mode
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned by an acoustic signal and a mes-
sage on the instrument panel.
•
The driver must then regulate vehicle
speed, apply the brakes if necessary,
and maintain a safe distance to other
vehicles.
The function may automatically go into
standby mode if one of the following occurs.
•
One of the systems that Pilot Assist is
dependent on stops working, such as
Electronic Stability Control 
60
.
•
The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
•
The driver opens the door.
•
The driver unbuckles the seat belt.
•
The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high.
•
One or more of the wheels lose traction.
•
The brake temperature is high.
•
The parking brake is applied.
•
The camera and radar unit is covered by
snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar
waves are blocked).
59
Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
287
•
Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine
if the vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is
another object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h
(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so
that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 284)
•
Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
•
Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)
Temporarily deactivating steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*
61
Pilot Assist steering assistance can be tem-
porarily deactivated and reactivated without
prior warning.
When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's
steering assistance will be temporarily deacti-
vated. When the direction indicator is turned
off, steering assistance is reactivated automat-
ically if the lane's edge markings can still be
detected.
If Pilot Assist cannot clearly interpret the
lane's side marker lines or if the camera/radar
sensor is unable for some other reason to
clearly interpret the lane, Pilot Assist will tem-
porarily deactivate steering assistance. How-
ever, the speed and distance warnings will
remain active. Steering assistance will resume
when the side marker lines can once again be
interpreted. In these situations, the driver may
be alerted through slight vibrations in the
steering wheel that steering assistance is tem-
porarily deactivated.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 284)
•
Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
•
Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)
60
Electronic Stability Control
61
Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

288

Pilot Assist*

limitations

Pilot Assist functionality may be reduced in

certain situations.

Pilot Assist is a driver support function

designed to simplify driving and assist the

driver in many situations. However, the driver

is always responsible for maintaining a suita-

ble distance to vehicles or objects around it

and ensuring that the vehicle is correctly posi-

tioned in the traffic lane.

WARNING

In some situations, Pilot Assist may have

trouble helping the driver properly or may

be deactivated automatically – we advise

against using Pilot Assist in such cases.

Examples of such situations include:

•

the lane markings are unclear, worn,

missing, cross each other, or there are

multiple sets of road markings.

•

the lane division changes, e.g. when

lanes split or merge, and at off-ramps.

•

when there is road construction and

sudden changes to the road surface,

e.g. when the lines may no longer mark

the correct route.

•

edges or other lines than lane markings

are present on or near the road, e.g.

curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-

face, edges of barriers, roadside edges

or strong shadows.

•

the lane is narrow or winding.

•

the lane contains ridges or holes.

•

weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,

snow or fog or slush or reduced visibil-

ity with poor light conditions, back-

lighting, wet road surface, etc.

The driver should also note that Pilot Assist

has the following limitations:

•

High curbs, roadside barriers, tempo-

rary obstacles (traffic cones, safety bar-

riers, etc.) are not detected. Alterna-

tively, they may be detected incorrectly

as lane markings, with a subsequent

risk of contact between the vehicle and

such obstacles. The driver is responsi-

ble for ensuring that the vehicle main-

tains a suitable distance from such

obstacles.

•

The camera and radar sensors do not

have the capacity to detect all oncom-

ing objects and obstacles in traffic

environments, e.g. potholes, stationary

obstacles or objects that completely or

partially block the route.

•

Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,

animals, etc.

•

The steering assistance is limited in

force, which means that Pilot Assist

cannot always help the driver to steer

and keep the vehicle within the lane.

•

In vehicles equipped with Sensus

Navigation*, the function is able to use

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

289

information from map data, which

could cause variations in performance.

•

Pilot Assist will be switched off if the

speed-dependent power steering

wheel resistance is working at reduced

power, e.g. during cooling due to over-

heating.

WARNING

Pilot Assist should only be used if there are

clear lane lines painted on each side of the

lane. All other use will increase the risk of

contact with nearby obstacles that cannot

be detected by the functions.

WARNING

•

This is not a collision avoidance sys-

tem. The driver is always responsible

and must intervene if the system fails

to detect a vehicle ahead.

•

The function does not brake for people

or animals and does not brake for small

vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy-

cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low

trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta-

tionary vehicles and objects.

•

Do not use the function in demanding

situations, such as in city traffic, at

intersections, on slippery surfaces,

with a lot of water or slush on the road,

in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on

winding roads, or on on/off ramps.

The driver can always correct or adjust steer-

ing assistance provided by Pilot Assist by turn-

ing the steering wheel to the desired position.

Steep roads and/or heavy loads

Pilot Assist is primarily intended to be driven

on flat roads. The function may not be able to

maintain the correct time interval to the vehi-

cle ahead when driving down steep hills. The

driver should be extra attentive and prepared

to apply the brakes.

Do not use Pilot Assist if the vehicle is carrying

a heavy load or towing a trailer.

NOTE

Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,

bike carrier or similar is connected to the

vehicle electrical system.

Drive mode unavailable

The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected

when Pilot Assist is activated.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Related information

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

•

Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-

tance (p. 254)

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

290

Pilot Assist*

symbols and

messages

A number of symbols and messages relating

to Pilot Assist may be displayed in the instru-

ment panel.

Symbol Message Meaning

Gray steering wheel symbol Indicates that steering assistance is deactivated. When Pilot Assist is providing steer-

ing assistance, the steering wheel is green.

Symbol for hands on the steering wheel The system cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel. Place your hands

on the steering wheel and actively steer the vehicle.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's man-

ual

Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒

an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

291

Related information

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

•

Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)

•

Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

292

Passing assistance*

Passing assistance can assist the driver when

passing other vehicles. The function can be

used with Adaptive Cruise Control* or Pilot

Assist*.

When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist

is following another vehicle and you indicate

that you intend to pass that vehicle by using

the turn signal

, the system will begin accel-

erating toward the vehicle ahead before your

vehicle has moved into the passing lane.

The function will then delay a speed reduction

to avoid early braking as your vehicle

approaches a slower-moving vehicle.

The function remains active until your vehicle

has passed the other vehicle.

WARNING

Please note that this function can be acti-

vated in more situations than just passing

another vehicle, such as when a direction

indicator is used to indicate a lane change

or before exiting to another road – the vehi-

cle will then briefly accelerate.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Using passing assistance (p. 292)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

Using passing assistance

Passing assistance can be used with Adap-

tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist*. Several

conditions must be met for passing assis-

tance to be possible.

In order to activate passing assistance:

•

your vehicle must be following a vehicle

ahead (target vehicle)

•

your vehicle's current speed must be

at least 70 km/h (43 mph)

•

the set speed must be high enough to

safely pass another vehicle.

To start passing assistance:

–

Turn on the left turn signal.

> Passing assistance will start.

Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
293
WARNING
The driver should be aware that if condi-
tions suddenly change when using Passing
Assistance, the function may implement an
undesired acceleration in certain condi-
tions.
Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if:
•
the vehicle is approaching an exit in the
same direction as passing would nor-
mally occur
•
the vehicle ahead slows before your
vehicle has had time to switch to the
passing lane
•
traffic in the passing lane slows down
Situations of this type can be avoided by
temporarily putting Adaptive Cruise Control
or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Related information
•
Passing assistance* (p. 292)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* standby mode
(p. 275)
•
Pilot Assist* standby mode (p. 286)
Collision risk warning from driver
support
The driver support systems Adaptive Cruise
Control* and Pilot Assist* can help alert the
driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead
suddenly decreases to an unsafe distance.
Collision warning audible signal and symbol
Audible signal at risk of collision
Collision warning symbol
Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring
Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist use
approx. 40% of the braking capacity. If a sit-
uation requires more braking force than driver
support can provide, and if the driver does not
apply the brakes, a warning light and audible
warning signal will be activated to alert the
driver that immediate action is required.
WARNING
The driver support system only issues a
warning for vehicles detected by its radar
unit – thus, a warning may come after a
delay or not at all. Never wait for a warning.
Apply the brakes when necessary.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

294

Switching target vehicles with

driver support

At certain speeds, vehicles with automatic

transmissions and the driver support func-

tions Adaptive Cruise Control* and Pilot

Assist* can switch target vehicles.

Switching target vehicles

If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may

be stationary traffic ahead.

When driver support is actively following

another vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h

(20 mph) and switches targets from a moving

vehicle to a stationary vehicle, driver support

will brake for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When driver support follows another vehi-

cle at speeds over approx. 30 km/h

(20 mph) and changes target vehicle –

from a moving vehicle to a stationary one –

driver support will ignore the stationary

vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored

speed.

•

The driver must then intervene and

apply the brakes.

Automatic standby mode when switching

targets

Driver support disengages and goes into

standby mode if:

•

your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h

(3 mph) and driver support cannot deter-

mine if the target vehicle is stationary or if

it is another object, e.g. a speed bump.

•

your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h

(3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so

that driver support no longer has a vehicle

to follow.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

Adjusting set speed for driver

support

It is possible to adjust set speeds for the

cruise control, Adaptive Cruise Control* and

Pilot Assist* functions.

: Increases the set speed

: Reduces the set speed

Set speed

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

295

–

Change a set speed by pressing the

(1) or (2) buttons briefly or by pressing

and holding them:

•

Brief press: Each press changes the

speed in +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) incre-

ments.

•

Press and hold: Release the button

when the set speed indicator (3) has

moved to the desired speed.

> The most recently set speed will be

stored.

NOTE

For vehicles without Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol*, speed instead increases by +/- 1km/h

(+/- 1 mph) each time the button is

pressed.

Pressing the accelerator pedal

If speed is increased by depressing the accel-

erator pedal while pressing the

(1) button

on the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed

when the button is pressed will be stored as

the set speed.

Temporarily increasing speed using the accel-

erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi-

cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will

return to the set speed when the accelerator

pedal is released.

Possible speed

Automatic transmission

The driver support functions can follow

another vehicle at speeds from a standstill up

to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance

from near-stationary speeds up to 140 km/h

(87 mph).

The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h

(20 mph). When following another vehicle,

ACC can monitor that vehicle's speed and

slow your own vehicle down to a standstill,

but it is not possible to set speeds lower than

30 km/h (20 mph).

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Cruise control (p. 267)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

Setting time interval to the vehicle

ahead

The time interval to the vehicle ahead can be

set for the functions Adaptive Cruise Control*

and Pilot Assist*.

Different time intervals to the

vehicle ahead can be selected

and are shown in the instru-

ment panel as 15 horizontal

bars. The more bars, the

longer the time interval. One

bar represents an interval of

approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars

represents approx. 3 seconds.

NOTE

When the symbol in the instrument panel

shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot

Assist follows a vehicle ahead at a preset

time interval.

When only a steering wheel is shown,

there is no vehicle ahead within a reasona-

ble distance.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

296

NOTE

When the symbol in the instrument panel

shows two vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol is following the vehicle ahead at a pre-

set time interval.

When only one vehicle is shown, there is

no vehicle ahead within a reasonable dis-

tance.

Controls for setting a time interval.

Reduce the time interval

Increase the time interval

Distance indicator

–

Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or

increase the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the

current time interval.

In order to help your vehicle follow the vehicle

ahead as smoothly and comfortably as possi-

ble, Adaptive Cruise Control allows the time

interval to vary noticeably in certain situations.

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi-

cle ahead is short, Adaptive Cruise Control

increases the time interval slightly.

NOTE

•

The greater the vehicles' speed, the

greater the distance between them for

a set time interval.

•

Only use the time intervals permitted

by local traffic regulations.

•

If driver support does not seem to

respond with a speed increase when

activated, it may be because the time

interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter

than the set time interval.

WARNING

•

Only use a time interval suitable for the

current traffic conditions.

•

The driver should be aware that short

time intervals give them limited time to

react and act to any unforeseen traffic

situation.

Related information

•

Drive modes when using time interval to

vehicle (p. 297)

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

297

Drive modes when using time

interval to vehicle

The driver can choose different drive modes

to determine how driver support should

maintain a time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Settings are made using the DRIVE MODE

controls.

Select one of the following:

•

Eco - Driver support will focus on provid-

ing good fuel economy, which will

increase the time interval to the vehicle

ahead.

•

Comfort - Driver support will focus on fol-

lowing the set time interval to the vehicle

ahead as smoothly as possible.

•

Dynamic* - Driver support will focus on

following the set time interval to the vehi-

cle ahead more exactly, which could mean

faster acceleration and heavier braking.

Related information

•

Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead

(p. 295)

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

Auto-hold braking with driver

support

The driver support functions Adaptive Cruise

Control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake

function in slow traffic and while stationary.

In certain situations, the parking brake will be

applied to keep the vehicle at a standstill.

Braking function in slow traffic and at

a standstill

In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when

stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume

automatically if the vehicle is stopped for less

than approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3

seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving

again, the driver support function will go into

standby mode and the auto-hold brake func-

tion will activate.

–

The function can be reactivated by:

•

Pressing the

button on the steer-

ing wheel keypad.

•

Pressing the accelerator pedal.

> The function will resume following the

vehicle ahead if it begins to move

within approx. 6 seconds.

WARNING

A noticeable increase in speed may follow

when the speed is resumed with the

steering wheel button.

WARNING

The driver support system only issues a

warning for obstacles detected by its radar

sensor – thus, a warning may come after a

delay or not at all.

•

Never wait for a warning or assistance.

Apply the brakes when necessary.

NOTE

Driver support can keep the vehicle sta-

tionary for no more than 10 minutes – after

that time the parking brake is applied and

the function is deactivated.

The parking brake must be released before

driver support can be reactivated.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

298

Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake

function

In certain situations, auto-hold will be deacti-

vated when the vehicle is at a standstill and

the function will go into standby mode. This

means that the brakes will be released and the

vehicle could begin to roll. The driver must

actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle

stationary.

This can occur if:

•

The driver depresses the brake pedal.

•

The parking brake is applied.

•

The gear selector is moved to the P, N or

R position.

•

The driver puts Adaptive Cruise Control or

Pilot Assist in standby mode.

Auto Activate Parking Brake

The parking brake will be applied if the func-

tion is keeping the vehicle stationary using the

brakes and:

•

The driver opens the door or unbuckles

his/her seat belt.

•

The function has kept the vehicle at a

standstill for more than

approx. 10 minutes.

•

The brakes overheat.

•

The driver switches off the engine.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

•

Brake functions (p. 374)

Lane Keeping Aid

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA

) is designed to

actively steer the vehicle on freeways, high-

ways and other major roads to help the driver

reduce the risk of the vehicle unintentionally

veering out of the lane.

Lake Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into

the lane and/or alerts the driver using vibra-

tions in the steering wheel.

Lane Keeping Aid is active at speeds between

65200 km/h (40125 mph) on roads with

clearly visible traffic lane marker lines.

On narrow roads, the function may be unavail-

able and go into standby mode. The function

will become available again when the road

becomes sufficiently wide.

Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

299

A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker

lines.

Lane Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into its

lane.

Lane Keeping Aid alerts the driver using vibrations in

the steering wheel.

Depending on the settings used, Lane Keep-

ing Aid functions in different ways:

•

Assist enabled: When the vehicle

approaches a lane marker line, the func-

tion will actively steer the vehicle back into

the lane using light pressure on the steer-

ing wheel.

•

Warning enabled: If the vehicle is about

to move over a lane marker line, the driver

will be alerted by vibrations in the steering

wheel.

There is also an option for activating steering

assistance and alerts at the same time.

NOTE

When the direction indicators/turn signals

are activated, the Lane Keeping Aid does

not provide any warning or intervene with

steering.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
300
Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene
Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene in sharp inside
curves.
In certain cases, such as when a turn signal is
used or when "straightening out" an inside
curve, Lane Keeping Aid will not provide steer-
ing assistance or alerts.
Hands on the steering wheel
Steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid
only functions if the driver's hands are on the
steering wheel, which the system continu-
ously monitors.
If the driver's hands are not
on the steering wheel, an
audible signal will be given
and a message will instruct
the driver to actively steer the
vehicle:
•
Lane Keeping Aid – Apply steering
If the driver does not begin to steer the vehi-
cle, the function will go into standby mode
and this message will be displayed:
•
Lane Keeping Aid – Standby until
steering applied
The function will then be unavailable until the
driver begins actively steering the vehicle
again.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Activating or deactivating Lane Keeping
Aid (p. 300)
•
Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301)
•
Lane Keeping Aid symbols and messages
(p. 302)
Activating or deactivating Lane
Keeping Aid
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
66
) function is
optional – the driver can choose to have the
function activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the center display's Function
view.
•
GREEN button indicator light – the func-
tion is activated.
•
GRAY button indicator light – the function
is deactivated.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298)
•
Selecting type of assistance for Lane
Keeping Aid (p. 301)
•
Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301)

DRIVER SUPPORT

301

Selecting type of assistance for

Lane Keeping Aid

The driver can determine what types of assis-

tance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA

) should pro-

vide if the vehicle veers from its lane.

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe

in the center display's Top view.

Under

Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select

what assistance the function should pro-

vide:

•

Assist the driver will receive steering

assistance but no warning.

•

Warning – the driver is only warned

through vibrations in the steering

wheel.

•

Both – the driver receives steering

assistance and a warning through

vibrations in the steering wheel.

Related information

•

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298)

Lane Keeping Aid limitations

In certain demanding driving conditions, Lane

Keeping Aid (LKA

) may not be able to prop-

erly assist the driver. In these situations, it is

recommended that the function be deacti-

vated.

Examples of such situations include:

•

road work

•

winter driving conditions

•

poor road surfaces

•

a very sporty driving style

•

bad weather with reduced visibility

•

roads with indistinct or no lane markings

•

sharp edges or lines other than the lane's

side markings

•

when speed-dependent power steering

wheel resistance is working at reduced

power – e.g. during cooling due to over-

heating.

The function cannot detect barriers, railings or

similar obstacles at the side of the lane.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Related information

•

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298)

•

Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-

tance (p. 254)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

302

Lane Keeping Aid symbols and

messages

A number of symbols and messages related

to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA

) may be dis-

played in the instrument panel. Several exam-

ples are provided below.

Symbol Message Meaning

Driver support system

Reduced functionality Service required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.

Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

303

Symbol Message Meaning

Lane Keeping Aid

Apply steering

LKA's steering assistance is disabled when the driver's hands are not on the wheel.

Follow the instructions and steer the vehicle.

Lane Keeping Aid

Standby until steering applied

LKA will go into standby mode until the driver begins steering the vehicle again.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298)

•

Lane Keeping Aid display (p. 304)

•

Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301)

DRIVER SUPPORT

304

Lane Keeping Aid display

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA

) uses symbols in

the instrument panel for various situations.

Some examples of symbols

and descriptions of the situa-

tions in which they might

appear are provided below.

Available

Available ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are

WHITE.

Lane Keeping Aid is able to detect one or both

of the traffic lane's side marker lines.

Unavailable

Unavailable ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are

GRAY.

Lane Keeping Aid is unable to detect the lane

marker lines, the vehicle's speed is too low or

the road is too narrow.

Steering/warning indicator

Steering/warning

‒

the marker lines in the symbol

are COLORED.

Indicates that the Lane Keeping Aid system is

alerting the driver and/or attempting to steer

the vehicle back into the lane.

Related information

•

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298)

•

Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301)

Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

305

City Safety™

City Safety

can alert the driver with light,

sound and pulsations in the brake pedal to

help the driver detect pedestrians, cyclists,

large animals and vehicles.

Function overview

Audible signal at risk of collision

Collision warning symbol

Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring

The function can help the driver avoid a colli-

sion in e.g. stop-and-go traffic, when changes

in the traffic ahead and driver distraction could

lead to an incident. City Safety activates a

brief, forceful braking in an attempt to stop

your vehicle immediately behind the vehicle or

object ahead.

The function assists the driver by automati-

cally applying the brakes if there is an immi-

nent risk of a collision and the driver does not

react in time by braking and/or steering away.

City Safety is activated in situations in which

the driver should have applied the brakes

much earlier, which means that the system

will not be able to assist the driver in all situa-

tions. The function is designed to be activated

as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary

intervention. Automatic braking will only be

applied after or during a collision warning.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not

be aware of City Safety except when the sys-

tem intervenes when a collision is imminent.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

City Safety sub-functions (p. 306)

•

Setting a warning distance for City Safety

(p. 308)

•

Detecting obstacles with City Safety

(p. 309)

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

306

•

City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles

(p. 313)

•

Automatic braking during delayed evasive

maneuvers with City Safety (p. 312)

•

City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 311)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

•

City Safety messages (p. 317)

City Safety sub-functions

City Safety

can help prevent a collision or

lower the vehicle's speed at the point of

impact. The function consists of several sub-

functions.

Ability to reduce speed

If the difference in speed between your vehicle

and the obstacle is greater than the speeds

specified below, the City Safety auto-brake

function cannot prevent a collision, but it can

help mitigate its effects.

Vehicles

City Safety can help prevent a collision with a

vehicle ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed

by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).

Cyclists

City Safety can help prevent a collision with a

cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed

by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).

Pedestrians

City Safety can help prevent a collision with a

pedestrian ahead by reducing your vehicle's

speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).

Large animals

If there is a risk of colliding with a large ani-

mal, City Safety can help reduce your vehicle's

speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

The braking function for large animals is pri-

marily intended to mitigate the force of a colli-

sion at higher speeds. Braking is most effec-

tive at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and

less effective at lower speeds.

City Safety steps

City Safety carries out three steps in the fol-

lowing order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake assistance

3. Auto-brake

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

307

1 - Collision warning

The driver is first alerted to the risk of an immi-

nent collision.

City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or

vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the

same direction as your vehicle and are ahead

of your vehicle. City Safety can also detect

pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are

crossing the road in front of your vehicle.

If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian,

large animal, cyclist or another vehicle, the

driver will be alerted with light, sound and pul-

sations in the brake pedal. At lower speeds,

during hard braking or if the accelerator pedal

is pressed, the brake pedal pulsation warning

will not be given. The intensity of the brake

pedal pulsations varies according to the vehi-

cle's speed.

2 - Brake assistance

If the risk of a collision increases after the colli-

sion warning, brake support will be activated.

If the system determines that the pressure the

driver is exerting on the brake pedal is insuffi-

cient to prevent the collision, brake support

will increase pressure.

3 - Auto-brake

The automatic braking function is activated at

the last moment.

If the driver has not taken evasive action by

this stage and a collision is imminent, the

automatic braking function will be triggered.

This occurs whether or not the driver is press-

ing the brake pedal. Full braking force will be

applied to reduce the speed at impact or

reduced braking effect will be applied if this is

sufficient to avoid the collision.

The seat belt tensioner may be activated when

the automatic braking function is triggered.

In certain situations, auto-braking may begin

with a limited braking force before applying

full braking force.

If City Safety has prevented a collision, the

vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the

driver takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to

avoid colliding with a slower-moving vehicle

ahead, your speed will be reduced to that vehi-

cle's speed.

Auto-braking can always be cancelled if the

driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

When City Safety activates the brakes, the

brake lights come on.

When City Safety applies the brakes, a text

message will appear in the instrument panel

to notify the driver that the function is/was

activated.

WARNING

City Safety may not be used to change

how the driver operates the vehicle. The

driver must not only rely on City Safety to

brake the vehicle.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 311)

•

City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles

(p. 313)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

•

Seat belt tensioners (p. 52)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

308

Setting a warning distance for City

Safety

City Safety

is always active, but the func-

tion's warning distance can be adjusted.

NOTE

The City Safety function cannot be deacti-

vated. It is activated automatically each

time the engine/electric motor is started.

The alert distance determines the sensitivity of

the system and regulates the distance at

which the light, sound and brake pulsations

will be activated.

To select warning distance:

1. Select

Settings My Car IntelliSafe

in the center display's Top view.

Under

City Safety Warning, tap Late,

Normal or Early to set the desired warn-

ing distance.

If the driver feels that the

Early setting is giv-

ing too many warnings or finds them irritating,

the Normal or Late warning distance settings

can be selected instead.

If the driver feels that the warnings are too fre-

quent and distracting, the warning distance

can be reduced. This will reduce the total

number of warnings, but it will also result in

City Safety providing warnings at a later stage.

The

Late warning distance setting should

therefore only be used in exceptional cases,

such as when a more dynamic driving style is

preferred.

WARNING

•

No automatic system can guarantee

100% correct function in all situations.

You should therefore never test use of

City Safety in the direction of people,

animals or vehicles – this could lead to

severe damage, serious personal injury

or even death.

•

City Safety warns the driver if there is a

risk of collision, but the function cannot

reduce the driver's reaction time.

•

Even if the warning distance has been

set to

Early, warnings may be per-

ceived as late in certain situations –

e.g. when there are large speed differ-

ences or if the vehicle ahead suddenly

brakes heavily.

•

With the warning distance set to

Early,

warnings come further in advance. This

may cause the warnings to come more

frequently than with warning distance

Normal, but is recommended since it

can make City Safety more effective.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

•

Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

309

Detecting obstacles with City

Safety

City Safety

can help the driver detect other

vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedes-

trians.

Vehicles

City Safety can detect most vehicles that are

stationary or are moving in the same direction

as your vehicle. In some cases, it can also

detect oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic.

For City Safety to be able to detect a vehicle in

the dark, its headlights and taillights must be

on and clearly visible.

Cyclists

Examples of what City Safety would interpret to be a

cyclist: clear body and bicycle shapes.

For good performance, the system's function

for cyclist detection needs the clearest possi-

ble information about the contours of the bicy-

cle and of the cyclist's head, arm, shoulders,

legs, torso and lower body in combination

with normal human movements.

If large portions of the cyclist's body or the

bicycle itself are not visible to the function's

camera, it will not be able to detect a cyclist.

The system can only detect adult cyclists rid-

ing on bicycles intended for adults.

WARNING

City Safety is supplementary driver sup-

port, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all

situations and, for example, cannot see:

•

partially obscured cyclists.

•

cyclists if the contrast to the cyclist's

background is poor.

•

cyclists in clothing that hides their

body contour.

•

bikes loaded with large objects.

Warnings and brake interventions may

occur late or not at all. The driver is always

responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is

driven correctly and with a safety distance

suitable for the speed.

Pedestrians

Examples of what the system considers to be a

pedestrian: clear body contours.

For good performance, the system's function

for pedestrian detection needs the clearest

possible information about the contours of the

pedestrian's head, arm, shoulders, legs, torso

and lower body in combination with normal

human movements.

In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be

a contrast to the background, which could

depend on clothing, weather conditions, etc. If

there is little contrast, the person may be

detected late or not at all, which may result in

a delayed reaction from the system or no reac-

tion at all.

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

310

City Safety can detect pedestrians even in

dark conditions if they are illuminated by the

vehicle's headlights.

WARNING

City Safety is supplementary driver sup-

port, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in

all situations and, for example, cannot see:

•

partially obscured pedestrians, people

in clothing that hides their body con-

tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm

(32 in.).

•

pedestrians if the contrast to the

pedestrian's background is poor.

•

pedestrians who are carrying large

objects.

Warnings and brake interventions may

occur late or not at all. The driver is always

responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is

driven correctly and with a safety distance

suitable for the speed.

Large animals

Examples of what City Safety would interpret as a

large animal: stationary or moving slowly and with

clear body contours.

For good performance, the system's function

for detecting large animals (e.g. moose,

horses, etc.) needs the clearest possible infor-

mation about body contours. This entails

being able to detect the animal straight from

the side in combination with normal move-

ments for that animal.

If parts of the animal's body are not visible to

the function's camera, the system will not be

able to detect the animal.

City Safety can detect large animals even in

dark conditions if they are illuminated by the

vehicle's headlights.

WARNING

City Safety is supplementary driver sup-

port, but it cannot detect all large animals

in all situations and, for example, cannot

see:

•

partially obscured larger animals.

•

larger animals seen from the front or

from behind.

•

running or fast moving larger animals.

•

larger animals if the contrast to the ani-

mal's background is poor.

•

smaller animals such as cats and dogs.

Warnings and brake interventions may

occur late or not at all. The driver is always

responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is

driven correctly and with a safety distance

suitable for the speed.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

311

City Safety in crossing traffic

City Safety

can assist the driver when turn-

ing into the path of an oncoming vehicle in an

intersection.

Sector in which City Safety can detect an

oncoming vehicle in crossing traffic.

In order for City Safety to detect an oncoming

vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a

collision, that vehicle must be within the sec-

tor in which City Safety can analyze the situa-

tion.

The following criteria must also be met:

•

your vehicle's speed must be at least

4 km/h (3 mph)

•

your vehicle must be making a left turn

•

the oncoming vehicle's headlights must

be on

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

Limitations of City Safety in

crossing traffic

In certain situations, it may be difficult for

City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision

with crossing traffic.

For example:

•

On slippery roads when Electronic Stabil-

ity Control (ESC) is actively operating.

•

If an approaching vehicle is detected at a

late stage.

•

If the oncoming vehicle is partially

obstructed by another vehicle or object.

•

If the oncoming vehicle's headlights are

off.

•

If the oncoming vehicle is moving errati-

cally and e.g. suddenly changes lanes at a

late stage.

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

312

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Related information

•

City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 311)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Automatic braking during delayed

evasive maneuvers with City

Safety

City Safety

can assist the driver by auto-

matically braking the vehicle when it is not

possible to avoid a collision by steering alone.

City Safety assists the driver by periodically

attempting to predict possible "escape

routes" to the sides of the vehicle in the event

a slow-moving or stationary vehicle were to be

detected at a late stage.

Your vehicle (1) cannot detect any potential escape

routes for veering away from the vehicle ahead (2)

and may therefore apply the brakes at an earlier

stage.

Own vehicle

Slow-moving/stationary vehicles

City Safety will not intervene to automatically

apply the brakes if it is possible for the driver

to avoid a collision by steering the vehicle.

However, if City Safety determines that an

evasive maneuver would not be possible due

to traffic in the adjacent lane(s), the function

can assist the driver by automatically starting

to apply the brakes at an earlier stage.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

313

City Safety braking for oncoming

vehicles

City Safety can help you apply the brakes for

an oncoming vehicle in your lane.

If an oncoming vehicle veers into your lane

and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can

help reduce your vehicle's speed to attempt to

mitigate the force of the collision.

Own vehicle

Oncoming vehicles

The following criteria must be met for the

function to work:

•

your vehicle's speed must be above

4 km/h (3 mph)

•

the road must be straight

•

your lane must have clear side lane mark-

ings

•

your vehicle must be positioned straight in

your lane

•

the oncoming vehicle must be positioned

within your vehicle's lane markings

•

the oncoming vehicle's headlights must

be on

•

the function can only handle “front-to-

front” collisions

•

the function can only detect vehicles with

four wheels.

WARNING

Warnings and brake interventions due to

an imminent collision with an oncoming

vehicle always come very late.

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

City Safety limitations (p. 313)

City Safety limitations

City Safety

functionality may be reduced in

certain situations.

Surroundings

Low objects

Hanging objects, such as flags for overhang-

ing loads or accessories such as auxiliary

lights or front protective grids that extend

beyond the height of the hood, may limit City

Safety functionality.

Slippery road conditions

The extended braking distance on slippery

roads may reduce City Safety's capacity to

help avoid a collision. In these types of situa-

tions, the Anti-lock Braking System and Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC

) are designed

for optimal braking power with maintained

stability.

Backlighting

The visual warning signal in the windshield

may be difficult to detect in bright sunlight, if

there are reflections, or if the driver is wearing

sunglasses or not looking straight ahead.

Heat

If the temperature in the passenger compart-

ment is high due to e.g. bright sunlight, the

visual warning signal in the windshield may be

temporarily disabled.

This function is not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

314

Camera and radar sensor's field of vision

The camera's field of vision is limited and in

certain situations, it may be unable to detect

pedestrians, large animals, cyclists or vehicles,

or it may detect them later than expected.

Vehicles that are dirty may be detected later

than clean vehicles, and in dark conditions,

motorcycles may be detected late or not at all.

If a text message displayed in the instrument

panel indicates that the camera or radar sen-

sor is obstructed, it may be difficult for City

Safety to detect pedestrians, large animals,

cyclists, vehicles or lane markings in front of

the vehicle. City Safety functionality may

therefore be reduced.

Text messages may not be displayed for all sit-

uations in which the windshield sensors are

blocked. The driver must therefore always

keep the windshield in front of the camera/

radar sensor clean.

CAUTION

Only a workshop may perform mainte-

nance on driver support components – an

authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Driver intervention

Backing up

City Safety is temporarily deactivated when

the vehicle is backing up.

Low speed

City Safety is not activated at very low speeds

under 4 km/h (3 mph). The system will there-

fore not intervene in situations in which your

vehicle is approaching another vehicle very

slowly, such as when parking.

Active driver

Action by the driver always has priority. City

Safety will therefore not react or will react at a

later stage with a warning or intervention in

situations in which the driver is clearly steering

and operating the accelerator pedal, even if a

collision is unavoidable.

An active and aware driving style may there-

fore delay collision warnings and intervention

in order to minimize unnecessary warnings.

Important warnings

WARNING

The driver support system only issues a

warning for obstacles detected by its radar

sensor – thus, a warning may come after a

delay or not at all.

•

Never wait for a warning or assistance.

Apply the brakes when necessary.

Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

315

WARNING

•

Warnings and brake interventions can

be triggered late or not at all if the traf-

fic situation or external influences pre-

vent the camera and radar unit from

properly detecting pedestrians,

cyclists, large animals or vehicles

ahead of the vehicle.

•

To be able to detect vehicles at night,

its front and rear lights must work and

illuminate clearly.

•

The camera and radar unit have a lim-

ited range for pedestrians and cyclists

– the system can provide effective

warnings and brake interventions if the

relative speed is lower than 50 km/h

(30 mph). For stationary or slow-mov-

ing vehicles, warnings and brake inter-

ventions are effective at vehicle speeds

of up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed

reduction for large animals is less than

15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved

at vehicle speeds over 70 km/h

(43 mph). At lower speeds, the warn-

ing and brake intervention for large ani-

mals is less effective.

•

Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-

ing vehicles and large animals can be

disengaged due to darkness or poor

visibility.

•

Warnings and brake interventions for

pedestrians and cyclists are disen-

gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h

(50 mph).

•

Do not place, affix or mount anything

on the inside or outside of the wind-

shield, or in front of or around the cam-

era and radar unit – this could disrupt

camera-based functions.

•

Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of

the camera sensor can reduce the

function, disengage it completely or

give an improper function response.

WARNING

•

The City Safety auto-brake function

can prevent a collision or reduce colli-

sion speed, but to ensure full brake

performance the driver should always

depress the brake pedal – even when

the car auto-brakes.

•

The warning is only activated if there is

a high risk of collision – you must

therefore never wait for a collision

warning.

•

Warnings and brake interventions for

pedestrians and cyclists are disen-

gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h

(50 mph).

•

City Safety does not activate auto-

braking intervention during heavy

acceleration.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Market limitations

City Safety is not available in all countries. If

City Safety is not shown in the center display's

Settings menu, your vehicle is not equipped

with this function.

DRIVER SUPPORT

316

In the center display's Top view, tap:

•

Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

DRIVER SUPPORT

317

City Safety messages

A number of messages related to City Safety

may be displayed in the instrument panel.

Several examples are provided below.

Message Meaning

City Safety

Automatic intervention

When City Safety is braking or has activated the automatic braking function, one or more symbols may

illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message may be displayed.

City Safety

Reduced functionality Service

required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

City Safety™ (p. 305)

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
318
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
The 
Collision avoidance function can help
the driver reduce the risk of the vehicle leav-
ing its lane unintentionally and/or colliding
with another vehicle or obstacle by actively
steering the vehicle back into its lane and/or
swerving.
The function consists of these subfunctions:
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-
tance
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind*
After the system has automatically intervened,
this text message will appear in the instru-
ment panel:
Collision avoidance – Automatic
intervention
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
•
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
It is always the driver who must decide
how much the vehicle should be in control
– the vehicle can never take command.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Activating or deactivating steering assis-
tance during collision risks (p. 319)
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-
tance (p. 319)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic (p. 320)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind* (p. 321)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
limitations (p. 322)
•
Symbols and messages for steering assis-
tance during collision risks (p. 323)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

319

Activating or deactivating steering

assistance during collision risks

The steering assistance function is optional –

the driver can choose to have it activated or

deactivated.

Activate or deactivate the

function using this button in

the center display's Function

view.

•

GREEN button indicator light – the func-

tion is activated.

•

GRAY button indicator light – the function

is deactivated.

The function is automatically activated each

time the engine is started

NOTE

When the Collision avoidance function is

deactivated, all subfunctions of the follow-

ing are deactivated:

•

Steering assistance at risk of run-off

•

Steering assistance at risk of head-on

collision

•

Steering assistance during collision

risks from behind*

Although it is possible to deactivate the

function, the driver is advised to keep it

activated since it can help improve driving

safety in most cases.

Related information

•

Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 318)

•

Steering assistance during collision risks

limitations (p. 322)

Run-Off Mitigation with steering

assistance

Steering assistance has several sub-func-

tions. Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-

tance can help the driver and reduce the risk

of the vehicle inadvertently running off the

road by actively steering the vehicle back

onto the road.

This function has two activation levels for

intervention:

•

Steering assistance only

•

Steering assistance with braking

Steering assistance only

Intervention with steering assistance

On some markets, the setting that was active when the engine was switched off is reactivated.

DRIVER SUPPORT

320

Steering assistance with braking

Intervention with steering assistance and braking

Braking intervention assists in situations

where steering assistance alone is not suffi-

cient. Braking force is automatically adapted

according to the situation at the moment the

vehicle begins to run off the road.

The function is active at speeds between

65140 km/h (4087 mph) on roads with

clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines.

The system uses a camera to monitor the

edges of the road and the painted side marker

lines. If the vehicle is about to cross the edge

of the road, the function will attempt to steer

the vehicle back onto the road. If this is not

sufficient to keep the vehicle on the road, the

brakes will also be applied.

However, the function will not provide either

steering assistance or braking if the turn signal

is used. The function will also not be activated

if it detects that the driver is actively operating

the vehicle.

Related information

•

Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 318)

•

Steering assistance during collision risks

limitations (p. 322)

Steering assistance during

collision risks from oncoming

traffic

Steering assistance has several sub-func-

tions. Steering assistance during collision

risks from oncoming traffic can help a dis-

tracted driver who has not noticed that the

vehicle is veering out of the lane.

The function provides assistance by swerving your

vehicle back into your own lane.

Oncoming vehicles

Own vehicle

When steering assistance is activated, colli-

sion warning for driver support will also be

activated. However, the brake pedal pulsa-

tions that are part of collision warning will not

be activated.

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
321
The function is active at speeds between
60140 km/h (3787 mph) on roads with
clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines.
If your vehicle is starting to veer from your
own lane and a vehicle is approaching from
the opposite direction, this function can help
the driver steer the vehicle back into its own
lane.
However, the function will not provide steer-
ing assistance if the turn signal is used. The
function will also not be activated if it detects
that the driver is actively operating the vehicle.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 318)
•
Collision risk warning from driver support
(p. 293)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
limitations (p. 322)
Steering assistance during
collision risks from behind*
Steering assistance has several sub-func-
tions. If you become distracted and do not
notice your vehicle starting to veer out of the
lane while another vehicle is approaching
from behind or is in your vehicle's blind spot,
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind can help provide assistance.
The function provides assistance by steering your
vehicle back into your own lane.
Another vehicle in blind spot zone
Own vehicle
If your vehicle is beginning to veer out of your
lane while another vehicle is in your blind spot
or another vehicle is rapidly approaching in the
next lane, this function can help the driver
steer the vehicle back into its own lane.
Even if the driver intentionally changes lanes
using a turn signal without noticing another
vehicle approaching, the function can provide
assistance.
The function is active at speeds between
60140 km/h (3787 mph) on roads with
clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines.
The lights in the door mirrors will flash while
steering assistance is being provided, whether
or not the BLIS
80
 function is activated. An
audible signal will also sound.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 318)
•
BLIS* (p. 325)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
limitations (p. 322)
80
Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
322
Steering assistance during
collision risks limitations
The function may have limited functionality in
certain situations and not intervene, e.g.:
•
for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles
•
if more than half of your vehicle has
moved into the adjacent lane
•
on roads/lanes with indistinct or no side
lane markings
•
outside the speed range 60140 km/h
(3787 mph)
•
when speed-dependent power steering
wheel resistance is working at reduced
power – e.g. during cooling due to over-
heating.
Functionality may also be reduced in other sit-
uations, such as:
•
road work
•
winter driving conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surfaces
•
a very sporty driving style
•
bad weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding driving conditions, the
function may not be able to properly assist the
driver. In these situations, it is recommended
that it is turned off.
NOTE
The function uses the vehicle's camera and
radar sensor, which has certain general
limitations.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 318)
•
Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis-
tance (p. 319)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from oncoming traffic (p. 320)
•
Steering assistance during collision risks
from behind* (p. 321)

DRIVER SUPPORT

323

Symbols and messages for

steering assistance during collision

risks

A number of symbols and messages related

to steering assistance may be displayed in

the instrument panel. Several examples are

provided below.

Symbol Message Meaning

Collision avoidance

Automatic intervention

When the function is activated, a message will appear to alert the driver.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒

an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 318)

•

Steering assistance during collision risks

limitations (p. 322)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

324

Rear Collision Warning*

The Rear Collision Warning

(RCW) function

can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions

from vehicles approaching from behind.

The function can alert drivers of following vehi-

cles of the risk of a collision by rapidly flashing

the turn signals.

If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the

function detects that the vehicle is in danger

of being hit from behind, the seat belt tension-

ers may tension the front seat belts. The

Whiplash Protection System will also be acti-

vated in a collision.

Immediately before a collision from behind,

the function may also activate the brakes in

order to reduce the forward acceleration of the

vehicle during the collision. However, the

brakes will only be applied if your vehicle is

stationary. The brakes will be immediately

released if the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The function is automatically activated each

time the engine is started.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Rear Collision Warning* limitations

(p. 324)

•

Whiplash Protection System (p. 48)

Rear Collision Warning*

limitations

In some situations, it may be difficult for Rear

Collision Warning (RCW) to warn the driver

of a collision risk.

This may be the case if:

•

the vehicle approaching from the rear is

detected at a late stage

•

the vehicle approaching from the rear

changes lanes at a late stage

•

a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-

nected to the vehicle's electrical system -

the function will then be automatically

deactivated.

NOTE

In certain markets RCW does not warn

with the direction indicators due to local

traffic regulations – in such cases, that part

of the function is deactivated.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Warning of collision from the rear.

This function is not available on all markets.

Warning of collision from the rear.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

325

Related information

•

Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)

•

Setting a warning distance for City Safety

(p. 308)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

BLIS*

The BLIS

function is designed to help pro-

vide assistance in heavy traffic with several

lanes moving in the same direction by helping

the driver to detect the presence of vehicles

in the "blind spot" area behind and to the side

of the vehicle.

Location of BLIS indicator light

BLIS is a driver support system designed to

alert the driver of:

•

vehicles in your "blind spot"

•

vehicles approaching rapidly in adjacent

lanes.

BLIS overview

Blind spot zone

Rapidly approaching vehicle zone

The system is designed to react to:

•

vehicles passing your vehicle

•

vehicles that are rapidly approaching your

vehicle from behind.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a

rapidly approaching vehicle in zone 2, an indi-

cator light will illuminate in the relevant rear-

view mirror and glow steadily. If the driver

then uses the turn signal on the side in which

the warning has been given, the indicator light

will become brighter and begin flashing.

BLIS is active when your vehicle is traveling at

a speed over 10 km/h (6 mph).

Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

326

If a passing vehicle's speed is more than

15 km/h (9 mph) faster than your vehicle, BLIS

will not react.

NOTE

The light illuminates on the side of the

vehicle where the system has detected the

vehicle. If the vehicle is passed on both

sides simultaneously, both lights come on.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 326)

•

BLIS limitations (p. 327)

•

BLIS messages (p. 328)

Activating or deactivating BLIS

The BLIS

function can be activated or deac-

tivated.

Activate or deactivate the

function using this button in

the center display's Function

view.

•

GREEN button indicator light – the func-

tion is activated.

•

GRAY button indicator light – the function

is deactivated.

If BLIS is activated when the engine is started,

the indicator lights in the rearview mirrors will

flash once.

If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is

turned off, it will remain off the next time the

engine is started and the indicator lights will

not illuminate.

Related information

•

BLIS* (p. 325)

•

BLIS limitations (p. 327)

Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

327

BLIS limitations

BLIS

functionality may be reduced in cer-

tain situations.

Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and

right sides of the vehicle)

Examples of limitations:

•

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

may reduce functionality and prevent the

system from providing warnings.

•

The BLIS function is automatically deacti-

vated if a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is

connected to the vehicle's electrical sys-

tem.

•

For BLIS to function effectively, bicycle

holders, luggage racks or similar should

not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

WARNING

•

BLIS does not work in sharp curves.

•

BLIS does not work when the vehicle

is being reversed.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's radar sen-

sors, which have certain general limita-

tions.

Related information

•

BLIS* (p. 325)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Blind Spot Information

Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

328

BLIS messages

A number of messages related to BLIS

may

be displayed in the instrument panel. Several

examples are provided below.

Message Meaning

Blind spot sensor

Service required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

Blind spot system off

Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA

have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Cross Traffic Alert*

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

BLIS* (p. 325)

•

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331)

Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

329

Driver Alert Control

The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is

designed to help alert the driver to erratic

behavior, e.g. if the driver is distracted or

showing signs of fatigue.

The objective of the function is to detect

slowly deteriorating driving behavior and is

primarily intended to be used on major roads.

The function is not intended for use in city traf-

fic.

DAC is activated when the vehicle's speed

exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains

active as long as speeds are above 60 km/h

(37 mph).

Driver Alert Control detects the vehicle's position in

the traffic lane.

A camera monitors the traffic lane's marker

lines and compares the direction of the road

with the driver's movements of the steering

wheel.

The vehicle is moving erratically in the lane.

If driving behavior becomes

considerably erratic, the

driver will be alerted by this

symbol in the instrument

panel, an audible signal and

the message

Time for a

break.

If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus

Navigation* and the

Rest Stop Guidance

function is activated, suggestions will also be

provided for suitable places to take a break.

The warning will be repeated after a short time

if driving behavior does not improve.

WARNING

Driver Alert Control must not be used to

extend a period of driving. The driver

should plan in breaks at regular intervals

and make sure they are well rested.

WARNING

An alarm from Driver Alert Control should

be taken very seriously since a sleepy driver

is often not aware of their own condition.

If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:

•

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos-

sible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is just as dan-

gerous to drive while tired as it is to drive

under the influence of alcohol or other

stimulants.

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
330
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
•
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Activating or deactivating Driver Alert
Control (p. 330)
•
Selecting guidance to a rest area if the
Driver Alert Control warning has been
given (p. 330)
•
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 331)
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can
be activated or deactivated.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Select 
My Car IntelliSafe Driver
Alert
.
3.
Select/deselect 
Alertness Warning to
activate/deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 329)
•
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 331)
Selecting guidance to a rest area if
the Driver Alert Control warning
has been given
In vehicles equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide
that can automatically suggest a suitable rest
stop if the Driver Alert Control (DAC) warning
is given.
The Rest Stop Guidance function can be
switched on or off.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Select 
My Car IntelliSafe Driver
Alert
.
3.
Select/deselect 
Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 329)
•
Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 331)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

331

Driver Alert Control limitations

Driver Alert Control (DAC) functionality may

be reduced in certain situations.

In certain situations, the system may provide a

warning even if it has not detected a change in

driving behavior, e.g.:

•

in strong crosswinds

•

on grooved road surfaces.

WARNING

In certain cases, driving behavior might not

be affected despite the driver's fatigue –

when using the Pilot Assist* function –

resulting in the driver not getting a warning

from DAC.

It is therefore very important to always

stop and take a break at the slightest sign

of fatigue, regardless of whether the func-

tion has issued a warning or not.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's camera and

radar sensor, which has certain general

limitations.

Related information

•

Driver Alert Control (p. 329)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Cross Traffic Alert*

Cross Traffic Alert(CTA) is a supplementary

driver support system to BLIS

that is

intended to help the driver detect vehicles

crossing behind the vehicle while backing up.

The auto-brake subfunction can help the

driver stop the car if there is a risk of collision

with an unobserved vehicle.

Examples of areas in which Cross Traffic Alert can

help the driver detect obstacles while backing up.

The function is primarily designed to detect

vehicles, but in certain cases can also detect

pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy-

cles.

The function is only active when the vehicle is

moving backward or reverse gear is engaged.

If the function detects that something is

approaching your vehicle from the side:

•

an audible signal will sound from either

the left or right speaker, depending on

which side of your vehicle the object is

approaching from.

•

an icon will illuminate in the

Park Assist

System graphic on the screen.

•

an icon will appear in the Park Assist Cam-

era's Top view.

Illuminated Cross Traffic Alert icon in the Park

Assist System graphic on the screen.

If the driver does not pay attention to the

warning from the function and a collision is

unavoidable, the auto brake function will

intervene to stop the vehicle and a text will be

Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

Blind Spot Information

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
332
shown on the instrument panel to explain why
the vehicle was braked.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
•
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert* (p. 332)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 333)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* messages (p. 334)
•
BLIS* (p. 325)
•
Park Assist* (p. 335)
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*
91
The driver can choose to deactivate the Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA) function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the center display's Function
view.
•
GREEN button indicator light – the func-
tion is activated.
•
GRAY button indicator light – the function
is deactivated.
The function is automatically activated each
time the engine is started.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 333)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* messages (p. 334)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

333

Cross Traffic Alert*

limitations

The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with

auto brake may have limited functionality in

certain situations. Auto-brake is active at

speeds under 15 km/h (9.3 mph).

WARNING

The auto-brake sub-function can only

detect and apply the brakes for other mov-

ing vehicles – not for e.g. stationary obsta-

cles, cyclists or pedestrians.

The function has certain limitations – the sen-

sors, for example, cannot "see" through other

parked vehicles or objects blocking the vehi-

cle.

Below are a few examples of situations in

which the function's field of vision may be ini-

tially limited and approaching vehicles may

therefore not be detected until they are very

close to your vehicle:

The vehicle is parked very far into a parking space.

In a diagonal parking space, Cross Traffic Alert may

be completely "blind" on one side of your vehicle.

Blind zone.

The function's field of vision.

However, as you back your vehicle slowly out

of a parking space, CTA's field of vision

changes in relation to the obstructing vehicle/

object and its blind zone is reduced.

Examples of further limitations

•

The auto brake subfunction only detects

vehicles in motion and may therefore not

"see" and brake for e.g. stationary obsta-

cles, a cyclists or a pedestrian.

•

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

may reduce functionality and prevent the

system from providing warnings.

•

CTA is automatically deactivated if a

trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con-

nected to the vehicle's electrical system.

•

For CTA to function effectively, bicycle

holders, luggage racks or similar should

not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

NOTE

The function uses the vehicle's radar sen-

sors, which have certain general limita-

tions.

Related information

•

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

334

Cross Traffic Alert*

messages

A number of messages related to Cross

Traffic Alert (CTA) may be displayed in the

instrument panel. Several examples are provi-

ded below.

Message Meaning

Blind spot sensor

Service required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

Blind spot system off

Trailer attached

BLIS

and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Blind Spot Information System

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331)

•

BLIS* (p. 325)

•

Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 333)

Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

335

Park Assist*

The Park Assist function (PAS

) uses sen-

sors to help the driver when maneuvering in

tight spaces by indicating distances to obsta-

cles using audible signals and graphics in the

center display.

Display view showing obstacle zones and sensor

sectors.

The center display shows an overview of the

vehicle in relation to objects that have been

detected.

The marked sector indicates where the obsta-

cle is located. The closer the vehicle symbol is

to a marked sector forward/rearward, the

closer the detected obstacle is to your vehicle.

The side sectors change color as the distance

between the vehicle and an object decreases.

The audible signals will also speed up the

closer the obstacle is to the vehicle. The vol-

ume of the audio system will be automatically

lowered.

Audible signals for obstacles in front and to

the sides of the vehicle are active when the

vehicle is moving but will cease after the vehi-

cle has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds.

Audible signals for obstacles behind the vehi-

cle will remain active even when the vehicle is

stationary.

If a detected obstacle is within approx. 30 cm

(1 ft) from the front or rear of the vehicle, the

tone will become constant and the active sen-

sor field closest to the vehicle symbol will be

filled in.

At distances within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)

from an obstacle to the sides of the vehicle, an

rapid pulsing signal will be given and the

active sector fields will change color from

ORANGE to RED.

The volume of the Park Assist audible signals

can be adjusted while the signal is being given

using the >II knob or in the center display's

Top view under

Settings.

NOTE

Besides in the sector closest to the vehicle

symbol, audible warnings are only provided

for objects located directly in the vehicle's

path.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Park Assist System

||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
336
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Park Assist front, rear and sides* (p. 336)
•
Activating or deactivating Park Assist*
(p. 337)
•
Park Assist symbols and messages
(p. 339)
•
Park Assist limitations (p. 338)
Park Assist front, rear and sides*
Park Assist (PAS
95
) behaves differently
depending on which part of the vehicle is
approaching an obstacle.
Front camera
The warning signal has a continuous tone when the
obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the
vehicle.
The Park Assist system's front sensors are
automatically activated when the engine is
started. They are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The distance monitored extends
approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the vehicle.
NOTE
The Park Assist system is deactivated
when the parking brake is used or when P
is selected on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
CAUTION
When installing auxiliary lights: Make sure
these do not obscure the sensors – the
auxiliary lights could be perceived as an
obstacle.
Back
The warning signal has a continuous tone when the
obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the
vehicle.
95
Park Assist System

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

337

The rear sensors will be activated if the vehicle

begins rolling backward or if reverse gear is

engaged.

The distance monitored extends

approx. 1.5 meters (5 ft) behind the vehicle.

The Park Assist system's rear sensors will be

automatically deactivated if the vehicle is

backing up with a trailer connected to the

vehicle's electrical system.

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike

carrier on the trailer hitch – without Volvo

original trailer cables – the Parking Assist

system may have to be turned off manually

to prevent the sensors from reacting to

these.

Side sensors

The warning signal will begin pulsating rapidly when

the obstacle is less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from

the vehicle.

Park Assist's side sensors are automatically

activated when the engine is started. They are

active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).

The distance monitored is approx. 25 cm

(0.8 ft) out from the sides.

The detection area of the side sensors increa-

ses significantly, however, when the steering

angle of the front wheel increases and

depending on the position of the steering

wheel, obstacles up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft)

diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle can

be detected.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 335)

•

Park Assist sensor field (p. 345)

Activating or deactivating Park

Assist*

The Park Assist function (PAS

) can be acti-

vated or deactivated.

Park Assist's front and side sensors are auto-

matically activated when the engine is started.

The rear sensors are activated if the vehicle is

moving backward or reverse gear is engaged.

Activate or deactivate the

function using this button in

the center display's Function

view.

•

GREEN button indicator light – the func-

tion is activated.

•

GRAY button indicator light – the function

is deactivated.

In vehicles equipped with Park Assist Cam-

era*, Park Assist can also be activated or deac-

tivated from the relevant camera view.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 335)

•

Park Assist limitations (p. 338)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

338

Park Assist limitations

Park Assist (PAS

) may not be able to detect

all conditions in all situations and functional-

ity may therefore be limited in certain cases.

The driver should be aware of the following

limitations for Park Assist:

WARNING

•

The parking sensors have dead/blind

spots where objects cannot be

detected.

•

Pay particular attention to people and

animals near the vehicle.

•

Bear in mind that the front end of the

vehicle may swing out towards oncom-

ing traffic during the parking maneuver.

WARNING

Be extra cautious when

reversing if this symbol is

shown when a trailer, bike

carrier or similar is

attached and electrically

connected to the vehicle.

The symbol indicates that

the rear parking assist sensors are deacti-

vated and will not warn of any obstacles.

CAUTION

Objects such as chains, thin and glossy

poles or low obstacles may end up in the

"signal shadow" and then go temporarily

undetected by the sensors – the pulsating

tone may then unexpectedly stop instead

of becoming a constant tone as expected.

The sensors cannot detect high objects,

such as protruding ramps.

•

In such situations, pay extra attention

and maneuver/drive the vehicle very

slowly or stop the current parking

maneuver – there may be a high risk of

damage to the vehicle or other objects

since information from the sensors is

not always reliable in such situations.

CAUTION

In some circumstances, the Park Assist

System may produce false warnings due to

external sound sources with the same

ultrasonic frequencies as those the system

works with.

Examples of such sources are horns, wet

tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust

noise from motorcycles, etc.

NOTE

When a trailer hitch is configured with the

vehicle electrical system, the trailer hitch

protrusion is included when the function

measures the distance to objects behind

the vehicle.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 335)

Park Assist System

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

339

Park Assist symbols and messages

Symbols and messages for the Park Assist

system (PAS

) may be displayed in the

instrument panel and/or the center display.

Several examples are provided below.

Symbol Message Meaning

The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings for obstacles/

objects will be provided.

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as

possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 335)

•

Park Assist limitations (p. 338)

Park Assist System

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

340

Park Assist Camera*

The Park Assist Camera (PAC

) can assist

the driver when maneuvering in tight spaces

by indicating obstacles using the camera

screen and graphics in the center display.

The Park Assist Camera is a support function

that is automatically activated when reverse

gear is engaged. It can also be started man-

ually from the center display.

Example camera view.

Zoom

100

- zoom in/out

360° view* - activate/deactivate all cam-

eras

PAS

101

– activates/deactivates Park Assist

system sensors

Lines - activate/deactivate trajectory lines

Towbar* - activate/deactivate trajectory

lines for towbar*

102

CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic

Alert

Objects/obstacles may be closer to the vehicle

than they appear on the display.

WARNING

•

The parking sensors have dead/blind

spots where objects cannot be

detected.

•

Pay particular attention to people and

animals near the vehicle.

•

Bear in mind that the front end of the

vehicle may swing out towards oncom-

ing traffic during the parking maneuver.

Park Assist Camera

100

The trajectory lines will not be displayed when zooming in.

101

Park Assist System

102

Not available for all models and markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
341
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and help make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual about this
function to learn of its limitations,
which the driver must be aware of
before using the function.
•
Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgment. The driver is always respon-
sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven
in a safe manner, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Driver support systems (p. 254)
•
Location and field of vision of Park Assist
Cameras* (p. 341)
•
Park Assist Camera trajectory lines*
(p. 343)
•
Park Assist sensor field (p. 345)
•
Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 346)
•
Park Assist Camera symbols and mes-
sages (p. 348)
•
Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)
•
Park Assist* (p. 335)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331)
Location and field of vision of Park
Assist Cameras*
The Park Assist Cameras (PAC
103
) can display
a 360° panoramic view as well as separate
views for each of the four cameras: rear,
front, left and right.
103
Park Assist Camera

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

342

360° view*

The location of the cameras and their approximate

fields of vision.

The 360° view function activates all Park

Assist Cameras and all four sides of the vehi-

cle are shown in the center display at once to

help the driver see what is around the vehicle

while maneuvering at low speeds.

From the 360° view, each camera view can

be activated separately:

•

Tap the screen to select the camera's field

of vision, e.g. in the area in front/above the

front camera.

The active cameras will be

indicated by a camera symbol

on the vehicle symbol in the

center display.

If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist

System*, the distance to detected obstacles

will be illustrated by fields in different colors.

The cameras can be activated automatically or

manually.

Back

The rear camera is located above the license plate.

The rear camera shows a wide area behind the

vehicle. On certain models, part of the bumper

and the towbar (if installed) may be visible.

Objects on the center display may appear to

be leaning slightly. This is normal.

Front camera

The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille.

The front camera can be useful when pulling

out from areas with limited visibility, such as

when pulling out of a garage. The front camera

is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph)

and is automatically turned off when the vehi-

cle exceeds this speed.

If the vehicle does not reach a speed of

50 km/h (30 mph) and speed falls below

22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the

front camera turns off, the camera will be

reactivated.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

343

Side cameras

The side cameras are located in the rearview mirrors.

The side cameras can show views along each

side of the vehicle.

Related information

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

•

Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 346)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Park Assist Camera trajectory

lines*

The Park Assist Cameras (PAC

104

) use trajec-

tory lines and fields on the screen to indicate

the vehicle's position in relation to its imme-

diate surroundings.

Example of trajectory lines

The trajectory lines show the anticipated tra-

jectory for the vehicle's outermost dimensions

based on the current position of the steering

wheel and can help simplify parallel parking,

backing into tight spaces or attaching a trailer.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they

were painted lines on the ground behind the

vehicle and are directly affected by the way in

which the steering wheel is turned. This

makes it possible for the driver to see path the

vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the

steering wheel.

These lines also indicate the outermost limits

that any object (towbar, rearview mirrors, cor-

ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the

vehicle.

NOTE

•

When reversing with a trailer that is

not electrically connected to the vehi-

cle, the screen guide lines show the

path the vehicle will take – not the

trailer.

•

The screen does not show guide lines

when a trailer is electrically connected

to the vehicle's electrical system.

•

Guide lines are not shown when zoom-

ing in.

104

Park Assist Camera

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

344

CAUTION

•

Bear in mind that when the rearward

camera view is selected, the screen

only shows the area behind the vehicle

– pay attention to the sides and front

of the vehicle when steering while

reversing.

•

The same applies to the reverse – pay

attention to what is happening with

the rear parts of the vehicle when the

front camera view is selected.

•

Note that the guide lines show the

shortest path – pay extra attention to

ensure that the vehicle sides do not

come in contact with/travel over any-

thing when steering while driving for-

ward or that the vehicle front moves

toward/over anything when steering

while reversing.

Trajectory lines in 360° view*

360° view with trajectory lines

In the 360° view, trajectory lines are shown

behind, in front of, or to the sides of the vehi-

cle, depending on the direction of travel.

•

When driving forward: Front lines

•

When backing up: Side lines and rear lines

When the front or rear camera is selected, the

trajectory lines will be shown regardless of the

vehicle's direction of travel.

With a side camera selected, the trajectory

lines will only be shown if the vehicle is back-

ing up.

Trajectory lines for a towbar*

Towbar with trajectory line

Towbar - activate trajectory lines for tow-

bar.

Zoom - zoom in/out.

To use the camera when hitching a trailer:

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

345

Tap

Towbar (1).

> The trajectory line for the towbar's

anticipated path toward the vehicle will

appear and the vehicle's trajectory lines

will disappear.

Trajectory lines cannot be displayed for

both the vehicle and the towbar at the

same time.

Tap

Zoom (2) for a close-up view for more

precise maneuvering.

> The camera will zoom in.

Related information

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

•

Location and field of vision of Park Assist

Cameras* (p. 341)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Park Assist sensor field

If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist

(PAS

105

), distances will be shown in the Park

Assist Camera's (PAC

106

) 360° view with col-

ored fields for each sensor that has detected

an obstacle.

Front and rear sensors

The screen can display colored sensor fields on the

vehicle symbol.

The front and rear fields change colors (from

YELLOW to ORANGE to RED) as the vehicle

moves closer to an obstacle.

Field color

rearward

Distance in meters

(feet)

Yellow 0.61.5 (2.04.9)

Orange 0.30.6 (1.02.0)

Red 00.3 (01.0)

Field color for-

ward

Distance in meters

(feet)

Yellow 0.60.8 (2.02.6)

Orange 0.30.6 (1.02.0)

Red 00.3 (01.0)

When the sensor field color is red, the audible

pulsing sounds will change to a continuous

tone.

105

Park Assist System

106

Park Assist Camera

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

346

Side sensor fields

Warning signals vary depending on the vehi-

cle's intended direction of travel. Depending

on the steering wheel position, warnings may

be given for obstacles diagonally in front of or

behind the vehicle, not only directly behind the

vehicle.

Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be

detected.

Left-side front sensor field

Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended

direction of travel forward – varies accord-

ing to steering wheel position

Sector with RED field color and rapidly

pulsing tone

Right-side rear sensor field

Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended

direction of travel rearward – varies

according to steering wheel position.

The color of the side field changes as the vehi-

cle moves closer to the object – from YEL-

LOW to RED.

Side field

color

Distance in meters

(feet)

Yellow 0.250.9 (0.83.0)

Red 00.25 (00.8)

When the sensor field is RED, the audible

pulsing signal will become more rapid.

Related information

•

Park Assist* (p. 335)

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

•

Location and field of vision of Park Assist

Cameras* (p. 341)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

Activating Park Assist Camera

The Park Assist Camera (PAC

107

) is automati-

cally activated when reverse gear is engaged

or can be started manually using one of the

center display's function buttons.

Camera view when backing up

When reverse gear is engaged, the screen

shows the rear view

108

Camera view when manually

activating the camera

Activate the Park Assist Cam-

era using this button in the

center display's Function

view.

The screen will first show the

most recently used camera

view. However, each time the engine is

started, the previous side view will be replaced

by the 360° view and a previously displayed

zoomed-in rear view will be replaced by the

regular rear view.

•

GREEN button indicator light – the func-

tion is activated.

•

GRAY button indicator light – the function

is deactivated.

107

Park Assist Camera

108

In Canada, it is also possible to choose the 360° view. For the US, rear view is standard and cannot be changed.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

347

Automatically deactivating the camera

Front view switches off when the vehicle's

speed reaches 25 km/h (16 mph) to help avoid

distracting the driver. It will be automatically

reactivated if the vehicle's speed falls below

22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute as long as

the vehicle's speed has not exceeded 50 km/h

(31 mph).

Other camera views switch off at 15 km/h

(9 mph) and are not reactivated.

Related information

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

•

Park Assist limitations (p. 338)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

DRIVER SUPPORT

348

Park Assist Camera symbols and

messages

Symbols and messages for the Park Assist

Camera (PAC

109

) may be displayed in the

instrument panel and/or the center display.

Several examples are provided below.

Symbol Message Meaning

The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings or field markings for

obstacles/objects will be provided.

The camera is not functioning properly.

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-

ded

One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as

possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

109

Park Assist Camera

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

349

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

350

Park Assist Pilot*

Park Assist Pilot (PAP

110

) can help the driver

maneuver the vehicle when parking. The

function can also assist with steering when

pulling out from a parallel parking space.

The function first checks whether there is suf-

ficient space and then helps the driver steer

the vehicle into the space.

The center display uses symbols, graphics and

messages to inform the driver of what steps

need to be taken and when.

WARNING

•

The function is supplementary driver

support intended to facilitate driving

and help make it safer – it cannot han-

dle all situations in all traffic, weather

and road conditions.

•

The driver is advised to read all sec-

tions in the Owner's Manual about this

function to learn of its limitations,

which the driver must be aware of

before using the function.

•

Driver support functions are not a sub-

stitute for the driver's attention and

judgment. The driver is always respon-

sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven

in a safe manner, at the appropriate

speed, with an appropriate distance to

other vehicles, and in accordance with

current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Types of parking with Park Assist Pilot*

(p. 351)

•

Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 352)

•

Leaving a parallel parking space with Park

Assist Pilot* (p. 355)

•

Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

•

Park Assist Pilot* messages (p. 358)

110

Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

351

Types of parking with Park Assist

Pilot*

Park Assist Pilot (PAP

111

) can be used for both

parallel and perpendicular parking.

Parallel parking

Overview of parallel parking.

The function helps park the vehicle using the

following steps:

1. The system searches for and measures

potential parking spaces.

2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing

into the parking space.

3. The vehicle's position in the space is

adjusted by driving forward/backward.

The

Park Out

function can also help the driver

pull out of parking spaces.

Perpendicular parking

Perpendicular parking overview.

The function helps park the vehicle using the

following steps:

1. The system searches for and measures

potential parking spaces.

2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing

into the space and its position is adjusted

by driving forward/backward.

NOTE

Leaving a parking space with the Park Out

function should only be used in connection

with parallel parking – it does not work for

perpendicular parking.

Related information

•

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350)

•

Leaving a parallel parking space with Park

Assist Pilot* (p. 355)

111

Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

352

Using Park Assist Pilot*

Park Assist Pilot (PAP

112

) helps the driver

park using three different steps. The function

can also help the driver pull out of a parking

space.

The function measures the space and steers

the vehicle. The driver's role is to:

•

keep close watch of the area around the

vehicle

•

follow the instructions on the center dis-

play

•

change gears (reverse/forward) – an audi-

ble signal indicates when the driver needs

to change gears

•

regulating and maintaining a safe speed

•

applying the brakes and stopping the vehi-

cle.

Information about the actions required by the

driver are provided in the center display using

symbols, graphics and/or text.

The function can be activated if the following

criteria have been met after the engine is

started:

•

No trailer is hitched to the vehicle

•

Your vehicle's speed is lower than

30 km/h (20 mph).

NOTE

The distance between the vehicle and

parking spots should be 0.51.5 meters

(1.65.0 ft) when the function is looking

for parking.

Parking with Park Assist Pilot

The function helps park the vehicle using the

following steps:

1. The system searches for and measures

potential parking spaces.

2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing

into the parking space.

3. The vehicle is positioned in the parking

space (the driver may be prompted to shift

gears and apply the brakes).

Searching and measuring potential parking

spots

The function can be activated

in the center display's Func-

tion view.

It can also be accessed from

the camera views.

•

GREEN button indicator light – the func-

tion is activated.

•

GRAY button indicator light – the function

is deactivated.

Parallel parking search overview.

Perpendicular parking search overview.

Vehicle speed may not exceed 30 km/h

(20 mph) when parking.

112

Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

353

Tap

Park In in Function view or in Camera

view.

> The function will search for a potential

parking space and measure it to deter-

mine if it is big enough.

2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when a

graphic and message in the center display

indicate that a suitable parking space has

been found.

> A pop-up window will appear.

Select

Parallel parking or Perpendicular

parking and engage reverse gear.

NOTE

The function searches for space for park-

ing, shows instructions and guides the

vehicle on its passenger side. But, if so

desired the vehicle can be parked on the

driver's side of the street:

•

Activate the turn signals on the driver's

side – the system will then search for

space to park on that side of the vehi-

cle instead.

Backing into a parking space

Backing into a parallel parking spot overview.

Backing into a perpendicular parking spot overview.

1. Make sure the path behind your vehicle is

clear and engage reverse gear.

2. Back up slowly and carefully without

touching the steering wheel and do not

exceed a speed of 7 km/h (4 mph).

3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when

instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-

sage in the center display.

NOTE

•

Keep your hands away from the steer-

ing wheel when the function is acti-

vated.

•

Make sure that the steering wheel is

not hindered in any way and can rotate

freely.

•

To achieve the best results – wait until

the steering wheel is finished turning

before beginning to drive forward/in

reverse.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

354

Positioning the vehicle in the parking space

Parallel parking positioning overview.

Perpendicular parking positioning overview.

1. Move the gear selector to the gear instruc-

ted by the system. Wait until the steering

wheel turns and then drive slowly forward.

2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when

instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-

sage in the center display.

3. Engage reverse gear and back up slowly.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes when

instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-

sage in the center display.

The function will switch off automatically and

a graphic and message will appear to indicate

that parking has been completed. Adjust-

ments can always be made be the driver after-

ward. Only the driver can determine when the

vehicle is correctly parked.

CAUTION

The warning distance is shorter when the

sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot

(PAP

113

) compared to when they are used

by the Parking Assist system.

Auto-brake during a parking sequence

If, while parking, the parking sensors detect a

vehicle or pedestrian in the vehicle's intended

direction of travel behind or in front of the

vehicle, the auto-brake function will bring the

vehicle to a standstill.

A pop-up message will then appear in the

instrument panel and the driver can tap

Cancel to cancel the parking sequence or

Resume to continue the parking sequence.

After selecting Resume:

–

Check that the area around the vehicle is

free of obstructions and follow the instruc-

tions on the center display, such as:

To continue – Gently accelerate away

from object.

Related information

•

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350)

•

Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

113

Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

355

Leaving a parallel parking space

with Park Assist Pilot*

The

Park Out function can help the driver to

pull out of a parking space when the vehicle

is parallel-parked.

NOTE

Leaving a parking space with the Park Out

function should only be used in connection

with parallel parking – it does not work for

perpendicular parking.

The Park Out function is acti-

vated in the center display's

Function view or in Camera

view.

•

GREEN button indicator light – the func-

tion is activated.

•

GRAY button indicator light – the function

is deactivated.

Tap

Park Out in Function view or in Cam-

era view.

2. Move the gear selector to the suitable

position (e.g. D or R) for the direction in

which you will be pulling out of the park-

ing space.

3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when

instructed to do so by a graphic and mes-

sage in the center display. Follow the

instructions in the same way as for the

parking procedure.

Note that the steering wheel can "spring"

back when the procedure is completed and

the driver may need to turn the steering wheel

back to the maximum position in order to pull

out of the parking space.

If the function determines that the driver can

pull out of the parking space without any extra

maneuvers, the function will be deactivated,

even if it seems as though the vehicle is not

completely out of the parking space.

Related information

•

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350)

•

Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

Park Assist Pilot* limitations

Park Assist Pilot (PAP

114

) may not be able to

detect all conditions in all situations and func-

tionality may therefore be limited.

The driver should be aware of the following

limitations for Park Assist Pilot.

WARNING

•

The parking sensors have dead/blind

spots where objects cannot be

detected.

•

Pay particular attention to people and

animals near the vehicle.

•

Bear in mind that the front end of the

vehicle may swing out towards oncom-

ing traffic during the parking maneuver.

CAUTION

Objects situated higher than the detection

area of the sensors are not included when

the parking maneuver is calculated, which

could cause the function to swing into the

parking space too early. Such parking

spaces should be avoided for this reason.

114

Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

356

The parking sequence is cancelled

A parking sequence will be cancelled if:

•

the driver moves the steering wheel

•

the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h

(4 mph)

•

the driver taps

Cancel in the center dis-

play

•

when the anti-lock brakes or the Elec-

tronic stability control are engaged - e.g.

when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road

•

when speed-dependent power steering

wheel resistance is working at reduced

power – e.g. during cooling due to over-

heating

•

when, while parking, the parking sensors

detect a vehicle or pedestrian in the vehi-

cle's intended direction of travel behind or

in front of the vehicle, the auto-brake func-

tion will bring the vehicle to a standstill.

A message in the center display will explain

why the parking sequence was cancelled.

CAUTION

Under certain circumstances, the function

may not be able to find parking spaces –

one reason may be that the sensors are

disrupted by external sound sources that

emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that

the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns,

wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,

exhaust noise from motorcycles, etc.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

reduce their function and can make meas-

urement impossible.

Driver responsibility

The driver should keep in mind that the func-

tion is a parking aid

‒

not an infallible fully

automatic system. The driver must always be

prepared to take control and cancel a parking

sequence if necessary.

There are a number of things to keep in mind

when parking, including:

•

The driver is always responsible for deter-

mining if the space suggested by the func-

tion is suitable for parking.

•

Do not use the function when using snow

chains or a temporary spare tire.

•

Do not use the function if there are any

objects protruding from the vehicle.

•

Heavy rain or snowfall may inhibit PAP's

ability to accurately measure a parking

space.

•

While searching and measuring the park-

ing space, the function may be unable to

detect objects located far into the space.

•

PAP may not suggest parking spaces on

narrow streets if it does not detect suffi-

cient space for maneuvering the vehicle.

•

Use approved tires

115

inflated to the cor-

rect tire pressure because this affects the

function's ability to provide parking assis-

tance.

•

The function is based on the way the vehi-

cles are parked behind and in front of your

parking space. If they are, for example,

parked too close to the curb, there is a risk

that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims

115

"Approved tires" refers to tires of the same type and make as the vehicle's original, factory-installed tires.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

357

could be damaged by the curb during the

parking procedure.

•

Perpendicular parking spaces may not be

detected or may be suggested unneces-

sarily if a parked vehicle is sticking out

more than other parked vehicles.

•

The function is intended to provide park-

ing assistance on straight streets, not sec-

tions of street with sharp curves or bends.

Always make sure that your vehicle is par-

allel to relevant parking spaces when the

function is measuring the parking space.

Related information

•

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350)

•

Speed-dependent steering wheel resis-

tance (p. 254)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

358

Park Assist Pilot* messages

Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP

116

) may

be displayed in the instrument panel and/or

the center display. Several examples are pro-

vided below.

Message Meaning

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly press-

ing the

button in the center of the right-

side steering wheel keypad.

If a message cannot be erased, contact a

workshop

Related information

•

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350)

•

Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

116

Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

359

Radar sensor

The radar sensor is used by several driver

support systems to detect other vehicles.

Location of radar sensor

The radar sensor is used by the following func-

tions:

•

Distance Alert*

•

Adaptive Cruise Control*

•

Pilot Assist*

•

Lane Keeping Aid

•

City Safety

•

Steering assistance at risk of collision

Any modifications to the radar sensor may

make its use illegal.

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

•

Recommended camera and radar sensor

maintenance (p. 365)

•

Radar sensor type approval (p. 360)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

360

Radar sensor type approval

The type approval for the vehicle's radar units

for adaptive cruise control* (ACC

117

), Pilot

Assist* and BLIS*

118

are found here.

Market ACC & PA BLIS Type approval

Canada

✓

FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A0054TR

FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A0055TR

✓

Canada Standard RSS310

USA

✓

FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A0054TR

FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A0055TR

✓

FCC ID: NBG01RS4

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject

to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de

catégorie II respecte la norme CNR310

d’Industrie Canada. Le présent appareil est

conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada

applicables aux appareils radio exempts de

licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes:

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout

brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre

le fonctionnement.

Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie

Canada a applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L’exploitation est

autorisée à condition que l'appareil ne

produise pas de brouillage préjudiciable et

qu'il accepte tout brouillage, même celui

susceptible d'en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or

modifications not expressively approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate the

equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio

certification number only signifies that

Industry Canada technical specifications were

met.

Note: This equipment complies with radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

117

Adaptive Cruise Control

118

Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

361

environment. This equipment should be

installed and operated with minimum distance

of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

For detailed information about type approval,

go to volvocars.com/support.

Related information

•

Radar sensor (p. 359)

•

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270)

•

Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

•

BLIS* (p. 325)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

362

Camera

The camera is used by several driver support

systems to e.g. detect lane marker lines or

road signs.

Location of the camera

The camera is used by the following functions:

•

Adaptive Cruise Control*

•

Pilot Assist*

•

Lane Keeping Aid*

•

Steering assistance at risk of collision

•

City Safety

•

Driver Alert Control*

•

Road Sign Information*

•

Active high beams*

•

Park Assist*

Related information

•

Driver support systems (p. 254)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

•

Recommended camera and radar sensor

maintenance (p. 365)

Camera/radar sensor limitations

The camera and radar sensor used by several

of the driver support functions has certain

limitations, which also affect the functions

using the camera and radar sensor. The driver

should be aware of the following limitations:

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

363

Common camera and radar limitations

Obstructed camera

The area marked in the illustration must be cleaned

regularly and kept free of decals, objects, solar film,

etc.

The camera is located on the upper interior

section of the windshield along with the radar

sensor.

Do not place, affix or mount anything on the

inside or outside of the windshield, or in front

of or around the camera and radar sensor –

this could disrupt camera and radar-based

functions. It could cause functions to be

reduced, deactivated completely or to produce

an incorrect function response.

High temperatures

If the temperature in the passenger compart-

ment is very high, the camera/radar sensor

will switch off temporarily for

approx. 15 minutes after the engine is started

to protect its electronic components. When

the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the

camera/radar sensor will automatically restart.

Damaged windshield

NOTE

Failure to take action could result in

reduced performance for the driver support

systems that use the camera and radar

unit. It could cause functions to be

reduced, deactivated completely or to pro-

duce an incorrect function response.

To avoid the risk of malfunction of the driver

support systems that use the radar sensor, the

following also apply:

•

If there are cracks, scratches or stone

chips on the windshield in front of any of

the camera and radar sensor "windows"

and this covers an area of

about 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or

more, contact a workshop to have the

windshield replaced

119

•

Volvo advises against repairing cracks,

scratches or stone chips in the area in

front of the camera and radar sensor – the

entire windshield should instead be

replaced.

•

Before replacing the windshield, contact a

workshop

119

to verify that the right wind-

shield has been ordered and installed.

•

The same type of windshield wipers or

wipers approved by Volvo should be used

for replacement.

•

If the windshield is replaced, the camera

and radar sensor must be recalibrated by a

workshop

119

to help ensure proper func-

tioning of all of the vehicle's camera and

radar-based systems.

Additional radar limitations

Vehicle speed

The radar sensor's ability to detect a vehicle

ahead is significantly reduced if the speed of

the vehicle ahead differs greatly from your

vehicle's speed.

119

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

364

Limited field of vision

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In

some situations, it may detect a vehicle later

than expected or not at all.

The radar sensor's field of vision

The radar sensor's detection of vehicles

very close to your vehicle may be delayed

in certain situations, e.g. if a vehicle pulls

in between your vehicle and the vehicle

directly ahead.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles that are not driving in the center

of the lane may remain undetected.

In curves, the radar may detect the a dif-

ferent vehicle than intended or lose sight

of a target vehicle.

Low trailers

Low trailer in the radar shadow

Low trailers may also be difficult or even

impossible for the radar to detect. The driver

should be extra alert when driving behind vehi-

cles towing low trailers when Adaptive Cruise

Control

or Pilot Assist

is activated.

Additional camera limitations

Reduced visibility

Cameras have the same limitations as the

human eye. In other words, their “vision" is

impaired by adverse weather conditions such

as heavy snowfall/rain, dense fog, swirling

dust/snow, etc. These conditions may reduce

the function of systems that depend on the

camera or cause these systems to temporarily

stop functioning.

Strong sunlight, reflections from the road sur-

face, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty

road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may

drastically reduce the camera’s ability to

detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a

cyclist, a large animal or another vehicle.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory.

365

Additional Park Assist Camera*

limitations

Blind sectors

There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields

of vision.

With the Park Assist Camera's 360° view*

selected, objects/obstacles may not be

detected if they are located in the "joints"

where the edges of the individual camera

views meet.

WARNING

Even if it seems as though only a fairly

small section of the screen image is

obstructed, this may mean that a relatively

large sector is hidden and obstacles there

may not be detected until they are very

near the vehicle.

Lighting conditions

The camera image is automatically adjusted

according to the current lighting conditions.

This means that the brightness and quality of

the image may vary slightly. Poor lighting con-

ditions may result in reduced image quality.

NOTE

A bike carrier and other accessories moun-

ted on the rear of the vehicle can obscure

the camera's view.

Related information

•

Camera (p. 362)

•

Radar sensor (p. 359)

•

Recommended camera and radar sensor

maintenance (p. 365)

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

•

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Recommended camera and radar

sensor maintenance

In order for the camera and radar units to

function properly, they must be kept free of

dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed

regularly with water and car washing deter-

gent.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

could cause false warnings, reduced func-

tion, or no function.

Location of the Park Assist sensors

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.

366

Location of rear radar sensors. Keep the marked area

clean (on both the left and right sides of the vehicle).

•

For best possible performance, it is impor-

tant to keep the areas in front of the sen-

sors clean.

•

Do not attach any objects, tape or decals

to the surface of the sensors.

•

Clean the camera lenses regularly using

lukewarm water and car washing deter-

gent. Wash gently to avoid scratching the

lens.

CAUTION

Only a workshop may perform mainte-

nance on driver support components – an

authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Related information

•

Camera (p. 362)

•

Radar sensor (p. 359)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

•

Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

367

Camera and radar unit symbols

and messages

Here are examples of some of the messages

and symbols related to the camera and radar

units that may be displayed in the instrument

panel.

Sensor blocked

If this symbol and the message

Windscreen sensor Sensor

blocked, see Owner's manual is

displayed in the instrument panel, it

means that the camera and radar unit are

unable to detect other vehicles, cyclists,

pedestrians and large animals in front of the

vehicle and that the vehicle's camera and

radar-based functions may be obstructed.

The following table shows some of the situa-

tions that can cause the message to be dis-

played, and suggested actions:

Cause Action

The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is

dirty or covered by ice or snow.

Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor and remove dirt, ice

and snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the

camera's range of visibility.

No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar sensor

from functioning.

Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar

signals or the camera's range of visibility.

No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the cam-

era/radar sensor from functioning.

There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the cam-

era/radar sensor.

Consult a workshop to have the area of the windshield on the inside of the cam-

era's casing cleaned. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Bright sunlight. No action. The camera/radar sensor will reset automatically when lighting con-

ditions improve.

DRIVER SUPPORT

368

Defective camera

If a camera sector is dark and

contains this symbol, this

indicates that the camera is

not functioning properly.

The vehicle's left-side camera is malfunctioning.

A dark camera sector may also be displayed in

the following situations, but without the

defective camera symbol:

•

a door is open

•

the tailgate is open

•

a rearview mirror is folded in

Rear Park Assist Camera

WARNING

Be extra cautious when

reversing if this symbol is

shown when a trailer, bike

carrier or similar is

attached and electrically

connected to the vehicle.

The symbol indicates that

the rear parking assist sensors are deacti-

vated and will not warn of any obstacles.

Related information

•

Camera (p. 362)

•

Radar sensor (p. 359)

•

Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

•

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

370

Starting the vehicle

The vehicle can be started using the start

knob next to the steering wheel when the

remote key is in the passenger compartment.

Location of the start button.

WARNING

Before starting:

•

Buckle your seat belt.

•

Adjust the seat, steering wheel and

mirrors.

•

Make sure you can fully depress the

brake pedal.

The remote key is not physically used to start

the ignition because the vehicle is equipped

with the keyless Passive Start system.

To start the vehicle:

1. The remote key must be inside the vehicle.

For vehicles with Passive Start, the key

must be in the front section of the passen-

ger compartment. With the optional key-

less locking/unlocking function*, the key

can be anywhere in the vehicle.

2. Press and hold down the brake pedal

far as possible.

3. Press the start button.

WARNING

•

Never use more than one inlay mat at a

time on the driver's floor. If any other

type of floor mat is used, remove the

original mat from the driver's seat floor

before driving. All types of mats must

be securely anchored in the attach-

ment points in the floor. Make sure the

floor mat does not impede the move-

ment of the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal in any way, as this could be a

serious safety hazard.

•

Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-

factured for your vehicle. They must be

properly secured in the attachment

points in the floor to help ensure they

cannot slide and become trapped

under the pedals.

The starter motor will crank until the engine

starts or until overheating protection is trig-

gered.

Error messages

If the Vehicle key not found message is

shown in the instrument panel at start, place

the remote key at the backup reader and then

make a new start attempt.

If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the button to start the engine.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

371

Location of the backup reader.

NOTE

When the remote key is placed in the

backup reader, make sure that no other

vehicle keys, metal objects or electronic

devices (e.g. cellular phones, tablets, lap-

tops or chargers) are in the backup reader.

Multiple vehicle keys close to each other in

the backup reader can disrupt their func-

tionality.

CAUTION

If the engine has not responded after 3

attempts – wait for 3 minutes before star-

ting a new attempt. Starting capability

increases if the starter battery is given time

to recover.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from

the vehicle while driving or the vehicle is

being towed.

WARNING

•

Always remove the remote key from

the passenger compartment when you

leave the vehicle and make sure the

ignition is in mode 0.

•

Always put the gear selector in P and

apply the parking brake before leaving

the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle

unsupervised while the engine is run-

ning.

•

Always open the garage door fully and

make sure that ventilation is very good

before starting the engine in a garage.

The exhaust fumes produced by the

vehicle contain carbon monoxide,

which is invisible and odorless but very

toxic.

CAUTION

•

When starting in cold weather, the

automatic transmission may shift up at

slightly higher engine speeds than nor-

mal until the automatic transmission

fluid reaches normal operating tem-

perature.

•

Do not race a cold engine immediately

after starting. This could prevent fluids

from properly lubricating vital compo-

nents in the engine before it has

reached the proper operating tempera-

ture.

•

The engine should be idling when the

gear selector is moved. Never acceler-

ate until the gear is fully engaged.

Accelerating rapidly before a gear is

properly engaged could lead to harder

wear of components.

•

To help prevent the transmission oil

from overheating, select P or N when

idling at a standstill for prolonged peri-

ods of time.

||
STARTING AND DRIVING
372
NOTE
With a cold start, idling speed may be con-
siderably higher than normal for certain
engine types. This is done to get the emis-
sions system up to normal operating tem-
perature as quickly as possible, which min-
imizes exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Related information
•
Switching off the vehicle (p. 372)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)
•
Jump starting using another battery
(p. 410)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)
Switching off the vehicle
The vehicle is turned off using the start but-
ton next to the steering wheel.
Location of the start button.
To switch off the vehicle:
–
Press the start button – the vehicle is
turned off.
If the vehicle rolls:
–
Press and hold the start button until the
vehicle is turned off.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 370)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)
•
Jump starting using another battery
(p. 410)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)
Ignition modes
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions
available.
To enable the use of a limited number of func-
tions when the engine is not running, the igni-
tion can be put in one of three different levels:
0, I and II. These levels are referred to as "igni-
tion modes" in the Owner's Manual.
The following table shows which functions are
available in each ignition mode:

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

373

Mode Functions

•

The odometer, clock and tem-

perature gauge are illumi-

nated

•

The power* seats can be

adjusted.

•

The power windows can be

used.

•

The center display is activated

and can be used

•

The infotainment system can

be used

In this mode, the functions are

available for a limited time and

then switch off automatically.

Mode Functions

•

The panoramic roof, power

windows, 12-volt electrical

socket in the passenger com-

partment, Bluetooth, naviga-

tion, phone, blower and wind-

shield wipers can be used.

•

The power seats can be

adjusted.

•

The 12-volt electrical socket* in

the cargo compartment can be

used.

•

The infotainment system starts

up automatically if it was on

when the ignition was

switched off.

Electrical current will be taken

from the battery in this ignition

mode.

Mode Functions

•

The headlights illuminate.

•

Warning/indicator lights illumi-

nate for 5 seconds.

•

A number of other systems are

activated. However, seat and

rear window heating can only

be activated when the engine

is running.

This ignition mode uses a lot of

current from the battery and

should be avoided whenever

possible!

Also activated when the door is opened.

Related information

•

Starting the vehicle (p. 370)

•

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)

•

Jump starting using another battery

(p. 410)

•

Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
374
Selecting ignition mode
The vehicle's ignition can be put in various
modes (levels) to make different functions
available.
Selecting an ignition mode
Location of the start button.
•
Ignition mode 0 – Unlock the vehicle and
keep the remote key in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
To set level I or II without engine start –
do not depress the brake pedal (or clutch
pedal for vehicles with manual transmis-
sion) when selecting this ignition mode.
•
Ignition mode I – Press the start button
and release.
•
Ignition mode II – Press the button and
hold it in for approx. 5 seconds. Release
the button.
•
Back to ignition mode 0 – To return to
ignition mode 0 from modes I and II,
press the start button.
Related information
•
Starting the vehicle (p. 370)
•
Switching off the vehicle (p. 372)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)
•
Jump starting using another battery
(p. 410)
Brake functions
The vehicle's brakes are used to reduce
speed or prevent the vehicle from rolling.
In addition to the wheel brakes and parking
brakes, the vehicle is also equipped with a
number of automatic brake assist functions.
These systems provide assistance by e.g. the
driver not needing to depress the brake pedal
at a traffic light, when starting up a hill or
when driving down a hill.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the following brake assist functions may be
included:
•
Auto-hold brake function at a standstill
(Auto Hold)
•
Hill Start Assist (Hill Start Assist)
•
Braking assist after a collision
•
City Safety
•
Hill Descent Control (Hill Descent
Control)*
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 375)
•
Parking brake (p. 377)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)
•
Braking assist after a collision (p. 383)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 382)
•
City Safety™ (p. 305)
•
Hill Descent Control* (p. 400)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory.

375

Brakes

The brake pedal is used to apply the vehicle's

regular brakes, which are part of the brake

system.

The vehicle is equipped with two brake cir-

cuits. If one brake circuit is damaged, the

brake pedal may go down further when

depressed. More pressure will then be

required from the driver for normal braking

effect.

The driver's pressure on the brake pedal is

enhanced by a power braking function.

WARNING

Power braking only functions if the engine

is running.

If the brake pedal is used when the engine is

turned off, the pedal will feel stiffer than usual

and greater pressure must be applied to brake

the vehicle.

In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy

load, engine braking in manual gear should be

used to augment the brakes. Engine braking is

most effective if the same gear is used both

uphill and downhill. Use the Off Road* drive

mode to increase the engine braking effect

when driving on steep downgrades at low

speeds.

Anti-lock brakes

The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock

Braking System (ABS

), which helps prevent

the wheels from locking and helps maintain

steering control when braking. Vibrations may

be felt from the brake pedal when ABS is

operating, which is normal.

After the vehicle is started, a brief test of the

ABS system is automatically performed when

the driver releases the brake pedal. An addi-

tional automatic test of the system may be

performed when the vehicle is traveling at a

low speed. During the test, the brake pedal

may feel as though it is pulsating.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Meaning

Check the brake fluid level. If the

level is low, fill brake fluid and

check to determine the reason

for the loss of brake fluid.

Steady glow for 2 seconds after

the engine is started: Automatic

function check.

Steady glow for more than 2

seconds: Fault in the ABS sys-

tem. The vehicle's regular brake

system is still working, but with-

out the ABS function.

In Canada.

In the US.

Anti-lock Braking System

||
STARTING AND DRIVING
376
WARNING
If the warning symbols for both brake fault
and ABS fault are lit simultaneously, there
may be a fault in the brake system.
•
If the brake fluid reservoir level is nor-
mal when this occurs, drive carefully to
the nearest workshop to have the
brake system checked - an authorized
Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid has fallen below the
MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir,
the vehicle should not be driven until
the brake fluid has been filled. The rea-
son for the brake fluid loss must be
checked.
Related information
•
Brake Assist System (p. 376)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 382)
•
Braking on wet roads (p. 376)
•
Braking on salted roads (p. 377)
•
Maintenance of the brake system (p. 377)
•
Brake lights (p. 155)
Brake Assist System
The brake enhancing system, (BAS
3
), helps
increase braking force and can thereby
reduce braking distance.
The system monitors the driver's braking hab-
its and increases braking force when neces-
sary. Braking force can be increased up to the
point at which the ABS intervenes.
NOTE
When BAS is activated, depress and hold
down the brake pedal as long as needed.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 375)
Braking on wet roads
Prolonged driving in heavy rain without brak-
ing may cause braking effect to be slightly
delayed the first time the brakes are applied.
This may also occur after washing the vehicle.
It will then be necessary to apply greater pres-
sure to the brake pedal. You should therefore
maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Firmly apply the brakes after washing the
vehicle or driving on wet roads. This helps
warm up the brake discs, enabling them to dry
more quickly and protecting them against cor-
rosion. Consider the current traffic situation
when braking.
Related information
•
Brakes (p. 375)
•
Braking on salted roads (p. 377)
3
Brake Assist System

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

377

Braking on salted roads

When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt

may form on the brake discs and brake pads.

This could increase stopping distance. Main-

tain an extra large safety distance to the vehi-

cle ahead. Make sure to also:

•

Apply the brakes from time to time to help

remove salt. Make sure braking does not

pose a risk to any other road users.

•

Gently apply the brakes when you have

finished driving and before driving again.

Related information

•

Brakes (p. 375)

•

Braking on wet roads (p. 376)

Maintenance of the brake system

Regularly check the brake system compo-

nents for wear.

To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as

possible, follow the Volvo service schedule

specified in the Warranty and Maintenance

Records Information booklet. After replacing

brake pads and brake discs, braking effect is

not adapted until they are "broken in" by driv-

ing a few hundred kilometers (miles). Com-

pensate for the reduced braking effect by

applying greater pressure to the brake pedal.

Volvo recommends only using brake pads

approved for your Volvo.

CAUTION

The brake system's components should be

regularly checked for wear.

Contact a workshop for advice on how to

do this or let a workshop perform the

inspection - an authorized Volvo workshop

is recommended.

Related information

•

Brakes (p. 375)

Parking brake

The parking brake helps keep the vehicle sta-

tionary by mechanically locking two wheels.

When the electric parking brake is being

applied, a faint sound can be heard from the

brake's electric motor. This sound can also be

heard during the automatic function check of

the parking brake.

If the vehicle is stationary when the parking

brake is activated, it will only be applied to the

rear wheels. If it is activated while the vehicle

is moving, the normal brakes will be used on

all four wheels. Braking will be transferred to

only the rear wheels when the vehicle is

almost stopped.

STARTING AND DRIVING

378

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the parking

brake (p. 378)

•

Parking on a hill (p. 380)

•

Parking brake malfunction (p. 380)

•

Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)

Activating and deactivating the

parking brake

Use the parking brake to help keep the vehi-

cle stationary when it is parked.

Activating the parking brake

1. Pull up the control.

> The symbol in the instrument panel will

illuminate when the parking brake is

activated.

2. Make sure the vehicle is stationary.

Symbol in the instrument panel

Symbol Meaning

The symbol will be illuminated

when the parking brake is acti-

vated.

A flashing symbol indicates that

a fault has been detected. Read

the message in the instrument

panel.

Canadian models.

US models.

Automatic activation

The parking brake is applied automatically

•

when the ignition is switched off and the

setting for automatically activating the

parking brake is activated in the center

display.

•

when the gear selector is moved to P on a

steep hill.

•

if the auto-hold brake (automatic brake at

standstill) function is activated and

•

the vehicle has been stationary for a

prolonged period of time (510

minutes).

•

the vehicle is switched off.

•

the driver has left the vehicle.

STARTING AND DRIVING
379
Emergency braking
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
activated when the vehicle is moving by pull-
ing and holding up the control. The braking
process is canceled when the control is
released or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
NOTE
In case of emergency braking at high
speeds, a signal sounds during the brake
procedure.
Deactivating the parking brake
Deactivating manually
The parking brake can only be deactivated if
the engine is running.
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control.
> The parking brake will release and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go
out.
Deactivating automatically
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Move the
gear selector to D or R and press the
accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake will release and the
symbol in the instrument panel will go
out.
NOTE
For automatic deactivation to be possible,
the driver's seat belt must be buckled or
the driver's door closed.
Related information
•
Settings for automatically activating the
parking brake (p. 379)
•
Parking brake malfunction (p. 380)
•
Parking brake (p. 377)
•
Parking on a hill (p. 380)
Settings for automatically
activating the parking brake
Choose whether the parking brake should be
activated automatically when the vehicle is
switched off.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap 
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap 
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
 and select or deselect the
Auto Activate Parking Brake function.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 378)
•
Parking brake (p. 377)

STARTING AND DRIVING

380

Parking on a hill

Always use the parking brake when parking

on a hill.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when park-

ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put-

ting the automatic transmission in P may

not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta-

tionary in all situations.

If the vehicle is pointing uphill:

•

Turn the front wheels so they are pointing

away from the curb.

If the vehicle is pointing downhill:

•

Turn the front wheels so they are pointing

toward the curb.

Heavy load uphill

Heavy loads, such as a trailer, could cause the

vehicle to roll backward when the parking

brake is released automatically on steep uphill

gradients. To help avoid this, pull the control

upward while you are driving away. Release

the control when the vehicle gains traction.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the parking

brake (p. 378)

Parking brake malfunction

If you are unable to deactivate or activate the

parking brake after several attempts, contact

an authorized Volvo workshop.

A audible warning signal will sound if the park-

ing brake is activated while the vehicle is

being driven.

If the vehicle must be parked before the prob-

lem is rectified, turn the wheels as when park-

ing on an incline and put the gear selector in

Low battery charge level

If the battery charge level is too low, it will not

be possible to activate or deactivate the park-

ing brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the

vehicle if the battery is discharged.

Replacing brake pads

Due to the design of the electric parking

brake, the rear brake pads must be replaced

by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop

is recommended.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Meaning

A flashing symbol indicates that

a fault has been detected. See

the message in the instrument

panel.

Fault in the brake system. See

the message in the instrument

panel.

Information message in the

instrument panel.

Canadian models.

US models.

STARTING AND DRIVING
381
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 378)
•
Parking on a hill (p. 380)
•
Starter battery (p. 565)
•
Volvo's service program (p. 548)
Auto-hold brakes
With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver
can release the brake pedal and the brakes
will remain applied, for example, when the
vehicle has stopped at a traffic light or inter-
section.
When the vehicle stops, the brakes are acti-
vated automatically. The function can use
either the normal brakes or the parking brakes
to keep the vehicle stationary and works on
flat surfaces or hills. If the driver has their seat
belt fastened and/or if the driver's door is
closed, the brakes will disengage automati-
cally when the vehicle starts driving.
NOTE
When braking to a stop on an uphill or
downhill gradient, depress the brake pedal
with slightly more force than usual before
releasing to ensure that the vehicle cannot
move at all.
The parking brake is activated if
•
the vehicle is switched off.
•
the driver's door is opened
•
the driver's seat belt is removed
•
the vehicle has been stationary for a pro-
longed period of time (510 minutes)
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Meaning
This symbol illuminates when the
function is using the normal
brakes to keep the vehicle sta-
tionary.
A
B
This symbol illuminates when the
function is using the parking
brake to keep the vehicle station-
ary.
A
Canadian models.
B
US models.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a
standstill (p. 382)
•
Brakes (p. 375)
•
Parking brake (p. 377)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 382)

STARTING AND DRIVING

382

Activating and deactivating Auto-

hold at a standstill

The Auto-hold brake function at a standstill is

activated with the button in the tunnel con-

sole.

–

Press the button in the tunnel console to

activate or deactivate the function.

> The indicator light in the button will illu-

minate when the function is activated.

The function will remain active the next

time the vehicle is started.

When shutting off

If the function is active and holding

the vehicle stationary using the nor-

mal brakes (A symbol lit in the

instrument panel), the brake pedal

must be depressed while pressing the button

in order to deactivate Auto-hold.

•

The function will remain off until it is reac-

tivated.

•

When Auto-hold is switched off, Hill Start

Assist (HSA) will remain active to help

prevent the vehicle from rolling backward

when starting up a hill.

Related information

•

Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)

Hill Start Assist

The function for assisting when starting the

vehicle on inclines (HSA

) helps prevent the

vehicle from rolling backward when starting

on an uphill gradient. When backing up a hill,

HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling

forward.

The function retains pressure from the brake

pedal in the brake system for several seconds

after the brake pedal has been released.

This temporary braking effect is released after

a few seconds or when the driver begins driv-

ing.

Hill Start Assist is activated when the vehicle

is stopped on steep inclines. The function is

available even when the Auto-hold brake func-

tion is switched off.

Related information

•

Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)

•

Brakes (p. 375)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

383

Braking assist after a collision

In a collision in which the activation level is

reached for the pyrotechnic seat belt tension-

ers or airbags, or if a collision with a large ani-

mal is detected, the vehicle's brakes will be

automatically activated. This function is

intended to help prevent or reduce the effects

of any subsequent collision.

After a serious collision, it may no longer be

possible to control and steer the vehicle. In

order to avoid or mitigate a possible further

collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehi-

cle's path, the brake assist system is activated

automatically to help stop the vehicle safely.

If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a

risk of being hit by passing traffic, the driver

can override the system by depressing the

accelerator pedal.

This function assumes that the brake system

is intact after a collision.

Related information

•

Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)

•

BLIS* (p. 325)

•

Brake functions (p. 374)

Regenerative braking*

The vehicle recovers kinetic energy during

braking in order to reduce fuel consumption

and emissions.

The battery symbol is shown in the

instrument panel when the vehicle is

generating power for the battery

The function is available in all drive modes

together with gear selector position D or M.

Activating brake regeneration

Brake regeneration is activated by gentle pres-

sure on the brake pedal or during engine brak-

ing.

Regeneration increases during engine braking

if manual gear selector position M is selected.

Related information

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

•

Shifting gears with automatic transmis-

sion (p. 384)

Transmission

The transmission is part of the vehicle's drive-

line (power transmission) between the engine

and the drive wheels. The function of the

transmission is to change gears depending

on speed and power needs.

The vehicle has an 8-speed automatic trans-

mission. The number of gears allows the

engine's torque and power band to be effec-

tively utilized.

Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save

fuel when driving at a constant engine speed.

Both the gear selector and the steering wheel

paddles can be used to shift up or down man-

ually. The selected gear selector position will

be displayed in the instrument panel.

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

Hill Start Assist

The symbol is used in vehicles with 48 V batteries.

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
384
Automatic transmission
Gear position is selected automatically to
make driving as energy efficient as possible.
The transmission also has a manual mode.
Overview of gear selector and gear shift pattern in
the instrument panel.
The selected gear selector position is dis-
played in the instrument panel:
Related information
•
Shifting gears with automatic transmis-
sion (p. 384)
•
Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift
(p. 386)
•
Shiftlock (p. 387)
•
The kickdown function (p. 387)
•
The Launch function* (p. 388)
•
Automatic transmission symbols and mes-
sages (p. 388)
Shifting gears with automatic
transmission
Change gear position by pushing the spring-
loaded gear selector forward or rearward, or
to the side for manual shifting.
Selecting gears
Gear selector and gear selector positions overview.
Gear selector positions
Parking – P
Gear selector and P position overview.
Parking is activated using the P button located
next to the gear selector.
In the P position, the transmission is mechani-
cally locked.
Select P position when the vehicle is parked.
The vehicle can be started when it is in P posi-
tion. The vehicle must be stationary when P is
selected.
When parking – apply the parking brake
before shifting to position P.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

385

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when park-

ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put-

ting the automatic transmission in P may

not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta-

tionary in all situations.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in position P in

order to lock the vehicle and set the alarm.

Help functions

The system will switch to the P position auto-

matically:

•

if the ignition is switched off while D or R

is selected.

•

if the driver unbuckles the seat belt and

opens the driver's door while the vehicle is

running with a gear other than P selected.

To park a vehicle with an unbuckled seat belt

and open door – end P mode by shifting to R

or D again.

If the vehicle is switched off in gear position

N, it will not automatically switch to the P

position. This makes it possible to wash the

vehicle in an automatic car wash.

Reverse – R

Select R when backing up. The vehicle must

be stationary when R is selected.

Neutral – N

In N position, the vehicle can roll freely. The

vehicle can be started when it is in N position.

Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-

tionary with the gear selector in the N posi-

tion.

To move to another gear position when N is

selected, the brake pedal must be depressed

and the ignition in mode II. For some trans-

mission variants, the engine must be running.

D drive mode

D is the normal driving gear position. The

transmission shifts up or down automatically

depending on acceleration and speed.

The vehicle must be stationary when the gear

selector is moved from R to D.

Manual position – M

Overview of manual gear selector positions in instru-

ment panel.

With position M, it is possible to shift gears

manually. Engine braking will occur when the

accelerator pedal is released.

M position is selected by moving the gear

selector rearward from D.

•

Push the gear selector to the right toward

"+" (plus) and release to shift up one gear.

•

Push the gear selector to the left toward

"–" (minus) and release to shift down one

gear.

•

Push the gear selector rearward to return

to D mode.

For smooth shifting and engine performance,

the transmission will shift down automatically

if the vehicle's speed becomes too low for the

selected gear.

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

•

Shiftlock (p. 387)

•

Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift

(p. 386)

•

The kickdown function (p. 387)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

386

Using the steering wheel paddles*

to shift

The steering wheel paddles are a supplement

to the gear selector and make it possible to

shift manually without removing your hands

from the steering wheel.

The function is available in position D or M.

"-": Shift down one gear.

"+": Shift up one gear.

Change

To shift:

–

Pull one of the paddles toward the steer-

ing wheel and then release.

As long as the engine speed (rpm) is within

the permissible range for the selected gear, a

gear shift will take place each time a paddle is

pulled. The current gear will be displayed in

the instrument panel.

In the M position, the paddles are automati-

cally activated.

Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for

shifting in manual mode.

Activating the steering wheel paddles

in the D position

To be able to shift gears using the paddles,

they must be activated:

–

Pull one of the paddles toward the steer-

ing wheel.

> A number in the instrument panel indi-

cates the current gear being used.

Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for

shifting.

Turning off the steering wheel paddles

in the D position

Manual deactivation

–

Pull the right paddle (+) toward the steer-

ing wheel and hold it there until the num-

ber in the instrument panel goes out.

> The transmission will return to the D

position.

Automatic deactivation

The steering wheel paddles will switch off

after a short time if they are not being used.

This is shown by the number in the instrument

panel going out. If engine braking is currently

being used, the paddles will remain active

until engine braking stops.

STARTING AND DRIVING

387

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

•

Shifting gears with automatic transmis-

sion (p. 384)

Shiftlock

The automatic transmission's shiftlock func-

tion helps prevent inadvertently moving the

gear selector between different positions.

Automatic shiftlock

The automatic shiftlock has a separate safety

system.

From Park – P or Neutral – N

To move the gear selector from P or N to

another gear selector position, the engine

must be running.

If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has

been stationary for at least 3 seconds (with or

without the engine running), the gear selector

will be locked in that position.

Messages in the instrument panel

If the gear selector is locked in position a mes-

sage will appear in the instrument panel e.g.

Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate

gear lever.

There is no mechanical shiftlock function.

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

•

Shifting gears with automatic transmis-

sion (p. 384)

The kickdown function

Kickdown can be used when maximum

acceleration is needed e.g. when passing.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed all

the way to the floor (past the normal full accel-

erator position), the transmission will auto-

matically engage kickdown, i.e. immediately

shift down to a lower gear.

If the accelerator pedal is released from the

kickdown position, the transmission will auto-

matically shift up again.

Safety function

The transmission control module is equipped

with a downshift protection feature to help

prevent the engine from overheating.

In some conditions, the transmission will pre-

vent downshifting/kickdown if this would lead

to such high engine speed (rpm) that the

engine could be damaged. If the driver still

attempts downshifting or kickdown at a high

rpm, nothing will happen and the original gear

will remain selected.

With kickdown, the vehicle can downshift one

or more steps at a time depending on the

engine speed. The vehicle upshifts when the

engine reaches its maximum rpm to prevent

engine damage.

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

388

The Launch function*

Launch can be used to provide maximum

acceleration from a standstill. The function is

available for the drive modes:

Dynamic,

Comfort and Individual.

Activating Launch

Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the wheels are pointing straight ahead.

1. Put the gear selector in D position.

2. Depress the brake pedal fully.

3. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal.

4. Release the brake pedal within 2 seconds.

NOTE

If the Launch function does not work, wait

a few minutes to let the driveline reach

working temperature before trying again.

CAUTION

The driveline is exposed to wear when

using Launch and the function is therefore

only available a limited number of times.

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

Automatic transmission symbols

and messages

If a problem occurs with the transmission, a

symbol and a message are displayed in the

instrument panel.

CAUTION

Check the operating temperature of the

transmission to help avoid damage to any

of the drive system components. If there is

a risk of overheating, a warning symbol will

appear in the instrument panel and a text

message will be displayed. Follow the rec-

ommendations given.

Symbol Meaning

A fault has occurred in the trans-

mission.

Read the message in the instru-

ment panel.

Hot or overheated transmission.

Read the message in the instru-

ment panel.

Temporary fault in driveline.

Read the message in the instru-

ment panel.

Related information

•

Automatic transmission (p. 384)

All Wheel Drive (AWD)*

All-wheel drive (AWD

), also called four-

wheel drive, means that power is distributed

to all four wheels, which improves traction.

To achieve the best traction, power is auto-

matically directed to the wheels that have the

best grip. The system continuously calculates

the need for torque to the rear wheels, and

can immediately redistribute up to half of the

engine's torque to the rear wheels.

All-wheel drive also has a stabilizing effect at

higher speeds. In normal driving conditions,

most of the engine's power is directed to the

front wheels. When the vehicle is stationary,

all-wheel drive is always activated in prepara-

tion for maximum traction during acceleration.

All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on

which drive mode is selected.

Related information

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

•

Low Speed Control* (p. 399)

•

Transmission (p. 383)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory.

389

Drive modes*

Drive modes affect the vehicle's driving cha-

racteristics in different ways to enhance and

simplify the driving experience in certain

types of situations.

Drive modes enable easy access to the vehi-

cle's many functions and settings in different

driving situations. The following systems are

adapted to help optimize driving characteris-

tics in each drive mode:

•

Steering

•

Engine/transmission/all-wheel drive*

•

Brakes

•

Shock absorbers

•

Instrument panel

•

Start/Stop function

•

Climate control settings

Select the drive mode that is adapted to the

current driving conditions. Keep in mind that

not all drive modes are available in all situa-

tions.

Available drive modes

When the engine is started, the vehicle will be

Comfort mode and the start/stop function

will be activated. Drive mode can be changed

once the vehicle is started, e.g. to Individual

mode. Once Individual mode is selected, you

can adjust settings to personal preferences,

e.g. to show the tachometer.

Comfort

Comfort is the vehicle's default mode. This

setting offers driving comfort, light steering

and soft suspension.

Eco

•

Adapt the vehicle for more fuel-efficient

and eco-friendly driving with

Eco mode.

In this mode, the Start/Stop function is acti-

vated and certain climate settings are

reduced.

When driving in

Eco mode, an ECO gauge

indicating how economical the driving is will

be displayed in the instrument panel.

Off Road

•

Helps maximize the vehicle's ability to tra-

verse difficult terrain or poor roads.

Steering is light and all-wheel drive* and the

low-speed function with assistance for driving

downhill (HDC

) are activated. The Start/Stop

function is deactivated.

This mode can only be activated at low

speeds. The permitted speed range will be

shown in the speedometer. If this speed is

exceeded,

Off Road mode will be deactivated

and another drive mode activated.

Off Road mode, a compass will be dis-

played between the speedometer and the

tachometer in the instrument panel.

NOTE

This drive mode is not designed to be used

for normal street driving.

Dynamic

•

Dynamic mode is designed to help pro-

vide sportier driving characteristics and a

faster acceleration response.

Gear shifting will be faster and more distinct

and the transmission will prioritize gears with

a higher traction force.

Steering response is faster and suspension is

stiffer

to help reduce body roll when corner-

ing.

The Start/Stop function is deactivated.

Dynamic mode is also available in a Polestar

Engineered* version.

All Wheel Drive

Hill Descent Control

Vehicles with Four-C.

||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
390
Individual
•
Customizes drive mode to personal prefer-
ences.
Select one of the drive modes as a basis and
adjust the settings to achieve your preferred
driving characteristics. These settings will be
stored in the active driver profile and will be
available every time the vehicle is unlocked
with that remote key.
Individual drive mode is only available if it has
been activated in the center display.
Settings view
9
 for Individual drive mode.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode
and select Individual Drive Mode.
3.
Under 
Presets, select one of the following
drive modes as a basis: Eco, Comfort,
Dynamic or Polestar Engineered*.
The following settings can be modified:
•
Driver Display
•
Steering Force
•
Powertrain Characteristics
•
Brake Characteristics
•
Suspension Control
•
ECO Climate
•
Start/Stop.
Related information
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 391)
•
Eco drive mode (p. 391)
•
Economical driving (p. 402)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 394)
•
Low Speed Control* (p. 399)
•
Hill Descent Control* (p. 400)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 388)
•
Driver profiles (p. 132)
•
Regenerative braking* (p. 383)
9
The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
391
Changing drive mode*
Select the drive mode that is adapted to the
current driving conditions.
The drive mode is changed using the button
in the center console.
Keep in mind that not all drive modes are
available in all situations.
To change drive mode:
1. Tap the DRIVE MODE button.
> A pop-up menu opens in the center dis-
play with the active drive mode
marked.
2. Drive mode can be selected two different
ways:
•
Tap the desired drive mode directly on
the touchscreen to select and activate
it.
•
Tap the DRIVE MODE button again to
move the cursor to the desired drive
mode. The selected drive mode is acti-
vated after a brief delay.
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 389)
•
Activating and deactivating Eco drive
mode using the function button (p. 393)
•
Activating and deactivating Low Speed
Control* using the function button
(p. 399)
•
Activating and deactivating Hill Descent
Control* using the function button
(p. 401)
Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode can help make driving more
fuel-efficient and eco-friendly.
Use this mode to save fuel and promote eco-
friendly driving.
When 
Eco mode is activated, the following
characteristics are modified:
•
The automatic transmission's shifting
points.
•
Engine control and accelerator pedal
response.
•
Eco Coast functionality is activated and
engine braking is disabled when the accel-
erator pedal is released at speeds
between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
•
Some of the climate system settings will
be reduced or switched off.
•
Information will be shown in the ECO
gauge in the instrument panel to help pro-
mote more eco-friendly and economical
driving.
Coast function Eco Coast
Eco Coast essentially deactivates engine brak-
ing, allowing the vehicle's kinetic energy to be
used to roll greater distances. When the driver
releases the accelerator pedal, the transmis-
sion is automatically disengaged from the
engine. Engine speed is reduced to idling
speed to reduce fuel consumption.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

392

This function is most effective in driving situa-

tions where the vehicle can roll freely for a

long distance e.g. on roads with slight down-

grades or when a decrease in speed is antici-

pated such as when approaching an area with

a lower speed limit.

Activating Eco Coast

The function is activated when the accelerator

pedal is fully released and the following condi-

tions are met:

•

Eco drive mode is activated.

•

The gear selector is in D.

•

The vehicle's speed is approximately

65140 km/h (4087 mph).

•

The gradient of the downgrade is less than

approximately 6%.

COASTING will be displayed in the instrument

panel when Eco Coast is being used.

Limitations

Eco Coast is not available if

•

the engine and/or transmission are not at

normal working temperatures

•

the gear selector is moved from D to man-

ual shifting mode

•

the vehicle's speed is not within the

65140 km/h (4087 mph) range

•

the gradient of the downgrade is more

than approximately 6%

•

the steering wheel paddles* are being

used for manual shifting.

Deactivating and turning off Eco Coast

In certain situations, it may be advisable to

deactivate or turn off Eco Coast so that engine

braking can be used. These situations might

include driving down steep hills or before

passing another vehicle to help ensure this

can be done as safely as possible.

Deactivate Eco Coast by

•

pressing the accelerator or brake pedal

•

moving the gear selector to manual mode

•

using the steering wheel paddles* to shift.

Turn off Eco Coast by

•

switching to another drive mode*

•

deactivating

Eco drive mode in Function

view.

It is possible to roll short distances even with-

out Eco Coast in order to help conserve fuel.

However, for the best fuel economy, Eco

Coast should be activated and used to roll

longer distances.

Cruise control Eco Cruise

When cruise control is activated in the Eco

drive mode, the vehicle's acceleration and

deceleration will be slower than in other drive

modes to help further conserve fuel. Because

of this, the vehicle's actual speed may be

slightly above or below the set speed.

•

On a level road, the vehicle's actual speed

may differ from the set speed when cruise

control is active and the vehicle is coast-

ing.

•

On a steep uphill gradient, the vehicle's

speed is reduced until the transmission

downshifts. Reduced acceleration is then

initiated in order to reach the set speed.

•

On a downhill gradient in which the vehi-

cle is coasting, the vehicle's actual speed

may be slightly above or below the set

speed. The function uses engine braking

to keep the set speed. If necessary, the

normal brakes are also applied.

ECO gauge in the instrument panel

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
393
The ECO gauge indicates how economical
current driving is:
•
A low reading in the green area of the
gauge indicates economical driving.
•
A high reading is shown when driving is
not economical, e.g. heavy braking or
rapid acceleration.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing
how a reference driver would drive in the same
driving situation. This is shown by the short
pointer in the gauge.
ECO Climate
In Eco mode, ECO climate is automatically
activated in the passenger compartment to
help reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the Eco drive mode is activated, set-
tings for certain climate system and elec-
tricity consuming functions are reduced.
Some of these settings can be reset man-
ually, but full functionality will only be
restored by switching off Eco mode or
adapting the Individual* drive mode to full
climate system functionality.
If condensation forms on the windows, tap the
max defroster button, which will function nor-
mally.
Related information
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 391)
•
Activating and deactivating Eco drive
mode using the function button (p. 393)
•
Drive modes* (p. 389)
•
Economical driving (p. 402)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 394)
Activating and deactivating Eco
drive mode using the function
button
There is a function button for 
Eco drive mode
in the center display's Function view if the
vehicle is not equipped with a drive mode
button in the center console.
When the engine is switched off, Eco mode is
deactivated and must therefore be reactivated
each time the engine is started. ECO will be
displayed in the instrument panel when the
function is activated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the center
display's Function view
–
Tap the Driving Mode ECO button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator light in the button will illu-
minate when the function is activated.
Related information
•
Eco drive mode (p. 391)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 391)
•
Drive modes* (p. 389)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

394

Start/Stop function

Start/Stop is a function that temporarily

switches off the engine when the vehicle has

stopped, e.g. at a traffic light or in heavy traf-

fic, and then starts it again automatically

when needed.

The Start/Stop function reduces fuel con-

sumption, which helps to reduce exhaust

emissions.

The system makes it possible to drive more

economically and climate-smart by letting the

engine auto-stop when appropriate.

Related information

•

Driving with the Start/Stop function

(p. 394)

•

Conditions for the Start/Stop function

(p. 396)

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

Driving with the Start/Stop

function

Start/stop is a function that temporarily turns

off the engine when the vehicle is stationary

and then automatically starts it when needed.

The Start/Stop function is available when the

ignition is started and can be activated if cer-

tain conditions are met.

The instrument panel indicates when the func-

tion is

•

Available

•

active

•

not available.

All of the vehicle's ordinary systems, such as

lighting, radio, etc. function normally when the

engine has been auto-stopped. Certain func-

tions may be temporarily reduced however

such as the climate system's blower speed or

extremely high audio system volume.

Auto-stop

To auto-stop the engine:

•

Stop the vehicle by applying the brakes

and keep the brake pedal depressed. The

engine will auto-stop.

Comfort or Eco drive mode, the engine

may auto-stop before the vehicle has com-

pletely stopped.

With Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist

activated, the engine will auto-stop about

three seconds after the vehicle has stopped.

Auto-start

The following conditions must be met for the

engine to auto-start.

•

Release the brake pedal. The engine will

auto-start and the vehicle can be driven.

On an uphill gradient, Hill Start Assist

(HSA

) will activate to help prevent the

vehicle from rolling backward.

•

When the Auto-hold function is activated,

auto-start will be delayed until the acceler-

ator is pressed.

•

When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot

Assist are activated, the engine will auto-

start when the accelerator pedal is

depressed or the

button on the left-

side steering wheel keypad is pressed.

•

Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and

press the accelerator pedal. The engine

will auto-start.

•

On a downhill gradient: Release the brake

pedal slightly so that the vehicle begins to

roll. The engine will auto-start after a slight

increase in speed.

Hill Start Assist

STARTING AND DRIVING
395
Symbols in the instrument panel
 White – Displayed in the tachometer
when the function is available.
 Green – Shown in the tachometer
when the function is active and the engine is
auto-stopped.
 Gray – When the symbol is grayed-
out with a line through it, the function is not
available.
If no symbol is shown, the function is
switched off.
The function is active and the engine has auto-stop-
ped.
Related information
•
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
(p. 395)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 396)
•
Start/Stop function (p. 394)
•
Hill Start Assist (p. 382)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)
Deactivating the Start/Stop
function
In certain situations, it may be advisable to
turn the Start/Stop function off.
To turn off Start/Stop, tap the
Start/Stop function button
in the center display's Func-
tion view. The indicator light
in the button will go out
when the function has been
turned off.
The function will remain turned off until:
•
it is reactivated
•
the drive mode is changed to 
Eco.
Related information
•
Driving with the Start/Stop function
(p. 394)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 396)

STARTING AND DRIVING

396

Conditions for the Start/Stop

function

Certain conditions must be met for Start/

Stop to function.

If any condition is not met, this will be indi-

cated in the instrument panel.

The engine does not auto-stop

The engine will not auto-stop if:

•

The vehicle has not reached a speed of

ca 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting.

•

After several auto-stops, the speed must

again exceed approximately ca 10 km/h

(6 mph) before the next auto-stop.

•

The driver has not fastened the seatbelt.

•

The engine is not running at its normal

operating temperature.

•

The ambient temperature is under

approximately -5 °C (23 °F) or over

approximately 37 °C (98 °F).

•

Windshield heating is activated.

•

The climate system settings and the

actual climate in the passenger compart-

ment differ.

•

The vehicle is in reverse.

•

The driver is making large steering wheel

movements.

•

The road gradient is very steep.

•

The hood is open.

•

Driving at high altitude and the engine has

not reached its normal operating tempera-

ture.

•

ABS has been activated.

•

Hard braking (even if the ABS system has

not been activated).

•

Many starts during a short period of time

have triggered the starter motor's over-

heating protection.

•

The exhaust system's particulate filter is

full.

•

A trailer is connected to the vehicle's elec-

trical system.

•

The transmission is not running at its nor-

mal operating temperature.

•

The gear selector is in mode M (

•

If traffic conditions allow it (for example in

a traffic jam).

The engine does not auto-start

The engine will not auto-start after an auto-

stop if:

•

The driver is not wearing a seat belt, the

gear selector is in the P position and the

driver's door is open. The engine must be

started normally.

The engine auto-starts while the brake

pedal is depressed

In the following situations, the engine will

auto-start even if the brake pedal is

depressed:

•

High levels of condensation on the inside

of the windows.

•

The climate system settings and the

actual climate in the passenger compart-

ment differ.

•

The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.

•

The hood is open.

•

The vehicle begins to roll or increases

speed slightly if the engine auto-stopped

before the vehicle was at a standstill.

•

The driver's seat belt is unbuckled with the

gear selector in the D or N positions.

•

The gear selector is moved from D to R or

M (±).

•

The driver's door is opened with the gear

selector in D. An audible signal and a text

message informs the driver that the igni-

tion is on.

WARNING

Do not open the hood if the engine has

auto-stopped. Turn off the engine by

switching off the ignition before lifting the

hood.

STARTING AND DRIVING

397

Related information

•

Start/Stop function (p. 394)

•

Driving with the Start/Stop function

(p. 394)

•

Deactivating the Start/Stop function

(p. 395)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

398

Leveling control* and suspension

Self-leveling and suspension functions are

controlled automatically.

Shock absorbers (Four-C)

On vehicles equipped with Four-C, the shock

absorbers are adapted to the selected drive

mode and the current vehicle speed. The

shock absorbers are normally set to help opti-

mize comfort and are adjusted continuously

according to the road surface and the vehicle's

acceleration, braking and cornering.

Symbols and messages

If a problem occurs with the leveling control, a

message will be displayed in the instrument

panel.

Symbol Message Meaning

Suspension

Service required

A fault has occurred. Visit a workshop

as soon as possible.

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

Drive modes* (p. 389)

STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
399
Low Speed Control*
The low-speed function (LSC
11
) facilitates and
improves control and traction on rough roads
and slippery surfaces, e.g. when towing a
trailer on grass or up boat ramps.
In vehicles equipped with drive mode but-
ton*, the function is included in the 
Off Road
drive mode.
Low Speed Control is designed for driving on
rough roads and when towing trailers at low
speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
Low Speed Control prioritizes low gear posi-
tions and traction. If the vehicle is all-wheel
drive, power is automatically distributed
evenly to provide as much traction as possible
on all wheels and reduce the risk of wheel
spin. The accelerator pedal will be less respon-
sive to improve traction and speed control at
low speeds.
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC
12
), which makes it pos-
sible to control speed going down steep hills
using the accelerator pedal and reduces the
need to use the brake pedal. The system
makes it possible to maintain a low and uni-
form speed when driving down steep hills.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel
of the accelerator pedal and engine
response will change.
NOTE
This drive mode is not designed to be used
for normal street driving.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating Low Speed
Control* using the function button
(p. 399)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 391)
•
Hill Descent Control* (p. 400)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 388)
Activating and deactivating Low
Speed Control* using the function
button
There is a function button for driving at low
speeds with 
Hill Descent Control in the cen-
ter display's Function view if the vehicle is
not equipped with a drive mode button in the
center console.
Selecting Low Speed Control in the
center display's Function view
–
Tap the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator light in the button will illu-
minate when the function is activated.
When the engine is switched off, the function
will be automatically deactivated.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.
11
Low Speed Control
12
Hill Descent Control

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

400

Related information

•

Low Speed Control* (p. 399)

•

Changing drive mode* (p. 391)

Hill Descent Control*

The function for assisting when driving down-

hill (HDC

) is a low-speed function with

increased engine braking. The function

makes it possible to increase or decrease the

vehicle's speed on steep downhill gradients

by only using the accelerator pedal, without

applying the brakes.

In vehicles equipped with drive mode but-

ton*, the function is included in the

Off Road

drive mode.

HDC is designed for driving on rough roads at

low speeds and downhill gradients with slip-

pery or otherwise difficult road surfaces. The

driver does not need to use the brake pedal

but can instead focus on steering.

WARNING

HDC is only intended to be a supplemen-

tary braking aid and it does not function in

all situations.

The driver is always ultimately responsible

for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

Function

Hill Descent Control allows the vehicle to

move forward or backward at very low speeds

assisted by the brake system. The driver can

increase the speed by pressing the accelerator

pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released,

the vehicle will return to very low speed

regardless of how steep the hill is and without

the brakes needing to be applied. The brake

lights will illuminate when the function is acti-

vated.

The driver can brake to stop or slow the vehi-

cle at any time by depressing the brake pedal.

HDC is activated along with Low Speed Con-

trol (LSC

), which facilitates and improves

traction and control on rough and slippery sur-

faces. The system is intended to be used at

low speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25

mph).

To keep in mind when using HDC

•

If the function is switched off while driving

on a steep downhill gradient, braking

effect will be gradually reduced.

•

HDC can be used in gear positions D and

R, and in manual gears 1 or 2.

•

It is not possible to manually shift to third

gear or higher when HDC is active.

Hill Descent Control

Low Speed Control

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
401
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel
of the accelerator pedal and engine
response will change.
NOTE
This drive mode is not designed to be used
for normal street driving.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating Hill Descent
Control* using the function button
(p. 401)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 391)
•
Low Speed Control* (p. 399)
•
All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 388)
Activating and deactivating Hill
Descent Control* using the
function button
There is a function button for assistance on
steep gradients with 
Hill Descent Control in
the center display's Function view if the vehi-
cle is not equipped with a drive mode button
in the center console.
Selecting Hill Descent Control in the
center display's Function view
HDC only works at low speeds.
–
Tap the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator light in the button will illu-
minate when the function is activated.
When the engine is switched off, the function
will be automatically deactivated.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
high speeds and must be reactivated at
lower speeds if so desired.
Related information
•
Hill Descent Control* (p. 400)
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 391)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

402

Economical driving

A more economical driving style can help

lower fuel consumption.

Before driving

•

If possible, precondition the vehicle before

driving.

•

If preconditioning is not possible when it

is cold outside, use seat and steering

wheel heating first. Avoid heating the

entire passenger compartment to reduce

the amount of current being taken from

the start battery.

•

Avoid using idling to warm up the vehicle

before driving.

•

The type of tires and inflation pressure

used could affect energy consumption –

consult an authorized Volvo retailer for

advice on suitable tires.

•

Remove unnecessary items from the vehi-

cle - the heavier the load, the higher the

fuel consumption.

While driving

•

Activate

Eco drive mode.

•

Use gear selector position D as often as

possible.

•

When using manual gear shifting, drive

using the highest possible gear. Use the

gear indicator

•

Maintain a steady speed and a generous

following distance to traffic ahead to mini-

mize braking. Use engine braking if possi-

ble.

•

Higher speeds increase energy consump-

tion because air resistance increases with

speed.

•

In a cold climate, reduce heating of the

windshield/rear window, mirrors, seats

and the steering wheel.

•

Avoid driving with the windows open.

•

Do not use the accelerator pedal to keep

the vehicle stationary on an uphill gradi-

ent. Instead, activate the auto-hold brake

function at a standstill.

•

Use trip data to see current fuel consump-

tion.

WARNING

Never turn off the engine while the vehicle

is moving, e.g. when driving downhill. This

deactivates certain important systems

such as power steering and brakes.

After driving

•

If possible, park in a climate-controlled

garage.

Related information

•

Eco drive mode (p. 391)

•

Starting and stopping preconditioning*

(p. 213)

•

Checking tire pressure (p. 507)

•

Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a

standstill (p. 382)

•

Start/Stop function (p. 394)

•

Trip computer (p. 87)

Only available in certain markets.

STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
403
Preparing for a long trip
It is important to have the vehicle's systems
and equipment checked carefully before driv-
ing long distances.
Check that
•
the engine is running properly and that
fuel consumption is normal
•
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
•
the brake pedal is functioning properly
•
all lights work
•
tire tread depth and air pressure are at
correct levels. Change to snow tires when
driving in areas where there is a risk of
snowy or icy roads
•
the start battery is sufficiently charged
•
the wiper blades are in good condition
Related information
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 507)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Winter driving (p. 403)
•
Economical driving (p. 402)
•
Vehicle modem settings (p. 482)
•
Loading recommendations (p. 537)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 414)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 280)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 522)
Winter driving
It is important to check the vehicle before
driving in cold/snowy conditions to make
sure it can be driven safely.
Before the cold season arrives:
•
Make sure the engine coolant contains
50% antifreeze. This mixture helps pro-
tect the engine from frost erosion down to
approx. –35 °C (–31 °F). Do not mix dif-
ferent types of antifreeze as this could
pose a health risk.
•
Keep the fuel tank well filled to prevent
condensation from forming.
•
Check the viscosity of the engine oil. Oil
with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting and reduces fuel
consumption when driving with a cold
engine.
•
Check the condition and charge level of
the start battery. Cold weather places
greater demands on the start battery and
reduces its capacity.
•
Use washer fluid containing antifreeze to
help prevent ice from forming in the
washer fluid reservoir.
See separate section for engine oil recommen-
dations.
Slippery driving conditions
To help optimize traction and roadholding,
Volvo recommends using snow tires on all
wheels whenever there is a risk of snow or ice
on the road.
NOTE
Certain countries require use of winter tires
by law. Not all countries permit the use of
studded tires.
Practice driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the vehicle
reacts.
Related information
•
Engine oil specifications (p. 618)
•
Snow tires (p. 520)
•
Snow chains (p. 521)
•
Braking on salted roads (p. 377)
•
Braking on wet roads (p. 376)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Starter battery (p. 565)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Refilling coolant (p. 563)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

404

Driving through standing water

It may be necessary to drive the vehicle

through standing water e.g. deep puddles or

flooding on the road. This must be done with

great caution.

The vehicle can be driven through water up to

a depth of 45 cm (17 in) at no more than walk-

ing speed. Be particularly careful when driving

through flowing water.

When driving through standing water, drive

slowly and do not stop the vehicle. When you

have passed the water, press lightly on the

brake pedal and check that the brakes are

functioning properly. Water, mud, slush, etc.

can make the brake linings slippery, resulting

in delayed braking effect.

•

If the vehicle is equipped with contacts for

an electric heater or trailer coupling, clean

these after driving in water or mud.

•

Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water

up to the sills any longer than absolutely

necessary. This could result in electrical

malfunctions.

CAUTION

•

Engine damage could occur if water

enters the air cleaner.

•

If water enters the transmission, the

lubricating ability of the oils is reduced

and the service life of these systems is

shortened.

•

Damage to any component, engine,

transmission, turbocharger, differential

or its internal components caused by

flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is

not covered under warranty.

•

If the engine stalls while the vehicle is

in water, do not attempt to restart it.

Have the vehicle towed out of the

water to a workshop. An authorized

Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk

of engine failure.

CAUTION

Because it can be difficult to determine the

water depth, Volvo recommends not driv-

ing through standing or running water. The

driver is always responsible for operating

the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering

to all applicable laws and regulations.

Related information

•

Recovery (p. 421)

•

Low Speed Control* (p. 399)

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

The vehicle must be unlocked before the fuel

filler door can be opened

An arrow next to the fuel

pump symbol in the instru-

ment panel indicates the side

of the vehicle on which the

fuel filler door is located.

1. Open the fuel filler door by pressing lightly

on its rear edge.

2. After refueling, press the fuel filler door

lightly to close it.

Related information

•

Refueling (p. 405)

STARTING AND DRIVING

405

Refueling

The fuel tank is equipped with a fuel filling

system without a cover.

Refueling the vehicle at a service

station

It is important to insert the pump's nozzle past both

of the two flaps in the fuel filler pipe before beginning

fueling.

Instructions for fueling:

1. Turn off the engine and open the fuel filler

door.

2. Select a fuel approved for use in the vehi-

cle. For more information on approved

fuels, see the section on “Fuel”.

3. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler

pipe's opening. There are two flaps just

inside the fuel filler pipe and the pump's

nozzle must push both of these flaps open

before fuel can be added.

4. Avoid overfilling the tank. Do not press the

handle on the filler nozzle again after it has

initially stopped pumping.

> The fuel tank is now filled.

NOTE

An over-full tank may overflow in hot

weather.

CAUTION

Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In

addition to causing damage to the environ-

ment, gasolines containing alcohol can

cause damage to painted surfaces, which

may not be covered under the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Refueling from a fuel container

When filling from a fuel container, use the fun-

nel provided in a foam block under the floor

hatch in the cargo compartment.

1. Open the fuel filler door.

2. Insert the funnel into the fuel filler pipe's

opening. There are two flaps just inside

the fuel filler pipe and the tube section of

the funnel must push both of these flaps

open before fuel can be added.

WARNING

California Proposition 65

Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-

senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-

cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-

oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine

except as necessary, service your vehicle in

a well ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-

vehicle.

Related information

•

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

(p. 404)

•

Fuel (p. 406)

Only locking and unlocking using the remote key, Passive Entry* or Volvo On Call will affect the status of the fuel filler door.

STARTING AND DRIVING

406

Fuel

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-

oline to control engine deposits.

Deposit control gasoline (gasoline

with detergent additives)

Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping

injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent

use of deposit control gasolines will help

ensure good driveability and fuel economy. If

you are not sure whether the gasoline contains

deposit control additives, check with the serv-

ice station operator.

NOTE

Volvo recommends not using external fuel

injector cleaning systems, e.g. do not add

detergent additives to gasoline before or

after refueling.

Unleaded fuel

All Volvo vehicles have a three-way catalytic

converter and must only use unleaded gaso-

line. US and Canadian regulations require that

pumps delivering unleaded gasoline are

labeled "UNLEADED". Only the nozzles of

these pumps will fit in your vehicle's fuel filler

inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into

a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only".

Leaded gasoline damages the three-way cata-

lytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor

system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will

lessen the effectiveness of the emission con-

trol system and could result in loss of emission

warranty coverage. State and local vehicle

inspection programs will make detection of

misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emis-

sion test failure for misfueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain

an octane enhancing additive called

methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricar-

bonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your

Emission Control System performance

may be affected, and the Check Engine

Light (malfunction indicator light) located

on your instrument panel may light. If this

occurs, please return your vehicle to a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and

ethers, "Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws

require that the service pump be marked indi-

cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,

there are areas in which the pumps are

unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is

alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,

check with the service station operator. To

meet seasonal air quality standards, some

areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo permits the use of the following "oxy-

genated" fuels. However, the specified octane

ratings must still be met.

Alcohol - Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume

may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to

as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers - MTBEETBE: Fuels containing up to

22% MTBEETBE by volume may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice

can result in vehicle performance deterioration

and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys-

tem. Such damage may not be covered under

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Related information

•

Octane rating (p. 407)

•

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

(p. 404)

•

Refueling (p. 405)

•

Emission controls (p. 408)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

407

Octane rating

Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane

higher) for all T5, T6 and T8 engines, and rec-

ommends AKI 93 for optimal performance

and fuel economy. See decal examples in

illustrations 1 and 2.

For optimal performance, Volvo recommends

premium fuel (91

octane and higher) for T4

engines. However, engine reliability should

not be affected as long as 87 octane

higher is used. See decal example in illustra-

tion 3.

Minimum octane

Decals

Illustration 1: Sample fuel pump octane label

Illustration 2: Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap

on vehicles that require premium fuel

Illustration 3: Sample fuel pump octane label

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline

Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Deter-

gent Gasoline" where available to help main-

tain engine performance and reliability. TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand-

ard jointly established by leading automotive

manufactures to meet the needs of today's

advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail-

ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their

gasoline as having met the "TOP TIER Deter-

gent Gasoline" standards.

NOTE

Information about TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline is available at toptiergas.com

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-

sary to fill the tank more than once before a

difference in engine operation is noticea-

ble.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead or man-

ganese as a knock inhibitor, and do not use

lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust

emission control systems on your vehicle, lead

has been strongly linked to certain forms of

cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to

AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2

For supplementary information - see the car's Service and Warranty Booklet.

STARTING AND DRIVING

408

certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area

where you must fill your own gas tank, take

precautions. These may include:

•

standing upwind away from the filler noz-

zle while refueling

•

refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the mouth

of the filler neck during refueling

•

wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur-

ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick-

eners, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.

Overuse may damage your engine, and some

of these additives contain organically volatile

chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself

to these chemicals.

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched

on while refueling your vehicle. If the

phone rings, this may cause a spark that

could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire

and injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,

and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust

gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes

inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger

compartment is ventilated, and immedi-

ately return the vehicle to a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician for cor-

rection.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as

when towing a trailer or driving in hot weather

or for prolonged periods at high altitudes, it

may be a good idea to switch to a higher-

octane fuel (AKI

91 or higher) or to switch to

another brand of gasoline in order to fully uti-

lize the vehicle's engine capacity and optimize

traction.

Related information

•

Fuel (p. 406)

•

Emission controls (p. 408)

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

•

Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving

the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition

systems, may cause unusually high three-

way catalytic converter temperatures. Do

not continue to operate your vehicle if you

detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of

power or other unusual operating condi-

tions, such as engine overheating or back-

firing. A properly tuned engine will help

avoid malfunctions that could damage the

three-way catalytic converter.

•

Do not park your vehicle over combustible

materials, such as grass or leaves, which

can come into contact with the hot

exhaust system and cause such materials

to ignite under certain wind and weather

conditions.

•

Excessive starter cranking (in excess of

one minute), or an intermittently firing or

flooded engine can cause three-way cata-

lytic converter or exhaust system over-

heating.

•

Remember that tampering or unauthor-

ized modifications to the engine, the

Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may

be illegal and can cause three-way cata-

lytic converter or exhaust system over-

AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

409

heating. This includes: altering fuel injec-

tion settings or components, altering

emission system components or location

or removing components, and/or repeated

use of leaded fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-

gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings

are fed into a control module that continuously

monitors engine functions and controls fuel

injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine

is continuously adjusted for efficient combus-

tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

Related information

•

Octane rating (p. 407)

•

Fuel (p. 406)

Overheating of engine and

transmission

In certain driving conditions, such as driving

in mountainous areas or hot weather, there is

a risk of the engine or transmission overheat-

ing, especially when carrying heavy loads.

•

Engine power may be temporarily limited.

•

Remove any auxiliary lights mounted in

front of the grille when driving in hot

weather.

•

If the temperature in the engine's cooling

system becomes too high, a warning sym-

bol will appear in the instrument panel

along with the message

Engine

temperature

High temperature Stop

safely. Pull over to a safe location and let

the engine idle for a few minutes to cool

down.

•

If the message

Engine temperature

High temperature Turn off engine or

Engine coolant Level low, turn off

engine is displayed, stop the vehicle and

turn off the engine.

•

If the transmission begins to overheat, an

alternative gear shifting program will be

selected. An integrated protective function

will also be activated, the warning symbol

will illuminate and the message

Transmission warm Reduce speed to

lower temperature or Transmission hot

Stop safely, wait for cooling will be dis-

played in the instrument panel. Follow the

recommendations given by reducing

speed or stopping the vehicle safely and

letting the engine idle for a few minutes to

let the transmission cool.

•

If the vehicle begins to overheat, the air

conditioning may be temporarily switched

off.

•

After a prolonged period of driving in

demanding conditions, do not turn off the

engine immediately after stopping.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to

operate for a short time after the engine is

switched off.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Meaning

High engine temperature. Follow

the recommendations provided.

Low coolant level. Follow the

recommendations provided.

Transmission hot/overheated/

cooling. Follow the recommen-

dations provided.

STARTING AND DRIVING

410

Related information

•

Refilling coolant (p. 563)

•

Driving with a trailer (p. 414)

•

Preparing for a long trip (p. 403)

Battery drain

The electrical functions in the vehicle drain

the battery to varying degrees. Avoid using

ignition mode II when the engine is switched

off. Use ignition mode I instead, as this uses

less electrical current.

Note that certain accessories may also drain

power from the electrical system. Do not use

functions that use a lot of electrical current

when the engine is turned off. Examples of

such functions are:

•

blower

•

headlights

•

windshield wipers

•

audio system (especially at high volume).

If the starter battery voltage is low, a message

is shown in the driver display. The vehicle's

energy-saving function will then turn off or

reduce certain functions, such as the blower

and/or the audio system.

–

To charge the battery, start the engine and

let it run for at least 15 minutes (driving

charges the battery faster than letting the

engine idle).

Related information

•

Starter battery (p. 565)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

Jump starting using another

battery

If the start battery is discharged, current from

another battery can be used to start the vehi-

cle.

Jumper cable connecting points.

To avoid short circuits or other damage, the

following steps are recommended when jump

starting the battery using another battery:

1. Put the ignition in mode 0.

2. Make sure the auxiliary battery (the bat-

tery used to jump start the discharged

battery) has a voltage of 12 volts.

3. If the auxiliary battery is in another vehicle,

turn off that vehicle's engine and make

sure that the vehicles are not touching

each other.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

411

4. Clamp the red jumper cable onto the auxil-

iary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

CAUTION

Connect the jump cable carefully to pre-

vent short circuits with other components

in the engine compartment.

5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's

positive (+) jump start terminal (2).

6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper

cable to your vehicle's positive (+) jump

start terminal (2).

7. Clamp the black jumper cable onto the

auxiliary battery's negative (-) terminal (3).

8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper

cable to your vehicle's negative (-) ground

point (4).

9. Make sure the jumper cables are securely

attached to help prevent sparks while

jump starting.

10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes at a higher

idling speed than normal, about

1500 rpm.

11. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

dead battery.

CAUTION

Do not touch the connections between the

cable and the vehicle during the start

attempt. Risk of sparking.

12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse

order ‒ first the black cables and then the

red cables.

Make sure that none of the clamps of the

black jumper cables come into contact

with either vehicle's positive (+) jump start

terminals or either of the red jumper

cable's connected clamps.

WARNING

High voltage may be dangerous if handled

incorrectly. Do not touch anything on bat-

teries that is not clearly described in this

Owner's Manual.

•

Never use a 48 V support battery to

jump start the vehicle.

•

External electrical equipment may not

under any circumstance be connected

to the 48 V battery.

•

Only a workshop may replace or per-

form service on the 48 V battery – an

authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery

posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-

cals known to the state of California to

cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash

hands after handling.

STARTING AND DRIVING

412

WARNING

•

Batteries generate hydrogen gas,

which is flammable and explosive.

•

Do not connect the jumper cable to

any part of the fuel system or to any

moving parts. Avoid touching hot

manifolds.

•

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces.

•

If contact occurs, flush the affected

area immediately with water. Obtain

medical help immediately if eyes are

affected.

•

Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark. Do not smoke near

the battery. Failure to follow the

instructions for jump starting can lead

to injury.

NOTE

If the starter battery has been discharged

to the extent that the vehicle does not have

normal electrical functions and the engine

must then be jump-started with an external

battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop

function may remain activated. If the Start/

Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops

the engine, there is a huge risk that auto-

start of the engine will fail due to insuffi-

cient battery capacity since the battery had

not had time to recharge.

If the vehicle has been jump-started or if

there has not been enough time for the

battery to be charged with a battery

charger, the Start/Stop function should be

temporarily deactivated until the battery

has been recharged by the vehicle. At an

ambient temperature of about +15°C

(about 60°F), the battery must be charged

by the vehicle for at least one hour. At

lower ambient temperatures, the charging

time can increase to 34 hours. It is advisa-

ble to charge the battery with an external

battery charger.

Related information

•

Starting the vehicle (p. 370)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

•

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)

•

Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)

•

Support battery (p. 567)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory.

413

Detachable towbar*

Volvo recommends the use of Volvo towbars

that are specially designed for the vehicle.

NOTE

The optional detachable trailer hitch may

not be available in all markets or on all

models. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Ball holder

Cotter pin

Towbar assembly

Locking bolt

Safety wire attachment bracket

Installing the ball holder

1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from

the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt

out of the towbar assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar

assembly.

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the

one in the towbar assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the towbar

assembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end

of the locking bolt.

WARNING

•

Be sure the towbar is securely locked

in position before attaching anything to

it.

•

Always attach the trailer's safety wire

securely to the towbar's safety wire

attachment bracket.

Removing the ball holder

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking

bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the

ball holder/towbar assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the towbar

assembly.

WARNING

Damage may occur on the towbar if it is

not used correctly or if incorrect or faulty

accessories are used, such as:

•

Overloading of accessory.

•

Use of incorrect or faulty accessory.

•

Accessory used for an incorrect pur-

pose.

•

Use of weight-distributing towing sys-

tem.

•

Incorrectly positioned ball mount; see

geometric limits for the towbar.

Stowing the ball holder

WARNING

When not in use, the detachable ball holder

should always be properly stowed in the

designated location under the floor of the

cargo compartment.

Driving with a trailer

When towing a trailer, the original ball holder

or equivalent should be used.

STARTING AND DRIVING

414

The ball mount must fall within the geometric

limits for the towbar, for both distance

and

height

. Geometric limits are described on a

type plate located on the towbar.

Related information

•

Driving with a trailer (p. 414)

•

Towing capacity and tongue weight

(p. 616)

Driving with a trailer

There are a number of things to consider

when towing a trailer, such as the towbar, the

trailer and how the load is distributed in the

trailer.

Load-carrying capacity is determined by the

vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all

passengers and any installed accessories, e.g.

towbar, reduces the vehicle's load-carrying

capacity by the corresponding amount.

•

Towbars used on the vehicle must be

approved for the applicable use.

•

Distribute the load on the trailer so that

the weight on the towbar complies with

the specified maximum towball weight.

The tongue weight is calculated as part of

the vehicle's payload.

•

Increase the tire pressure to the recom-

mended pressure for a full load.

•

The engine is subjected to more load than

usual when towing a trailer.

•

Towing a trailer affects the vehicle's han-

dling, durability and driving economy.

•

Do not drive with a heavy trailer when the

vehicle is very new. Wait until the mileage

has reached at least 1000 km (620 miles).

•

On long and steep downgrades, the vehi-

cle's brakes are subjected to much more

load than usual. When manually shifting,

downshift and adapt speed accordingly.

•

Follow applicable regulations regarding

permitted speed and weight.

•

Drive slowly when towing a trailer up a

long and steep incline.

•

The maximum trailer weights given only

apply to altitudes up to 1000 meters

(3280 feet) above sea level. At higher alti-

tudes, engine power (and thus the vehi-

cle's climbing ability) is decreased due to

the reduced air density, and the maximum

trailer weight must therefore be reduced.

The weight of the vehicle and trailer must

be decreased by 10% for each additional

1000 m (3280 feet) or part thereof.

•

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of

more than 12%.

•

Avoid overloading and other incorrect use.

•

The trailer's brakes must be balanced with

the vehicle's brakes to help ensure safe

stops (follow applicable local regulations).

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory.

415

CAUTION

•

Bumper-attached trailer hitches must

not be used on Volvos, nor should

safety chains be attached to the

bumper.

•

Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•

Never connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to the vehicle

brake system, nor a trailer's lighting

system directly to the vehicle lighting

system. Consult your nearest author-

ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-

tion.

•

When towing a trailer, the trailer's

safety chains or wire must be correctly

fastened to the attachment points pro-

vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle.

The safety chain or wire must never be

fastened to or wound around the tow-

ing ball.

NOTE

The optional detachable trailer hitch may

not be available in all markets or on all

models. Consult your Volvo retailer.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, towing a

trailer, high altitude and lower fuel grade

than recommended are factors that can

significantly increase the vehicle's fuel con-

sumption.

Trailer weights

WARNING

Please adhere to the recommendations

provided for trailer weight. If the recom-

mendations are not followed, the vehicle

and trailer may be difficult to control during

evasive maneuvers and braking.

NOTE

The specified maximum trailer weights are

those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle

regulations may set additional restrictions

on trailer weight and speed. The trailer

hitches may be certified for higher towing

weights than the vehicle is permitted to

tow.

Self-leveling suspension*

The vehicle's self-leveling system attempts to

keep the vehicle at a constant level, regardless

of load (up to the maximum permitted weight).

When the vehicle is stationary, the rear end of

the vehicle will be slightly lowered, which is

normal.

Driving in hilly terrain or hot weather

In certain conditions, there is a risk of over-

heating when driving with a trailer. If overheat-

ing of the engine and drive system is detected,

a warning symbol will illuminate in the instru-

ment panel and a message will appear.

The automatic transmission adapts the gear

for the current load and engine speed.

Steep inclines

Do not lock the automatic transmission into a

higher gear than what the engine can handle

‒

it is not always preferable to drive in high

gears at low rpm.

Parking on a hill

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Put the gear selector in P.

4. Release the brake pedal.

Put chocks behind the wheels when the vehi-

cle is parked on a hill with a trailer attached.

Starting on a hill

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Put the gear selector in D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the brake pedal and start driving.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

416

Related information

•

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416)

•

Checking trailer lights (p. 417)

•

Towing capacity and tongue weight

(p. 616)

•

Overheating of engine and transmission

(p. 409)

Trailer Stability Assist*

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA

) is part of the

ESC

stability system and is a function

designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is

towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer

have begun to sway. The function is added

when installing a towbar. Contact a Volvo

retailer for more information.

Reasons for swaying

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway

for various reasons. Normally this only occurs

at high speeds. However, if the trailer is over-

loaded or unevenly distributed, e.g. too far

back, there is a risk of swaying even at low

speeds.

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•

The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden,

strong crosswind.

•

The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an

uneven road or over a bump.

•

Sudden movements of the steering wheel.

Once swaying has begun, it can be difficult or

impossible to stop it. This makes the vehicle

and trailer difficult to control and there is a risk

of swerving into oncoming traffic or driving off

the road.

Trailer Stability Assist function

Trailer Stability Assist continuously monitors

the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

movements. If swaying is detected, the brakes

are applied individually on the front wheels,

which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle

and trailer. This is often enough to enable the

driver to regain control of the vehicle.

If the Trailer Stability Assist function's first

attempt is not adequate to stop the swaying

motion, the brakes are applied on all wheels

and engine power is temporarily reduced. As

the swaying motion begins to decrease and

the vehicle and trailer have once again

become stable, TSA stops regulating the

brakes/engine power and the driver regains

control of the vehicle.

NOTE

Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if the

driver activates

ESC Sport Mode in the

center display's menu system.

Trailer Stability Assist may not intervene if the

driver tries to compensate for the swaying

motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly,

because the system will then not be able to

determine if it is the trailer or the driver caus-

ing the swaying.

Trailer Stability Assist

Electronic Stability Control

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

417

When Trailer Stability Assist

is activated, the ESC symbol

is displayed in the instrument

panel.

NOTE

A vehicle software update is required when

a towbar is retrofitted. Contact a Volvo

retailer.

Related information

•

Driving with a trailer (p. 414)

•

Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)

Checking trailer lights

When connecting a trailer, make sure that all

of the lights on the trailer are functioning

before starting to drive.

Trailer turn signals and brake lights

If one or more of the turn signals or brake

lights on the trailer is not working, a symbol

and message will be displayed in the instru-

ment panel. The other lights on the trailer

must be checked manually by the driver before

the vehicle is driven.

Symbol Message

•

Trailer turn indicator Right

turn indicator malfunction

•

Trailer turn indicator Left

turn indicator malfunction

•

Trailer brake light Malfunc-

tion

If any of the trailer's turn signal lights is not

working, the turn signal symbol in the instru-

ment panel will also flash more quickly than

normal.

Trailer rear fog light

When a trailer is connected, the vehicle's rear

fog light may not illuminate and rear fog light

functionality is instead transferred to the

trailer. If this is the case, check to see if the

trailer is equipped with a rear fog light before

activating the vehicle's fog lights when driving

with a trailer to help ensure safe operation.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

418

Checking trailer lights*

Automatic check

When the trailer has been connected to the

vehicle's electrical system, its lights can be

checked by automatically activating them.

This function helps the driver check that the

trailer's lights are functioning correctly before

starting to drive.

In order to perform this check, the vehicle

must be switched off.

1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar,

the message

Automatic Trailer Lamp

Check will appear in the instrument panel.

2. Acknowledge the message by pressing

the O button on the right-side steering

wheel keypad.

> The light check will begin.

3. Get out of the vehicle to perform the

check.

> All of the lights on the trailer will begin

flashing, and then illuminate separately

one at a time.

4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lights

are functioning correctly.

5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lights

will start flashing again.

> The light check is completed.

Disabling the automatic check

The automatic light check can be disabled in

the center display.

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting.

Deselect

Automatic Trailer Lamp

Check.

Manual check

If the automatic check has been disabled, the

check can be started manually.

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap

My Car Lights and Lighting.

Select

Manual Trailer Lamp Check.

> The light check will begin. Get out of

the vehicle to perform the check.

Related information

•

Driving with a trailer (p. 414)

Towing using a towline

This section refers to one vehicle being towed

behind another using a towline.

Before towing another vehicle, check applica-

ble speed limit regulations.

Preparations and towing

CAUTION

For some transmission variants, it is not

possible to shift from P position if the

engine is switched off. Contact an author-

ized Volvo workshop for assistance towing

or call a professional towing service.

CAUTION

Note that the vehicle must always be

towed with the wheels rolling forward.

•

Do not tow a vehicle with automatic

transmission at a speed greater than

80 km/h (50 mph) or for a distance

greater than 80 km (50 miles).

STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
419
WARNING
•
Ignition mode II must be active – all
airbags are deactivated in ignition
mode I.
•
Always have the remote key in the
vehicle when it is towed.
WARNING
The brake and steering servos do not work
when the engine is off – it takes
about 5 times more pressure on the brake
pedal and steering requires much more
effort than normal.
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Attach the towline to the towing eyelet.
3. Put the vehicle in ignition mode II – with-
out pressing the brake pedal, press and
hold the start button for about 4 seconds.
Release the button.
4. Move the gear selector to neutral (N) and
release the parking brake.
If the battery charge level is too low, it
may not be possible to release the parking
brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the
vehicle if the battery is discharged.
> The towing vehicle can now start driv-
ing.
5. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle slows down by applying light pres-
sure to the brake pedal. This will help
avoid jarring movements.
6. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop
the vehicle.
Jump starting
Do not tow the vehicle to start the engine. Use
an auxiliary battery if the start battery's charge
level is so low that the engine cannot be
started.
CAUTION
Attempting to tow with the engine running
could result in damage to the three-way
catalytic converter.
Related information
•
Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
(p. 419)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 155)
•
Recovery (p. 421)
•
Jump starting using another battery
(p. 410)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)
•
Transmission (p. 383)
Attaching and removing the
towing eyelet
Use the towing eyelet when towing. Screw
the towing eyelet securely into place in the
threaded outlet behind the cover on the right-
hand side of the front and rear bumpers.
Attaching the towing eyelet
Take out the towing eyelet, which is
stored in a foam block under the floor in
the cargo compartment.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

420

Front: Remove the cover by pressing the

cover.

> The cover turns along its center line and

can then be removed.

Rear: Remove the cover by placing a coin,

key or similar at the mark and prying out

the cover.

> Fold out the cover completely and

remove.

4. Screw the towing eyelet in as far as possi-

ble.

Fasten the eyelet securing by, for example,

inserting a lug wrench* through it and

using this as a lever.

CAUTION

It is important that the towing eye is

screwed in securely as far as possible.

To consider before using the towing eyelet

•

In certain conditions, the towing eyelet

may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flat-

bed tow truck. The vehicle's position and

ground clearance determines if this is pos-

sible.

•

If the incline of the tow truck is too steep

or if the ground clearance under the vehi-

cle is insufficient, attempting to pull it up

using the towing eyelet may result in dam-

age.

•

If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow

truck's lifting device instead of using the

towing eyelet.

WARNING

No person or object should be behind the

tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto

the bed of the truck.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet is only intended for tow-

ing on roads – not for pulling vehicles from

ditches or any similar purpose involving

severe strain. Call a tow truck for profes-

sional assistance.

Removing the towing eyelet

–

Unscrew the towing eyelet after use and

return it to the foam block.

Replace the cover on the bumper.

Related information

•

Towing using a towline (p. 418)

•

Recovery (p. 421)

•

Tool kit (p. 516)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory.

421

Recovery

This section refers to transporting the vehicle

with a tow truck or similar vehicle.

Call a professional towing service for assis-

tance.

In certain conditions, the towing eyelet can be

used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow

truck.

The vehicle's location and ground clearance

determine if it can be lifted onto a tow truck. If

the incline of the tow truck is too steep or if

the ground clearance under the vehicle is

insufficient, attempting to pull it up may result

in damage. In this case, the vehicle should

only be lifted with the tow truck's lifting equip-

ment.

WARNING

No person or object should be behind the

tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto

the bed of the truck.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet is only intended for tow-

ing on roads, and must not be used to pull

vehicles from ditches or any similar pur-

pose involving severe strain. Call a tow

truck for professional assistance.

CAUTION

Note that the vehicle must always be

towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Related information

•

Attaching and removing the towing eyelet

(p. 419)

HomeLink

®22

is a programmable remote con-

trol, integrated in the vehicle electrical sys-

tem, that can control up to three different

devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys-

tem, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby

replace the remote controls for these.

General

The illustration is generic – the design may vary.

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Indicator light

HomeLink

is delivered integrated in the rear-

view mirror. The HomeLink

panel consists of

Certain markets only.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

422

three programmable buttons and an indicator

light in the mirror.

For more information about HomeLink

please visit: homelink.com or call

18003553515.

Save the original remote controls for future

programming (e.g. for use in another vehicle).

CAUTION

The button programming should be cleared

if the vehicle is sold.

Related information

•

Using HomeLink

* (p. 424)

•

Programming HomeLink

* (p. 422)

•

Type approval for HomeLink

* (p. 424)

Programming HomeLink

Follow these instructions to program

HomeLink

, reset all programming, or pro-

gram individual buttons.

NOTE

In some vehicles, the ignition must be on

or in the "accessory position" before

HomeLink

can be programmed or used. It

can be a good idea to put new batteries in

the remote control being replaced by

HomeLink

for faster programming and

better radio signal transmission. The

HomeLink

buttons should be reset before

programming.

WARNING

While HomeLink

is being programmed,

the garage door or gate being programmed

may be activated. Make sure that no one is

near the door or gate during programming.

When programming a garage door opener,

it is advised to park outside of the garage.

1. Point the remote control at the

HomeLink

button to be programmed and

hold it about 28 cm (13 inches) from the

button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink

indicator light.

Note: Some remote controls are more

effective at programming HomeLink

from

a distance of about 1520 cm (612

inches). Keep this in mind if you experi-

ence any programming difficulties.

2. Press and hold both the remote control

button and the HomeLink

button to be

programmed.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

Certain markets only.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

423

3. Do not release the buttons until the indica-

tor light has stopped flashing slowly

(about once a second) and either flashes

quickly (about 10 times a second) or

glows steadily.

> If the indicator light glows steadily:

Indication that programming is com-

plete. Press the programmed button

twice to activate.

If the indicator light flashes quickly:

The device being programmed with

HomeLink

may have a security func-

tion that requires an extra step. Try

pressing the programmed button twice

to see whether the programming

works. Otherwise, continue with the

following steps.

4. Locate the "training" button

on the

receiver for the e.g. garage door opener. It

is usually located near the antenna bracket

on the receiver.

5. Press and release the "training" button

once. Programming must be completed

within 30 seconds after pressing the but-

ton.

Press and release the HomeLink

button

to be programmed. Repeat the press/

hold/release sequence a second time. For

some receivers, the sequence may need to

be repeated a third time.

> Programming is now completed and

the garage door, gate, etc. should now

be activated when the programmed

button is pressed.

If you experience any difficulties programming,

please contact HomeLink

at: homelink.com,

or call 18003553515.

Programming individual buttons

To program an individual HomeLink

button:

1. Press and hold the desired button for

about 20 seconds.

When the indicator light on HomeLink

starts flashing slowly, it is possible to pro-

gram as usual.

Note: If the button you are reprogram-

ming does not program with a new

device, it will return to the previously

saved programming.

Resetting the HomeLink

buttons

It is only possible to reset all HomeLink

but-

tons at once. It is not possible to reset individ-

ual buttons. Individual buttons can only be

reprogrammed.

–

Press and hold the outer buttons (1 and 3)

on HomeLink

for about 10 seconds.

> When the indicator light goes from a

steady glow to flashing, the buttons

have been reset and are ready for

reprogramming.

Related information

•

Using HomeLink

* (p. 424)

•

HomeLink

* (p. 421)

•

Type approval for HomeLink

* (p. 424)

The name and color of the button varies depending on the manufacturer.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

424

Using HomeLink

Once HomeLink

is programmed, it can be

used instead of the separate remote controls.

Press and hold the programming button. The

garage door, gate, alarm system, etc. will be

activated (this may take several seconds). If

the button is held down for more than 20 sec-

onds, reprogramming will begin. The indicator

light will glow steadily or flash when the but-

ton has been pressed. The original remote

controls may be used concurrently with

HomeLink

if desired.

NOTE

When the ignition is switched off,

HomeLink

will be active for at least

7 minutes.

NOTE

HomeLink

cannot be used if the vehicle is

locked and the alarm is armed* from the

outside.

WARNING

•

If you use HomeLink

to open a garage

door or gate, be sure no one is near the

gate or door while it is in motion.

•

Do not use HomeLink

with any

garage door opener that lacks safety

stop and reverse features as required

by U.S. federal safety standards (this

includes any garage door opener model

manufactured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect an

object - signaling the door to stop and

reverse - does not meet current U.S.

federal safety standards. For more

information, contact HomeLink at:

homelink.com.

Related information

•

HomeLink

* (p. 421)

•

Programming HomeLink

* (p. 422)

•

Type approval for HomeLink

* (p. 424)

Type approval for HomeLink

FCC (USA) and IC (Canada)

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and Industry Canada RSS210. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

WARNING

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate the

device.

Type approval for EU

Gentex Corporation hereby declares that

HomeLink

Model UAHL5 complies with the

Radio equipment directive 201453EU.

Wavelengths within which the radio equip-

ment operates:

•

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

•

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

Certain markets only.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

425

•

868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

•

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

•

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.

Certificate holder address: Gentex Corpora-

tion, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI

49464, USA

For further details, search for support informa-

tion on type approval at volvocars.com

Related information

•

HomeLink

* (p. 421)

Compass*

An integrated compass

in the upper right

corner of the rearview mirror shows the

direction the vehicle is traveling.

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different compass directions are shown

with the abbreviations:

N (north), NE (north-

east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW

(southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest).

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating the compass*

(p. 425)

•

Calibrating the compass* (p. 426)

Activating and deactivating the

compass*

An integrated compass

in the upper right

corner of the rearview mirror shows the

direction the vehicle is traveling.

The compass is automatically activated when

the vehicle is started.

To deactivate/activate the compass manually:

–

Use a paper clip or similar object to press

the button on the bottom of the mirror.

> If the compass is deactivated when the

vehicle is switched off, it will not be

activated the next time the vehicle is

started. The compass will then need to

be activated manually.

Related information

•

Compass

(p. 425)

•

Calibrating the compass* (p. 426)

Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.

426

Calibrating the compass*

The globe is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The compass

should be calibrated if the

vehicle is driven from one zone to another.

1. Stop the vehicle in a large, open area away

from steel constructions and high-voltage

power lines.

2. Start the engine and switch off all electri-

cal equipment (climate system, wipers,

etc.) and make sure all doors are closed.

NOTE

Calibration may fail or not even be initiated

if electrical equipment is not turned off.

3. Hold the button on the bottom of the rear-

view mirror pressed for about 3 seconds

(using e.g. a paper clip). The number of the

current magnetic zone is shown.

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button on the underside of the

mirror repeatedly until the desired mag-

netic zone (

115) appears (see the map of

magnetic zones).

Wait until the display again shows C, or

press and hold the button on the under-

side of the rearview mirror for approx.

6 seconds until C is displayed.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a com-

pass direction is shown in the display. This

indicates that calibration is complete.

Drive in a circle two more times to fine-

tune the calibration.

Vehicles with heated windshields*: If

is shown in the display when the wind-

shield heating function is activated, per-

form step 6 above with the heating func-

tion on.

8. Repeat the above procedure as needed.

Related information

•

Compass* (p. 425)

•

Activating and deactivating the compass*

(p. 425)

Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
428
Audio, media and Internet
The audio and media system consists of a
media player and a radio. A cellular phone can
also be connected through Bluetooth to use
hands-free functions or play music in the
vehicle. When the vehicle is connected to the
Internet, it is also possible to use apps to play
media.
Audio and media overview
The functions can be controlled using voice
commands, the steering wheel keypad or the
center display. The number of speakers and
amplifiers varies depending on the audio sys-
tem installed in the vehicle.
System updates
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to download
system updates as soon as they are available.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 449)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Voice Control (p. 138)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
•
Driver distraction (p. 41)
•
Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 551)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 488)
Sound settings
Sound reproduction quality is preset but can
also be adjusted.
The system's volume is normally adjusted
using the volume control below the center dis-
play or the right-side steering wheel keypad.
This applies, for example, when playing music
or the radio or during phone calls and active
traffic messages.
Sound reproduction
The audio system is precalibrated using digital
signal processing. This calibration takes into
account speakers, amplifiers, passenger com-
partment acoustics, listener position, etc. for
each combination of vehicle model and audio
system. There is also a dynamic calibration
that takes into account the volume control set-
ting and the vehicle's speed.
Personal settings
Different settings are available in Top view
under 
Settings Sound depending on the
vehicle's sound system.
Premium Sound* (Harman Kardon)
•
Equalizer - setting of equalizer.
•
Balance - balance between right/left and
front/rear speakers.
•
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
429
High Performance
•
Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal-
izer, etc.
•
Balance - balance between right/left and
front/rear speakers.
•
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
Related information
•
Sound experience* (p. 429)
•
Media player (p. 449)
•
Voice control settings (p. 142)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
•
Audio, media and Internet (p. 428)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
Sound experience*
Sound experience is an app that provides
access to additional sound settings.
Open Sound Experience from the center dis-
play's App view. Depending on the sound sys-
tem installed in the vehicle, the following set-
tings are possible:
•
Seat Optimization – sound settings can
be adjusted to be primarily adapted for
Driver, All and Rear.
•
Surround - surround sound mode with
level settings.
•
Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal-
izer, etc.
Related information
•
Sound settings (p. 428)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
Apps
The App view contains apps that provide
access to certain vehicle services.
Swipe the center display screen from right to
left
1
 to access the App view from the Home
view. This view displays downloaded apps
(third-party apps) as well as apps for inte-
grated functions, such as 
FM radio.
1
Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
430
App view. (generic illustration; basic apps vary
depending on market and model)
Several basic apps are always available. More
apps such as web radio and music services
can be downloaded when the car is connected
to the Internet.
Some apps can only be used when the vehicle
is connected to the Internet.
Start an app by pressing the app in the center
display's app view.
All apps used should be updated to the latest
version.
Related information
•
Download apps (p. 430)
•
Updating apps (p. 431)
•
Deleting apps (p. 432)
•
Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
* (p. 458)
•
Android Auto* (p. 462)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Hard disk storage space (p. 487)
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485)
Download apps
New apps can be downloaded when the vehi-
cle is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrup-
ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to
switch off or cancel other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
1.
Open the 
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select 
New apps to open a list of apps
that are available but are not installed in
the vehicle.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
431
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to
expand in the list and get more informa-
tion about the app.
4.
Select 
Install to start the download and
installation of the app.
> The current status of the download and
installation will be shown.
If a download cannot be started imme-
diately, a message will be displayed.
The app will remain in the list and it will
be possible to reattempt downloading.
Canceling a download
–
Tap Abort to cancel a download in pro-
gress.
Note that only a download can be cancelled.
An installation cannot be cancelled once it has
begun.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Updating apps (p. 431)
•
Deleting apps (p. 432)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 551)
•
Hard disk storage space (p. 487)
Updating apps
Apps can be updated when the vehicle is
connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrup-
ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to
switch off or cancel other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
If an app is being used while an update is in
progress, it will be restarted to complete the
update.
Update all
1.
Open the 
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select 
Install all.
> The update will begin.
Update certain apps
1.
Open the 
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select 
Application updates to open a list
of all available updates.
3.
Find the desired app and select 
Install.
> The update will begin.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Download apps (p. 430)
•
Deleting apps (p. 432)
•
Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 551)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
432
Deleting apps
When the vehicle is connected to the Inter-
net, it is possible to uninstall apps.
If the app is being used, it must be closed
before it can be uninstalled.
1.
Open the 
Download Center app in App
view.
2.
Select 
Application updates to open a list
of all installed apps.
3.
Find the desired app and select 
Uninstall
to begin uninstalling the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it
will be removed from the list.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Download apps (p. 430)
•
Updating apps (p. 431)
•
Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 551)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
Radio
The radio can receive broadcasting from the
FM waveband with HD Radio™ Technology
and SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio *. When the
vehicle has an Internet connection, it is also
possible to listen to web radio.
The radio can be controlled
using voice commands, the
right-side steering wheel key-
pad or the center display.
Related information
•
Starting the radio (p. 433)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 433)
•
Storing radio channels in the Radio favor-
ites app (p. 435)
•
Radio settings (p. 435)
•
RBDS (p. 436)
•
HD Radio™ (p. 436)
•
SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio* (p. 440)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
•
Media player (p. 449)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

433

Starting the radio

The radio is started from the center display's

App view.

Open the desired waveband (e.g.

FM)

from App view.

2. Select a radio station.

Related information

•

Radio (p. 432)

•

Searching for a radio station (p. 434)

•

Changing waveband and radio station

(p. 433)

•

Storing radio channels in the Radio favor-

ites app (p. 435)

•

Radio settings (p. 435)

•

Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)

Changing waveband and radio

station

Instructions for changing wavebands, wave-

band lists and radio stations in the selected

list are provided here.

Changing wavebands

Swipe from App view on the center display

and select the desired waveband (e.g.

FM) or

open the App menu in the instrument panel

with the right-side steering wheel keypad and

make your selection there.

Changing a list in a waveband

Tap

Library.

Select playback from

Stations, Favorites

or Genres.

3. Tap the desired station in the list.

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
434
Favorites – only plays selected favorite chan-
nels.
Genres - only plays channels broadcasting the
selected genre or program type, e.g. pop, clas-
sical, etc.
Changing radio stations in a selected
list
–
Press   or   under the center display
or on the right-side steering wheel key-
pad.
> Move step-by-step through the
selected list.
It is also possible to change radio station in
the selected list via the center display.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 434)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
•
Storing radio channels in the Radio favor-
ites app (p. 435)
•
Radio settings (p. 435)
•
App menu in instrument panel (p. 100)
Searching for a radio station
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
radio stations that are sending out the stron-
gest signals in the vehicle's current location.
Searching is performed in different ways
depending on the waveband selected:
•
FM, stations, genres and frequency.
1.
Tap 
Library.
2.
Tap  .
> Search view will displayed and the key-
board will open.
3. Enter a search word/phrase.
> The search will start and change as
characters are entered. Search results
will be displayed by category.
Searching for a station manually
Searching manually makes it possible to find
and tune to stations that are not on the auto-
matically compiled list of the strongest sta-
tions in the area.
–
Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or
tap   or  . Press and hold to skip to
the next available station in the frequency
band. You can also use the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Starting the radio (p. 433)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 433)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
•
Radio settings (p. 435)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

435

Storing radio channels in the Radio

favorites app

It is possible to add a radio station in the

Radio favorites app and in the list of favor-

ites for the waveband (e.g. FM). Instructions

for adding and removing radio channels are

provided below.

Radio favorites

The radio favorites app

shows stored radio channels

from all wavebands.

Open the

Radio favorites app from App

view.

2. Tap the desired station in the list to listen.

Adding and deleting radio favorites

Tap to add a radio channel to the

waveband's list of favorites or the Radio

favorites app.

Tap

Library, select Edit and tap to

delete a radio channel from the list of

favorites.

When you delete a radio channel from the

Radio favorites app, the channel will also be

deleted from that waveband's list of favorites.

Related information

•

Radio (p. 432)

•

Starting the radio (p. 433)

•

Searching for a radio station (p. 434)

•

Changing waveband and radio station

(p. 433)

•

Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)

•

Radio settings (p. 435)

•

App menu in instrument panel (p. 100)

Radio settings

There are a number of different radio func-

tions that can be activated and deactivated.

Canceling a traffic message

A current broadcast (e.g. a traffic message)

can be temporarily interrupted by pressing

in the right-side steering wheel keypad or

tapping

Cancel in the center display.

Activating and deactivating radio

functions

Pull down Top view and select Settings

Media and the desired waveband to see avail-

able functions.

AMFM Radio

•

HD Radio FM: HD Radio™ Technology:

makes it possible to achieve a sound qual-

ity comparable with a CD.

•

Show Broadcast Information: shows

information on program content, artists,

etc.

•

Freeze Program Name: select to stop

the program service name from scrolling

continuously. Instead it freezes after 20

seconds.

AM radio availability varies depending on model and/or market.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

436

SiriusXM

Satellite radio*

Pull down Top view and select Settings

Media SiriusXM to show a list of available

options.

Related information

•

Radio (p. 432)

•

Settings for SiriusXM

Satellite radio*

(p. 442)

•

Symbols in the center display status bar

(p. 120)

RBDS

RBDS radio

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) ena-

bles certain functionality

, such as:

•

Searches for program types or new broad-

casts

•

Text information about currently broadcast

programs

Related information

•

Radio (p. 432)

•

Radio settings (p. 435)

HD Radio™

HD Radio is a brand name registered by the

DTS, Inc.

. They are the developer of a broad-

casting technology called IBOC or In Band On

Channel, which refers to the method of trans-

mitting a digital radio broadcast signal cen-

tered on the same frequency as the AM or FM

station's present frequency.

Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio

broadcast (generic illustration)

NOTE

HD Radio volume may fade in and out at

times due to coverage limitations.

Certain stations only.

HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS, Inc.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
437
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analog and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analog (non-digital) signal. HD
Radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automati-
cally switch to the analog signal if the digital
signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the
receiver.
When you have tuned to an HD Radio station,
the 
 symbol will appear in the infotain-
ment system display. The symbol will be dis-
played in different colors:
•
Grayed-out symbol: no HD Radio broad-
cast reception
•
White symbol: the radio is actively receiv-
ing an HD broadcast
•
Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an
HD broadcast with digital sound
More information about HD Radio and IBOC
can be found on DTS, Inc.'s website,
www.dts.com.
Artist Experience
™
A radio station's logo and album art can be
displayed. If a station opts to provide this
information, it is broadcast once every 12
minutes, which means that there may be a
delay before the logo/album art appear on the
screen. The radio can store 100 station logos
so the next time the radio is tuned to the same
station, the logo will be displayed immedi-
ately. Album art is synched with the artist that
you are currently listening to.
Ball game mode
This feature means that a main FM station
(HD1) will broadcast live events, where the
content of the programming is more important
than sound quality, in analog mode only to
help prevent the delay between analog and
digital broadcasting. The HD Radio symbol
will be white during live broadcasts and "Live"
will be displayed next to the symbol.
Benefits of digital broadcasting
•
Better sound (FM sounds near CD qual-
ity).
•
Some FM frequencies offer a greater
number of listening choices through multi-
casting (consisting of a frequency's main
channel and any sub-channels that may
also be available on that particular fre-
quency.)
•
When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
crackling due to outside influences.
How HD Radio ™ Technology
broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional
radio and broadcasts of this type are available
in many areas of the United States. However,
there are a few key differences:
•
Instead of transmitting one analog signal,
stations send out a bundled signal – both
analog and digital.
•
An HD Radio receiver can receive both
digital and analog broadcasts. Depending
on the terrain and location of the vehicle
(which will influence the signal strength),
the receiver will determine which signal to
receive.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Activating and deactivating the HD
Radio™ (p. 438)
•
HD Radio
™
 sub-channels (p. 438)
•
HD Radio
™
 limitations (p. 439)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 433)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 434)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

438

Activating and deactivating the HD

Radio™

HD Radio is deactivated when the car leaves

the factory.

When listening to an HD Radio station and

driving through areas with weak HD signals

(fringe areas), you may experience that the

radio repeatedly switches between analog/

digital and digital/analog reception. If this hap-

pens, it may be desirable to switch HD off.

Carry out the following to activate or deacti-

vate HD Radio:

1. Drag down the top view and tap on

Settings.

Press

Media and FM Radio.

Press

HD Radio FM to activate/deacti-

vate the function.

If HD radio is deactivated, the radio will be

unable to receive digital broadcasts but it will

continue to function as a conventional radio

(analog FM receiver). Please note that when

HD is switched off, it will not be possible to

tune in to sub-channels.

Activating or deactivating HD Radio only

affects the currently selected waveband.

Related information

•

HD Radio™ (p. 436)

•

HD Radio

™

sub-channels (p. 438)

•

HD Radio™ limitations (p. 439)

•

Opening contextual setting in the center

display (p. 129)

HD Radio™ sub-channels

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM

wavebands only) will also have sub-channels

offering additional types of programming or

music.

Sub-channels

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

If any sub-channels are available, they will lis-

ted below the main channel on the screen. In

this example, WILDFM HD2 is a sub-chan-

nel.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
439
Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the
station on the screen or press the forward/
back arrow keys on the right-side steering
wheel keypad or below the screen.
Sub-channels can also be saved as radio
favorites.
If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take
up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes
audible. If you tap a station while you are out
of digital range of the transmitter, 
No
reception will be displayed.
Related information
•
HD Radio
™
 (p. 436)
•
Activating and deactivating the HD
Radio™ (p. 438)
•
Changing waveband and radio station
(p. 433)
•
Searching for a radio station (p. 434)
•
HD Radio
™
 limitations (p. 439)
HD Radio™ limitations
Limitations
•
Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
only): The main channel is the only chan-
nel that can receive in hybrid mode (both
digital and analog). If a frequency has sub-
channels, they are broadcast in digital
mode only. The main FM channel will be
displayed as, for example, "WRIFFM
HD1". The sub-FM channels will be dis-
played as"WRIFFM HD2", "WRIFFM
HD3", etc.
•
Reception coverage area: Due to current
IBOC transmitter power limitations, the
reception coverage area in digital mode is
somewhat more limited than the station's
analog coverage area. Be aware that, like
all radio transmission technology, terrain,
time of day, vegetation and buildings can
have a positive or negative effect on radio
reception.
•
Analog to digital/digital to analog
blending: Analog to digital blending will
occur as the signal strength reaches a pre-
set threshold in the receiver. This will be
noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak
reception) and is normal.
NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from ana-
logue to digital or digital to analogue
occurs, such as:
•
Volume increase or decrease
•
Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid-
range/Treble cut or boost
•
Time alignment (Digital program mate-
rial in extreme cases can be as much
as 8 seconds behind the analogue).
This will noticeable as a "stuttering"
effect.
The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and
do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's
radio receiver or antenna systems.
Related information
•
HD Radio™ (p. 436)
•
Activating and deactivating the HD
Radio™ (p. 438)
•
HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 438)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

440

SiriusXM

Satellite radio*

The SiriusXM

Satellite system broadcasts

from of a number of high elevation satellites

in geosynchronous orbit.

Listening to satellite radio

The digital signals from the satellites are line-

of-sight, which means that physical obstruc-

tions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may tem-

porarily interfere with signal reception.

Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic

objects transported on roof racks or in a ski

box, or other antennas that may impede sig-

nals from the SiriusXM

satellites.

Selecting SiriusXM

Satellite radio

mode

1. From the center display's Home view,

swipe from right to left to come to App

view.

Tap the SiriusXM

Satellite radio icon.

Home view with SiriusXM

Satellite radio activated

If there is no subscription activated, tap chan-

nel 1, where you will be prompted on the

screen to phone SiriusXM

If a cell phone is paired and connected to the

vehicle, you can also subscribe by:

1. From Home view, pull down the Settings

menu.

Open the settings menu for SiriusXM

Satellite radio.

Tap

Unsubscribed Services.

To call SiriusXM

, enter the phone num-

ber. They will activate the subscription of

your choice. This may take several

minutes.

When the subscription has been activated, tap

the SiriusXM

Satellite radio icon to start the

function and display the channel list included

in your subscription.

Related information

•

Radio (p. 432)

•

Using SiriusXM

Satellite radio* (p. 441)

•

Settings for SiriusXM

Satellite radio*

(p. 442)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* (p. 444)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

441

Using SiriusXM

Satellite radio*

SiriusXM

Satellite radio offers several fea-

tures for finding and listening to music, news,

sporting events, etc. being broadcast on sat-

ellite radio stations.

SiriusXM

Satellite radio functions

With SiriusXM

Satellite radio activated, tap

Library to display a screen offering the follow-

ing functions:

•

Search (the magnifying glass icon)

•

Channels

•

Favorites

•

Categories

If you have used this view previously, you will

be returned to the most recently used one.

Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen

where you can enter text using the center dis-

play's keyboard or by writing in the free-text

field to search for e.g., a station number, an

artist, song title, etc.

Channels

Tap to display a complete list of the channels

included in your subscription. Tap a channel

name to listen. If a subscription to a channel

has expired, its name will be grayed-out on the

screen.

For quick access to a channel that you often

listen to, tap the star to the right of the chan-

nel's name. It will then be added to your list of

favorites.

Favorites

Tap to display the channels that you have

added to this list. Tap a channel name to lis-

ten.

Categories/Genres

Tap to display the categories available. Tap a

category or genre name to display the chan-

nels that it contains and then tap a channel to

listen.

If you have activated alerts (see the “Alerts”

section below) and an alert is activated for an

artist, song or team, temporary virtual catego-

ries will also be created and displayed. The

channels currently broadcasting the song,

artist or broadcasting a program with the

selected team will be listed in a virtual cate-

gory.

EPG (Electronic Program Guide)

On the center display's Home view, tap EPG

for information about e.g., when a program is

being broadcast and its name, description,

artist, etc. If no information is currently availa-

ble,

No information will be displayed.

Alerts

If this feature has been selected under

SiriusXM Settings, the Alerts button will be

displayed on the Home view.

To add e.g. an artist's name, song title or a

sports team to the list of alerts:

1. Tune to a channel that is broadcasting a

song, game, etc., of your choice.

Tap the Alerts button.

3. A pop-up window will be displayed show-

ing a list of alerts (nothing will be dis-

played if the selected channel does not

support the alert function).

4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only

one can be selected at a time).

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
442
5. The song/artist/team will now be added to
the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can
also be added to the list using “Game
Alert” in the SiriusXM satellite radio set-
tings.
> When your choice is being broadcast
on a channel, you will be informed by a
pop-up.
iTunes tagging
From the center display's Top view, tap
SiriusXM Settings. Tap the iTunes Tagging
menu. Tap the iTunes Tagging box to acti-
vate/deactivate this function and tap Close to
return to Home view. Tap Tags List to display
a list of all tagged songs.
If the function is activated, the 
iTunes tag
button will be displayed in Home view. If a
song is played that you would like to buy in
the iTunes store, tap this button while the
song is playing to tag it. If a song with 
iTunes
Tagging information is available, the button
will be selectable. Tap the button to tag the
song. If you would like to buy a tagged song
via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button.
To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting
an iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB port in the
tunnel console. The iTunes tagging list will
automatically be transferred to the device and
removed from the list in the vehicle. If the
device is connected when a song is tagged,
the data will automatically be saved in the
device. To purchase the song, consult the
iTunes support page.
Related information
•
SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio* (p. 440)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 125)
•
Settings for SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio*
(p. 442)
•
Settings for SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio*
(p. 442)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 456)
Settings for SiriusXM
®
 Satellite
radio*
There are numerous settings that can be
made to enhance your SiriusXM
®
 Satellite
radio listening experience.
Settings
Drag down the top view and tap on Settings
Media SiriusXM. The following alterna-
tives will be displayed:

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

443

Traffic Jump

Tap to display a list of cities from which you

can choose to get traffic/weather information

(or

Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature).

Tap to select a city (JUMP will be displayed

on the Home screen next to Library). Tap

Back to return to the list of settings or Close

to return to the Home screen.

From the Home screen, tap

JUMP to activate

the function. When traffic/weather information

is available from the selected city, the radio

will automatically tune to the channel provid-

ing the information. When the information/

announcement is finished, the radio will auto-

matically return to the channel that you were

previously listening to.

During an announcement, tap

JUMP to inter-

rupt the message and return to the station

that you were currently listening to.

Alert Notifications

Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti-

vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc.

that you have selected is playing. You will be

asked if you want to listen.

Alert Notifications Sound

Opt to receive an audible alert when one of

your selected choices is being played.

Sort Channels

Select how to sort your channels list.

iTunes Tagging

Tap to display a menu with the options:

iTunes Tagging and Tags List. With this fea-

ture activated, songs can be tagged for later

purchase from the iTunes store.

Game Alerts

Tap to display a list of sports.

Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a

box on the right side of the screen to select a

team as a favorite. An alert will then be provi-

ded when information about the team is being

broadcast.

Tap

Confirm below the list to return to the list

of sports.

Tap

Back to return to the list of settings or

Close to return to the main screen.

Unsubscribed Services

If you have a SiriusXM

Satellite radio sub-

scription, any channels not included in the

subscription will be listed here. Call

SiriusXM™ to subscribe. The phone number

will be shown on the screen. If a cell phone is

paired and connected to the vehicle, tap the

phone number to make the call.

Skipped Stations

Tap to display a list of channels that you would

like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the

channel list by tapping the boxes to the right

of the screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will

not be shown in the channel list. However, a

channel previously selected as a favorite will

still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it

has been added to the skip list.

Skipped Categories

Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a cate-

gory to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in

the list of categories.

Related information

•

SiriusXM

Satellite radio* (p. 440)

•

Using SiriusXM

Satellite radio* (p. 441)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

444

SiriusXM Travel Link

SiriusXM Travel Link is a subscription fea-

ture offered by SiriusXM

satellite radio* that

can provide information about e.g., weather

forecasts, weather alerts, service stations,

sports, etc. in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Starting SiriusXM Travel Link

NOTE

SiriusXM Travel Link services are only

available in vehicles equipped with the

Sensus Navigation system.

From the center display's App view, tap Travel

Link to activate the feature. A disclaimer text

will be displayed. Tap OK to display a list of

SiriusXM Travel Link services:

•

Alerts

•

Fuel

•

Sports

•

Weather

•

Favorites

In order to use one or more of these services,

the user has to subscribe to the ones desired.

To subscribe to a SiriusXM Travel Link service:

1. Open the center display's Top view.

Tap

Settings.

Tap

Media.

Press

SiriusXM Travel Link and

Subscription Status.

> To subscribe, call the phone number lis-

ted on the screen.

Any services not subscribed will be grayed out

and contain the text

Service not subscribed.

When the services have been activated (sub-

scribed), tap the one of your choice to start it.

The following applies for all of the

SiriusXM

Travel Link services:

•

Pressing the

Back button will take you

back to the previous screen

•

Pressing the

Close button will take you to

the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.

NOTE

If the Close button is used to return to the

SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, the

following applies (the Weather service is

used here as an example):

•

If you have already used the

Weather

function, tapping Weather again in the

SiriusXM Travel Link home screen

before using any other SiriusXM

Travel Link service will return you to

the point where you left the Weather

service.

•

If another

SiriusXM Travel Link serv-

ice is used (e.g., Fuel, Sports, etc.)

before you return to the Weather serv-

ice, you will be returned to the default

Weather view (in this case, Local).

The same principle applies to all of the

SiriusXM Travel Link services.

Favorites

Many SiriusXM Travel Link selections can be

saved for easy access as favorites by tapping

the "star" icon next to the selection where

applicable.

To display a list of your stored selections, tap

the

Favorites application in the SiriusXM

Travel Link home screen.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

445

Related information

•

SiriusXM

Satellite radio* (p. 440)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Fuel (p. 447)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Sports (p. 448)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Weather (p. 445)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Notifications

(p. 446)

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Weather

This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides

weather-related information near the vehicle,

at a local ski resort, etc.

From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen,

to display weather-related information:

–

Tap the Weather button to display this

screen.

At the top of the screen, the following catego-

ries will be displayed:

•

Search (the magnifying glass icon)

•

Local

•

Ski condition

•

Areas

•

Favorites

Tap the category of your choice.

Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function

is supported in the current context, a keyboard

will appear on the screen. Enter the text of

your choice and tap

Search for detailed infor-

mation from the SiriusXM Travel Link data-

base.

Local

Information from the closest weather station

will be displayed and the following alternatives

are available:

•

Map view

•

Today

•

5 days

Map view

Tap the map to display it in full-screen mode.

Tap

Back to return to the original map view.

Tap Map options to display the following

alternatives.

•

Weather radar

•

Storm attributes

•

Surface features

•

Tropical storm tracks

•

Winds

Tap the relevant box to the right of the option

to select/deselect it. Tap

Done to confirm and

return to the previous screen or Cancel.

Today

Tap to see the current temperature, or the

temperature in 36 hours.

Tap

Back to return to the Local screen or

Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link

home screen.

This is the weather default unless another alternative has been selected.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

446

5 days

Tap to see weather information for the coming

5 days.

Tap

Back to return to the Local screen or

Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link

home screen.

Ski condition

Tap to display a list of ski areas in the vicinity

of the vehicle. Tap a name in the list for infor-

mation such as if the ski area is open/closed,

temperature, wind conditions, snow condi-

tions, the number of lifts that are in operation,

etc.

•

Weather locations

•

Ski location

Tap Map view to display a map and a weather

legend.

Tap

Map options to display the following

alternatives.

•

Weather radar

•

Storm attributes

•

Surface features

•

Tropical storm tracks

•

Winds

Tap the relevant box to the right of the option

to select/deselect it. Tap

Done to confirm and

return to the previous screen or Cancel.

Areas

Tap Areas to display a list of areas/locations in

states from the SiriusXM Travel Link database.

Scroll to a state and tap to display:

•

Weather locations: tap arrow to the right

to display a list of towns. Scroll to desired

town and tap for detailed weather infor-

mation. You can choose Map view, today,

5 days or Favorites (star)

•

Ski locations: tap arrow at right to dis-

play local ski areas. Tap an area for

detailed info.

For information about storing a location, state,

town, etc. as a favorite, see the heading

"Favorites" in the article "SiriusXM Travel

Link."

Related information

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* (p. 444)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Fuel (p. 447)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Sports (p. 448)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Notifications

(p. 446)

SiriusXM Travel Link

* -

Notifications

This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides

notifications of potential weather problems or

other emergency situations in the vicinity of

the vehicle.

From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen,

to show notifications:

–

Tap the Alerts button to display this

screen.

•

If any notifications are currently available,

a message will appear at the top of the

screen. They can also be listed from the

Settings menu in the center display's Top

view.

•

If no notifications are available,

No active

alerts will be displayed.

Types of notifications

To select the types of notifications to be dis-

played:

From the

Alerts screen, tap the Select

alerts button at the bottom of the screen.

2. This displays the types of notifications that

can be displayed. Tap the box to the right

of each type of notification to select/dese-

lect it.

Tap

Done when you have made your

selections. You will return to the Alerts

screen.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

447

Information about a notification

If any notifications have been displayed on the

screen, tap one for more detailed information

(i.e., the location of the weather problem on a

map and a description of the situation).

If a phone number is available in a notification,

Call button will be displayed. Tap this button

for additional information.

Related information

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* (p. 444)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Fuel (p. 447)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Sports (p. 448)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Weather (p. 445)

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Fuel

This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides

information and guidance to service stations

near the vehicle providing the type of fuel that

you prefer/require for your vehicle.

From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen,

to show fuel information:

–

Tap the Fuel button to display the main

fuel screen.

The following categories are shown:

•

Search (the magnifying glass icon)

•

Nearby

•

Recommended

•

Favorites

•

Brands

Tap one of the alternatives to display its

screen.

NOTE

In each of the categories listed, tapping the

Select fuel type button near the bottom

of the screen opens a sub-view where you

can specify the type of fuel preferred/

required (Regular, Midrange, Premium,

Diesel, Electric 120V, etc.) Tap Done to

return to the previous screen.

Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function

is supported in the current context, a keyboard

will appear on the screen. Enter the text of

your choice and tap

Search for detailed infor-

mation if available.

Nearby

Tap for a list of service stations in the vicinity

of the vehicle, with the nearest station at the

top of the list.

The following information will be provided

where available:

•

For vehicles using gasoline, the price

information for regular gasoline (unless

another grade/type of fuel has been

selected in

Select fuel type)

•

For electric vehicles/hybrids, information

about charging stations, showing the total

number of charging ports and the number

of ports currently not in use

•

The distance to the station

•

A star icon to set the service station as a

favorite

Tap the name of a service station to display

more detailed information.

For guidance to the service station, tap the

Start navigation or Add as waypoint but-

tons. See the Sensus Navigation* supplement

This service is not available in Canada.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

448

for additional information about using the nav-

igation system.

Recommended

Tap for a list of service stations near the vehi-

cle, displayed according to the price of regular

gasoline (unless another grade/type of fuel has

been selected in

Select fuel type) or of sta-

tions offering the greatest number of available

charging ports for electric vehicles/hybrids.

The station offering the lowest price/most

available charging ports will be displayed at

the top of the list. Tap the name of a service

station to display more detailed information.

Favorites

Tap for a list of service stations that have been

stored as favorites. Tap the name of a service

station to display more detailed information.

In addition to the

Select fuel type button at

the bottom of the screen, tap the Edit button

to delete individual stations from the list or tap

Delete to clear the list. Tap Done to return to

the previous screen.

Brands

Tap

Brands to display a list of service sta-

tion brands in the area.

2. Tap a brand to display a list of service sta-

tions affiliated with that brand (BP, Exxon,

etc.).

3. Tap the name of a service station to dis-

play more detailed information.

In addition to the

Select fuel type button at

the bottom of the screen, tap the Sort button

to arrange the list according to Nearest or

Cheapest/Recommended. Tap Done to

return to the previous screen.

Related information

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* (p. 444)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Notifications

(p. 446)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Sports (p. 448)

•

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Weather (p. 445)

SiriusXM Travel Link

* - Sports

This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides

information about sporting events, tourna-

ments, teams, leagues, etc.

From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen,

to display sports information:

–

Tap the Sports button to display the main

sports screen.

A number of sports categories will be listed

(Football, Baseball, Basketball, etc.)

Tap a sport to select a league in that sport

(NFL, MLB, etc.) or a sport organization (PGA,

LPGA, etc.).

The following is an example of the result of

tapping Baseball:

1. MLB (Major League Baseball) will be dis-

played.

2. Tap MLB to display the two leagues in

Major League Baseball (American League

or National League).

3. Tap one of the league names to display

the divisions in the league.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
449
4. Tap one of the divisions to display:
•
In progress: play-by-play information
about a match/game/tournament cur-
rently in progress. Continue tapping to
display. In the detailed view, you can
also select a radio station that is cur-
rently broadcasting an ongoing sport-
ing event
•
Headlines for MLB
: tap to display
brief headline information
•
Scheduled: schedules for coming
matches, games, etc.
•
Scores: match/game results
The same principle applies to all sports.
Related information
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* (p. 444)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Notifications
(p. 446)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Fuel (p. 447)
•
SiriusXM Travel Link
®
* - Weather (p. 445)
Media player
The media player can play audio from external
audio sources connected via USB port or
Bluetooth. It can also play video format via
the USB port.
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and to access music services via apps.
The media player is controlled
from the center display. Sev-
eral functions can also be
controlled using voice com-
mands or the right-side steer-
ing wheel keypad.
The radio, which is also handled by the media
player, is described in a separate section.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 450)
•
Controlling and changing media (p. 451)
•
Media searches (p. 452)
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Video (p. 453)
•
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
 (p. 455)
•
Playing media via the USB port (p. 455)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
450
Playing media
The media player is controlled from the cen-
ter display. Several other functions can also
be controlled using the right-side steering
wheel keypad or by using voice commands.
The radio can also be controlled in the media
player. See the section describing the radio.
Starting a media source
App view. (Generic illustration; basic apps vary
depending on market and model).
USB flash drive
1. Inset a USB flash drive.
2.
Open the 
USB app from App view.
3. Select the track you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
MP3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
To start playback from an iPod, the iPod
app must be used (not USB).
When an iPod is used as source, the car's
audio and media system has a menu struc-
ture similar to the iPod player's own menu
structure.
1. Connect a media source.
2. Start playback in the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (
iPod, USB) from App view.
> Playback will begin.
Bluetooth-connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect a media source.
3. Start playback in the connected media
source.
4.
Open the 
Bluetooth app from App view.
> Playback will begin.
Media with Internet connection
Medial playback from apps with Internet con-
nection:
1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet.
2. Open the app from the App view.
> Playback will begin.
Read the separate section on how to down-
load apps.
Video
1. Connect a media source.
2.
Open the 
USB app from App view.
3. Tap the title you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate sec-
tion.
Related information
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 101)
•
Radio (p. 432)
•
Controlling and changing media (p. 451)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 456)
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 455)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

451

•

Download apps (p. 430)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

Video (p. 453)

•

Apple

CarPlay

* (p. 458)

•

Android Auto* (p. 462)

•

Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)

•

Compatible file formats for media (p. 457)

Controlling and changing media

Media playback can be controlled using voice

commands, the steering wheel keypad or the

center display.

The media player can be con-

trolled using voice com-

mands, the right-side steer-

ing wheel keypad or the cen-

ter display.

Volume - turn the knob under the center dis-

play or tap

on the right-side steering

wheel keypad to raise or lower the volume.

Play/pause - tap the image for the track you

would like to play, or press the button below

the center display or

on the right-side

steering wheel keypad.

Changing track/song - tap the desired track in

the center display, or press

or below

the center display or on the right-side steering

wheel keypad.

Rewinding/fast-forwarding - tap the time axis

in the center display and drag it sideways, or

press and hold

or below the center

display or on the right-side steering wheel

keypad.

Changing media source - select from among

previous sources in the app, tap the desired

app in App view or use the right-side steering

wheel keypad to select the app in the app

Library - tap the button to

play from the library.

Shuffle - tap the button to

play tracks in a random order.

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
452
Similar - tap the button to
use Gracenote to search for
similar music on the USB
device and create a playlist
from the music found. The
playlist can contain up to 50
tracks.
Change device - tap the but-
ton to toggle between USB
devices when more than one
is connected.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 449)
•
Media searches (p. 452)
•
Sound settings (p. 428)
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
Gracenote
®
 (p. 453)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
Media searches
Searches can be performed to locate a spe-
cific artist, composer, song title, album,
video, audio book or playlist. If the vehicle is
connected to the Internet, it is also possible
to search for podcasts (online digital media).
1.
Tap  .
> Search view will displayed and the key-
board will open.
2. Enter a search word/phrase.
3.
Tap 
Search.
> A search will be performed on con-
nected devices and the results will be
displayed by category.
Swipe the screen horizontally to display each
category separately.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 449)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Playing media (p. 450)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 125)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
453
Gracenote
®
Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks
and any associated images that can be dis-
played during playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
 is a standard for music
recognition. It can identify and analyze the
metadata of music files and present informa-
tion about the music. Metadata from different
sources may sometimes be inconsistent or
insufficient.
Because Gracenote supports phonetic pro-
cessing of artist name, album titles and gen-
res, voice commands can be used to control
music playback.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Media Gracenote®.
3. Choose settings for Gracenote data:
•
Gracenote® Online Search - search
Gracenote's online database for currently
playing media.
•
Gracenote® Multiple Results - select
how Gracenote data should be displayed if
there are multiple search results.
1 - the file's original data will be used.
2 - Gracenote data will be used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
•
None - no result will be displayed.
Updating Gracenote
The contents of the Gracenote database are
continuously updated. Download the latest
update to take advantage of improvements.
For information and to download, see
volvocars.com/support.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 450)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 488)
•
Voice control for radio and media (p. 142)
Video
The media player can play videos from USB-
connected devices.
Video is not available when the vehicle is mov-
ing; only audio will be played. Video will
resume when the vehicle is stationary.
Information on compatible media formats is
provided in a separate section.
Related information
•
Playing video (p. 454)
•
Playing DivX
®
 (p. 454)
•
Video settings (p. 454)
•
Compatible file formats for media
(p. 457)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
454
Playing video
The 
USB app in App view is used to play vid-
eos.
1. Connecting media source (USB device).
2.
Open the 
USB app from App view.
3. Tap the title you would like to play.
> Playback will begin.
If the USB device also contains music and
audio tracks, it may be difficult to locate the
video files. To find them, go to 
Library and
select the video tab.
Related information
•
Video (p. 453)
•
Playing DivX
®
 (p. 454)
•
Video settings (p. 454)
•
Compatible file formats for media
(p. 457)
Playing DivX
®
 
The DivX Certified
®
 device must be registered
to play purchased DivX video-on-demand
(VOD) movies.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD to get a regis-
tration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
and to complete the registration process.
Related information
•
Video (p. 453)
•
Playing video (p. 454)
•
Video settings (p. 454)
•
Compatible file formats for media
(p. 457)
Video settings
You can change some language settings for
video playback.
Audio Language and Subtitle Language can
be adjusted with the video player in full-screen
mode or by opening Top view and tapping
Settings Media Video.
Related information
•
Video (p. 453)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
455
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
The vehicle's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can play audio files from
Bluetooth-enabled external devices such as
cellular phones and tablets.
In order for the media player to be able to
wirelessly play audio files from an external
device, the device must be connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 455)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Playing media (p. 450)
•
Compatible file formats for media
(p. 457)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
Connect a Bluetooth
®
 device to the vehicle to
wirelessly play media and give the vehicle an
Internet connection if it is available.
Many cellular phones on the market currently
offer wireless Bluetooth
®
 technology, but not
all phones are fully compatible with the vehi-
cle.
The procedure for connecting a media device
is the same as for connecting a cellular phone
to the vehicle via Bluetooth
®
.
Related information
•
Streaming media via Bluetooth
®
 (p. 455)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Playing media (p. 450)
Playing media via the USB port
External audio sources, such as an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via the vehicle's USB port.
Devices with rechargeable batteries can be
charged when they are connected via the USB
port and the ignition is in mode I, II or the
engine is running.
The content on the external source can be
read faster if it only contains data of a compat-
ible format. Video files can also be played via
the USB port.
Some MP3 players have their own file system
that the vehicle has support for.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 456)
•
Playing media (p. 450)
•
Video (p. 453)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 456)
•
Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
* (p. 458)
•
Android Auto* (p. 462)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
456
Connecting a device via the USB
port
External audio sources, such as an iPod
®
 or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via any of the vehicle's USB ports.
If the vehicle has two USB ports, the phone
must be connected to the port with the white
frame to use Apple CarPlay* or Android Auto*.
USB ports (type A) under the center display.
USB ports* (type C) on rear of tunnel console for
charging phones, tablets, etc.
7
.
Related information
•
Playing media (p. 450)
•
Playing media via the USB port (p. 455)
•
Media player (p. 449)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 456)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 456)
•
Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
* (p. 458)
•
Android Auto* (p. 462)
Technical specifications for USB
devices
For the contents of USB devices to be read,
the following specifications must be met.
Any folder structures will not be shown in the
center display during playback.
Max. number
Files 15 000
Folders 1 000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Tracks in a playlist 1 000
Subfolders No limit
Technical specifications for the USBA
connector
•
Type A port
•
Version 2.0
•
Voltage 5 V
•
Max. current 2.1 A
Technical specifications for the USBC
connector
•
Type C port
•
Version 3.1
7
It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

457

•

Voltage 5 V

•

Max. current 3.0 A

Related information

•

Playing media via the USB port (p. 455)

Compatible file formats for media

In order to play media, the following file for-

mats must be used.

Audio files

For-

mat

File extension Codec

MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,

MPEG2 Layer III,

MP3 Pro (mp3

compatible),

MP3 HD (mp3

compatible)

AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC

(MPEG4 part III

Audio), HEAAC

(aacPlus v1/v2)

WMA .wma WMA89,

WMA910 Pro

WAV .wav LPCM

FLAC .flac FLAC

Video files

Format File extension

MP4 .mp4, .m4v

MPEGPS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

Format File extension

AVI .avi

AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx

ASF .asf, .wmv

Subtitles

Format File extension

SubViewer .sub

SubRip .srt

SSA .ssa

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

458

DivX

DivX-certified devices have been tested for

high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback.

When you see the DivX logo, you have the

freedom to play your favorite DivX videos.

Profile DivX Home Theater

Video codec DivX, MPEG4

Resolution 720x576

Audio speed

(bit rate)

4.8Mbps

Frame rate 30 fps

File extension .divx, .avi

Max. file size 4 GB

Audio codec MP3, AC3

Subtitles XSUB

Special func-

tions

Multiple subtitles, multi-

ple audio, resume play

Reference Meets all requirements of

the DivX Home Theater

profile. Visit divx.com for

more information and

software tools to convert

your files into DivX Home

Theater video.

Related information

•

Media player (p. 449)

•

Video (p. 453)

•

Playing DivX

(p. 454)

Apple

CarPlay

With CarPlay

, you can listen to music, make

phone calls, get driving instructions, send/

receive messages and use Siri, all while

remaining focused on driving.

CarPlay works with select

iOS devices. If the car does

not already support CarPlay,

this can be retrofitted. Con-

tact a Volvo retailer to install

CarPlay.

Information about supported apps and com-

patible iOS devices are available on the Apple

website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using

apps that are not compatible with CarPlay

may sometimes mean that the connection

between the device and the vehicle is broken.

Please note that Volvo is not responsible for

the content of CarPlay.

When using navigation guidance provided by

CarPlay, navigation will only be shown on the

center display and not in the instrument panel.

When navigation is started through Apple

CarPlay, any current route guidance from the

vehicle's own systems will be discontinued.

CarPlay apps can be controlled from the cen-

ter display, an iOS device or with the right-

side steering wheel keypad (for certain func-

tions). The apps can also be voice-controlled

Availability may vary depending on market.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

459

using Siri. Press and hold the

button on

the steering wheel to start voice control with

Siri. Press briefly to activate the vehicle's own

voice control system. If Siri cuts off too soon,

press and hold the

button on the steer-

ing wheel..

By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge

the following: Apple CarPlay is a service

provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and

conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not

responsible for Apple CarPlay or its

features/applications. When using Apple

CarPlay, certain information from your car

(including its position) is transferred to

your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you

are fully responsible for your and any

others person’s use of Apple CarPlay.

Related information

•

Using Apple

CarPlay

* (p. 459)

•

Settings for Apple

CarPlay

* (p. 461)

•

Voice Control (p. 138)

•

Resetting center display settings (p. 130)

Using Apple

CarPlay

To use CarPlay

, the Siri voice control must

be activated in your iOS device. The device

must also have an Internet connection via Wi-

Fi or a mobile network for all functions to

work.

Connecting an iOS device and starting

CarPlay

NOTE

CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is

disabled. A cell phone or media player con-

nected to the vehicle via Bluetooth will

therefore not be available when CarPlay is

active. An alternative source must be used

to provide an Internet connection for the

vehicle's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the vehicle's

integrated modem.

To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has

not previously been connected:

1. Connect an iOS device that supports

CarPlay to the USB port. If there are two

USB ports, use the one with the white

frame.

2. Read the terms and conditions and then

tap

Accept to connect.

> The CarPlay tile will open and compati-

ble apps will be displayed.

3. Tap the desired app.

> The app will start up.

Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Availability may vary depending on market.

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
460
Starting CarPlay
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
previously been connected:
1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. If
there are two USB ports, use the one with
the white frame.
> If the auto start setting is selected –
the name of the device will be dis-
played. The CarPlay tile will open auto-
matically when Home view is displayed
when the iOS device is connected.
2. If the CarPlay tile does not open automati-
cally, tap the name of the device. The
CarPlay tile will open and compatible apps
will be displayed.
3. If any other app is active in the same tile,
tap 
Apple CarPlay in App view.
> The CarPlay tile will open and compati-
ble apps will be displayed.
4. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
CarPlay will run in the background if another
app is started, or is already active when the
device is connected, in the same view. To dis-
play CarPlay in the tile, tap the CarPlay icon in
App view.
Switching connection between
CarPlay and iPod
CarPlay to iPod
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Proceed to Communication Apple
CarPlay
.
3. Uncheck the box for the iOS device that
should no longer start CarPlay automati-
cally when the USB cable is connected.
4. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device
into the USB port.
5.
Open the 
iPod app from App view.
iPod to CarPlay
1.
Tap 
Apple CarPlay in App view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up win-
dow and then tap 
OK.
3. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device
into the USB port.
> The Apple CarPlay tile will open and
compatible apps will be displayed
11
.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 456)
•
Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
* (p. 458)
•
Settings for Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
* (p. 461)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481)
•
Voice Control (p. 138)
11
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

461

Settings for Apple

CarPlay

Settings for an iOS device connected through

CarPlay

Automatic start

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Communication Apple CarPlay

and select the desired setting:

•

Check the box - CarPlay will start auto-

matically when the USB cable is con-

nected.

•

Uncheck the box - CarPlay will not start

automatically when the USB cable is

connected.

A maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored

in the list, which may be worth noting if many

people share the vehicle, e.g. in a car pool.

When the list is full and a new device is con-

nected, the oldest one will be deleted.

To delete the list, the settings must be rest in

the center display (factory reset).

System Volumes

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Sound System Volumes to

change the settings for the following:

•

Voice Control

•

Navi Voice Guidance

•

Phone Ringtone

Related information

•

Apple

CarPlay

* (p. 458)

•

Using Apple

CarPlay

* (p. 459)

•

Resetting center display settings (p. 130)

Tips for using Apple

CarPlay

Here are some useful tips for when you use

CarPlay

®14

•

Update your iOS device with the latest

version of the iOS operating system and

ensure that the apps have been updated.

•

In the event of a problem with CarPlay,

unplug the iOS device from the USB port

and then plug it in again. Otherwise, try to

close the app on the device that is not

working and then restart the app, or try

closing all apps and restart your device.

•

If the apps do not appear when CarPlay

starts (black screen), try minimizing and

expanding the tile for CarPlay.

•

Using apps that are not compatible with

CarPlay may sometimes cause the con-

nection between the iOS device and the

vehicle to be broken. Information about

supported apps and compatible devices

can be found on Apple's website. You can

also search for CarPlay in the App Store to

find information about apps that are com-

patible with CarPlay in your market.

•

You can use Siri to write or dictate mes-

sages or have them read aloud. Messages

are read aloud and dictated in the lan-

guage selected in the Siri settings. When

Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Availability may vary depending on market.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

462

you write/dictate messages, no text will

be shown in the vehicle's center display,

but the text will be shown in your iOS

device. When using Siri, note that it is the

phone's microphones that are used and

the quality therefore depends on the

phone's location.

•

If the device is connected to the vehicle

through Bluetooth, the connection will be

broken when CarPlay is used. Resume

Internet connection in the vehicle by teth-

ering using the device's Wi-Fi hotspot.

•

Some of CarPlay's functions (such as

voice calls and messages) interrupt the

use of the vehicle's own functions and

CarPlay will instead be automatically dis-

played. If you do not wish this to happen,

deselect display of the corresponding

function in CarPlay under the phone's

notification settings.

•

CarPlay only works with iPhone

NOTE

Availability and functionality can vary

depending on market.

Related information

•

Apple

CarPlay

* (p. 458)

•

Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via

a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480)

Android Auto*

Android Auto

lets you listen to music, make

calls, get driving directions and use apps cus-

tomized for your vehicle from an Android

device. Android Auto can be used with

selected Android devices.

For information on supported apps and com-

patible Android devices, please go to

www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps,

see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not

responsible for the content of Android Auto.

Android Auto is started from App view. After

Android Auto has been initially started, the app

will start automatically the next time the

device is connected. The automatic start set-

ting can be deactivated in Settings.

Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

Availability may vary depending on market.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
463
NOTE
When a device is connected to Android
Auto, it is possible to stream to another
media player via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is
active while Android Auto is in use.
When using navigation guidance provided by
Android Auto, navigation will only be shown
on the center display and not in the instrument
panel.
Android Auto can be controlled from the cen-
ter display, with the right-side steering wheel
keypad or by using voice commands. Press
and hold the steering wheel button 
 to
start the Google Assistant and press briefly to
deactivate it.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms
and conditions. Volvo Cars is not
responsible for Android Auto or its
features or applications. When you use
Android Auto, your car transfers certain
information (including its location) to your
connected Android phone. You are fully
responsible for your and any other
person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 463)
•
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 464)
Using Android Auto*
To use the 
Android Auto
17
 app, the app must
be installed on the Android device and the
device must be connected to the vehicle's
USB port.
NOTE
For installation of Android Auto to be pos-
sible, the vehicle must be equipped with
two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only
has one USB port then it is not possible to
use Android Auto.
Connecting an Android device for the first
time
1. Connect the Android device to the USB
port with the white frame.
2. Read the information in the pop-up win-
dow and then tap 
OK.
3.
Tap 
Android Auto in App view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap 
Accept to connect.
> The Android Auto tile will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
5. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
From a previously connected Android
device
1. Connect the device to the USB port with
the white frame.
> If the auto start setting is selected -
the name of the device will be dis-
played.
2. Tap the name of the device – the
Android Auto tile will open and compatible
apps will be displayed.
3. If the automatic start setting is not acti-
vated - open the 
Android Auto app from
App view.
> The Android Auto tile will open and
compatible apps will be displayed.
4. Tap the desired app.
> The app will start up.
Android Auto will run in the background if
another app is started in the same tile. To dis-
play Android Auto in the tile, tap the
Android Auto icon in App view.
Related information
•
Android Auto* (p. 462)
•
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 464)
•
Connecting a device via the USB port
(p. 456)
•
Voice Control (p. 138)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

464

Settings for Android Auto*

Settings for Android devices initially con-

nected with Android Auto

Automatic start

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap

Communication Android Auto

and select setting:

•

Check the box - Android Auto will start

automatically when the USB cable is

connected.

•

Uncheck the box - Android Auto will not

start automatically when the USB cable

is connected.

A maximum of 20 Android devices can be

stored in the list. When the list is full and a

new device is connected, the oldest one will

be deleted.

A factory reset must be performed to delete

the list.

System Volumes

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Sound System Volumes to

change the settings for the following:

•

Voice Control

•

Navi Voice Guidance

•

Phone Ringtone

Related information

•

Android Auto* (p. 462)

•

Using Android Auto* (p. 463)

•

Resetting center display settings (p. 130)

Tips for using Android Auto*

Here are some useful tips for when you use

Android Auto

•

Ensure that your apps are updated.

•

When starting the vehicle, wait until the

center display has started, connect the

device and then open Android Auto from

the app view.

•

In the event of problems with Android

Auto, unplug your Android device from the

USB port and then plug it in again. Other-

wise, try closing the app on the device and

then restarting the app.

•

When a device is connected to Android

Auto it is still possible to play media via

Bluetooth to another media player. The

Bluetooth function is on when Android

Auto is used.

•

If the Android Auto icon is grayed out, it

means that a device is no longer con-

nected. When you connect your device,

the icon will light up. If there is no icon at

all, the vehicle does not support connect-

ing a device for this purpose.

•

If the device is connected to the vehicle

through Bluetooth, the connection will be

broken when Android Auto is used.

Resume Internet connection in the vehicle

Availability may vary depending on market.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

465

by tethering using the device's Wi-Fi hot-

spot.

Related information

•

Android Auto* (p. 462)

•

Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via

a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480)

Phone

A phone equipped with Bluetooth can be

wirelessly connected to the vehicle's inte-

grated hands-free system.

The audio and media system offers hands-free

functionality for remotely controlling a number

of the phone's features. The phone's inte-

grated controls can also be used, even when it

is connected to the vehicle.

When the phone has been paired and con-

nected to the vehicle, it can be used as an

Internet connection or to make or receive

calls, send or receive text messages or wire-

lessly play music.

The phone is controlled from the center dis-

play, and the App menu (accessed using the

right-side steering wheel keypad) and voice

commands can also be used to control certain

functions.

Overview

Microphone.

Phone.

Wireless phone charger.

Phone handling in the center display.

Keypad for controlling phone functions

shown in the center display and voice

commands.

Instrument panel.

Related information

•

Handling phone calls (p. 469)

•

Managing the phone book (p. 472)

•

Handling text messages (p. 470)

•

Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-

tooth for the first time (p. 466)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
466
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 468)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 468)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 468)
•
Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 469)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 469)
•
Wireless phone charger* (p. 473)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
•
Voice Control (p. 138)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 101)
•
Sound settings (p. 428)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
Pair a Bluetooth-enabled phone to the vehicle
to make calls, send/receive text messages
and wirelessly play media from the vehicle, or
connect the vehicle to the Internet.
Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at
the same time, but in that case, only one will
be used for wireless playback. The most
recently paired phone will be automatically
connected to make calls, send/receive text
messages, play media or use as an Internet
connection. It is possible to change what the
phone is used for under 
Bluetooth Devices
via the settings menu in the center display's
Top view. The cellular phone must be equip-
ped with Bluetooth and support tethering.
After the device has been connected/regis-
tered for the first time via Bluetooth, the
device no longer needs to be visible/searcha-
ble. It just needs to have Bluetooth activated.
A maximum of 20 paired Bluetooth devices
can be stored in the vehicle.
There are two ways to pair a phone to the
vehicle. Searching for the phone from the vehi-
cle or searching for the vehicle from the
phone.
Option 1 - searching for the phone
from the vehicle
1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using
its Bluetooth function.
2. Open the phone tile in the center display.
•
If no phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap 
Add phone.
•
If a phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap 
Change . Tap Add phone in
the pop-up window.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will
be displayed. The list will be updated as
new devices are discovered.
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like
to connect.
4. Make sure that the code displayed in the
vehicle matches the one in the phone. If it
does, confirm the code in both places.
5. In the phone, accept or cancel the options
for selecting the phone's contacts and text
messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
•
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
and may not be able to display con-
tacts and messages in the vehicle.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
467
Option 2 - searching for the vehicle
from the phone
1. Open the phone tile in the center display.
•
If no phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap 
Add phone Make vehicle
discoverable
.
•
If a phone has been paired to the vehi-
cle, tap 
Change . Tap Add phone
Make vehicle discoverable in the
pop-up window.
2. Activate Bluetooth in the phone.
3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will
be displayed.
4. Select the vehicle's name from the list of
devices in the phone.
5. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6. Make sure that the code displayed in the
vehicle matches the one shown in the
external device. If it does, confirm the
code in both places.
7. In the phone, accept or cancel the options
for selecting the phone's contacts and text
messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
•
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
and may not be able to display con-
tacts and messages in the vehicle.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is being
updated, it is possible that the connection
will be interrupted. Delete the phone from
the car and reconnect.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 468)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 468)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 468)
•
Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 469)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 469)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
468
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
A phone can be automatically connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must
have first been paired with the vehicle.
Only the two most recently connected phones
can be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before
turning the vehicle's ignition to mode I.
2. Turn the ignition to I or higher.
> The phone will be connected.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 468)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 468)
•
Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 469)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 469)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480)
•
Ignition modes (p. 372)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
A phone can be manually connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must have
first been paired with the vehicle.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone.
2. Open the phone tile.
> A list of available phones will be dis-
played.
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like
to connect.
> The phone will be connected.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 468)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 468)
•
Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 469)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 469)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-
connected phone
A Bluetooth-connected phone can be discon-
nected from the vehicle.
•
When the phone is out of range of the
vehicle, it will be automatically discon-
nected. If a call is in progress when the
phone is disconnected from the vehicle,
the call will be transferred from the vehi-
cle's speakers and microphone to the cel-
lular phone.
•
The phone can also be disconnected by
manually deactivating Bluetooth.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
•
Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 469)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 469)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
469
Switch between phones
connected via Bluetooth
It is possible to switch between Bluetooth-
connected phones.
1. Open the phone tile.
2.
Tap 
Change  or pull down Top view
and tap 
Settings Communication
Bluetooth Devices Add device.
> A list of available Bluetooth devices will
be displayed.
3. Tap the name of the phone you would like
to connect.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 468)
•
Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi-
ces (p. 469)
Disconnecting Bluetooth-
connected devices
Phones or other devices in the list of regis-
tered Bluetooth devices can be removed.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap 
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
> A list of registered Bluetooth devices is
displayed.
3. Tap the name of the device you would like
to remove.
4.
Tap 
Remove device and confirm.
> The device is no longer registered in the
vehicle.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 468)
•
Switch between phones connected via
Bluetooth (p. 469)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
Handling phone calls
Handling phone calls in the vehicle for a
Bluetooth-connected cellular phone.
Generic illustration.
Making calls
1. Open the phone tile.
2. Initiate a call by selecting the phone num-
ber from the recent calls list, entering the
number on the keypad or selecting a num-
ber from the phone book (list of contacts).
You can search or scroll to find a contact
in the phone book. Tap 
 in the phone
book to add a contact to 
Favorites.
3.
Tap   to make a call.
4.
Tap 
 to end the call.
Calls can also be made from the list of recent
calls using the app menu, which can be

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
470
opened using the   button on the right-side
steering wheel keypad.
Making multiple calls
While the call is in progress:
1.
Tap 
Add call.
2. Select from the list of recent calls, favor-
ites or contacts.
3. Tap an item/row in the list of recent calls
or   for the contact in the phone book.
4.
Tap 
Swap call to switch between calls.
5.
Tap   to end the current call.
Group (conference) calls
While multiple calls are in progress:
1.
Tap 
Join calls to merge ongoing calls.
2.
Tap   to end the call.
Incoming calls
Incoming phone calls will be shown on the
instrument panel and in the center display.
Manage the calls using the right-side steering
wheel keypad or the center display.
1.
Tap 
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap 
 to end the call.
Incoming calls while another call is in
progress
1.
Tap 
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap 
 to end the call.
Privacy
–
While a call is in progress, tap Privacy
and select setting:
•
Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function will be disabled and the
call will proceed on the cellular phone.
•
Driver focused - the microphone in the
ceiling liner on the passenger side will
be muted and the call will proceed
using the vehicle's hands-free function.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)
•
Handling the App menu in the instrument
panel (p. 101)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 125)
•
Managing the phone book (p. 472)
•
Handling text messages (p. 470)
•
Sound settings (p. 428)
Handling text messages
20
A Bluetooth-connected cellular phone's text
messages can be handled in the vehicle.
Text message functionality needs to be acti-
vated in certain phones. Not all phones are
fully compatible and therefore cannot display
contacts and messages in the vehicle.
Handling text messages in the center
display
Text messages are only shown in the center
display if the relevant setting is made.
Tap 
Messages in App view
to handle text messages in
the center display.
NOTE
When the vehicle is moving:
•
Only one row of the message will be
displayed. Tap 
Read out to have the
entire message read aloud.
•
The center display's keyboard cannot
be used.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
471
Reading text messages in the center
display aloud
Tap the icon to have the message
read aloud.
Sending text messages in the center
display
21
1. It is possible to reply to text messages or
create a new message.
•
To reply to a text message - tap the
name of the contact who sent the mes-
sage and then tap 
Answer.
•
To create a new message - tap 
Create
new
. Select a contact or enter a phone
number.
2. Write the message.
3.
Tap 
Send.
Handling text messages in the
instrument panel
Text messages are only shown in the instru-
ment panel if the relevant setting is made.
Reading new text messages in the
instrument panel aloud
–
To have the message read aloud, select
Read out using the steering wheel key-
pad.
Dictating replies in the instrument panel
After the text message has been read aloud, it
is possible to dictate a brief reply if the vehicle
has an Internet connection.
–
Tap Answer using the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialog will start.
Message alert
Alerts can be activated and deactivated in the
text message settings.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Text message settings (p. 471)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
•
Internet-connected vehicle
*
 (p. 479)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 125)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485)
Text message settings
Settings for handling text messages received
through a connected phone can be personal-
ized.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap 
Communication Text Messages
and select settings:
•
Notification in center display - dis-
play text message notifications in the
center display's status bar.
•
Notification in driver display - dis-
plays notifications in the driver's display
and incoming messages can be man-
aged using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad.
•
Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Handling text messages (p. 470)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
20
Only applies to certain markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information.
21
Only certain phones can send text messages via the vehicle. The connected phone must support the Bluetooth profile Message Access Profile (MAP).

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
472
Managing the phone book
When a phone is connected with Bluetooth
to the vehicle, contacts can be managed
directly in the center display.
Up to 3,000 contacts can be displayed from
the phone selected in the center display.
Scroll by letter or   to find contacts.
Only letters matching existing contacts in
the phone book will be shown.
Search contacts - tap   to search by
phone number or name in the phone book.
Favorites - tap   to add/remove a con-
tact from the list of favorites.
Sorting
The phone book is sorted in alphabetical order
and special characters and numbers are sor-
ted under 
. The list can be sorted by either
first name or last name. This is adjusted in
your cellular phone settings.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
•
Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141)
•
Entering characters, letters and words by
hand in the center display (p. 125)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
Phone settings
When the phone is connected to the car, the
following settings can be made:
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap 
Communication Phone and select
settings:
•
Ringtones - select a ring tone. Ring
tones from the cellular phone or the
vehicle can be used. Some phones are
not fully compatible and it may not be
possible to use the phone's ring tones
in the vehicle.
•
Sort Order - select sort order in the
contact list.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Text message settings (p. 471)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Sound settings (p. 428)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
473
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap 
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
 and select settings:
•
Add device - start the procedure for pair-
ing a new device.
•
Previously paired devices - lists regis-
tered/paired devices.
•
Remove device - remove a connected
device.
•
Allowed services for this device - select
what the device will be used for: making
calls, sending/receiving messages,
streaming media, Internet connection.
•
Internet connection connect the vehicle
to the Internet using the device's
Bluetooth connection.
Bluetooth
®
 declaration of conformity
USA
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Phone settings (p. 472)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
Wireless phone charger*
A charging pad for wireless phone charging is
located in the tunnel console.
To be able to charge, the phone
must have wireless charging (Qi)
capability. Phones not equipped with
a wireless charging receiver can
often be supplemented with a shell that ena-
bles wireless charging.
This device complies with 47CFR part 15 of
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condi-
tion that this device does not cause harmful
interference.
WARNING
Wireless charging can affect the operation
of an implanted pacemaker or other medi-
cal devices. If you have one, it is recom-
mended to consult with your doctor before
using the wireless charging system.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 465)
•
Using the wireless phone charger*
(p. 474)
•
Certificate for wireless charger (p. 475)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

474

Using the wireless phone charger*

The rubber pad below the center display can

be used to charge a phone without having to

connect its cord.

Wireless phone charger in front of gear selector

WARNING

Wireless charging can affect the operation

of an implanted pacemaker or other medi-

cal devices. If you have one, it is recom-

mended to consult with your doctor before

using the wireless charging system.

The charging plate can be switched on and off

via the center display's Function view. The

charging plate's default mode is activated.

When the charging plate is switched on, a

message will appear describing the risks for

users with pacemakers or other implanted

devices who could be affected by the plate.

Tap the center display to confirm that the

charging plate should be switched on.

To use the wireless charging plate:

1. Make sure that the charging plate is

switched on in the center display's Func-

tion view.

Remove all objects from the charging pad

and place the phone in the center of the

pad.

> The phone will begin charging and the

symbol will appear at the top of

the center display.

CAUTION

Do not place cards with NFC (Near Field

Communication), e.g. debit cards for con-

tactless payment, next to the phone. This

type of card could be destroyed during

charging.

NOTE

Some cellular phones may become warm

during wireless charging. This is normal.

If the phone is not charging:

•

Make sure that the charging plate is

switched on in the center display's Func-

tion view.

•

Make sure there are no other objects on

the charging pad.

•

Make sure the phone supports wireless

charging (Qi).

•

If the phone has a phone case, remove it.

•

Lift up the phone and then put it back on

the center of the charging pad.

•

Make sure the ignition is on.

If the phone is incorrectly positioned or an

object prevents charging on the charge pad, a

message is shown on the center display.

CAUTION

Keep cellular phones and charger stations

away from other objects while charging to

help avoid overheating.

Related information

•

Phone (p. 465)

•

Wireless phone charger* (p. 473)

•

Certificate for wireless charger (p. 475)

•

Symbols in the center display status bar

(p. 120)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

475

Certificate for wireless charger

Country/

Area

Mexico: RCPVAPVO 181919

Paraguay:

2018111000541

Taiwan: 根據 NCC 低󰣆率電波輻射性電機管理辦法規定:

第十二條經型式認證合格之低󰣆率射頻電機，非經許可，公司󰃞商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率󰃞󰣇大󰣆率或變更原設計之特性及

󰣆能󰃟

第十四條

低󰣆率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用󰃟

前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信󰃟

低󰣆率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業󰃞科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾󰃟

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

476

Country/

Area

Ukraine:



 : 107  - 115 

Мь ь : 5  (), 63   (єь)

Кє : N / A

М: 2 

NFC

 : 13,56 М,   +/- 0,01%

Мь  ь : 10 

–

: -  І.(LG Electronics Inc) 10, М' 10-, -, , 07796, К

Frequency range 111  / Мь ь : 42   / 

 -  Іє,    WC510MVV20 є  

;     ь   -   :https://www.lg.com/

global/support/cedoc/cedoc.

 :  І 





, 5-





К

Кь ь

, 08112,



.: +38(044) 585 63 00

К  : Alla Haidai ([email protected])

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

477

Country/

Area

US/

Canada

FCC ID : BEJWC510MVV20

IC : 2703HWC510MVV20

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-Gen,RSS216 rules of Canada. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any changed or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to

operate this equipment.

FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.

–

IDéclaration d'avertissement ISED

Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquerd'interferences nuisibles, et

(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interference recue, y compris les interferences pouvant entrainerun fonctionnement indesirable.

Les changements ou modifications non expressement approuves par LG Vehicle Components Company pourraient annuler l'autorite

de l'utilisateura utilizer l'equipement.

Déclaration d'exposition aux radiations RF de l'ISED: Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements RF de

l'ISED définies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas être situés ou fonctionner

conjointement avec une autre antenne ou un autre émetteur.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

478

Country/

Area

Cet équipement doit être installé pour fonctionner avec une distance minimale de 10cm entre le radiateuret le corps de l'utilisateur

final.

Related information

•

Wireless phone charger* (p. 473)

•

Using the wireless phone charger*

(p. 474)

•

License agreement for audio and media

(p. 488)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
479
Internet-connected vehicle*
When the vehicle is connected to the Inter-
net, it is possible to use web radio and music
services via apps, download software and
contact retailers from the vehicle.
The vehicle can be connected to the Internet
using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or the vehicle's inte-
grated modem (SIM card).
When the vehicle is connected to the Internet,
it is possible to share the vehicle's Internet
connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devi-
ces, e.g. tablets, can access the Internet
22
.
The Internet status is shown by a symbol in
the center display's status bar.
NOTE
Data (data traffic) is transfered when using
the internet, which can incur additional
costs.
Activating data roaming can cause addi-
tional charges.
Contact your network operator about data
traffic costs.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi-
ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet
using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the vehicle to the Internet using
Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the vehicle's modem.
Before the vehicle is connected to the Inter-
net, search for support information about
terms and conditions for services and the cus-
tomer privacy policy at volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Symbols in the center display status bar
(p. 120)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481)
•
Apps (p. 429)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)
•
Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi
hotspot (tethering) (p. 483)
•
Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 484)
•
Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 485)
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485)
22
This is not possible when the vehicle is connected to another Wi-Fi hotspot.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
480
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a Bluetooth-connected
phone
Establish an Internet connection using
Bluetooth and tethering from a phone and
get access to multiple connected services in
your vehicle.
1. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone
must first be paired with the vehicle via
Bluetooth.
2. Make sure that the phone supports Inter-
net sharing (tethering) and that the func-
tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function
is called "personal hotspot". In Android
phones, the function can have different
names, but is often called "hotspot". For
iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot"
menu page must also be open until the
Internet connection has been made.
3. If the phone has been connected via Blue-
tooth previously, tap 
Settings in the cen-
ter display's Top view.
4. Tap 
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
5.
Mark the window for 
Bluetooth Internet
connection
 under the heading Internet
connection.
6. If a different connection is being used,
confirm the connection change.
> Your vehicle is now connected to the
Internet via your Bluetooth-connected
phone.
NOTE
The cellular phone and network operator
must support tethering (sharing of Internet
connection) and the subscription must
include data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi-
ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet
using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 466)
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480)
•
Apple
®
 CarPlay
®
* (p. 458)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473)
Connecting the vehicle to the
Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
Establish an Internet connection using Wi-Fi
through Internet sharing (tethering) from a
phone and get access to the connected servi-
ces in your vehicle.
1. Make sure that the phone supports Inter-
net sharing (tethering) and that the func-
tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function
is called "personal hotspot". In Android
phones, the function can have different
names, but is often called "hotspot". For
iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot"
menu page must also be open until the
Internet connection has been made.
2.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
3. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
uncheck the Wi-Fi box.
5. If a different connection is being used,
confirm the connection change.
6. Tap the name of the network you would
like to connect.
7. Enter the network password.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.
Please note that certain cellular phones will
disable Internet sharing (tethering) when the
connection to the vehicle has been broken,
e.g. when the phone has been removed from

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory.

481

the vehicle. The phone's tethering function will

then need to be reactivated the next time the

phone's hotspot is used to connect to the

Internet.

When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it

will be saved for future use. To display a list of

saved networks or to manually delete saved

networks, tap

Settings Communication

Wi-Fi Saved networks.

NOTE

The cellular phone and network operator

must support tethering (sharing of Internet

connection) and the subscription must

include data traffic.

Technical and security requirements for Wi-Fi

connection are described in a separate sec-

tion.

Related information

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 484)

•

No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)

•

Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 485)

Connecting the vehicle to the

Internet via vehicle modem (SIM

card)

It is possible to establish an Internet connec-

tion via the vehicle modem and a personal

SIM card (PSIM).

Vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call will use

the vehicle modem Internet connection for the

services.

Insert a personal SIM card in the holder

under the floor of the cargo compartment.

Note that the vehicle's card reader

requires mini SIM cards.

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

||
AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
482
3. Tap 
Communication Vehicle Modem
Internet
.
4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/
uncheck the 
Vehicle modem Internet
box.
5. If a different connection is being used,
confirm the connection change.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The vehicle will connect to the network.
NOTE
Please note that the SIM card used for
Internet connection via PSIM cannot have
the same telephone number as the SIM
card used in the cellular phone. If the same
card is used for both, phone calls will not
be connected properly to the cellular
phone. Use a SIM card with a separate
phone number for the Internet connection
or a data card that does not handle phone
calls and can therefore not interfere with
phone function.
Related information
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Folding up the cargo compartment floor
(p. 540)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)
•
Vehicle modem settings (p. 482)
Vehicle modem settings
Your vehicle is equipped with a modem that
can be used to connect the vehicle to the
Internet. It is also possible to share this Inter-
net connection over Wi-Fi.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the Top view.
2. Tap 
Communication Vehicle Modem
Internet
 and select settings:
•
Vehicle modem Internet - select this to
use the vehicle's modem to connect to the
Internet.
•
Data usage. - tap Reset to reset the
counter for the amount of data received
and sent.
•
Network.
Select carrier - select a service provider
manually or automatically.
Data roaming - if the box is checked, the
vehicle modem will attempt to connect to
the Internet when the vehicle is outside its
home network (e.g. if you are in another
country). Please note that this could entail
additional charges. Consult with your serv-
ice provider for data roaming terms under
your contract.
•
SIM card PIN.
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can
be entered.
Disable PIN - select whether a PIN code
will be required to access the SIM card.
•
Send request code - used to e.g. down-
load or check the balance remaining on a
prepaid phone card. This function is spe-
cific to your service provider.
NOTE
Please note that the SIM card used for
Internet connection via PSIM cannot have
the same telephone number as the SIM
card used in the cellular phone. If the same
card is used for both, phone calls will not
be connected properly to the cellular
phone. Use a SIM card with a separate
phone number for the Internet connection
or a data card that does not handle phone
calls and can therefore not interfere with
phone function.
Related information
•
Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via
vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

483

Sharing Internet from the vehicle

via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)

When the vehicle is connected to the Inter-

net, other devices may share the vehicle's

Internet connection

The network service provider (SIM card) must

support Internet sharing (tethering).

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Communication Vehicle Wi-Fi

Hotspot

Tap

Network name to assign a name to

the hotspot.

Tap Password and create a password.

This password can then be used to con-

nect other devices to this hotspot.

Tap Frequency band and select a fre-

quency for the hotspot to use to transmit

data. Please note that selecting a fre-

quency is not possible on all markets.

6. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/

uncheck the

Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot box.

7. If Wi-Fi is being used to connect to the

Internet, confirm the change of connec-

tions.

> It is now possible for external devices

to connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hot-

spot.

NOTE

Activation of Wi-Fi hotspot can cause addi-

tional charges from your network operator.

Contact your network operator about data

traffic costs.

The connection status is shown by a symbol in

the center display's status bar.

Tap

Connected devices to see a list of cur-

rently connected devices.

Related information

•

Symbols in the center display status bar

(p. 120)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)

This does not apply when the vehicle is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

484

No or poor Internet connection

Factors affecting the Internet connection.

The amount of data transmitted depends on

the services or apps currently in use in the

vehicle. Streaming music, for example,

involves the transmission of a large amount of

data, and this requires a good connection and

a strong signal.

Phone to vehicle

Internet connection speed may vary depend-

ing on the location of the cellular phone in the

vehicle. Move the phone closer to the center

display to increase signal strength. Make sure

that nothing is between the phone and center

display that could be blocking the signal.

Phone to network operator

The speed of the mobile network varies

depending on the coverage in the vehicle's

current location. Coverage may be poorer in

e.g. tunnels, mountainous areas, deep valleys

or indoors. Connection speed is also depend-

ent on the subscription you have with your

service provider.

NOTE

If you experience any problems with data

traffic, contact your network service pro-

vider.

Restarting the phone

If you experience any Internet connection

problems, it may help to restart your phone.

Related information

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 485)

Deleting Wi-Fi networks

Networks that are not needed can be

deleted.

Tap

Settings in the Top view.

2. Proceed to

Communication Wi-Fi

Saved networks.

Tap

Forget to delete the network.

4. Confirm the selection.

> The vehicle will no longer connect to

the deleted network.

Deleting all networks

All networks can be deleted at once by per-

forming a factory reset. Please note that all

user data and system settings will be restored

to original default factory settings.

Related information

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

No or poor Internet connection (p. 484)

•

Resetting center display settings (p. 130)

•

Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via

a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

485

Wi-Fi technology and security

Networks must meet certain criteria in order

for the vehicle to connect.

It is possible to connect to the following types

of networks:

•

Frequency - 2.4 or 5 GHz

•

Standards - 802.11 a/b/g/n.

•

Security type - WPA2AESCCMP.

The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to han-

dle Wi-Fi devices inside the vehicle.

Performance may be impaired if multiple devi-

ces are using a frequency at the same time.

Related information

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

The first time certain services and apps are

started, a pop-up window with the heading

Terms and conditions and Data sharing

may open.

The aim is to inform the user about Volvo's

accepting data sharing, the user accepts that

certain information will be sent from the vehi-

cle. This is required for certain services and

apps to work with full functionality.

The data sharing function for connected servi-

ces and apps is disabled by default

. For cer-

tain connected services and apps in the vehi-

cle to work, data sharing must be activated.

Data sharing can be set from the center dis-

play's settings menu or when the services or

apps are started in the center display.

Privacy and data sharing

The software update that became available in

November 2017 introduced privacy and data

sharing settings for connected services and

downloaded apps. These settings can be

found under

Privacy and data in the settings

menu in the vehicle's center display.

There, you can choose which connected servi-

ces will be allowed to share data. Data sharing

for downloaded apps can also be disabled

there. Note that services and apps cannot be

used as intended if data sharing is disabled.

After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or

a software update, your data sharing preferen-

ces may be reset to default settings. You will

then need to reactivate data sharing for con-

nected services and downloaded apps.

NOTE

Settings for privacy and data sharing are

unique for each driver profile.

Related information

•

Activating and deactivating data sharing

(p. 486)

Selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets.

Does not apply to Volvo On Call.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

486

Activating and deactivating data

sharing

Data sharing for relevant services and apps

can be set via the Settings menu in the center

display.

Tap

Settings in the center display's Top

view.

2. Tap

System Privacy and data.

3. Select to activate or deactivate data shar-

ing for individual services and all apps.

If data sharing for a connected service or

downloaded apps is not activated, this can be

done when they are started in the center dis-

play. If this is the first time that a service is

started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain

software updates, Volvo's terms and condi-

tions for connected services must be accep-

ted. Note that data sharing will then also be

activated for other services or apps that shar-

ing has already been accepted for.

NOTE

After visiting a Volvo workshop, you may

need to reactivate data sharing so that ser-

vices and apps will work again.

Related information

•

Data sharing for services

If you haven't activated data sharing for a

connected service or for downloaded apps,

you can do this when you start them in your

center display. The first time that you start a

service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain

software updates, you will also need to

accept Volvo's terms and conditions for con-

nected services.

Enabling data sharing when starting a

service

1. Select the function or service you want to

activate.

> If this is the first time you are using the

service or after e.g. a factory reset or

certain software updates, you will first

need to accept Volvo's terms and con-

ditions for connected services in order

to continue.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

487

2. Accept data sharing for the service or can-

cel.

If you choose to accept, data sharing will be

enabled and you can begin using the service.

Enabling data sharing when starting

an app

To accept data sharing for an app that needs

the function, start the app and tap accept in

the pop-up window.

You can disable data sharing for services and

apps in the settings menu under

System

Privacy and data Data Sharing.

Hard disk storage space

It is possible to view how much space is

remaining on the vehicle's hard disk.

Storage information for the vehicle's hard disk

can be shown, including total capacity, availa-

ble capacity and how much space is used for

installed apps. The information is found under

Settings System System Information

Storage.

Related information

•

Apps (p. 429)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

488

License agreement for audio and

media

A license is an agreement on the right to con-

duct a certain activity or the right to use

someone else's right according to terms and

conditions specified in the agreement. The

following texts are Volvo's agreements with

manufacturers/developers.

Dirac Unison

Dirac Unison co-optimizes the loudspeakers in

frequency, time and space for the best possi-

ble bass integration and clarity. It enables a

faithful reproduction of the acoustic characte-

ristics of specific performance venues. Using

advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all

loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-

precision measurements. Like a conductor of

an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeak-

ers perform in perfect unison.

DivX

, DivX Certified

and associated logos

are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used

under license.

This DivX Certified

device can play DivX®

Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-

ing .avi, .divx). Download free software at

www.divx.com to create, play and stream digi-

tal video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEOONDEMAND: This DivX

Certified

device must be registered in order

to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand

(VOD) movies. To obtain your registration

code, locate the DivX VOD section in your

device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for

more information on completing the registra-

tion process.

Patent number

Covered by one or more of the following pat-

ents in the US: 7,295,673; 7,460,668;

7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.

Gracenote

Gracenote or its providers.

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,

"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote

MusicID are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United

States and/or other countries.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

489

Gracenote

End User License Agreement

This application or device contains software

from Gracenote, Inc. in Emeryville, California,

United States (“Gracenote”). The software

from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”)

enables this application to perform disc and/or

file identification and obtain music-related

information, including name, artist, track, and

title information (“Gracenote Data”) from

online servers or embedded databases (collec-

tively “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote Data

only by means of the intended End-User func-

tions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Serv-

ers for your own personal non-commercial use

only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU

AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE-

NOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,

OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to

use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if

you violate these restrictions. If your license

terminates, you agree to cease any and all use

of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote

reserves all rights in all Gracenote Data, all

Gracenote Software, and all Gracenote Serv-

ers, including all ownership rights. Under no

circumstances will Gracenote become liable

for any payment to you for any information

that you provide. You agree that Gracenote,

Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agree-

ment against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier

to track queries for statistical purposes. The

purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden-

tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count

queries without knowing anything about who

you are. For more information, see the web

page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the

Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or war-

ranties, express or implied, regarding the

accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the

right to delete data from the Gracenote Serv-

ers or to change data categories for any cause

that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty

is made that the Gracenote Software or

Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func-

tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote

Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not

obligated to provide you with new enhanced

or additional data types or categories that

Gracenote may provide in the future and is

free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN-

TIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRAN-

TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES

NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL

BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACE-

NOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACE-

NOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUEN-

TIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR

ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Sensus software

This software uses parts of sources from clib2

and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source

1993), The Regents of the University of

California. All or some portions are derived

from material licensed to the University of

California by American Telephone and

Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,

Inc. and are reproduced herein with the

permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Redistribution and use in source and binary

forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following

conditions are met: Redistributions of source

code must retain the above copyright notice,

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

490

this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must

reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in

the documentation and/or other materials

provided with the distribution. Neither the

name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the

names of its contributors may be used to

endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specific prior written

permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED

BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT

OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

This software is based in part on the work of

the Independent JPEG Group.

This software uses parts of sources from

"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL

Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,

released January 26, 2000, developed by

Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is

Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third

parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,

to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files

(the "Software"), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without

limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,

merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or

sell copies of the Software, and to permit

persons to whom the Software is furnished to

do so, subject to the following conditions: The

above copyright notice including the dates of

first publication and either this permission

notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/

projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies

or substantial portions of the Software. THE

SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL

SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,

ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR

THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE

SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this

notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall

not be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other dealings in this

Software without prior written authorization

from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

This software is based in parts on the work of

the FreeType Team.

This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:

Linux software

This product contains software licensed under

GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU

Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

You have the right of acquisition, modification,

and distribution of the source code of the

GPLLGPL software.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

491

You may download Source Code from the

following website at no charge: http://

www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/

download/TVM_8351_013

The website provides the Source Code "As Is"

and without warranty of any kind.

By downloading Source Code, you expressly

assume all risk and liability associated with

downloading and using the Source Code and

complying with the user agreements that

accompany each Source Code.

Please note that we cannot respond to any

inquiries regarding the source code.

camellia:1.2.0

NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone

Redistribution and use in source and binary

forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain

the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer as

the first lines of this file unmodified.

2. Redistributions in binary form must

reproduce the above copyright notice, this

list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or

other materials provided with the

distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS

IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT

OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

Unicode: 5.1.0

reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use

in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,

to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode

data files and any associated documentation

(the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any

associated documentation (the "Software") to

deal in the Data Files or Software without

restriction, including without limitation the

rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,

distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files

or Software, and to permit persons to whom

the Data Files or Software are furnished to do

so, provided that (a) the above copyright

notice(s) and this permission notice appear

with all copies of the Data Files or Software,

(b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this

permission notice appear in associated

documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in

each modified Data File or in the Software as

well as in the documentation associated with

the Data File(s) or Software that the data or

software has been modified.

THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE

PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY

OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY

RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY

DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING

FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

492

WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS

ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR

SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of

a copyright holder shall not be used in

advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,

use or other dealings in these Data Files or

Software without prior written authorization of

the copyright holder.

Declaration of Conformity

USA

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate

the equipment. This transmitter must not be

co-located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

493

Country/

Area

Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não

pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.

Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br

EU:

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2333, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 6691513, Japan

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive

201453EU.

For further details, search for support information on www.volvocars.com.

United

Arab Emi-

rates:

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

494

Country/

Area

Kazakh-

stan:

Model name: NR0V

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Export country: Japan

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

495

Country/

Area

China:

■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz

■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①

■ 最大率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①

■ 载频容限20 ppm

■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)

■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)

•

≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)

•

≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)

•

≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)

•

≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)

•

≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)

2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线

3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续

使用

4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰

5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

496

Country/

Area

Korea:

B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)

이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로

가정에서 사용하는 것을 󹐅적으로 하며, 󹐄든

지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.

해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.

Malaysia:

This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical

Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (volvocars.com/support) and search for “SIRIM

Label Verification”.

Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)

Model: NR0V

Type Approval No.:

RDBV25A1118S(184228), RDBV26A1118S(184229), RDBV37A0619S(192241), RDBV39A0619S(192240)

AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.

497

Country/

Area

Mexico:

Taiwan:

低󰣆率電波輻射性電機管理辦法

第十二條

經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自

變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能

第十四條

低󰣆率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應

立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用󰃟前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線

電通信󰃟低󰣆率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業󰃞科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備

之干擾

Related information

•

Audio, media and Internet (p. 428)

•

Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

•

Media player (p. 449)

•

Gracenote

(p. 453)

•

Sensus - connection and entertainment

(p. 30)

•

Certificate for wireless charger (p. 475)

WHEELS AND TIRES

500

Tires

The function of the tires is to carry loads, pro-

vide traction on road surfaces, reduce vibra-

tions and protect the wheels from wear.

The tires significantly influence the vehicle's

driving characteristics. The type, dimensions,

tire pressure and speed rating have a consid-

erable impact on how the vehicle performs.

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according

to the vehicle's tire information placard on the

B-pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening).

WARNING

A damaged tire could cause the driver to

lose control of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel

combination designed to provide maxi-

mum dry pavement performance with con-

sideration for hydroplaning resistance.

They may be more susceptible to road haz-

ard damage and, depending on driving

conditions, may achieve a tread life of less

than 30,000 km (20,000 miles). Even if

this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's

advanced AWD or stability system, these

tires are not designed for winter driving,

and should be replaced with winter tires

when weather conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-

tics and offer good handling on dry and wet

surfaces. It should be noted however that the

tires have been developed to give these fea-

tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"

tires, which provide a somewhat higher

degree of roadholding on slippery road surfa-

ces than tires without the "all-season" rating.

However, Volvo recommends using snow tires

on all four wheels for good roadholding on icy

or snow-covered roads.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new

tires are the same size designation, type

(radial) and preferably from the same manu-

facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is

a risk of altering the vehicle's roadholding and

handling characteristics.

Recommended tires

On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo

original tires that have the VOL

marking on

the side of the tires. These tires have been

designed specifically for your vehicle. It is

therefore important when replacing tires that

the new tires have this same marking to help

maintain the vehicle's driving characteristics,

comfort and fuel consumption.

New tires

This may vary for certain tire dimensions.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

501

Tires are perishable goods. After a few years,

they will begin to harden and their friction

properties will gradually deteriorate. Always

replace tires with the freshest tires possible.

This is particularly important for snow tires. A

series of numbers is imprinted on the sidewall

of the tire. The last four digits in the series is

the Department of Transportation (DOT)

stamp and indicates the week and year the

tire was manufactured. The tire in the illustra-

tion has 0717 as the last four digits, which

means it was manufactured week 7 of 2017.

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are

not being used. It is recommended that tires

generally be replaced after 6 years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent

high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.)

exposure can accelerate the aging process.

The temporary spare

should also be replaced

at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been

used. A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discol-

oration should be replaced immediately.

Tire economy

•

Maintain correct tire pressure.

•

Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire

screeching.

•

Tire wear increases with speed.

•

Correct front wheel alignment is very

important.

•

Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy

and driving comfort.

•

Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

•

When replacing tires, the tires with the

most tread should be mounted on the rear

wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer

during hard braking.

•

Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Driv-

ing style, tire pressure, climate and road con-

ditions affect how quickly the tires age and

exhibit signs of wear. Maintaining the correct

tire pressure helps keep tread wear evenly dis-

tributed.

To help prevent differences in tread depth and

wear patterns forming on the tires, the front

and rear wheels should be rotated, i.e. the

front tires moved to the rear and the rear tires

moved to the front. Ideally, tire rotation should

be done the first time after approximately

5000 km (ca 3100 miles) and thereafter at

10,000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.

If you have any questions regarding tread

depth, Volvo recommends consulting an

authorized Volvo workshop. If significant dif-

ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread

depth) between the tires have already occur-

red, the least worn tires should always be

mounted on the rear wheels. A front-wheel

skid (understeer) is usually easier to control

than a rear-wheel skid (oversteer). If the front

wheels skid, the vehicle will continue in a

straight line instead of the rear wheels skid-

ding to the side, which could cause you to

completely lose control of the vehicle. It is

therefore important that the rear wheels never

lose grip before the front wheels.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the

floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on

their sides or standing upright, but should not

be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be stored

in close proximity to solvents, gasoline,

oils, etc.

Not available on all models.

||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
502
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unap-
proved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-
bility and handling.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
tions will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
Related information
•
Checking tire pressure (p. 507)
•
Tire direction of rotation (p. 502)
•
Tread wear indicator (p. 503)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system*
(p. 509)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 522)
•
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 506)
•
Tire terminology (p. 503)
•
Tire sidewall designations (p. 504)
•
Loading recommendations (p. 537)
Tire direction of rotation
Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
The arrow shows the tire's direction of rotation.
•
The tire should maintain the same direc-
tion of rotation throughout its service life.
•
Tires should only be moved between the
front and back, never from right to left or
vice versa.
•
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the vehi-
cle's braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.
•
The tires with the most tread should
always be mounted on the rear wheels to
help reduce the risk of skidding.
NOTE
Use tires of the same type, dimensions and
make (manufacturer) on each axle.
Related information
•
Tires (p. 500)

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

503

Tread wear indicator

The tread wear indicator shows the status of

the tire's tread.

The tread wear indicator is a narrow elevated

strip running across the tire's longitudinal

tread grooves. The letters TWI (Tread Wear

Indicator) are visible on the side of the tire.

When approximately 1.6 mm (116 inch) is left

on the tread, the tread will be at the same

height as the tread wear indicator. Replace the

tire as soon as possible. Tires with low tread

offer very poor traction in rain or snow.

Related information

•

Tires (p. 500)

Tire terminology

The following is a glossary of tire-related

terms.

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-

ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,

radial tubeless, etc.

•

Tire information placard: A placard

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure,

and the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

•

Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-

ber on the sidewall of each tire providing

information about the tire brand and man-

ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-

ufacture.

•

Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•

Standard load: A class of P-metric or

Metric tires designed to carry a maximum

load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tires load carrying capability.

•

Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maximum

load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tire's load carrying capability.

•

kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-

sure.

•

PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

unit of air pressure.

•

B-pillar: The structural member at the

side of the vehicle behind the front door.

•

Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next

to the rim.

•

Sidewall of the tire: Area between the

bead area and the tread.

•

Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime-

ter of the tire that contacts the road when

mounted on the vehicle.

•

Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire

or a tire and tube assembly upon which

the tire beads are seated.

•

Maximum load rating: A figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilo-

grams that can be carried by the tire. This

rating is established by the tire manufac-

turer.

•

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: The greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should ever be put in the tire.

This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

•

Recommended tire inflation pressure:

Inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that are

mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This

information can be found on the tire infla-

WHEELS AND TIRES

504

tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

B-pillar and in the tire inflation table.

•

Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same tempera-

ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This

temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3

hours.

Related information

•

Tires (p. 500)

Tire sidewall designations

The following information can be found on a

tire's sidewall.

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the sidewall

of all tires (see the illustration).

The vehicle has been certified with certain

combinations of wheels and tires.

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire

designation is an example only and that

this particular tire may not be available on

your vehicle.

1. 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its

width in percent.

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the

symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supporting run

flat tires

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a

load index of 95 equals a maximum load

of 1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum

speed at which the tire is designed to be

driven for extended periods of time, carry-

ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and

with correct inflation pressure. For exam-

ple, H indicates a speed rating of

210 km/h (130 mph).

Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

505

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they

are not required by law.

7. M+S or MS = Mud and Snow, AT = All

Terrain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"

and indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers are the

factory code where the tire was manufac-

tured, the next two are the tire size code

and the last four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was made. For

example, 0717 means that the tire was

manufactured during week 7 of 2017. The

numbers in between are marketing codes

used at the manufacturer's discretion. This

information helps a tire manufacturer

identify a tire for safety recall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:

Indicates the number of plies indicates or

the number of layers of rubber-coated fab-

ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man-

ufacturers also must indicate the ply

materials in the tire and the sidewall,

which include steel, nylon, polyester, and

others.

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's

tire information placard located on the B-

Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your

vehicle.

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades.

12. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: The greatest amount of air

pressure that should ever be put in the

tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-

turer.

Speed Symbol

A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi-

mum speed for which the tire has been certi-

fied and should be at least equivalent to the

vehicle's top speed.

Winter tires, with or without studs, are excep-

tions and may use a lower SS. When winter

tires are installed, the vehicle may not be

driven faster than the tires' SS.

The vehicle's speed should always be deter-

mined by the posted speed limit and traffic

and road conditions, not the tire's SS.

The following table indicates the maximum

permissible speed for each SS.

M 130 km/h (81 mph)

Q 160 km/h (100 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

WARNING

•

The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unap-

proved wheel/tire size combinations

can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-

bility and handling.

•

Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combina-

tions will not be covered by your new

vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or

expenses that may result from such

installations.

Related information

•

Tires (p. 500)

WHEELS AND TIRES

506

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES.

Quality grades can be found, where applica-

ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½)

times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and many depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variation in driving

habits, maintenance practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con-

trolled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering

(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds

to a minimum level of performance that all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and tire failure.

Related information

•

Tires (p. 500)

•

Tire sidewall designations (p. 504)

WHEELS AND TIRES

* Option/accessory.

507

Checking tire pressure

Correct inflation pressure helps improve driv-

ing stability, save fuel and increase the serv-

ice life of the tires.

Tire pressure decreases over time, which is

normal. Tire pressure also varies depending on

the ambient temperature. Driving on under-

inflated tires could cause the vehicle to over-

heat and lead to damage. Tire pressure affects

traveling comfort, road noise and driving cha-

racteristics.

Check the pressure in the tires every month.

Use the recommended inflation pressure for

cold tires to help maintain good tire perform-

ance. Under-inflated or over-inflated tires

could cause uneven tread wear.

Use an air pressure gauge and check the infla-

tion pressure on all the tires, including the

spare tire

, at least once a month and before

long trips. Volvo recommends buying a relia-

ble air pressure gauge, as the automatic

gauges provided at service stations may be

inaccurate.

WARNING

•

Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation,

or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of

vehicle control and increased risk of

injury.

•

Under-inflated tires reduce the load

carrying capacity of your vehicle.

Cold tires

Inflation pressure should be checked when the

tires are cold. The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same temperature as

the surrounding (ambient) air. This tempera-

ture is normally reached after the vehicle has

been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving for approximately 1.6 km (1 mile),

the tires are considered to be warm. If you

need to drive longer than that to inflate the

tires, check and record the inflation pressure

of the tires first and inflate accordingly when

you arrive at the pump.

When the ambient temperature changes, so

does the inflation pressure. A 10-degree tem-

perature drop causes a corresponding drop in

inflation pressure of 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the

inflation pressure of the tires regularly and

adjust to the correct pressure, which can be

found on the vehicle's tire information decal or

certification label.

If you check inflation pressure when the tires

are warm, you should never release air. The

tires become warm after driving and it is nor-

mal for warm tires to have an inflation pres-

sure above the recommended pressure for

cold tires. A warm tire with an inflation pres-

sure equal to or under the recommended pres-

sure for cold tires could be significantly under-

inflated.

Related information

•

Adjusting tire pressure (p. 508)

•

Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

•

Tire pressure monitoring system*

(p. 509)

•

Tires (p. 500)

Not available in all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

508

Adjusting tire pressure

Tire pressure decreases over time, which is

normal. The tire pressure must therefore be

adjusted to maintain the recommended tire

pressure.

Use the recommended inflation pressure for

cold tires to help maintain good tire perform-

ance and even wear.

NOTE

To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure,

pressure should be checked when the tires

are cold. The tires are considered to be

cold when they have reached the same

temperature as the ambient temperature

(about 3 hours after the vehicle was last

driven). After driving for a few kilometers,

the tires will warm up and the pressure will

increase.

1. Remove the valve cap from the tire and

press the air pressure gauge firmly onto

the valve.

2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-

sure; see the tire pressure placard on the

driver's side B pillar for recommended

pressures for factory-mounted tires.

3. Screw the valve cap back on.

NOTE

•

After inflating a tire, always replace the

valve cap to help prevent valve damage

caused by gravel, dirt, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

4. Visually inspect the tire to make sure there

are no nails or other embedded objects

that could puncture the tire and cause air

leakage.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there

are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irreg-

ularities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-

ing the spare tire

NOTE

If you have overfilled the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the center of

the valve. Then recheck the pressure with

your tire gauge.

Some spare tires require higher inflation

pressure than the other tires. Consult the

tire inflation pressure table or the inflation

pressure decal.

Related information

•

Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

•

Checking tire pressure (p. 507)

•

Inflate tires with the compressor included

in the tire sealing system (p. 527)

•

Approved tire pressure (p. 621)

Not available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory.

509

Recommended tire pressure

The tire pressure placard on the driver's side

B pillar (between the front and the rear door)

indicates tire pressure for different loads and

speed conditions.

Location of the tire pressure placard

The decal specifies the designation for the fac-

tory-mounted tires on the vehicle, as well as

load limits and inflation pressures.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner's Manual

do not claim to be exact reproductions of

those found in the vehicle. The purpose is

to show approximately how they look and

about where they are located on the vehi-

cle. The information that applies for your

vehicle in particular is found on the decal

on the vehicle.

Related information

•

Checking tire pressure (p. 507)

•

Approved tire pressure (p. 621)

Tire pressure monitoring system*

The tire inflation pressure monitoring system

provides an indicator symbol in the instru-

ment panel if pressure is too low in one or

more tires.

This symbol illuminates to

indicate low inflation pres-

sure. Check the inflation

pressure in the

Car Status

app in the center display.

If there is a system malfunc-

tion, the inflation pressure warning symbol will

flash for approximately one minute and then

glow steadily.

System description

The tire pressure monitoring system measures

differences in rotational speed between the

wheels through the ABS system to determine

if the tires are properly inflated. If inflation

pressure in a tire is too low, its diameter (and

consequently its rotational speed) changes. By

comparing the tires with each other, the sys-

tem can determine if the pressure in one or

more tires is too low.

WHEELS AND TIRES

510

General information about the tire pressure

monitoring system

In the following description, the tire monitor-

ing system is generally referred to as TPMS.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided)

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than

the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you should determine

the proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please

note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-

cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

To keep in mind

•

Always save the new inflation pressure in

the system after changing a tire or adjust-

ing the inflation pressure.

•

If you switch to a tire of another size than

the factory-mounted tires, the system

must be reset by storing a new inflation

pressure for these tires to avoid false

warnings.

•

If a spare wheel

is used, it is possible that

the tire pressure monitoring system will

not work correctly due to the differences

between the wheels.

•

The system does not replace the need for

regular tire inspection and maintenance.

•

It is not possible to deactivate the tire

pressure monitoring system.

WARNING

•

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead

to tire failure, which could cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

•

The system cannot predict sudden tire

damage.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Not available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
511
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)
•
Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 512)
•
Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 513)
•
Saving new reference values for tire infla-
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511)
•
Tire inflation pressure monitoring system*
messages (p. 514)
Saving new reference values for
tire inflation pressure monitoring*
In order for the tire inflation pressure moni-
toring system
9
 to function correctly, inflation
pressure reference values must be saved cor-
rectly. To help ensure that the system can
correctly alert the driver of low inflation pres-
sure, this must be done each time the tires
are changed or the inflation pressure is
adjusted.
For example, when driving with a heavy load
or at high speeds (over 160 km/h (100 mph)),
tire pressure should be adjusted to the Volvo-
recommended tire pressure values. The sys-
tem should then be reset by saving the new
inflation pressure.
To store the new inflation pressure as a refer-
ence value in the system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended
pressures for factory-mounted tires.
3. Start the vehicle.
4.
Open the 
Car Status app in App view.
5.
Tap 
TPMS.
NOTE
The vehicle must be stationary for the
Store Pressure button to be selectable.
6.
Tap 
Store Pressure.
7.
Tap 
OK to confirm that the tire pressure in
all four tires has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Drive the vehicle until the new inflation
pressure has been saved. The new infla-
tion pressure is stored when the vehicle is
driven at speeds over 35 km/h (22 mph).
> When enough data has been collected
for the system to detect low inflation
pressure, the animation showing the
progress of the storing procedure will
disappear from the center display. The
system will not provide any further con-
firmation that the new inflation pres-
sure has been stored.
If storing cannot be performed, 
Storing
pressure unsuccessful. Try again. will be
displayed.
9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
512
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monox-
ide, which is invisible and odorless but very
poisonous. The procedure for saving a new
inflation pressure must therefore always be
performed outdoors or in a workshop with
exhaust gas extraction.
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)
•
Adjusting tire pressure (p. 508)
•
Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 512)
•
Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 513)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509)
Viewing tire pressure status in the
center display*
With the system for tire inflation pressure
monitoring
10
, inflation pressure status can be
viewed in the center display.
Checking status
The vehicle may need to be driven for a few
minutes at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph)
to activate the system.
1.
Open the 
Car Status app in App view.
2.
Tap 
TPMS to display the status of the
tires.
The illustration is generic. Layout may vary depend-
ing on vehicle model or software version.
Related information
•
Saving new reference values for tire infla-
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511)
•
Action when warned of low tire pressure
(p. 513)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509)
•
Vehicle status (p. 552)
•
Tire inflation pressure monitoring system*
messages (p. 514)
10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
513
Action when warned of low tire
pressure
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring
system
11
 detects low inflation pressure in a
tire, immediate action is required.
If the system's indicator sym-
bol illuminates and the mes-
sage 
Tire pressure low is
displayed, check the tire
pressure and inflate if neces-
sary.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Check the inflation pressure on all four
tires using a tire pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres-
sure; see the tire pressure placard on the
driver's side B pillar for recommended
pressures for factory-mounted tires.
4. After the inflation pressure has been
adjusted, always save the new inflation
pressure in the system via the center dis-
play.
Please be aware that the indicator symbol
will not go out until the low tire pressure
has been corrected and a storing proce-
dure has been started for the new inflation
pressure.
NOTE
To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure,
pressure should be checked when the tires
are cold. The tires are considered to be
cold when they have reached the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(about 3 hours after the vehicle was last
driven). After driving for a few kilometers,
the tires will warm up and the pressure will
increase.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
WARNING
•
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
to tire failure, which could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
•
The system cannot predict sudden tire
damage.
Related information
•
Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)
•
Adjusting tire pressure (p. 508)
•
Saving new reference values for tire infla-
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511)
•
Viewing tire pressure status in the center
display* (p. 512)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509)
•
Inflate tires with the compressor included
in the tire sealing system (p. 527)
11
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WHEELS AND TIRES

* Option/accessory.

514

Tire inflation pressure monitoring

system* messages

A number of messages related to the tire

inflation pressure monitoring system

may

be displayed. Several examples are provided

below.

Instrument

panel:

Tire

pressure low

Check Car

Status app in

center display

The indicator symbol will

illuminate to indicate that

inflation pressure is low

in one or more tires. See

the

Car Status app in

the center display for

more information.

Instrument

panel:

Tire

pressure sys-

tem Tempo-

rarily unavaila-

ble

The indicator symbol will

flash for about 1 minute

and then glow steadily.

The system is temporarily

unavailable and will be

activated momentarily.

Instrument

panel:

Tire

pressure sys-

tem Service

required

The indicator symbol will

flash for about 1 minute

and then glow steadily. If

the system is not work-

ing properly, contact a

workshop

An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509)

•

Saving new reference values for tire infla-

tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511)

•

Action when warned of low tire pressure

(p. 513)

•

Vehicle status (p. 552)

•

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Changing a wheel

Wheel changes must always be carried out

correctly. The following instructions show

how to remove and install a wheel and what

is important to keep in mind. Make sure that

the tire dimension is approved for use on the

vehicle.

WARNING

•

If a tire must be changed near passing

traffic, make sure all passengers move

to a safe location.

•

Use a jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other

job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•

Never crawl under or allow any part of

your body to be extended under a vehi-

cle supported by a jack.

•

Never let anyone remain in the vehicle

when it is raised on a jack.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory.

515

CAUTION

•

When not in use, the jack* should be

kept in its storage compartment under

the cargo compartment floor.

•

The jack provided with your vehicle is

intended to be used only in temporary

situations such as changing wheels in

the event of a flat tire. Only the jack

that came with your particular model

should be used to lift the vehicle. If the

vehicle needs to be lifted more fre-

quently or for a prolonged period, using

a garage jack or hoist is recommended.

Always follow this device's instructions

for use.

Removing a wheel

Read through all instructions before starting.

Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift,

take out all the tools you will need.

1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning

flashers if a wheel change must be per-

formed in an area with traffic.

2. Make sure that the parking brake is

engaged and put the gear selector in P

position.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels that are still on the ground. For

example, use heavy wooden blocks or

large stones.

4. Using the lug wrench, screw the towing

eye into place as far as possible.

5. Remove the plastic covers from the wheel

bolts using the designated tool.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use

the lug wrench/towing eye to loosen the

wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing down-

ward (counterclockwise). Always start

with the locking wheel bolts*.

7. Follow the instructions for safely lifting the

vehicle using a jack.

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed can move freely. Unscrew the

wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

Installing a wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces between the

wheel and the wheel hub.

2. Lift the wheel into place. Tighten the

wheel bolts securely.

Do not grease the wheel bolt threads.

3. Lower the vehicle so that the wheel can-

not rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts in a crisscross pat-

tern (as shown in illustration). It is impor-

tant that the wheel bolts are securely

tightened. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.).

Use a torque wrench to check torque.

5. Press the plastic covers over the wheel

bolts.

6. Check the tire inflation pressure and store

the new inflation pressure in the tire pres-

sure monitoring system*.

||
WHEELS AND TIRES
* Option/accessory.
516
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be tightened
again several days after a wheel change.
Temperature fluctuations and vibrations
can cause them to loosen slightly.
NOTE
•
After inflating a tire, always replace the
valve cap to help prevent valve damage
caused by gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
Related information
•
Hoisting the vehicle (p. 555)
•
Tool kit (p. 516)
•
Saving new reference values for tire infla-
tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511)
Tool kit
Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are
provided in the vehicle's cargo compartment.
All the tools are located in a foam block under the
cargo compartment floor.
Jack*
Tool for removing the plastic wheel bolt
covers
Funnel for refilling fluids
Wheel bolt key* and towing eyelet
If the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire*
13
, a
jack and lug wrench are provided.
Related information
•
Folding up the cargo compartment floor
(p. 540)
•
Changing a wheel (p. 514)
•
Jack* (p. 517)
•
Tire sealing system (p. 522)
•
Attaching and removing the towing eyelet
(p. 419)
13
Not available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

* Option/accessory.

517

Jack*

The jack can be used to lift the vehicle to e.g.

change a wheel.

CAUTION

•

When not in use, the jack* should be

kept in its storage compartment under

the cargo compartment floor.

•

The jack provided with your vehicle is

intended to be used only in temporary

situations such as changing wheels in

the event of a flat tire. Only the jack

that came with your particular model

should be used to lift the vehicle. If the

vehicle needs to be lifted more fre-

quently or for a prolonged period, using

a garage jack or hoist is recommended.

Always follow this device's instructions

for use.

The jack needs to be cranked together to the

correct position in order to fit.

Related information

•

Folding up the cargo compartment floor

(p. 540)

•

Tool kit (p. 516)

•

Hoisting the vehicle (p. 555)

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place on

the wheel hub.

Only use rims that have been tested and

approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's

original product range.

Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel

bolts are tightened correctly.

Do not grease the wheel bolt threads.

WARNING

The wheel bolts may need to be tightened

again several days after a wheel change.

Temperature fluctuations and vibrations

can cause them to loosen slightly.

CAUTION

The wheel bolts should be tightened to

140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Over-tightening or

under-tightening could damage the threa-

ded joints.

Locking wheel bolt kit*

To loosen or tighten the locking wheel bolts,

turn the wrench in the locking bolt until it fully

engages in the code grooves. When removing

a wheel, always start with the locking wheel

bolts. When mounting a wheel, end with the

locking bolt.

WHEELS AND TIRES

518

CAUTION

Make sure you have a solid connection

between bolt and wheel bolt key when

loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.

Applying force at an angle could damage

the slots in the wheel bolts and the wheel

bolt key and make it impossible to install or

remove the wheel.

When the wheel bolt key is not being used,

stow it in its designated location in the foam

block under the cargo compartment floor. This

is important to remember so that the tool is

available if the vehicle is taken to a workshop.

If you lose the key, contact your Volvo retailer.

Related information

•

Changing a wheel (p. 514)

•

Tool kit (p. 516)

Spare wheel

The spare wheel is a Temporary Spare and

can be used to temporarily replace a punc-

tured tire on one of the vehicle's regular

wheels.

The spare wheel is only intended for tempo-

rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as

soon as possible.

The driving characteristics of the vehicle

change and ground clearance reduces when

the spare wheel is used. Do not wash the vehi-

cle in an automatic car wash while using the

Temporary Spare.

The recommended tire pressure must be

maintained regardless of at which position the

temporary spare wheel is used on the vehicle.

If the spare wheel is damaged, a replacement

can be purchased from a Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the

"Temporary Spare" wheel other than as a

temporary replacement for a punctured

tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-

ble by a standard tire. Roadholding and

handling may be affected with the "Tempo-

rary Spare" wheel in use.

WARNING

•

Never drive faster than 80 km/h

(50 mph) with a spare tire mounted on

the vehicle.

•

The vehicle must never be driven with

more than one "Temporary Spare"

wheel mounted.

•

Driving with a spare wheel may alter

the driving characteristics of the vehi-

cle. Replace the spare wheel with a

normal wheel as soon as possible.

•

The spare wheel is smaller than the

normal wheel, which affects the vehi-

cle's ground clearance. Watch for high

curbs and do not wash the vehicle in

an automatic car wash when a spare

wheel is mounted.

•

Follow the manufacturer's recom-

mended tire inflation pressure for the

spare wheel.

•

On all-wheel drive vehicles, the drive

on the rear axle can be disconnected.

•

If the spare wheel is mounted on the

front axle, snow chains must not be

used.

•

The spare wheel must not be repaired.

Not available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

519

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with tires of

different dimensions or with a spare wheel

other than the one that came with the vehi-

cle. The use of different size wheels can

seriously damage your vehicle's transmis-

sion.

Related information

•

Changing a wheel (p. 514)

•

Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

Handling the spare wheel

Follow these instructions regarding handling

the spare wheel.

Accessing the spare wheel

This illustration is generic and appearance may vary.

Vehicles with 48 V support battery.

The spare tire is located in the spare wheel

well under the cargo compartment with the

outside of the wheel facing downward. The

spare tire is secured with a bolt that goes

through the tire and attaches it to the body.

The foam block contains all tools needed to

change a wheel.

1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compart-

ment floor.

2. Unscrew the retaining bolt.

3. Lift out the spare wheel.

Accessing the spare wheel

This illustration is generic and appearance may vary.

Vehicles without 48 V support battery.

The spare tire is located under the floor of the

cargo compartment and is held in place by a

strap. The foam block contains all tools nee-

ded to change a wheel.

1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compart-

ment floor.

2. Release the straps and lift out the spare

wheel.

Not available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

520

Stowing a flat tire

1. Screw the spare tire's retaining bolt back

on.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to unscrew the lower part

of the retaining bolt if it is attached to the

body, as this could cause it to break.

If the retaining bolt becomes dislodged

from its lower attachment point in the

body under the spare tire, replace it in the

hole and turn clockwise to secure it again.

WARNING

On vehicles with 48 V batteries, the bolt is

attached to the battery box instead of the

body. If the lower part of the retaining bolt

is not dislodged when the spare tire is

taken out, it should be removed to help

prevent injury when the flat tire is replaced.

2. Put the tools back in their correct posi-

tions in the foam block.

3. Then lower the trunk/cargo compartment

floor and place the punctured tire in the

trunk/cargo compartment.

Related information

•

Spare wheel (p. 518)

•

Folding up the cargo compartment floor

(p. 540)

•

Tool kit (p. 516)

•

Changing a wheel (p. 514)

Snow tires

Snow tires are designed for winter driving

conditions.

Volvo recommends snow tires with specific

dimensions. The tire dimensions vary depend-

ing on engine type. When driving with snow

tires, the correct type of tires must be moun-

ted on all four wheels.

Tips for changing snow tires

When switching between regular tires and

snow tires, mark the tires according to which

side they were mounted on, e.g. L for left and

R for right.

Contact a Volvo retailer for assistance deter-

mining the most suitable rims and tires.

Studded tires

Studded tires should be broken in by driving

5001000 km (300600 miles) slowly and

gently to help the studs settle properly in the

tires. This gives the tire, and especially the

studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

Legal requirements concerning the use of

studded tires may vary. Always follow local

laws and regulations.

Tread depth

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-

peratures place considerably higher demands

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}}}

521

on tires than summer conditions. Volvo there-

fore recommends not driving on snow tires

that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm

(0.15 inch).

Related information

•

Changing a wheel (p. 514)

•

Winter driving (p. 403)

•

Tread wear indicator (p. 503)

•

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Snow chains

Using snow chains and/or snow tires can

help improve traction in winter driving condi-

tions.

Volvo does not recommend use of snow

chains on wheel dimensions larger than

18 inches

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-

lent snow chains that are suitable for the

vehicle model and the tire and wheel sizes.

Only one-sided snow chains are permit-

ted.

If uncertain about snow chains, Volvo rec-

ommends contacting an authorized Volvo

workshop. Use of the wrong snow chains

could cause serious damage to the vehicle

and result in an accident.

CAUTION

Snow chains can be used on the vehicle,

with the following restrictions:

•

Always follow the manufacturer's

installation instructions carefully. Install

chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•

Only put snow chains on the front

wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive

vehicles).

•

If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"

tires and wheels with different dimen-

sions than the original tires and wheels

are used, snow chains in some cases

may NOT be used. Sufficient distance

between the chains and brakes, sus-

pension and body components must

be maintained.

•

Check local regulations regarding the

use of snow chains before installing.

•

Never exceed the snow chain manu-

facturer's specified maximum speed

limit. Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).

•

Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns

when driving with snow chains.

•

Avoid driving on surfaces without

snow as this wears out both the snow

chains and the tires.

WHEELS AND TIRES

522

•

The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as

well as locked wheel braking.

•

Some types of strap-on chains affect

brake components and therefore must

NOT be used.

Consult a Volvo retailer for more information

about snow chains.

Related information

•

Winter driving (p. 403)

Tire sealing system

The temporary tire sealing system can be

used to seal a puncture in a tire or to check

and adjust the pressure in the tire.

Models equipped with a spare wheel

do not

have the tire sealing system.

WARNING

California Proposition 65

Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-

senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-

cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-

oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine

except as necessary, service your vehicle in

a well ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-

vehicle.

The tire sealing system consists of a compres-

sor and a bottle containing sealing compound.

The sealing functions as a temporary repair.

NOTE

The sealing compound effectively seals

tires with punctures in the tread but may

not be able to fully seal tires with punctu-

res in the sidewall. Do not use the tire seal-

ing system on tires with large tears, cracks

or similar damage.

NOTE

The compressor is intended for temporary

tire sealing and is approved by Volvo.

Location

The tire sealing system is located in a foam

block under the cargo compartment floor.

Certain models only.

Not available on all models.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

523

Sealing compound expiration date

The sealing compound bottle must be

replaced if its expiration date has passed (see

the decal on the bottle). Handle the old bottle

as hazardous waste.

Related information

•

Using the tire sealing system (p. 523)

•

Inflate tires with the compressor included

in the tire sealing system (p. 527)

•

Tires (p. 500)

Using the tire sealing system

The temporary tire sealing system (TMK

)

can be used to seal a puncture in a tire. Read

through all instructions before use.

Overview

Speed limit sticker

Switch

Electrical cable

Bottle holder

Air release valve

Air pressure gauge

Decal, wheel-side warning

Sealing compound bottle

Bottle opening

Connection for bottle

Hose

Connection valve

Connecting

Temporary Mobility Kit

WHEELS AND TIRES

524

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mind

when using the tire sealing system:

•

The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in

the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex,

natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub-

stances are harmful if swallowed.

•

The contents of this bottle may cause

allergic skin reactions or otherwise be

potentially harmful to the respiratory

tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-

tem, and the eyes.

Precautions:

•

Keep out of reach of children.

•

Do not ingest the contents.

•

Avoid prolonged or repeated contact

with the skin. Remove any clothing

that has come into contact with seal-

ant.

•

Wash thoroughly after handling.

First aid:

•

Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin

with soap and water. Get medical

attention if symptoms occur.

•

Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for

least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting

the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-

cal attention if symptoms occur.

•

Inhalation: Move the exposed person

to fresh air. If irritation persists, get

medical attention.

•

Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting

unless directed to do so by medical

personnel. Get medical attention.

•

Disposal: Dispose of this material and

its container at a hazardous or special

waste collection point.

WARNING

Do not remove the bottle or the hose while

the tire sealing system is being used.

1. Preparations

Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning

flashers if the tire sealing system is to be

used in an area with traffic.

If the puncture was caused by a nail or

similar object, do not remove it. It will help

seal the hole.

2. Peel off the speed limit sticker from the

side of the compressor. Affix the decal to a

clearly visible location on the windshield

to remind the driver not to exceed this

speed limit. Do not drive faster than

80 km/h (50 mph) while using a tire that

has been temporarily repaired with the tire

sealing system.

Also peel off the warning decal and affix it

securely to the side of the wheel.

3. Make sure the switch is in the 0 (Off)

position and take out the electric cable

and the hose.

4. Attach the sealing compound bottle to the

compressor, making sure that the red

arrows on the compressor and bottle are

aligned, and then turn clockwise until it

clicks into place.

The bottle is equipped with a check valve

that prevents fluid leakage when the bot-

tle is not connected to the compressor.

5. Attach the hose in the bottle opening and

turn clockwise until it clicks into place.

6. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw

the hose's valve connector as far as possi-

ble onto the valve.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

525

7. Begin tire sealing procedure

Connect the electrical cable to the nearest

12 V outlet and start the vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that none of the vehicle's other

12 V sockets are used while the compres-

sor is running.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle while the engine is running.

WARNING

Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri-

ous injury. Never leave the engine running

in an enclosed space or a space without

sufficient ventilation.

8. Start the compressor by moving the

switch to the I (On) position.

When the compressor starts, the pressure

can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi), but the

pressure will decrease after

approx. 30 seconds.

WARNING

Never stand next to a tire being inflated

with the compressor. If cracks, bulges, etc.

form on the tire, switch off the compressor

immediately. The vehicle should not be

driven. Call roadside assistance to have the

vehicle towed to a workshop for inspec-

tion/replacement of the tire. Volvo recom-

mends an authorized workshop.

9. Inflate the tire for 7 minutes.

CAUTION

To help avoid overheating, the compressor

should never be used for more than

10 minutes at a time.

10. Switch off the compressor and check the

inflation pressure using the air pressure

gauge. The inflation pressure should be

between 1.8 bar (22 psi) and 2.5 bar

(36 psi). If the inflation pressure is too

high, use the air release valve to release

air.

The sealing compound bottle must be

removed in order to access the air release

valve. Remove the bottle in the following

order:

1. Remove the hose from the tire's valve.

2. Remove the hose from the bottle.

3. Remove the bottle from the compres-

sor.

4. Reconnect the hose directly to the

compressor.

5. Screw the hose back on to the tire's

valve.

6. Release air using the air release valve.

WARNING

If pressure falls below 1.8 bar (22 psi), the

hole in the tire may be too large. The vehi-

cle should not be driven. Call roadside

assistance to have the vehicle towed to a

workshop for inspection/replacement of

the tire. Volvo recommends an authorized

workshop.

WHEELS AND TIRES

526

11. Switch off the compressor and remove

the electrical cable.

12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's valve and

screw the valve cap back on.

NOTE

•

After inflating a tire, always replace the

valve cap to help prevent valve damage

caused by gravel, dirt, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

13. Clean the hose before stowing it and

make sure that no sealing compound is

leaking out.

14. Immediately drive the vehicle at least

3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of

80 km/h (50 mph) to allow the sealing

compound to seal the tire, and then

recheck the inflation pressure.

WARNING

During the tire's first revolution, some seal-

ing compound may spray out of the punc-

ture hole. Before driving away, make sure

that no one is near the vehicle who could

be sprayed with sealing compound. Make

sure no one is within 2 meters (7 feet) of

the vehicle.

15. Rechecking the inflation pressure

Connect the hose to the tire's valve and

screw the hose connector onto the valve

as far as possible. The compressor must

be switched off.

16. Check the inflation pressure on the air

pressure gauge.

•

If the pressure is under 1.3 bar (19 psi),

the tire is not sufficiently sealed. The

vehicle should not be driven. Call road-

side assistance to have the vehicle

towed.

•

If the inflation pressure is higher than

1.3 bar (19 psi), the tire must be inflated

to the inflation pressure specified on

the tire pressure decal on the driver's

side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa =

14.5 psi). If the inflation pressure is too

high, use the air release valve to release

air.

WARNING

Check inflation pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends driving to the nearest

authorized Volvo workshop to have the tire

replaced/repaired. Inform the workshop that

the tire contains sealing compound.

The sealing compound bottle and the hose

must be replaced after use. Volvo recom-

mends contacting an authorized Volvo work-

shop for replacement.

WHEELS AND TIRES

}}

527

WARNING

After using the tire sealing system, the

vehicle should not be driven farther than

approximately 200 km (120 miles).

NOTE

The compressor is an electric device. Fol-

low local regulations for disposal.

Related information

•

Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

•

Tire sealing system (p. 522)

•

Inflate tires with the compressor included

in the tire sealing system (p. 527)

•

Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

Inflate tires with the compressor

included in the tire sealing system

The vehicle's original tires can be inflated

using the compressor in the tire sealing sys-

tem.

1. The compressor must be switched off.

Make sure that the switch is in the 0 (Off)

position and take out the electrical cable

and the hose.

2. Attach the hose directly onto the com-

pressor's bottle holder and turn clockwise

until it clicks into place.

Move the warning sticker to the side of

the compressor; it doesn't need to be

affixed to the wheel side if the sealing

compound is not used.

3. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw

the hose's valve connector as far as possi-

ble onto the valve.

4. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest

12 V outlet and start the vehicle.

WARNING

Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri-

ous injury. Never leave the engine running

in an enclosed space or a space without

sufficient ventilation.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle while the engine is running.

5. Start the compressor by moving the

switch to the I (On) position.

CAUTION

Risk of overheating. The compressor

should not be running for longer than 10

minutes at a time.

6. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on

the tire pressure decal on the driver's side

door pillar. If the inflation pressure is too

high, use the air release valve to release

air.

7. Switch off the compressor. Remove the

hose and the electrical cable.

WHEELS AND TIRES

528

8. Screw the valve cap back onto the tire.

NOTE

•

After inflating a tire, always replace the

valve cap to help prevent valve damage

caused by gravel, dirt, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

NOTE

The compressor is an electric device. Fol-

low local regulations for disposal.

Related information

•

Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

•

Using the tire sealing system (p. 523)

•

Tire sealing system (p. 522)

Determining the vehicle's

permitted weight

Properly loading your vehicle will provide

maximum return of vehicle design perform-

ance.

Weight designations

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your-

self with the following terms for determining

your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS

CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-

tion placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or optional equip-

ment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

towbar weight is also part of cargo weight.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS

CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle

must never exceed its maximum permissible

weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-

gers.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your

vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX

lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX"

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be

five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 ×

150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

WHEELS AND TIRES

529

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

•

Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other

weight rating limits can cause tire over-

heating resulting in permanent defor-

mation or catastrophic failure.

•

Do not use replacement tires with

lower load carrying capacities than the

tires that were original equipment on

the vehicle because this will lower the

vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires

with the correct load carrying capacity.

Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-

tion.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER

COMPARTMENT

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

532

Passenger compartment interior

Overview of the passenger compartment

interior and storage spaces.

Front seats

Storage compartment in door panel, card holder to

the left of the steering wheel, storage under driver's

seat

, sun visors and glove compartment with fold-

out hook.

Storage compartment at leg area, electrical outlets

and USB ports via wireless phone charger*, cup

holder and storage under armrest in tunnel console.

Rear seat

Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders*

in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the

front seat's backrest and USB ports* in the tunnel

console.

WARNING

Store loose objects, such as cell phone,

camera, remote control for extra equip-

ment, etc., in the glove compartment or

another compartment. Otherwise, these

could injure people in the vehicle in the

event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION

Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be

easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do

not place keys, phones or similar items on

sensitive surfaces.

Related information

•

Electrical outlets (p. 534)

•

Using the glove compartment (p. 535)

•

Sun visors (p. 537)

•

Tunnel console (p. 533)

•

Wireless phone charger* (p. 473)

•

Connecting a device via the USB port

(p. 456)

A maximum of 1 kg (2.2 lbs) can be stored here.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

533

Tunnel console

The tunnel console is located between the

front seats.

Storage compartment with cup holder.

Waste bin*

that can be taken out and

emptied.

Storage compartment under the armrest.

Climate control panel for the rear seats* or

storage compartment. There is also a USB

port underneath*.

WARNING

Store loose objects, such as cell phone,

camera, remote control for extra equip-

ment, etc., in the glove compartment or

another compartment. Otherwise, these

could injure people in the vehicle in the

event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION

Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be

easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do

not place keys, phones or similar items on

sensitive surfaces.

NOTE

One of the sensors for the alarm* is located

under the cup holder in the center console.

Avoid placing coins, keys and other metal

objects in the cup holder as this could trig-

ger the alarm.

NOTE

The USB port can be used to e.g. charge a

cellular phone or tablet. Only the front USB

port can be used to play media through the

vehicle's speakers.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment interior (p. 532)

•

Electrical outlets (p. 534)

•

Climate system controls (p. 201)

Only in vehicles with automatic transmission.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

534

Electrical outlets

There is a 12 V electrical outlet in the tunnel

console and a 12 V electrical outlet* in the

trunk/cargo compartment.

If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,

contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo

workshop is recommended.

12 V outlets

12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat.

The 12 V outlets can be used for devices

intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers

and cellular phones.

12 V outlet in the cargo compartment*.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment interior (p. 532)

•

Using the electrical outlets (p. 534)

Using the electrical outlets

The 12 V outlet can be used for devices

intended for this such as MP3 players, cool-

ers and cellular phones.

The ignition must be in at least mode I for the

outlets to supply current. The outlets will then

be active as long as there is sufficient charge

in the start battery.

If the engine is turned off and the vehicle is

locked, the outlets will be deactivated. If the

engine is turned off and the vehicle remains

unlocked, the sockets will remain active for up

to 7 minutes.

NOTE

Bear in mind that using the electrical out-

lets when the engine is off could cause the

starter battery to have too low of a charge

level, which could limit other functionality.

Accessories connected to the electrical

outlets can be activated even when the

vehicle electrical system is off or if precon-

ditioning is used. For this reason, discon-

nect plugs when they are not in use to pre-

vent the starter battery from becoming dis-

charged.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

535

WARNING

•

Do not use accessories with large or

heavy plugs – they could damage the

outlet or come loose while you are driv-

ing.

•

Do not use accessories that could

cause disruptions to e.g. the vehicle's

radio receiver or electrical system.

•

Position the accessory so that there is

no risk of it injuring the driver or pas-

sengers in the event of heavy braking

or a collision.

•

Pay attention to connected accessories

as they can generate heat that could

burn passengers or the interior.

Using 12 V outlets

1. Remove the stopper (tunnel console) or

fold down the cover (trunk/cargo com-

partment) over the socket and plug in the

device.

2. Unplug the device and put the stopper

back in (tunnel console) or fold up the

cover (trunk/cargo compartment) when

the socket is not in use or left unattended.

CAUTION

The maximum power is 120 W (10 A) per

outlet.

Related information

•

Electrical outlets (p. 534)

•

Passenger compartment interior (p. 532)

Using the glove compartment

The glove compartment is located on the pas-

senger side. The glove compartment can be

used to store the Owner's Manual, maps, etc.

There is also room for a pen and a card

holder.

Glove compartment with fold-out hook.

The hook on the glove compartment can be

folded out when the glove compartment is

open. Once folded out, it can be used when

the glove compartment is closed.

CAUTION

To help prevent damage to the hook, fold it

in completely before closing the glove

compartment.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

536

Locking and unlocking the glove box*

The glove compartment can be locked when

the vehicle is left at a workshop, hotel, etc.

The glove compartment can then only be

locked/unlocked with the glove compartment

key.

Storage compartment for the key. The illustration is

generic – the design may vary.

The illustration is generic – the design may vary.

To lock the glove compartment:

Insert the key into the lock on the glove

compartment.

Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key from the lock.

–

To unlock, perform the above steps in

reverse.

Using the glove box as a cooled area*

The glove compartment can be used to cool

e.g. drinks or food. Cooling is possible when

the climate system is active (i.e. when the

ignition is in mode II or when the engine is

running).

The illustration is generic – the design may vary.

Activate cooling.

Deactivate cooling.

–

Activate or deactivate cooling by moving

the control as far as possible toward the

passenger compartment/glove compart-

ment.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment interior (p. 532)

•

Private Locking (p. 248)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

* Option/accessory.

537

Sun visors

In the ceiling in front of the driver's and front

passenger's seats, there are sun visors that

can be lowered and angled to the side as

necessary.

The illustration is generic – the design may vary.

The mirror lighting* comes on automatically

when the visor is lifted up.

The mirror frame has a holder for e.g. cards or

tickets.

Related information

•

Passenger compartment interior (p. 532)

Cargo compartment

The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment

that makes it possible to carry and secure

large objects.

The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con-

siderably increased by folding down the rear

seat backrests. Use load anchoring eyelets or

grocery bag holders to help secure objects in

place. In order to accommodate bulky loads,

the parcel shelf is easy to remove and store

under the load compartment floor.

The towing eyelet and tire sealing system, or

the temporary spare tire*, are located under

the cargo compartment floor.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

•

Grocery bag holders (p. 539)

•

Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540)

•

Removing and storing the parcel shelf

(p. 544)

Loading recommendations

There are a number of things that are impor-

tant to consider when carrying loads in or on

the vehicle.

Load-carrying capacity is determined by the

vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all

passengers and any installed accessories

reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by

the corresponding amount.

WARNING

The vehicle's driving characteristics change

depending on the weight and position of

the load.

Loading the cargo compartment/trunk

Keep the following in mind when loading:

•

Position objects so they are pressing

against the rear seat backrests.

•

Heavy objects should be positioned as low

as possible. Avoid placing heavy objects

on folded-down seat backrests.

•

Cover sharp corners with a soft cloth or

similar to help prevent damage to the

upholstery.

•

Use the load anchoring eyelets and ten-

sioning straps or similar to secure all

objects.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

538

WARNING

In a head-on collision at a speed of

50 km/h (30 mph), an unsecured object

weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can reach a

projectile weight equivalent to 1000 kg

(2200 pounds).

WARNING

If objects are loaded higher than the upper

edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm

(4 in.) space between the objects and the

window. Objects placed closer to this

could impede the function of the inflatable

curtain concealed inside the headlining.

WARNING

Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may

shift during heavy braking and injure peo-

ple in the vehicle.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with

something soft.

Turn off the engine and apply the parking

brake when loading/unloading long

objects. Otherwise, it is possible for the

load to reach the gear lever or gear selector

and move it to a drive position – which

could cause the vehicle to begin rolling.

Extra cargo space

The rear seat backrests can be folded down to

increase cargo space in the cargo compart-

ment/trunk and simplify loading. If the rear

seat backrests are folded down, make sure

that no objects loaded into the vehicle prevent

the WHIPS system for the front seats from

functioning correctly.

A ski hatch* in the rear seat can be folded

down to carry skis or other long, thin objects.

Related information

•

Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540)

•

Folding down the rear seat backrests

(p. 183)

•

Rear seat ski hatch* (p. 540)

•

Roof loads and load carriers (p. 538)

•

Leveling control* and suspension (p. 398)

•

Weights (p. 615)

Roof loads and load carriers

Volvo-developed load carriers are recom-

mended for carrying loads on the roof of the

vehicle.

Volvo load carriers are specially designed to

help prevent damage to your vehicle and help

ensure maximum safety while driving. Volvo

load carriers are available from authorized

Volvo retailers.

Carefully follow the installation instructions

provided with the load carriers.

•

Distribute the load evenly throughout the

load carriers. Place heavier cargo at the

bottom of the load.

•

Check periodically to ensure that the load

carriers and load are properly secured.

Secure the load firmly using tie straps or

similar.

•

If the load is longer than the vehicle, such

as a canoe or kayak, attach the towing

eyelet in its front outlet and secure the tie

straps in it.

•

The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel

consumption increase with the size of the

load.

•

Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid acceleration,

hard braking and fast cornering.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

539

WARNING

The vehicle's center of gravity and driving

characteristics are altered by roof loads.

Follow the vehicle's specifications regar-

ding weights and maximum permitted

load.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

•

Weights (p. 615)

Grocery bag holders

Grocery bag holders (hooks) help keep shop-

ping bags in place and prevent them from

falling over and spilling their contents in the

cargo compartment.

On the sides of the cargo

compartment

There is a grocery bag holder in the side panel

on each side of the cargo compartment.

CAUTION

The grocery bag holders are only intended

to hold weights up to 5 kg (11 lbs).

Under the floor hatch*

1. Lift the handle in the center of the load

compartment floor and fold up the floor.

2. Move the load compartment floor to the

upright position and place it in the adjust-

ment track on each side.

> It is now possible to hang grocery bags

with handles at a suitable height on the

hooks.

In the glove compartment

There is also a fold-out hook in the glove com-

partment that can be used to hang a shopping

bag.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

•

Using the glove compartment (p. 535)

•

Installing and removing the cargo net*

(p. 542)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

540

Load anchoring eyelets

The load anchoring eyelets in the cargo com-

partment can be used to secure objects with

straps, a net, etc.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects in or pro-

truding from the vehicle can cause injury in

the event of hard braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

•

Weights (p. 615)

Rear seat ski hatch*

The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be

opened to transport long, narrow objects

such as skis.

1. In the cargo compartment, grasp the ski

hatch handle and pull it down.

2. Fold down the armrest in the rear seat.

3. Adjust the center seat head restraint

upwards so the steel tubes do not block

the opening.

If the private locking function is used, the ski

hatch must be closed.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

•

Private Locking (p. 248)

•

Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540)

Folding up the cargo compartment

floor

The cargo compartment floor can be secured

in the raised position using the support arm.

1. Grasp the handle to fold up the cargo

compartment floor.

2. Raise the support arm and insert the end

in the recess on the underside of the cargo

compartment floor.

> The cargo compartment floor will then

be held in the raised position.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

* Option/accessory.

541

With folding cargo compartment floor*

–

Lift the handle in the middle of the folding

cargo compartment floor and push it for-

ward so that it folds together.

Related information

•

Cargo compartment (p. 537)

Removing the folding cargo

compartment floor*

The folding cargo compartment floor can be

removed for easier access to e.g. the SIM

card holder or the storage space underneath

the cargo compartment floor.

Push the folding cargo compartment floor

forward so that it folds together.

Press the locking clip at the location

shown by the arrow until it stops. Maintain

pressure on the locking clip.

At the same time, lift the cargo com-

partment floor slightly upward.

3. Release pressure on the locking clip, but

keep holding the cargo compartment floor

up.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

542

While continuing to hold the cargo com-

partment floor up, press the locking clip on

the other side, as shown by the arrow.

> If the procedures in step 2 have been

performed correctly, the cargo com-

partment floor should now be released

from its side attachment points.

The cargo compartment floor can be

carefully placed back on top of the lock-

ing clips without it locking into place.

NOTE

The cargo compartment floor is also

secured in the front hinge.

Volvo recommends that the cargo com-

partment floor remains secured in its front

hinge.

5. Press the cargo compartment floor down-

ward to lock it into its attachment points

again.

Related information

•

Cargo compartment (p. 537)

Installing and removing the cargo

net*

The cargo net helps prevent objects in the

cargo compartment from entering the pas-

senger compartment in the event of a sudden

stop or hard braking.

The cargo net is attached at four points.

For safety reasons, the cargo net must always

be mounted and secured according to the fol-

lowing description.

The net is made of strong nylon weave and

can be attached in two different locations in

the vehicle:

•

Rear mounting - behind the rear seats.

•

Front mounting - behind the front seats.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

543

WARNING

Objects in the cargo compartment must

always be securely anchored, even with a

correctly installed cargo net.

Installing the cargo net

WARNING

All of the cargo net's upper consoles,

hooks and straps must be securely moun-

ted and attached before the net is used.

Never use the net if it is damaged.

NOTE

With front mounting, the cargo net is most

easily installed via a rear door.

1. Fold out the cargo net with the upper

hooks facing upwards.

2. Insert one of the net's hooks into the front

or rear ceiling mounting point with the

strap lock facing you.

Remove any clothing hooks from the ceil-

ing attachment by turning the hook a quar-

ter-turn clockwise (left side) or a quarter-

turn counterclockwise (right side).

Left side.

3. Insert the net's other upper hook into the

ceiling mounting point on the opposite

side.

Make sure that the net's hooks are pushed

forward as far as possible into their

respective mounting points.

Rear mounting.

For rear mounting:

With the cargo net hooked into the rear

ceiling mounting points, attach the net's

straps into the front cargo anchoring eye-

lets in the cargo compartment.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

544

Front mounting.

For front mounting:

With the cargo net mounted in the front

ceiling mounting points, hook the straps

into the outer eyelets on the front seat rails

behind the seats. Attaching the net is eas-

ier if the seat backrests are upright and the

seats are moved slightly forward.

Move the seat or backrest only until it

touches the net. Moving it with too much

force or applying too much pressure to the

net could lead to damage.

CAUTION

If a seat or backrest is pressed with too

much force back against the cargo net, the

net and its ceiling brackets could be dam-

aged.

5. Pull the straps until the cargo net is taut.

Removing the cargo net

The cargo net can be easily removed and

folded up.

1. Loosen the cargo net by pressing the but-

ton on the strap locks on each side and

pulling to allow some slack.

2. Press in the catches and release both of

the strap hooks.

3. Unhook the upper hooks and remove the

net from the ceiling mounting points.

4. Fold up the net and store it in its case.

Replace clothing hooks, if desired.

Related information

•

Loading recommendations (p. 537)

•

Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540)

Removing and storing the parcel

shelf

The parcel shelf can be removed to increase

the cargo space.

Removing the parcel shelf

Detach the parcel shelf lifting eyes on both

sides.

Unhook the front edge of the parcel shelf

and remove it.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.

545

Storing the parcel shelf under the

cargo floor

Once removed, the parcel shelf can be stored

under the cargo compartment floor.

Fold up the cargo compartment floor and

secure it with the support arm.

Position the parcel shelf with its top facing

down and place it in the space with the

rear part facing forward.

With folding cargo compartment floor*:

Fold the cargo compartment floor forward

to position the parcel shelf with its top fac-

ing down and its rear part facing forward.

2. Restore the cargo compartment floor to a

flat position.

Related information

•

Cargo compartment (p. 537)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

548

Volvo's service program

To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as

possible, follow the Volvo service schedule

specified in the Warranty and Maintenance

Records Information booklet.

WARNING

California Proposition 65

Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-

senger vehicle can expose you to chemi-

cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon-

oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are

known to the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine

except as necessary, service your vehicle in

a well ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-

vehicle.

Volvo recommends having an authorized

Volvo workshop perform service and mainte-

nance. Volvo workshops have the staff, service

literature and special tools that can provide

the highest quality of service.

CAUTION

To ensure the Volvo warranty is not invali-

dated, check and follow the Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet.

Introduction

The maintenance services contain several

checks that require special instruments and

tools and therefore must be performed by a

qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top

condition, specify time-tested and proven

Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act - U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle

manufacturers to furnish written instructions

to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper

servicing and function of the components that

control emissions. These services, which are

listed in the "Warranty and Service Records

Information" booklet, are not covered by the

warranty. You will be required to pay for labor

and material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance

with Volvo specifications. The maintenance

procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-

ice Records Information booklet, many of

which will positively affect your vehicle's emis-

sions, should be performed as indicated. It is

recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-

sion maintenance be retained in case ques-

tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-

tion and maintenance should also be per-

formed anytime a malfunction is observed or

suspected.

Applicable warranties - U.S./Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-

dian regulations, the following list of warran-

ties is provided.

•

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•

Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•

Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•

Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint

Systems Limited Warranty

•

Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•

Emission Performance Warranty

These are federal warranties; other warranties

are provided as required by state/provincial

law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet for

detailed information concerning each of the

warranties.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

549

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

NOTE

•

Refer to your Service and Warranty

Booklet for a comprehensive service

and maintenance schedule up to

240,000 km (150,000 miles). This

program contains inspections and ser-

vices necessary for the proper function

of your vehicle and includes compo-

nents that affect vehicle emissions.

•

The Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet also contains

detailed information concerning the

warranties that apply to your vehicle.

On-board Diagnostic System

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diag-

nostic information about your vehicle's emis-

sion controls. It can light the Check Engine

light (MIL) if it detects an emission control

"fault." A "fault" is a component or system

that is not performing within an expected

range. A fault may be permanent or temporary.

OBD II will store a message about any fault.

Emission inspection readiness

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can

then read "faults." In some states, this type of

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission

test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-

tion for any of the following reasons:

•

If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•

If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,

but went out without any action on your

part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.

Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending

on the inspection practices in your area.

•

If you had recent service that required dis-

connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic

information may be incomplete and "not

ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not

ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•

If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or

was lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,

serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•

If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a

period of driving is necessary to bring the

OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.

Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/

highway driving are typically needed to

allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your

Volvo retailer can provide you with more

information on planning a trip.

•

Maintain your vehicle in accordance with

your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

Owner maintenance

Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-

vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty

and Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried out

between the normally scheduled maintenance

services.

Each time the vehicle is refueled:

•

Check the engine oil level.

•

Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,

headlights, and taillights.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
550
Monthly:
•
Check cold tire pressure in all tires.
Inspect the tires for wear.
•
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min"
and "max" markings.
•
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•
Wipe driver information displays with a
soft cloth.
•
Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-
minal connector, or a battery near the end
of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo
retailer for additional information.
As needed:
Wash the vehicle, including the undercarriage,
to reduce wear that can be caused by a
buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be
caused by salt residues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at
the base of the windshield, and from other pla-
ces where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Related information
•
Vehicle status (p. 552)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553)
•
Connecting equipment to the vehicle's
data link connector (p. 37)
•
Technician certification (p. 38)
•
Climate control system service (p. 558)
•
Maintenance of the brake system (p. 377)
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 559)
Data transfer between vehicle and
workshop over Wi-Fi
Volvo workshops have a designated Wi-Fi
network for data transfer between your vehi-
cle and the workshop. Your visit to the work-
shop will be easier and more effective when
diagnostics information and software can be
transferred over the workshop's network.
At the workshop, your service technician can
connect your vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi
network to perform troubleshooting and
download software. For this type of communi-
cation, the vehicle only connects to a work-
shop's network. It is not possible to connect
the vehicle to another Wi-Fi network (e.g. your
home network) in the same way as to a work-
shop's network.
Connecting with remote key
Connection is usually managed by the service
technician, who will use the remote key but-
tons. It is therefore important to bring a key
with buttons with you when you visit the
workshop. Pressing the lock button on the
remote key three times will connect the vehi-
cle to the workshop's Wi-Fi network.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net-
work, the   symbol appears in the center
display.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
551
WARNING
The vehicle may not be driven when it is
connected to the workshop's networks and
systems.
Related information
•
Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 551)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553)
Download Center
With the vehicle connected to the Internet
1
,
updates for a number of the vehicle's sys-
tems can be downloaded from the center dis-
play.
The Download Center app is
started from the center dis-
play and makes it possible to:
•
search for and update system software
•
update Sensus Navigation* map data
•
download, update and delete apps.
Related information
•
Handling system updates via Download
Center (p. 551)
•
Download apps (p. 430)
•
Updating apps (p. 431)
•
Deleting apps (p. 432)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
Handling system updates via
Download Center
Functions for Internet-connected vehicles
and infotainment can be updated via Down-
load Center. Updates can be done one at a
time or all at the same time.
Searching for update
If an update is available, the
message 
New software
updates available See
Download Center will be
displayed in the center dis-
play's status field.
In order for system updates to be possible, the
vehicle must have an Internet connection
2
.
–
Go to Download Center in the center dis-
play's App view.
> If no search has been performed since
the last time the infotainment system
was started, a search will be initiated.
No search will begin if a software
download is in progress.
A number in 
System updates shows
how many updates are available. Tap to
display a list of updates that can be
installed in the vehicle.
1
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
2
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
552
NOTE
Data downloading can affect other services
such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the
affect on other services is experienced as
problematic, the download can be interrup-
ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to
switch off or cancel other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the
ignition is switched off and the vehicle is
left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the vehicle is left as the
update is resumed the next time the vehi-
cle is used.
Updating all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
To avoid displaying a list, select 
Install all
 via
System updates
.
Updating individual system software
–
Select Install to choose the software you
would like to download.
Canceling software download
–
Tap the checkbox in the activity indicator
that replaced 
Install when the download
began.
Note that only a download can be cancelled.
An installation cannot be cancelled once it has
begun.
Deactivating the background search
for software update
Automatic searching for software updates is
activated as the default factory setting, but the
function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap 
Settings in the center display's Top
view.
2. Tap 
System Download Center.
3.
Tap to deselect 
Auto Software Update.
Related information
•
Download Center (p. 551)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
Vehicle status
The general status of the vehicle can be
viewed in the center display.
The Car Status app is started
from the center display's App
view and has four tabs:
•
Messages - status messages
•
Status – checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level
3
•
TPMS - tire inflation pressure check
•
Appointments - appointment information
and vehicle information
4
Related information
•
Handling messages saved from the instru-
ment panel (p. 104)
•
Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562)
•
Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509)
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553)
•
Sending vehicle information to the work-
shop (p. 554)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory.

553

Scheduling service and repairs

This service offers a way to send a booking

request for service and workshop appoint-

ments directly from the vehicle.

When it is time for service, and in certain

cases if the vehicle requires repairs, a mes-

sage will be displayed in the instrument panel

and at the top of the center display. The time

for service is determined by how much time

has elapsed, the number of hours the engine

has run, or the distance driven since the last

service.

To use the service

•

Create a Volvo ID and register it to the

vehicle.

•

To send and receive appointment informa-

tion, the vehicle must be connected to the

Internet

Book service

Book a service request when desired or when

a message is displayed indicating that service

or repairs are needed.

Open the

Car Status app from App view

in the center display.

Tap

Appointments.

Tap

Request appointment.

Check that your

Volvo ID is correct.

Make sure your preferred

Workshop

information is correct.

In the

Tap to write information to the

workshop field, you can provide details

on what you would like performed during

the visit or other important information to

your workshop.

Tap Send appointment request.

> You will receive an appointment sug-

gestion by email within a couple of

days

On some markets, the message in the

instrument panel indicating that the

vehicle requires service will go out once

the appointment request has been sent.

Tap

Cancel request if you would like to

cancel your request.

The appointment request contains information

about your vehicle that helps the workshop

plan for your visit.

The retailer will send you a digital appointment

suggestion. You also have information about

your retailer available in the vehicle so that you

can contact your workshop.

Accepting an appointment suggestion

When the vehicle has received an appoint-

ment suggestion, a message will be displayed

at the top of the center display.

1. Tap the message.

2. To accept the suggested appointment, tap

Accept. Otherwise, tap Send new

proposal or Decline.

For some markets, the system reminds you

when an appointment time is approaching and

the navigation system

can also guide you to

the workshop at the appointed time.

NOTE

If you experience any problems with this

service, contact your Volvo retailer.

AdBlue Diesel models only.

Certain markets only.

There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

Timespan may vary depending on market.

For vehicles with Sensus Navigation*.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
554
Related information
•
Vehicle status (p. 552)
•
Sending vehicle information to the work-
shop (p. 554)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
Sending vehicle information to the
workshop
9
Vehicle-related information can be sent at
any time from the vehicle, e.g. if you schedule
a visit to a workshop and would like to assist
your workshop by providing additional basic
information. Sending vehicle information is
not the same as scheduling service.
1.
Open the 
Car Status app from App view
in the center display.
2.
Tap 
Appointments.
3.
Tap 
Send vehicle data.
> A message confirming that vehicle-rela-
ted information has been sent will
appear at the top of the center display.
You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the checkbox in the activity
indicator.
Information is sent via the vehicle's
Internet connection
10
.
Vehicle information can be accessed by any
retailer if they are provided with your vehicle
identification number (VIN
11
).
Vehicle information contents
The most recently saved vehicle-related infor-
mation will be sent (the last time the vehicle
was turned on). This includes information
regarding:
•
service requirements
•
time since last service was performed
•
function status
•
fluid levels
•
mileage (odometer reading)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN
11
)
•
software version
•
diagnostic information.
Related information
•
Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553)
•
Vehicle status (p. 552)
•
Navigating in the center display's views
(p. 111)
•
Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)
9
Certain markets only.
10
There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.
11
Vehicle Identification Number.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

555

Hoisting the vehicle

When hoisting the vehicle, it is important that

the jack is positioned on the designated

points under the vehicle.

The triangles in the plastic covering indicate where the jack attachment points/lifting points (red areas) are located.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

556

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack

intended for your specific vehicle model. If

a jack other than that recommended by

Volvo is used, follow the instructions

included with the equipment.

The vehicle's ordinary jack is only intended

to be used in temporary situations for short

periods of time, such as when changing

wheels in the event of a flat tire. If the vehi-

cle needs to be lifted more frequently, or

for a longer period of time than for a wheel

change, a garage jack or hoist is recom-

mended. Always follow the instructions for

use provided with the equipment.

WARNING

•

Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

•

Check that the jack is not damaged,

the threads are properly lubricated and

it is free from dirt.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-

slippery surface and that it is upright

and not leaning.

•

The jack must correctly engage in the

jack attachment.

•

No objects should be placed between

the base of the jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

•

Never let anyone remain in the vehicle

when it is raised on a jack.

•

If a tire must be changed near passing

traffic, make sure all passengers move

to a safe location.

•

Use a jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other

job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•

Never crawl under or allow any part of

your body to be extended under a vehi-

cle supported by a jack.

WARNING

If the vehicle is lifted on a garage jack, the

jack must be placed under one of the four

lifting points. Make sure that the vehicle is

correctly positioned on the jack and that it

cannot slide off. Make sure the jack plate

has a rubber pad to help keep the vehicle

stable and prevent damage. Always use

axle stands or similar.

When not in use, the jack* should be kept in

its storage compartment under the cargo

compartment floor.

Read through all instructions before starting.

Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift,

take out all the tools you will need.

1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning

flashers if e.g. a wheel change must be

performed in an area with traffic.

2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P, or first gear if the vehicle has

a manual transmission.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the

wheels that are still on the ground. For

example, use heavy wooden blocks or

large stones.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

557

4. Position the jack or garage lift arms at the

designated points under the vehicle. The

triangle markings on the plastic cover indi-

cate where the jack attachment points/lift-

ing points are located. There are two jack

attachment points on each side of the

vehicle. There is a groove for the jack at

each attachment point.

5. Position the jack under the attachment

point being used, ensuring that the sur-

face is firm, flat and not slippery.

6. Crank it up until it is properly aligned and

it is in contact with the vehicle's jack

attachment point. Make sure the top of

the jack (or the garage lift arms) is cor-

rectly positioned in the attachment point,

with the bump on the top of the jack in the

recess in the attachment point and its

base positioned vertically under the

attachment point.

7. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far as

possible from the side of the vehicle,

which will position the jack's arms per-

pendicular to the vehicle's direction of

movement.

8. Raise the vehicle to a suitable height for

the operation to be performed.

Related information

•

Jack* (p. 517)

•

Wheel bolts (p. 517)

•

Tool kit (p. 516)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

558

Climate control system service

Service and repairs on the air conditioning

system should only be done by an authorized

workshop.

Troubleshooting and repairs

The air conditioning system contains a fluores-

cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used

to search for leaks in the system.

Volvo recommends contacting an authorized

Volvo workshop.

The climate system in the vehicle uses a freon-

free R1234yf refrigerant. For information

regarding the refrigerant, refer to the decal

located on the inside of the hood.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains the

refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In

accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician

Training for Safe Service and Containment

of Refrigerants Used in Mobile AC Sys-

tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant

system may only be performed by trained

and certified technicians in order to ensure

the safety of the system.

Related information

•

Volvo's service program (p. 548)

Opening and closing the hood

To open the hood, pull the lever in the pas-

senger compartment and then turn the han-

dle under the hood.

Opening the hood

Pull the handle to the left of the brake

pedal to release the hood from its fully

closed position.

Move the handle under the front edge of

the hood upwards to release the catch

and lift the hood.

Warning - hood not closed

When the hood is released, a warn-

ing symbol and graphic will be dis-

played in the instrument panel and

an audible signal will sound. If the

vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be

repeated several times.

NOTE

If the warning symbol is illuminated or an

audible warning signal sounds even though

the hood is securely closed, consult a

workshop - an authorized Volvo workshop

is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

559

Closing the hood

1. Press down the hood until it begins to

close under its own weight.

2. When the hood reaches the catch at the

handle in the front edge of the vehicle,

press down on the hood to close it com-

pletely.

WARNING

Risk of injury! When closing, make sure

that the hood is completely unobstructed

and that no one can be injured.

WARNING

Make sure the hood locks securely after

closing. It must audibly lock on both sides.

Hood not completely closed.

Hood completely closed.

WARNING

Never drive with the hood

open!

If this symbol appears, or

anything else indicates

that the hood is not com-

pletely closed while driv-

ing, stop immediately and

close it properly.

Related information

•

Engine compartment overview (p. 559)

•

Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54)

Engine compartment overview

This overview shows some service-related

components.

The layout of the engine compartment may vary

depending on model and engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Washer fluid filler pipe

Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driv-

er's side)

Fusebox

Air filter

Engine oil filler pipe

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

560

Location of warning decal for the engine compart-

ment. The layout of the engine compartment may

vary depending on model and engine variant.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner's Manual

do not claim to be exact reproductions of

those found in the vehicle. The purpose is

to show approximately how they look and

about where they are located on the vehi-

cle. The information that applies for your

vehicle in particular is found on the decal

on the vehicle.

WARNING

Bear in mind that the cooling fan (located

at the front of the engine compartment

behind the radiator) may start or continue

running automatically up to about

6 minutes after the engine is turned off.

Always entrust engine washing to a work-

shop – an authorized Volvo workshop is

recommended. If the engine is hot, there is

a risk of fire.

WARNING

The ignition system works with extremely

high and dangerous voltages. The vehicle

electrical system should always be in igni-

tion mode 0 when work in being per-

formed in the engine compartment.

Do not touch any spark plugs or ignition

coils when the vehicle electrical system is

in ignition mode II or when the engine is

warm.

Related information

•

Opening and closing the hood (p. 558)

•

Filling washer fluid (p. 606)

•

Refilling coolant (p. 563)

•

Fuses in the engine compartment

(p. 572)

•

Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

Engine oil

For the recommended service intervals and

warranties to be applied, an approved engine

oil must be used.

Location of warning decal for the engine compart-

ment. The layout of the engine compartment may

vary depending on model and engine variant.

Volvo recommends:

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

561

If the engine oil is not checked regularly and

the level becomes low, this could cause seri-

ous engine damage.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner's Manual

do not claim to be exact reproductions of

those found in the vehicle. The purpose is

to show approximately how they look and

about where they are located on the vehi-

cle. The information that applies for your

vehicle in particular is found on the decal

on the vehicle.

CAUTION

To satisfy the requirements for the engine's

service intervals, all engines are factory-

filled with a specially adapted synthetic

engine oil. Great care has been put into the

choice of oil, with consideration given to

service life, startability, fuel consumption

and environmental impact.

For the recommended service intervals to

apply, an approved engine oil must be

used. Only use the prescribed oil grade to

top off or change the oil. Otherwise, there

is a risk of the vehicle's service life, starta-

bility, fuel consumption and environmental

impact being affected.

Failure to use engine oil of the prescribed

grade and viscosity could cause damage to

engine-related components. Volvo dis-

claims warranty liability for such type of

damage.

Volvo recommends entrusting oil changes

to an authorized Volvo workshop.

Symbols for low oil level

Volvo uses different systems to warn if the oil

level is too low/high or the oil pressure is low.

For oil pressure sensors, a warning symbol is

displayed in the instrument panel when oil

pressure is low

. For oil level sensors, the

warning symbol in the instrument panel

and display messages are used to alert the

driver. Some engine variants have both sys-

tems. Contact a Volvo retailer for more infor-

mation.

Change the engine oil and oil filter according

to the schedule specified in the Warranty and

Maintenance Records Information booklet.

Oils of a higher grade than that specified may

be used. If the vehicle is driven in adverse con-

ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil with a

higher grade than that specified.

Related information

•

Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562)

•

Engine oil specifications (p. 618)

•

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

562

Checking and filling engine oil

The engine oil level is monitored by an elec-

tronic oil level sensor.

Viewing oil level in the center display

Example of the oil level graphic in the center display

The oil level can be viewed using the elec-

tronic oil level gauge in the center display once

the vehicle has been started. The oil level

should be checked regularly.

Open the

Car Status app from App view

in the center display.

Tap Status to display the oil level.

NOTE

The system cannot directly detect changes

when the oil is filled or drained. The vehicle

must have been driven approximately

30 km (20 miles) and have been stationary

5 minutes on a level surface and with the

engine off before the correct oil level will

be displayed.

NOTE

If the conditions for measuring oil level are

not properly fulfilled (time after engine

shutdown, vehicle inclination, ambient

temperature, etc.) the message

No value

available will be shown in the center dis-

play. This does not mean that anything is

wrong in the vehicle systems.

CAUTION

If this symbol is shown, the oil

pressure may be too low. Stop

the vehicle as soon as possible

and have it towed to a workshop

– an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

Filling engine oil

Filler pipe

It may be necessary to top up engine oil

between regularly scheduled services. No

action is necessary with regard to engine oil

level until a message appears in the instru-

ment panel.

WARNING

If the message Engine oil level Service

required is displayed, drive to a workshop

– an authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended. The oil level may be too high.

Engines with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

563

WARNING

Do not spill oil on the hot exhaust pipes as

this could cause a fire.

CAUTION

If the messageEngine oil level low Refill

1 liter is displayed, fill only with the speci-

fied volume, e.g. 1 liter (1 quart).

Related information

•

Engine oil (p. 560)

•

Engine oil specifications (p. 618)

•

Ignition modes (p. 372)

•

Vehicle status (p. 552)

•

Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

Coolant

The coolant helps ensure that excess heat is

distributed in the circuit in order to, for exam-

ple, warm up the start battery or provide

heating to the passenger compartment.

To avoid deterioration of the cooling system,

engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool-

ant should be used.

Recommended grade: Volvo-approved pre-

mixed coolant. If concentrated coolant is used,

mix with 50% water of acceptable quality (i.e.

not salt water, etc.). Consult a Volvo retailer if

you have any questions.

To avoid deterioration of the cooling system,

engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool-

ant should be used.

WARNING

Coolant is hazardous if ingested and could

cause damage to organs (kidneys). The

product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor,

water, etc.

Related information

•

Refilling coolant (p. 563)

Refilling coolant

When refilling coolant, follow the instructions

on the package. Never fill the cooling system

with only water. The risk of freezing is

increased with too low or too high amounts

of coolant.

If there is coolant under the vehicle, smoke

from the cooling system, or if more than

2 liters (about 2 quarts) of coolant has been

added to the system, there could be some-

thing wrong with the cooling system and star-

ting the vehicle could damage the engine. Call

a tow truck and do not attempt to start the

engine.

WARNING

The coolant may be very hot. Never

unscrew the cap when the coolant is hot. If

coolant must be filled, unscrew the expan-

sion tank cap slowly to relieve overpres-

sure.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

564

Coolant expansion tank

–

Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill

coolant as needed. The level should not

exceed the MAX mark on the outside of

the expansion tank.

CAUTION

•

Do not ingest the contents. May cause

damage to organs (kidneys).

•

Use premixed coolant according to

Volvo's recommendations. If concen-

trated coolant is used, make sure that

the coolant mixture is 50% coolant

and 50% water of acceptable quality.

•

Do not mix different types of coolant.

•

To help ensure sufficient corrosion pro-

tection in the system, only use new

coolant when replacing larger compo-

nents in the cooling system.

•

Never run the engine unless the cool-

ing system is properly filled. An

improperly filled cooling system could

lead to high temperatures and cracks

in the cylinder heads.

•

High levels of chlorine, chlorides and

other salts may cause corrosion in the

cooling system.

Related information

•

Engine compartment overview (p. 559)

•

Coolant (p. 563)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

565

Starter battery

The starter battery is used to start the electri-

cal system and power the starter motor and

other electrical equipment in the vehicle.

The vehicle has a single-pole electrical system

that uses the chassis and engine mount as

conductors.

The vehicle has a voltage-regulated alternating

current generator.

The starter battery is a 12 V battery, dimen-

sioned for the carbon dioxide-reducing func-

tions Start/Stop and regenerative charging

and to support the function of the vehicle's

various systems.

The service life and performance of the starter

battery are affected by factors such as driving

style, driving conditions, climate, battery dis-

charges, number of starts, etc.

•

Never disconnect the starter battery while

the engine is running.

•

Make sure the cables to the starter battery

are correctly connected and the clamps

are securely tightened.

WARNING

•

Batteries generate hydrogen gas,

which is flammable and explosive.

•

Do not connect the jumper cable to

any part of the fuel system or to any

moving parts. Avoid touching hot

manifolds.

•

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces.

•

If contact occurs, flush the affected

area immediately with water. Obtain

medical help immediately if eyes are

affected.

•

Never expose the battery to open flame

or electric spark. Do not smoke near

the battery. Failure to follow the

instructions for jump starting can lead

to injury.

Starter battery service life and

capacity

The service life of the starter battery is affec-

ted by several factors, such as number of

starts, battery discharges, driving style, driving

conditions, climate, etc. The starting capacity

of the battery reduces gradually over time. The

battery must therefore be recharged if the

vehicle is not used for a long period of time or

if it is only driven short distances. Severe cold

further limits starting capacity. If the starter

battery becomes discharged too many times,

its service life will be shortened.

To help keep the starter battery in good condi-

tion, the vehicle should be driven at least

15 minutes per week or the battery should be

connected to a battery charger with automatic

trickle charging. A starter battery that is

always kept fully charged has the maximum

service life.

Location

The starter battery is located in the engine compart-

ment.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
566
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
function for automatic opening and closing
must be reset to function correctly. A reset
is required in order for the pinch protection
to work.
CAUTION
On certain models, the battery is secured
with a tensioning strap. Make sure that the
tensioning strap is always securely tight-
ened.
Specifications for starter battery
Battery type H6 AGM
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
 - CCA
B
 (A)
760
Dimensions, L×W×H 278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 70
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends that batteries are replaced
by an authorized Volvo workshop.
CAUTION
If replacing the battery, make sure you
replace it with a battery of the same size,
cold start capacity and type as the original
battery (see the decal on the battery).
Related information
•
Battery symbols (p. 569)
•
Support battery (p. 567)
•
Jump starting using another battery
(p. 410)
•
Reset procedure for pinch protection
(p. 160)
•
Battery recycling (p. 569)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

567

Support battery

Vehicles with the Start/Stop function are

equipped with two batteries – a more power-

ful 12 V start battery and a support battery

that provides stronger current during the

function's start sequence.

The 12 V support battery is located in the engine

compartment. The start battery is also shown here

(top).

If the vehicle is instead equipped with a 48 V support

battery, it is located to the left in the cargo compart-

ment. Only an authorized workshop may handle the

48 V support battery.

WARNING

High voltage may be dangerous if handled

incorrectly. Do not touch anything on bat-

teries that is not clearly described in this

Owner's Manual.

•

Never use a 48 V support battery to

jump start the vehicle.

•

External electrical equipment may not

under any circumstance be connected

to the 48 V battery.

•

Only a workshop may replace or per-

form service on the 48 V battery – an

authorized Volvo workshop is recom-

mended.

NOTE

•

The higher the current consumption in

the vehicle, the more the alternator has

to work and the batteries have to be

charged = increased fuel consumption.

•

When the starter battery capacity has

dropped below the lowest permissible

level, the Start/Stop function is disen-

gaged.

When the Start/Stop function is temporarily

reduced due to high current consumption:

•

The engine will auto-start, even if the

driver does not lift their foot from the

brake pedal.

The support battery does not normally require

more service than the start battery. If you have

any questions or concerns, consult a work-

shop

‒

an authorized Volvo workshop is rec-

ommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

568

CAUTION

If the following is not observed, the Start/

Stop function may temporarily stop work-

ing after connection of an external starter

battery or battery charger:

•

The negative battery terminal of the

vehicle's starter battery must never be

used to connect an external starter

battery or battery charger – only the

vehicle's negative charging point

should be used as a grounding point.

NOTE

If the starter battery has been discharged

to the extent that the vehicle does not have

normal electrical functions and the engine

must then be jump-started with an external

battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop

function may remain activated. If the Start/

Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops

the engine, there is a huge risk that auto-

start of the engine will fail due to insuffi-

cient battery capacity since the battery had

not had time to recharge.

If the vehicle has been jump-started or if

there has not been enough time for the

battery to be charged with a battery

charger, the Start/Stop function should be

temporarily deactivated until the battery

has been recharged by the vehicle. At an

ambient temperature of about +15°C

(about 60°F), the battery must be charged

by the vehicle for at least one hour. At

lower ambient temperatures, the charging

time can increase to 34 hours. It is advisa-

ble to charge the battery with an external

battery charger.

Specifications for support battery

Type AGM

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity

CCA

(A)

170

Dimensions, L×W×H

150×90×130 mm

(5.9×3.5×5.1

inches)

Capacity (Ah) 10

According to EN standard.

Cold Cranking Amperes.

CAUTION

If replacing the battery, make sure you

replace it with a battery of the same size,

cold start capacity and type as the original

battery (see the decal on the battery).

Related information

•

Starter battery (p. 565)

•

Start/Stop function (p. 394)

•

Battery symbols (p. 569)

•

Battery recycling (p. 569)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

569

Battery symbols

There are warning symbols and information

on the batteries.

Wear protective goggles.

See the Owner's Manual

for additional information.

Keep batteries away from

children.

Batteries contain corro-

sive acid.

Avoid smoking, open

flames, and/or sparks.

Risk of explosion.

Recycle properly.

Related information

•

Starter battery (p. 565)

•

Support battery (p. 567)

•

Battery recycling (p. 569)

Battery recycling

Start batteries and support batteries must be

recycled in an environmentally sound manner

at the end of their service life.

Consult a workshop if you are uncertain of

how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an

authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

•

Starter battery (p. 565)

•

Support battery (p. 567)

•

Battery symbols (p. 569)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

570

Fuses and fuseboxes

All electrical functions and components are

protected by a number of fuses in order to

protect the vehicle's electrical system from

damage by short circuiting or overloading.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a

higher amperage than that specified to

replace a fuse. This could cause significant

damage to the electrical system and possi-

bly lead to a fire.

If any electrical component or function is not

responding, the component may have blown a

fuse due to temporary overload. If the same

fuse blows repeatedly, there may be a prob-

lem with the component. Volvo recommends

contacting an authorized Volvo workshop to

have the component checked.

Location of fuseboxes

Engine compartment

Under the left front seat

Related information

•

Replacing fuses (p. 570)

•

Fuses in the engine compartment

(p. 572)

•

Fuses under the left front seat (p. 578)

Replacing fuses

All electrical functions and components are

protected by a number of fuses in order to

protect the vehicle's electrical system from

damage by short circuiting or overloading.

1. Refer to the fuse diagram to locate the

fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the

side to determine if the curved metal wire

in the fuse is intact.

3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with

a new fuse of the same color and amper-

age.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a

higher amperage than that specified to

replace a fuse. This could cause significant

damage to the electrical system and possi-

bly lead to a fire.

WARNING

Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for

assistance replacing fuses not listed in the

Owner's Manual. If fuse replacement is

performed incorrectly, significant damage

can be caused to the electrical system.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

571

Related information

•

Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 570)

•

Fuses in the engine compartment

(p. 572)

•

Fuses under the left front seat (p. 578)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

572

Fuses in the engine compartment

The fuses in the engine compartment help

protect electrical components such as engine

and brake functions.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory.

573

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the

fuse box cover to assist in removing and

inserting fuses.

There are also spaces for several extra fuses in

the fusebox.

Positions

There is a decal with a diagram of the loca-

tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

Function Ampere Type

USB port tunnel console, rear*

5 Micro

Double USB port tunnel console, rear*

7.5 Micro

12 V outlet in tunnel console, front 15 Micro

– – Micro

12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment*

15 Micro

Engine control module 20 Micro

Ignition coils; spark plugs 15 Micro

Solenoids (gasoline); valve; Engine cooling system thermostat (gasoline); EGR cooling pump (diesel); glow control

module (diesel)

Engine control module

15 Micro

Solenoids (gasoline); Valve; Engine cooling system thermostat (gasoline); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control

module (diesel); Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for power pulse (diesel)

Valves for cooling

Micro

Heated oxygen sensor, center (gasoline); Heated oxygen sensor, rear (diesel) 15 Micro

Nitrous oxide sensor (diesel); Engine control module 15 Micro

Coolant pump 20 Micro

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

574

Function Ampere Type

Right-side headlight 20 Micro

Left-side headlight 20 Micro

Airbags 5 Micro

Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro

Fed when ignition is on: engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical

module, brake system control module

5 Micro

Auxiliary electric heater*

OBDII firewall

5 Micro

– – Micro

Internal relay windings 5 Micro

– – Micro

Brake pedal sensor 5 Micro

Calculation module 5 Micro

Control module for actuator for engaging/changing gears, automatic transmission 5 Micro

Hydraulic clutch actuator 25 Micro

Transmission control module 15 Micro

Hydraulic clutch actuator 25 Micro

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory.

575

Function Ampere Type

Engine control module 5 Micro

– – Micro

Horn 20 Micro

Alarm siren*

5 Micro

Wipers 30

MCase

Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 40

MCase

Brake system control module (ABS pump) 40

MCase

– –

MCase

Transmission actuator 25

MCase

Transmission actuator 30

MCase

– – –

Right-hand headlight; Left-hand headlight 30

MCase

Brake control with 48 V battery 30

MCase

– –

MCase

Towbar* control module

MCase

Towbar* control module

MCase

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

576

Function Ampere Type

– –

MCase

Power driver seat*

MCase

– –

MCase

– – Micro

Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30

MCase

– –

MCase

– –

MCase

Support battery check function 5 Micro

Left-side headlight 20 Micro

Right-side headlight 20 Micro

Gasoline engines generation 3 (VEP4_G3).

This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

577

Related information

•

Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 570)

•

Replacing fuses (p. 570)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

578

Fuses under the left front seat

Fuses under the left front seat provide pro-

tection for e.g. electrical outlets, displays and

door modules.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory.

579

There are spaces for several extra fuses in the

distribution box in the engine compartment.

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the

fuse box cover to assist in removing and

inserting fuses.

Positions

There is a decal with a diagram of the loca-

tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

Function Ampere Type

Infotainment control module (amplifier)

MCase

Central Electric Module A: Sensors, radar sensors, power seats*

MCase

Central Electric Module B: Sensors, radar sensors, power seats*

MCase

Climate system blower module (front) 40

MCase

Power tailgate*

MCase

Power seat*, right

MCase

Parking heater*

MCase

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30

MCase

Door module in right-side rear door 20 Micro

Door module in left-side rear door 20 Micro

Door module in left-side front door 20 Micro

– – Micro

Door module in right-side front door 20 Micro

Seat heating, rear*

15 Micro

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

580

Function Ampere Type

48 V battery module 5 Micro

Calculation module 5 Micro

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Micro

– – Micro

Climate system control module 7.5 Micro

Interior movement sensors*

5 Micro

Instrument panel 5 Micro

Center console buttons 5 Micro

Steering wheel module 5 Micro

Module for start knob; Electronic gear module; Electronic parking brake 5 Micro

Center display 5 Micro

Control module for Internet-connected vehicle; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 Micro

Multi-band antenna module 5 Micro

Relay coils 5 Micro

Foot movement detection module for opening the power tailgate*

5 Micro

Sensus control module

TV*

15 Micro

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory.

581

Function Ampere Type

Data link connector OBDII 10 Micro

– – Micro

Lock motor for rear seat head restraint, left side 15 Micro

Lock motor for rear seat head restraint, right side 15 Micro

Heated rear window 30

MCase

Seat belt tensioner module (left side) 40

MCase

Seat belt tensioner module (right side) 40

MCase

Humidity sensor

48 V generator and voltage converter

5 Micro

Fuel pump control module 20 Micro

Coolant pump 7.5 Micro

Heated steering wheel* module

15 Micro

Air humidity sensors 5 Micro

Headlight washers*

MCase

Windshield and tailgate window washers 25

MCase

– –

MCase

– –

MCase

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

582

Function Ampere Type

– – Micro

Module for seat belt tensioners 5 Micro

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*; Exterior reverse signal control module

5 Micro

– – Micro

All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module*

15 Micro

Exhaust system 5 Micro

Park Assist Camera*

5 Micro

– – Micro

Control module for airbags and seat belt tensioners 5 Micro

Rear window wiper 15 Micro

Roof console for panoramic roof*

20 Micro

Sun sensor 5 Micro

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

583

Function Ampere Type

Interior lighting; rearview mirror autodimming*; rain and light sensor*; control panels in rear doors and load compart-

ment

7.5 Micro

– – Micro

Control module for driver support functions 5 Micro

– – Micro

Wireless phone charger*; USB port

5 Micro

– – Micro

Certain variants only.

This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Certain markets only.

Related information

•

Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 570)

•

Replacing fuses (p. 570)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
584
Replacing bulbs
Bulb types vary depending on model and
equipment level. If a light bulb
14
 breaks, it can
be replaced by following the procedure
shown in the Owner's Manual.
If there is a problem with an LED
15
 light, the
entire lamp unit will normally need to be
replaced.
NOTE
For information on lights not mentioned in
the Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo
retailer or an authorized Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The vehicle electrical system must be in
ignition mode 0 when bulbs are replaced.
CAUTION
Never touch the bulb glass with your bare
fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a
deposit on the reflector, which may dam-
age it.
NOTE
If the error message persists after the
defective bulb has been replaced, we rec-
ommend a visit to an authorized Volvo
workshop.
NOTE
Exterior lighting such as headlights and
taillights may develop temporary conden-
sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-
mal. All exterior lighting is designed to
resist this. Condensation is normally ven-
ted out of the lamp housing once the light
has been lit for some period of time.
NOTE
Bulbs for Active Bending Lights* contain
traces of mercury and should therefore
always be deposited at an authorized Volvo
workshop.
Related information
•
Location of exterior lights (p. 585)
•
Replacing rear turn signal bulbs (p. 585)
•
Replacing the brake light bulb (p. 587)
•
Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 588)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 588)
14
Some vehicles do not have any light bulbs.
15
LED (Light Emitting Diode)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory.

585

Location of exterior lights

The vehicle's exterior lighting consists of sev-

eral different bulbs. LED

bulbs must be

replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo

workshop is recommended.

Front lights

Daytime running lights/position lamps/

direction indicators (LED)

High beam (LED)

Low beam (LED)

Front fog light/cornering illumination*

(LED)

Rear bulbs

Brake light ‒ central, high-mounted (LED)

Fog light

Parking light (LED)

Turn signals

Brake lights

Backup light (LED)

Related information

•

Replacing bulbs (p. 584)

•

Bulb specifications (p. 588)

•

Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

Replacing rear turn signal bulbs

The rear turn signal bulbs are located behind

the panel in the side of the cargo compart-

ment.

1. Press in the top edge of the panel cover to

remove it.

2. Move aside the insulation to access the

support bridge.

LED (Light Emmitting Diode)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

586

3. Unscrew the spring screw by turning

counterclockwise, press the clips into the

sides and remove the support bridge. It is

simplest to leave one screw in place in the

support bridge.

4. Remove the gray bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it out.

5. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and

turning it counterclockwise.

6. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and

turning it clockwise.

7. Put the panel back in place and turn it

clockwise.

8. Install the support bridge using the sup-

plied spring screw and make sure that the

clip is positioned correctly. Tighten the

spring screw until it stops, max. 2 Nm (1.5

ft lbs).

9. Reposition the insulation, hook the panel

and then press it back into place.

CAUTION

Never touch the bulb glass with your bare

fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a

deposit on the reflector, which may dam-

age it.

Related information

•

Location of exterior lights (p. 585)

•

Bulb specifications (p. 588)

•

Replacing bulbs (p. 584)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

587

Replacing the brake light bulb

The brake light bulbs are located behind the

panel in the side of the cargo compartment.

1. Press in the top edge of the panel cover to

remove it.

2. Move aside the insulation to access the

brake light bulb.

3. Remove the black bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it out.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and

turning it counterclockwise.

5. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and

turning it clockwise.

6. Put the panel back in place and turn it

clockwise.

7. Reposition the insulation, hook the panel

and then press it back into place.

CAUTION

Never touch the bulb glass with your bare

fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a

deposit on the reflector, which may dam-

age it.

Related information

•

Location of exterior lights (p. 585)

•

Bulb specifications (p. 588)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

588

Replacing the rear fog light bulb

The rear fog light is located in the rear

bumper on the driver's side.

The rear fog light is only located on the driver's side.

1. Remove the fog light unit on the driver's

side by inserting a flat object (e.g. a

kitchen knife or screwdriver) behind the

light kit's narrower short side and prying

out the fog light unit.

2. Unplug the connector.

3. Remove the bulb holder by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it out.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and

turning it counterclockwise.

5. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and

turning it clockwise.

6. Put the panel back in place and turn it

clockwise.

7. Plug in the connector.

8. Insert the hook on the wide part of the fog

light unit in the rear bumper and rotate the

unit until the clips fasten into place.

Related information

•

Location of exterior lights (p. 585)

•

Bulb specifications (p. 588)

Bulb specifications

Specifications for replaceable light bulbs.

If you are experiencing problems with any

lights other than light bulbs, contact a work-

shop

. If there is a problem with an LED

light, the entire lamp unit will normally need

to be replaced.

Function

Type

Rear turn signals 24 PY24W

Brake lights 21 H21W LL

Rear fog light 21 H21W LL

Watt

Related information

•

Location of exterior lights (p. 585)

•

Replacing bulbs (p. 584)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
589
Cleaning the interior
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately. It is important to
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
CAUTION
•
Some colored clothing (for example,
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these
parts of the upholstery as soon as pos-
sible.
•
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, gasoline, mineral spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the inte-
rior as this can damage the upholstery
as well as other interior materials.
•
Never spray cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical
buttons and controls. Wipe instead
with a damp cloth with cleaning agent.
•
Sharp objects and Velcro can damage
the car's textile upholstery.
•
Only use cleaning agent on the type of
material it is intended for.
Related information
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)
Cleaning the center display
Marks, stains, finger smudges etc. on the
center display may affect its performance and
readability. Clean the screen regularly with a
microfiber cloth.
1. Turn off the center display by pressing and
holding the Home button.
2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber
cloth provided or use another microfiber
cloth of similar quality. Wipe the screen
with a clean, dry microfiber cloth using
small, circular motions. If necessary, mois-
ten the cloth slightly.
3. Reactivate the display by pressing the
Home button briefly.
17
An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
18
LED (Light Emitting Diode)

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
590
CAUTION
The microfiber cloth must be free of sand
and dirt when cleaning the center display.
CAUTION
When cleaning the center display, apply
only light pressure to the screen. Pressing
too hard could damage the screen.
CAUTION
Do not spray liquid or corrosive chemicals
directly onto the center display. Do not use
window cleaners, cleaning agents, aerosol
sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
detergents that contain abrasives.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or
tissue paper, as these may scratch the cen-
ter display.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
ceiling liner
Use of textile cleaner is recommended when
cleaning textile materials. Clean as needed
and treat stains immediately.
CAUTION
Never scrape or rub a stain because this
may damage the upholstery.
CAUTION
Never use stain removers or strong sol-
vents because these may damage the
upholstery.
Cleaning textile upholstery
1. Start by vacuuming the upholstery.
2. Follow the instructions of the textile
cleaner.
3. When cleaning upholstery, a spray extrac-
tion cleaner is recommended for sucking
up cleaning fluids and rinse water.
CAUTION
Certain dyed clothing (such as denim and
suede garments) may stain the upholstery.
Difficult stains, like oil, can be difficult to
remove.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
591
CAUTION
Always clean all of the upholstery, even if it
only has isolated stains. This helps to pre-
vent permanent water rings.
NOTE
Do not remove the upholstery when clean-
ing.
Cleaning the ceiling liner
1. Carefully brush the ceiling liner using a
soft brush.
2. Follow the instructions of the textile
cleaner.
3. Then use a soft, lint-free cloth to wipe the
ceiling liner.
CAUTION
Failure to take care during cleaning could
lead to damage to the ceiling liner.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)
Cleaning the seat belt
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately. It is important to
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
Use water and a synthetic soap solution. Spe-
cially designed textile cleaning agents are
available for purchase at Volvo retailers. Make
sure the belt is dry before it is retracted.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
592
Cleaning textile floor and inlay
mats
Use of textile cleaner is recommended when
cleaning textile mats. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately. It is important to
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
Remove the inlay mats to clean the floor mats
and inlay mats separately. Each inlay mat is
secured into place with pins.
1. Remove the inlay mat by grasping the
inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat
straight up.
2. Use a vacuum to remove dust and dirt.
NOTE
Do not swing or strike the inlay mats vio-
lently against another object to remove dirt
as this could damage the mats.
3. After vacuuming, a specially designed tex-
tile cleaning agent should be used to
remove stains on floor mats.
4. After cleaning, put the inlay mat back into
place by pressing it in at each pin.
WARNING
•
Never use more than one inlay mat at a
time on the driver's floor. If any other
type of floor mat is used, remove the
original mat from the driver's seat floor
before driving. All types of mats must
be securely anchored in the attach-
ment points in the floor. Make sure the
floor mat does not impede the move-
ment of the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal in any way, as this could be a
serious safety hazard.
•
Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
factured for your vehicle. They must be
properly secured in the attachment
points in the floor to help ensure they
cannot slide and become trapped
under the pedals.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)
Cleaning leather upholstery*
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately. It is important to
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to pro-
tect its original appearance. Over time, sun-
light, grease, dirt, etc. could break down the
protective layer. This could result in scratches
and cracking.
Leather upholstery* is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatments are
required to preserve the qualities and color of
the leather. Volvo offers a comprehensive
product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for
cleaning and treating leather upholstery.
When used as directed, it helps preserve the
leather's protective coating.
For optimal results, Volvo recommends clean-
ing and applying protective cream one to four
times a year (or more often as needed). Volvo
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Volvo Leather
Softener 943 7429 are available for purchase
at Volvo retailers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp
sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner
foams.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
593
2. Move the sponge in circular motions to
apply the foam to the stain.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain
and do not rub.
4. Dry the stain using a soft towel and let the
leather dry completely.
Protecting the leather upholstery
1. Apply a small amount of leather protector
to a cloth and then apply the protector to
the leather using light circular movements.
2. Let it dry for approximately 20 minutes.
> Protecting the leather upholstery
makes it better able to withstand sun-
light's harmful UV rays.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)
Cleaning the leather steering
wheel
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately. It is important to
vacuum before using a cleaning agent.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with a plastic protector.
Volvo Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather
Softener 943 7429 are recommended for
cleaning the leather steering wheel. First,
remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or
cloth.
CAUTION
Sharp objects such as rings could damage
the leather on the steering wheel.
Treating stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the
steering wheel using a solution of 5%
ammonia. For blood stains, mix approxi-
mately 2 dl (1 cup) of water with 25 g
(one ounce) of salt and wipe the stain.
Type 2 (grease, oil, sauces or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
2. Finish by wiping the wheel with an
absorbent paper or towel.
Type 3 (dry dirt or dust)
1. Remove the dirt/dust using a soft brush.
2. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
surfaces (p. 594)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
594
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood surfaces
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains immediately.
A lightly dampened microfiber cloth is recom-
mended for cleaning interior details and surfa-
ces. These cloths are available for purchase at
Volvo retailers.
Never scrape or rub a stain. Never use strong
stain removers.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent containing alcohol to
clean the instrument panel glass.
CAUTION
Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be
easily scratched. Wipe these surfaces with
a clean and dry microfiber cloth using
small, circular motions. If necessary, mois-
ten the cloth lightly with clean water.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 589)
•
Cleaning the center display (p. 589)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner
(p. 590)
•
Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)
•
Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats
(p. 592)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 593)
Cleaning the exterior
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier
to clean because dirt does not attach as
strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the
rims at a car wash or garage with an oil sepa-
rator. Use a car washing detergent recom-
mended by Volvo.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
595
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the vehicle when the paint is
dull or to provide extra protection. The vehicle
does not need to be polished until it is at
least a year old. However, it can be waxed
during the first year. Do not polish or wax the
vehicle in direct sunlight. The surface of the
vehicle should not be warmer than 45 °C
(113 °F).
•
Wash and dry the vehicle very carefully
before polishing or waxing. Remove
asphalt and tar stains with asphalt
remover or paint thinner. More stubborn
stains can be removed with a grinding
paste designed for vehicle paint. Use
cleaning agents recommended by Volvo.
•
Use polish first and then liquid or paste
wax. Follow the instructions on the pack-
age carefully. Many products contain both
polish and wax.
•
A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
to use and produce a long-lasting, high-
gloss finish that protects the bodywork
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
CAUTION
Never polish or wax initially matte exterior
details on the vehicle. This could destroy
the matte effect and make the surface per-
manently shiny.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and
rubber.
If using degreaser on plastic and rubber,
only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure.
Use a soft sponge.
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polish containing abrasives must not be
used.
CAUTION
Use cleaning agents recommended by
Volvo. Other treatments, such as preserva-
tion, sealing, protection, luster sealing or
similar, could damage the paintwork.
Paintwork damage caused by such treat-
ments are not covered by Volvo's warranty.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.

596

Hand washing

The vehicle should be washed as soon as it

becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier

to clean because dirt does not attach as

strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches

and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the

vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil

separator and use car washing detergent.

Use cleaning agents and car care products

recommended by Volvo.

Important to keep in mind when

handwashing your vehicle

•

Avoid washing the vehicle in direct sun-

light. This could cause the detergent or

wax to dry out and become abrasive.

•

Remove bird droppings from paintwork as

soon as possible. It contains chemicals

that affect and discolor paintwork very

quickly. Use e.g. soft paper or a sponge

soaked in lots of water. Consult an author-

ized Volvo workshop for assistance

removing discoloration.

•

Hose down the underbody, including the

wheel housings and bumper.

•

Hose down the entire vehicle and remove

any loose dirt, droppings etc. to reduce

the risk of scratches from washing. Do not

spray directly onto locks.

•

If necessary, use cold degreaser on heavily

soiled surfaces. Note that in such cases

the surfaces must not be hot from the sun.

•

Wash using a sponge, car washing deter-

gent and plenty of lukewarm water. Make

sure that the sponge is clean. A dirty

sponge can scratch the paint.

•

Clean the wiper blades with lukewarm

soap solution or car washing detergent.

•

Dry the vehicle using a clean, soft chamois

or a squeegee. Try not to let drops of

water dry in strong sunlight. This could

cause water drying stains that may need

to be polished out.

•

In areas with heavy industrial emissions,

more frequent washing of the vehicle's

exterior is recommended.

•

Tar spots from asphalt may remain even

after washing. Use a Volvo-recommended

tar remover to remove these spots after

washing the vehicle.

WARNING

Always entrust engine washing to a work-

shop. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of

fire.

CAUTION

Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean

them regularly, e.g. when refueling.

Do not use corrosive cleaners. Use water

and a non-abrasive sponge.

NOTE

Exterior lighting such as headlights and

taillights may develop temporary conden-

sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor-

mal. All exterior lighting is designed to

resist this. Condensation is normally ven-

ted out of the lamp housing once the light

has been lit for some period of time.

CAUTION

•

Make sure that the panoramic roof*

and sun shade are closed before wash-

ing the vehicle.

•

Never use abrasive polishing agents on

the panoramic roof.

•

Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the panoramic roof.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
597
CAUTION
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and sills after washing
the vehicle.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)
•
Settings for automatically activating the
parking brake (p. 379)
Automatic car washes
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
Washing your vehicle in an automatic car
wash is a fast and easy way to keep your vehi-
cle clean, but it does not reach all areas of the
vehicle. Volvo recommends washing your
vehicle by hand or supplementing automatic
car washes with a hand wash.
NOTE
Volvo recommends not washing the vehi-
cle in an automatic car wash during the
first few months; the paintwork on new
vehicles takes some time to fully harden.
CAUTION
Before driving the vehicle into a car wash,
deactivate the Automatic Braking when
Stationary and Automatic Parking Brake
Application functions. If the functions are
not deactivated, the brake system will
seize when the vehicle is stationary and the
vehicle will not be able to roll.
CAUTION
For automatic car washes in which the
vehicle is pulled forward on rolling wheels:
1. Before washing the vehicle, make sure
that the automatic rain sensor is deac-
tivated. If it is not deactivated and
inadvertently starts, the wiper arms
could be damaged.
2. To help prevent damage from the auto-
matic car wash machinery, make sure
that the door mirrors are folded in,
antennas retracted or removed, and
any auxiliary lights secured.
3. Drive into the automatic car wash.
4. Turn off the "Automatic Braking when
Stationary" function using the 
 but-
ton in the tunnel console.
5. Turn off the "Automatic Parking Brake
Application" function in the center dis-
play's Top view.
6. Turn off the engine by pressing the
start button next to the steering wheel.
Press and hold the button for at least
2 seconds.
The vehicle is now ready for the automatic
car wash.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
598
CAUTION
The system will automatically change to P
mode if the above steps are not followed.
In P mode, the wheels are locked, which
they should not be when the vehicle is
being washed in a car wash.
NOTE
Keep in mind that if the vehicle is equipped
with the keyless locking and unlocking
function*, the doors and tailgate/trunk lid
may open when washing the vehicle if the
remote key is within range.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
vehicle, including the parking brake, to
ensure moisture and corrosion do not
attach the brake pads and impair brake
functionality.
Lightly depress the brake pedal from time to
time when driving long distances in rain or
slush. The heat from the friction will help
warm up and dry the brake pads. Do the same
after starting the vehicle in very damp or cold
weather.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)
•
Auto-hold brakes (p. 381)
•
Settings for automatically activating the
parking brake (p. 379)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 238)
High-pressure washing
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage
with an oil separator. Use a car washing
detergent recommended by Volvo.
If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
wash, use sweeping movements and keep the
nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle.
Do not spray directly onto locks.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
599
Cleaning the wiper blades
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage
with an oil separator. Use a car washing
detergent recommended by Volvo.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windshield,
shorten the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, put the wiper blades in the
service position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windshield
regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or
vehicle shampoo. Do not use strong sol-
vents.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
clean. It could also lead to paint damage. Use
a car washing detergent recommended by
Volvo.
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
retailers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of colored plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim. Follow the
usage instructions for the cleaning agent care-
fully.
Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH
value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Doing
so could result in the discoloring of anodized
aluminum surfaces* (as shown in the illustra-
tions below). Abrasive polishing agents are not
recommended for these areas (as shown in
the illustrations below).

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
600
Components that should be washed with a cleaning
product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and
rubber.
If using degreaser on plastic and rubber,
only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure.
Use a soft sponge.
Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polish containing abrasives must not be
used.
CAUTION
Avoid washing the vehicle with cleaner
with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5.
This could cause discoloration of anodized
aluminum components like the roof rail and
around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on ano-
dized aluminum components. This could
cause discoloration and destroy the sur-
face treatment.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)
Cleaning rims
The vehicle should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains,
the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle
clean. It could also lead to paint damage.
Wash the rims at a car wash or garage with
an oil separator. Use a car washing detergent
recommended by Volvo.
Use a rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents could damage the
surface and stain the chromed aluminum rims.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
•
Corrosion protection (p. 601)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
601
Corrosion protection
Your vehicle is constructed with protection
against corrosion.
Corrosion protection for the body consists of
modern metallic protective coatings on the
sheet metal, a high-quality painting process,
corrosion-protected and minimized metal
overlap, and shielding plastic components,
abrasion protection and supplemental rust
inhibitor in exposed areas. In the chassis,
exposed components of the wheel suspension
are made of corrosion-resistant cast alumi-
num.
Inspection and maintenance
The corrosion protection does not normally
require maintenance, but keeping the vehicle
clean helps reduce the risk of corrosion. The
use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids
should be avoided on shiny body components.
Any stone chips in the paint should be
touched up as soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 594)
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 595)
•
Hand washing (p. 596)
•
Automatic car washes (p. 597)
•
High-pressure washing (p. 598)
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 599)
•
Cleaning rims (p. 600)
Paintwork
The paintwork consists of multiple layers. It is
an important part of the vehicle's corrosion
protection and therefore needs to be checked
regularly.
The most common types of paint damage are
minor stone chips, scratches and damage to
e.g. the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers.
To help prevent corrosion, paint damage
should be rectified immediately.
Related information
•
Touching up minor paint damage (p. 602)
•
Color codes (p. 603)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

602

Touching up minor paint damage

The paintwork is an important part of the

vehicle's corrosion protection and therefore

needs to be checked regularly. The most

common types of paint damage are minor

stone chips, scratches and damage to e.g.

the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers.

To help prevent corrosion, paint damage

should be rectified immediately.

NOTE

Make sure the surface is clean and dry

before performing any touch-ups to the

paint. The surface temperature should be

at least 15 °C (59 °F).

Materials that might be needed

•

Primer ‒ special adhesive primer is availa-

ble in a spray can for e.g. plastic-covered

bumpers.

•

Base coat and clear coat ‒ available in

spray cans or as a touch-up pen/stick

•

Masking tape.

•

Fine-grain sandpaper.

Applying touch-up paint to a damaged

surface

If the damage has not reached all the way

down to the metal, then touch-up paint can be

applied immediately after the surface has been

cleaned.

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that

any loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

If the damage goes down to the bare

metal, you may need to use primer first. If

the paint damage is on a plastic surface,

an adhesive primer should be used for bet-

ter results. Spray the primer into the lid of

the spray can and brush on thinly.

2. Light sanding with a very fine-grained

sandpaper or similar may be required

before painting (e.g. if there are uneven

edges). Clean the area carefully to remove

dirt, grease, salts, etc. and let it dry.

3. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it

with a small brush, toothpick or similar.

When the primer is dry, apply one or more

coats of paint and then a clear coat, letting

the paint dry between each application.

If there is a longer scratch, follow the same

procedure as above, but first mask off the sur-

rounding area to protect the undamaged paint.

Touch-up pens/sticks and spray paint are

available at Volvo retailers.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not gone down to the

bare metal and an undamaged coat of

paint remains, apply base coat and clear

coat immediately after cleaning the sur-

face.

Related information

•

Paintwork (p. 601)

•

Color codes (p. 603)

Follow the instructions on the packaging for the touch-up pen/stick carefully.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

603

Color codes

Color code

The color code decal is placed on the vehicle's

left-side door pillar (B-pillar) between the front

and rear doors and is visible when the left

front door is open.

Sample color code (1): US models.

Exterior color code

Secondary exterior color code (if applica-

ble)

Sample color code (1): Canadian models.

Exterior color code

Secondary exterior color code (if applica-

ble)

Related information

•

Paintwork (p. 601)

•

Touching up minor paint damage (p. 602)

Changing rear window wipers

The wiper blades help remove water from the

windshield and rear window. Along with the

washer fluid, they are designed to clean the

glass and help improve visibility while driving.

The windshield and rear window wiper

blades can be replaced.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
604
Changing rear window wipers
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the
lower section of the blade to the right.
Grasp the center of the wiper blade and
lift it from the window to the stop posi-
tion.
NOTE
When the wiper arm is halfway folded out,
it will stop in a locking position that helps
prevent the arm from falling back onto the
rear window. The wiper arm must be
pulled past the locking position stop in
order to change the wiper blade.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to
the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
3. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place. Check to make sure the blade
is securely in place.
4. Fold the wiper arm back toward the win-
dow.
CAUTION
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the life of the
blades.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
Replacing windshield wiper blades
The wiper blades help remove water from the
windshield and rear window. Along with the
washer fluid, they are designed to clean the
glass and help improve visibility while driving.
The windshield and rear window wiper
blades can be replaced.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
605
Raise the wiper arms to the service posi-
tion. Service position is activated/deacti-
vated via the function view in the center
display when the car is stationary and the
windshield wipers are not on. Press the
button on the wiper blade attachment and
pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel
with the wiper arm.
Slide in a new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
3. Check to make sure the blade is securely
in place.
4. Press the wiper blade back against the
windshield.
Wiper blades come in varying lengths
NOTE
When changing wiper blades, make sure
that the blades are of different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the
one on the passenger side.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
Putting the wiper blades in service
position
The windshield wiper blades must be in the
service (vertical) position for certain opera-
tions, e.g. replacing the blades.
Windshield wipers in the service position.
The windshield wipers must be in the service
position when replacing, washing or lifting the
blades (e.g. to scrape ice or snow from the
windshield).
CAUTION
Before placing the wipers in service posi-
tion, ensure that they have not frozen to
the windshield.

||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
606
Activating/deactivating service
position
The service position can be activated/deacti-
vated when the vehicle is stationary and the
windshield wipers are switched off. Service
position is activated/deactivated via Function
view in the center display:
Tap the 
Wiper Service
Position button. The indica-
tor light in the button will illu-
minate when service position
is activated. The wipers will
move to the service position
when activated. To deactivate
the service position, tap Wiper Service
Position once. The indicator light in the but-
ton will go out when service position is deacti-
vated.
The wiper blades will also move out of the
service position if:
•
The windshield wipers are turned on.
•
The windshield washers are turned on.
•
The rain sensor is activated.
•
The vehicle begins moving.
CAUTION
If the wiper arms in service position are
raised from the windshield, they must be
folded back against the windscreen before
activating wiping, washing or rain sensor
as well as before departure. This is to pre-
vent scratching the paint on the hood.
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 606)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used to keep the headlights,
windshield and rear window clean. Washer
fluid containing anti-freeze should be used in
very cold weather (below-freezing tempera-
tures).
Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the
blue cover. The reservoir is used for the wind-
shield washer, tailgate window washer and
headlight washer*.
NOTE
When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of
washer fluid remaining, the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill and the
 symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
607
Recommended grade: Washer fluid recom-
mended by Volvo, with frost protection during
cold weather and temperatures below the
freezing point.
CAUTION
Use Volvo's original washer fluid or an
equivalent fluid with the recommended pH
value between 6 and 8, diluted as recom-
mended, e.g. in a 1:1 solution with pH-neu-
tral water.
CAUTION
Use washer fluid with anti-freeze when
temperatures are below the freezing point
to help keep the pump, reservoir and hoses
from freezing.
Volume:
•
Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.5 liters
(5.8 qts).
•
Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5
liters (3.7 qts).
Related information
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 171)
•
Using the windshield and headlight wash-
ers (p. 173)
•
Using automatic rear window wiping
when backing up (p. 175)
•
Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper/washer
(p. 174)
•
Putting the wiper blades in service posi-
tion (p. 605)
•
Replacing windshield wiper blades
(p. 604)
•
Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)
•
Using the windshield wipers (p. 170)
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)
•
Opening and closing the hood (p. 558)

SPECIFICATIONS

610

Type designations

The decals in the vehicle contain information

such as chassis number, type designation,

color code, etc.

Location of decals

The illustration is general and details may vary depending on market and model.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

611

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

US models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all

applicable emission standards, as evidenced

by the certification label on the underside of

the hood. For further information regarding

these regulations, please consult your Volvo

retailer.

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to

meet all applicable emission standards, as evi-

denced by the certification label on the under-

side of the hood. For further information regar-

ding these regulations, please consult your

Volvo retailer.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The

VIN plate is located on the top left surface of

the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all

correspondence concerning your vehicle with

the retailer and when ordering parts.

Tire inflation pressures. This label indi-

cates the correct inflation pressures for the

tires that were on the vehicle when it left the

factory.

SPECIFICATIONS

612

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry

of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada).

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable

safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi-

cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (the

structural member at the side of the vehicle, at

the rear of the driver's door opening). This

label also includes codes for paint color, etc.

For further information regarding these regula-

tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S.

models have the upper decal; Canadian mod-

els have the lower one.

Engine oil. This label contains the recom-

mended engine oil specifications.

Decal AC. Refrigerant R1234yf.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner's Manual

do not claim to be exact reproductions of

those found in the vehicle. The purpose is

to show approximately how they look and

about where they are located on the vehi-

cle. The information that applies for your

vehicle in particular is found on the decal

on the vehicle.

Related information

•

Air conditioning specifications (p. 619)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

613

Dimensions

The vehicle's length, height, etc. are shown in

the table.

Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clear-

ance

205 8.1

B Wheelbase 2702 106.4

C Length 4425 174.2

D Load length,

floor, folded

backrest

1670 65.7

Dimensions mm inches

E Load length,

floor

887 34.9

Height

1658 65.3

G Load height 733 28.9

H Wheel track,

front

1601 63.0

I Wheel track,

rear

1626 64.0

Dimensions mm inches

J Load width,

floor

1059 41.7

K Width 1873

(1863

)

73.7

(73.3

)

SPECIFICATIONS

614

Dimensions mm inches

L Width incl.

rearview mir-

rors

2034 80.1

M Width incl.

folded rear-

view mirrors

1910 75.2

For curb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on

tire dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).

Including roof antenna, at curb weight.

Chassis width.

Related information

•

Weights (p. 615)

SPECIFICATIONS

615

Weights

The following table lists important weight

data for your vehicle.

Category Engine USA

(lbs)

Canada

(kg)

Gross vehicle weight

T4 4760 2160

T4 AWD 4895 2220

T5 AWD 4895 2220

Capacity weight – 925 420

Permissible axle weights, front

T4 2490 1130

T4 AWD 2535 1150

T5 AWD 2535 1150

Permissible axle weights, rear

T4 2360 1070

T4 AWD 2445 1110

T5 AWD 2445 1110

Curb weight – 36003860 16301750

Max. roof load – 165 75

CAUTION

•

When loading the vehicle, the maxi-

mum gross vehicle weight and permis-

sible axle weights may not be excee-

ded.

Related information

•

Type designations (p. 610)

•

Towing capacity and tongue weight

(p. 616)

SPECIFICATIONS

* Option/accessory.

616

Towing capacity and tongue

weight

Towing capacity and tongue weight are

shown in the table.

Category USA

(lbs)

Canada

(kg)

Max. trailer weights

Without brakes: 1650 750

With brakes: 3500 1600

Max. tongue weight – 350 160

CAUTION

•

The maximum trailer weights listed are

only applicable for altitudes up to

3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level.

With increasing altitude the engine

power and therefore the car's climbing

ability are impaired because of the

reduced air density, so the maximum

trailer weight has to be reduced

accordingly. The weight of the car and

trailer must be reduced by 10% for

every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or

part thereof).

Related information

•

Type designations (p. 610)

•

Weights (p. 615)

•

Driving with a trailer (p. 414)

•

Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416)

SPECIFICATIONS

617

Engine specifications

Engine specifications (output, etc.) for each

engine variant are shown in the table below.

The specifications for Special Edition vehicles

may vary.

NOTE

Not all engines are available on all markets.

Engine

Engine code

Output

(kW/rps)

Output

(hp/rpm)

Torque

(Nm/rps)

Torque

(ft. lbs./rpm)

Number of cylinders

T4 / T4 AWD B4204T47 14078 1874700 3002367 22114004000 4

T5 AWD B4204T18 18592 2485500 3503080 25818004800 4

The engine code, component and manufacturer serial numbers can be found on the engine.

Related information

•

Type designations (p. 610)

•

Engine oil specifications (p. 618)

SPECIFICATIONS

618

Engine oil specifications

Engine oil of type VCC RBS02AE 0W20

must be used. Lower oil grades may not offer

the same fuel economy, engine performance

or engine protection.

Volvo recommends:

General

See the Service and warranty booklet for infor-

mation about oil change intervals.

NOTE

This vehicle is delivered from the factory

with synthetic oil.

Do not use oil additives.

Oil viscosity

The wrong oil viscosity can shorten engine

service life during normal use.

VCC RBS02AE 0W20 provides good fuel

economy and engine protection. See the vis-

cosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Oil volume

Engine oil volumes (including oil filter) are

shown in the table.

Liter (approx) 5.6

US qts (approx) 5.9

Related information

•

Type designations (p. 610)

•

Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562)

•

Engine oil (p. 560)

Transmission fluid specifications

Under normal driving conditions, the trans-

mission fluid will not need to be changed dur-

ing the transmission's service life. However,

it may need to be changed if the vehicle is

driven frequently in adverse driving condi-

tions.

Automatic transmission

Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1

Related information

•

Type designations (p. 610)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

619

Brake fluid specifications

The medium in the hydraulic brake system is

called brake fluid and is used to transfer pres-

sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master

brake cylinder, which in turn actuates the

brake calipers.

Recommended grade: Volvo Original or simi-

lar fluid that meets a combination of Dot 4, 5.1

and ISO 4925 class 6.

NOTE

Changing or filling brake fluid should be

entrusted to an authorized Volvo work-

shop.

Related information

•

Engine compartment overview (p. 559)

Fuel tank volume

The fuel tank's refillable volume is shown in

the table below.

All models

Liter (approx) 54

US gallons (approx) 14.2

Related information

•

Refueling (p. 405)

•

Octane rating (p. 407)

Air conditioning specifications

The climate system in the vehicle uses a

freon-free R1234yf refrigerant. For informa-

tion regarding the refrigerant, refer to the

decal located on the inside of the hood.

The prescribed grades and volumes for fluids

and lubricants in the air conditioning system

are shown below.

AC Decal

Decal for R1234yf

SPECIFICATIONS

620

Explanation of symbols for R1234yf

Symbol Explanation

Caution

Mobile air condition system

(MAC)

Lubricant

Only a trained and certified tech-

nician can perform service on the

mobile air conditioning system

(MAC)

Flammable refrigerant

Refrigerant

The refrigerant amount (charge level) is prin-

ted on a decal on the inside of the hood.

Vehicles with R1234yf refrigerant

Refrigerant amount.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains the

refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In

accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician

Training for Safe Service and Containment

of Refrigerants Used in Mobile AC Sys-

tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant

system may only be performed by trained

and certified technicians in order to ensure

the safety of the system.

Compressor oil

Volume Prescribed grade

130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SPA2

Evaporator

CAUTION

The AC system evaporator must never be

repaired or replaced with a previously used

evaporator. The new evaporator must be

certified and labeled in accordance with

SAE J2842.

Related information

•

Climate control system service (p. 558)

SPECIFICATIONS

621

Approved tire pressure

The following tire pressures are recom-

mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to

the tire inflation placard for information spe-

cific to the tires installed on your vehicle at

the factory.

Tire dimensions Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

23560 R17

23555 R18

23550 R19

24545 R20

33 (230) 33 (230)

24540 R21 35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire

T12570 R18

T12580 R18

60 (420) 60 (420)

Related information

•

Type designations (p. 610)

•

Checking tire pressure (p. 507)

•

Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

INDEX
623
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD 388
A
ABS
anti-lock brakes 375
AC (Air conditioning) 211
Accessories and extra equipment 36
installation 37
Accessory installation warning 37
Active Bending Lights 152
Adapting driving characteristics 389
Adaptive Cruise Control 270
activating 273
auto-brake 297
change cruise control functionality 277
controls 272
deactivate 274
display 272
limitations 276
passing 292
set time interval 295
standby mode 275
stored speed 294
switching target vehicles 294
Symbols and messages 278
troubleshooting 276
WARNING 293
Adjusting the steering wheel 187
Airbag 55
activation/deactivation 59
driver's side 56
passenger side 56, 59
Air bag, see Airbag 55
Air conditioning 211
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 619
Air distribution 196
air vents 196, 197
changing 197
defrosting 207
recirculation 206
table showing options 198
Air quality 193, 195
allergy and asthma 194
passenger compartment filter 196
Air recirculation 206
Alarm 250
deactivating 251
Alarm about slippery road conditions 260
Alarm on hazard warning flashers 260
Allergy and asthma-inducing sub-
stances 194
All Wheel Drive, AWD 388
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 388
All Wheel Drive (four-wheel drive) 388
Android Auto 462, 463, 464
Antenna
location 241
Apple CarPlay 458, 459, 461
Approach lighting 156
Apps 429
Assistance at risk of collision 318
activating/deactivating 319
at risk of run-off 319
during collision risks from behind 321
during collision risks from oncoming
traffic 320
limitations 322
Symbols and messages 323
Audio and media 428
Audio system
HD digital radio 439
SiriusXM® Satellite radio  440, 441,
442
Auto-climate 205
Auto hold 381
Auto-hold brakes 381
activating/deactivating 382
INDEX

INDEX
624
after collision 383
driver support 254
Automatic car wash 597
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop 394
Automatic high beam 151
Automatic locking 244
Automatic relocking 225, 239
Automatic transmission 384
kickdown 387
oil 618
Trailer 414
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting 178, 179, 182
rear seat, folding 183
Battery
jump-start 410
Maintenance 565
recycling 569
starter battery 565
support 567
symbols on the battery 569
Blind Spot Information 325
BLIS 325
activating/deactivating 326
limitations 327
Symbols and messages 328
Blower
adjusting 209
air distribution 197
air vents 197
Bluetooth
connect 455
connecting vehicle to Internet 480
phone 465
settings 473
Book service and repair 553
Booster cushions 75
Brake assist
after collision 383
Brake fluid
grade 619
Brake functions 374
Brakes 375
anti-lock brakes, ABS 375
auto-brake with Pilot Assist 297
auto-braking with Adaptive Cruise
Control 297
automatic when stationary 381
Brake Assist System, BAS 376
brake lights 155
brake system 374
emergency brake lights 155
Maintenance 377
on salted roads 377
on wet roads 376
parking brake 377
brake system
fluid 619
C
Camera sensor
see Camera 362
Camera unit 362
limitations 362
maintenance and cleaning 365
Symbols and messages 367
Capacity weight 528, 615
Care Key
restricted remote key 232
settings 233
Cargo compartment 537
attachment points 540
cargo net 542
electrical outlet 534
Lighting 157
parcel shelf 544
Cargo compartment cover 544

INDEX
625
Cargo compartment floor 540
foldable 541
cargo net 542
Cargo net 542
Car wash 594, 596, 597, 598, 599, 600
Catalytic converter 408
recovery 419
Cell phone, see Phone 466
Center console 533
Center display
change appearance 127
cleaning 589
climate controls 201
Function view 118
handling 108, 111, 115, 120
keyboard 122
messages 136, 137
overview 106
settings 128, 129
switch off and change volume 127
symbols in status bar 120
views 111
Central locking 242
Certificate 475
Change of owner 130
Changing target vehicle 294
Checking engine oil level 562
Child lock
activating/deactivating 243
Child restraints 66, 68
booster cushions 75
convertible seats 72
infant seats 70
ISOFIXLATCH anchors 78
lower attachment points 77
recalls and registration 68
top tether anchors 76
Child safety 66
City Safety 305
braking for oncoming vehicles 313
crossing traffic 311
delayed evasive maneuver 312
detecting obstacles 309
limitations 313
limitations in crossing traffic 311
setting warning distance 308
sub-functions 306
Symbols and messages 317
Cleaning 592, 593, 594
automatic car wash 597
car wash 594, 596, 597, 598, 599,
600
center display 589
Seat belts 591
textile upholstery 589, 590, 592
upholstery 589, 590, 591, 592,
593, 594
wheels 600
Cleaning wheels 600
Cleaning wiper blades 599
CleanZone 194
Clean Zone Interior Package 194
Climate 190
auto-regulation 205
blower control 209
parking 212
perceived temperature 192
Sensors 191
temperature control 210, 211
voice control 192
zones 190
Climate controls 201
center display 201
rear seat 201
Climate system 190, 201
Refrigerant 619
repairs 558
Clock, setting 91
Clothing hook 542
Collision 44, 49, 55, 64

INDEX
626
Collision warner
crossing traffic rear 331
see City Safety 305
Collision warning
from the rear 324
with Adaptive Cruise Control 293
with Pilot Assist 293
Color code, paintwork 603
Color codes 603
Compass 425
calibration 426
Condensation in headlights 596, 597,
598, 599
Connected Safety 260
activating/deactivating 261
limitations 261
Connecting vehicle to Internet
No connection or poor connection 484
via a mobile device (WiFi) 480
via cellular phone (Bluetooth) 480
via vehicle's modem 481
Connect phone 466
Contact information 26
Convertible seats 72
coolant 563
filling 563
Cooling system
overheating 409
Cornering illumination 153
Corner Traction Control 255
Corrosion protection 601
Crash, see Collision 44
Crash event data 33
Cross Traffic Alert 331
activating/deactivating 332
limitations 333
messages 334
Cruise control 267
activating 268
standby mode 270
stored speed 294
turn off 269
Curb weight 615
Customer Privacy Policy 35
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 194
D
Data
recording 33
transferring between vehicle and
workshop 550
Data sharing 485, 486
Daytime running lights 148
Decals
location 610
Defrosting 207
Detecting obstacles
City Safety 309
Diagnosis
via the workshop's Wi-Fi 550
Dimensions 613
Dipstick, electronic 562
Direction of rotation 502
Display
driver information 84
Display lighting 158
Distance Alert
Set time interval 295
DivX
®
454
Door mirrors 163
compass 425, 426
dimming 163

INDEX
627
outer 163
power folding 164
resetting 164
store position 180, 181
Download Center 551
use 551
Driveline
transmission 383
Drive mode 389
changing 391
ECO 391, 393
when using driver support 297
Driver Alert Control 329
activating/deactivating 330
limitations 331
rest stop guidance 330
Driver performance 90
settings 90
Driver profile 132
edit 133, 134, 136
select 133
Driver support system 254
Drive mode 297
Driving
cooling system 409
with a trailer 414
Driving economy 402
Driving through standing water 404
driving with a trailer
towball load 616
towing capacity 616
E
ECO climate 391
ECO mode 391
activate with function button 393
Economical driving 391, 402
Electrical outlet 534
use 534
Electrical system 565
Electric parking brake 377
Electronic immobilizer 236
emergency brake lights 155
Emission inspection readiness 548
Engine
overheating 409
start 370
Start/Stopfunction 394
turn off 372
Engine braking 375, 400
Engine compartment
coolant 563
engine oil 560
overview 559
Engine drag control 255
Engine oil 560
checking and filling 562
grade and volume 618
Engine shutdown 372
Engine specifications 617
Engine temperature
high 409
Environment 28
Ethanol content
max. 10% by volume 406
Exterior dimensions 613
F
Federal Clean Air Act 548
Ferry transport 398
Flooded road 404
Fluids, volumes 606, 619
Fluids and oils 563, 618, 619

INDEX
628
Fog lights
front 153
rear 154
Four-C 398
Front seat
blower 209
climate 201
heating 203
temperature 210
Front seat manual 178
Front seats, power 179
adjusting seat 179
lumbar support 182
massage 182
multifunction control 182
store position 180, 181
FSC, environmental labeling 23
Fuel 406
Travel Link service 447
Fuel filling 405
Fuel gauge 87
Fuel requirements 406, 407
Fuel tank
volume 619
Fuse box 570
Fuses 570
below the glove compartment 578
in engine compartment 572
replacing 570
G
Gasoline grade 406
Gauge
fuel gauge 87
Gear selector positions
automatic transmission 384
Glass, laminated/reinforced 160
Glove compartment 535
Gracenote® 453
Grocery bag holders  539
Gross vehicle weight 615
H
Handbrake 377
Hand wash 596
Hard disk
space 487
Hazard warning flashers 155
HDC 400
HD radio 436
Head restraint 185
Heated washer nozzles 170
Heating
Seats 203, 204
steering wheel 204, 205
windows 208
high beams 150, 151
High engine temperature 409
Hill Descent Control 399, 400, 401
activate with function button 401
Hill Start Assist 382
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 382
Hoisting the vehicle 555
HomeLink® 421
programming 422
type approval 424
use 424
HomeLink® remote control 
programmable  421
Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting,
Follow me home lighting, follow-me-
home lighting 156
Honk 186
Hood, opening 558
Horn 186

INDEX
629
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 195
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 63
ID, Volvo 26
Identification number 39
Ignition mode 372, 374
Immobilizer 236
Electronic immobilizer 236
Indicator symbols 92
Individual drive mode 389
Infant seats 70
Inflatable curtain 63
Inflatable Curtain 63
Inflating tires 527
Inflation pressure
adjusting 508
Checking 507
decal with recommended pressure 509
Inflation pressure monitoring 509
action 513
save new inflation pressure 511
Status 512
Inflation pressure table 621
Information display 84, 86
Infotainment (Audio and media) 428
Instrument cluster 84
settings 86
Instrument illumination 158
Instrument lighting 158
Instrument panel 84
app menu 100, 101
messages 102
settings 86
Instruments and controls 82
Instruments overview
left-hand drive vehicle 82
IntelliSafe
driver support 29
Interior Air Quality System 195
Intermittent wiping 170
Internet, see Internet-connected vehi-
cle 479
Internet-connected vehicle 479
book service and repair 553
No connection or poor connection 484
send car data 554
system updates 551
iPod
®
, connecting 455
ISOFIXLATCH anchors 78
J
Jack 517
Jump-start 410
K
Key 222
Keyboard 122, 125
change language 125
Keyless
locking/unlocking 239
settings 240
touch-sensitive surfaces 238
Key tag 222
L
Labels
location 610
Laminated glass 160
Lamps
changing 584
location 585
specifications 588
Trailer 417

INDEX
630
Lane Keeping Aid 298
activating/deactivating 300
display 304
limitations 301
see Lane Keeping Aid 298
select assistance option 301
Symbols and messages 302
Language 128
Large Animal Detection (LAD) 309
Launch function 388
Leather upholstery, cleaning instruc-
tions 592
Leveling control
suspension 398
License agreement 95, 488
Lifting tools 517
Light bulbs
changing 584
specifications 588
Light control 146, 158
Lighting
Active Bending Lights 152
approach lighting 156
automatic high beam 151
brake lights 155
control, instrument, display 158
controls 146, 156
cornering illumination 153
daytime running lights 148
emergency brake lights 155
front fog lights 153
Hazard warning flashers 155
high beams 150, 151
home safe lighting 156
in passenger compartment 156
light locations 585
low beams 149
position lights 148
rear fog light 154
settings 147
Turn signals 152
Lighting, replacing bulbs 584
brake lights 587
light bulbs, specifications 588
rear fog light 588
turn signal, rear 585
Limp home 383
Load anchoring eyelets
cargo compartment 540
Load anchoring hooks 539
Load carriers 538
Load index 504
Loading
general 537
load anchoring eyelets 540
long load 538
Lock indication  220
setting 221
Locking/unlocking
Tailgate 226, 240
Locking wheel bolts 517
Locks
locking/unlocking 225
Locks and remote keys 220
Low battery charge level
start battery 410
Low beams 149
Low-speed driving 399
activate with function button 399
M
Maintained climate comfort 216
start/stop 217
Maintenance 548
corrosion protection 601
Max. axle weight 615
Max. roof load 615
Media player 449, 450, 451
compatible file formats 456, 457
voice control 142

INDEX
631
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 278
Assistance at risk of collision 323
BLIS 328
camera and radar unit 367
City Safety 317
Cross Traffic Alert 334
Lane Keeping Aid 302
Park Assist Camera 348
Park Assist Pilot 358
Parking Assist 339
Pilot Assist 290
stability and traction control system 258
Messages in display 102, 136
handling 103, 137
saved 104, 137
Mileage 87
Misting
condensation in headlights 594, 597
Mood lighting 157
adjusting 158
N
Net
cargo compartment 542
O
Occupant Classification System 59
Occupant safety 45
Octane rating 407
Oil, see also Engine oil 618
Oil filter 560
Oil level 562
On-board diagnostics 548
On-board Diagnostic socket 37
Option/accessory 21
Outside temperature gauge 92
Overheating 409, 414
Owner's information 16
OWNER'S MANUAL 21
environmental labeling 23
in cellular phone 20
in the center display 17, 18
P
Paddle at steering wheel 186
Paint
color code 603
paint damage and touch-up 601,
602, 603
Panoramic roof 165
opening and closing 167
pinch protection 160
sun shade 169
ventilation position 168
Parallel parking 350
Parcel shelf 544
Park Assist Camera 340
activating 346
limitations 362
location and views 341
sensor field 345
Symbols and messages 348
trajectory lines 343
Park Assist Pilot 350
limitations 355
parallel parking 351
perpendicular parking 351
pulling out of a parking space 355
Symbols and messages 358
use 352
Park Assist System 335
parking
on hills 380
Parking Assist 335
activating/deactivating 337
front, rear and sides 336
limitations 338
Symbols and messages 339

INDEX
632
Parking brake 377
activating/deactivating 378
automatic activation 379
Low battery charge level 380
Parking climate 212
Symbols and messages 218
Passenger compartment filter 196
Passenger compartment interior 532
center console 533
electrical outlet 534
glove compartment 535
sun visor 537
Passenger compartment lighting 156
adjusting 158
auto switch 157
Passing assistance 292
activating 292
personal information (Customer Privacy
Policy) 35
Phone 465
changing to another 469
connect 466
connect automatically 468
connect manually 468
delete 469
disconnect 468
phone call 469, 472
text message 470
voice control 141
Phone charger 473, 474
Pilot Assist 280
activating 284
auto-brake 297
controls 282
disengaged steering assistance 287
display 283
limitations 288
passing 292
set time interval 295
standby mode 286
stored speed 294
switching target vehicles 294
Symbols and messages 290
turn off 285
WARNING 293
pinch protection 160
resetting 160
PIN code 482
Private locking 249
Polishing 595
Position lights 148
Power 617
Power folding door mirrors 164
Power panoramic roof 165
Power save mode 410
Power seats 179
Power windows 161
opening and closing 161
pinch protection 160
Preconditioning 212
start/stop 213
timer 213
Pressure wash 598
Privacy Policy (Customer Privacy Policy) 35
Private locking 248
activating/deactivating 249
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 410
R
Radar unit 359
limitations 362
maintenance and cleaning 365
Symbols and messages 367
type approval 360
Radio 432
changing radio waveband and radio
station 433
HD radio 436
RBDS 436
search radio station 434
settings 435
SiriusXM
®
 Satellite radio 440, 441, 442

INDEX
633
start 433
voice control 142
Radio favorites 435
Rain sensor 171, 172
Rain sensor's memory function 172
Rear camera 340
Rear Collision Warning 324
limitations 324
Rear seat
climate 201
folding backrest 183
head restraint 185
heating 204
Rearview/door mirrors
adjusting door mirrors 164
dimming 163
heating 208
interior 163
Rearview mirror 163
dimming 163
Rear window
heating 208
washers 174, 175
wipers 174, 175
Recalls 47
Recommendations when driving 403
Recommendations when loading 537
Recovery 421
Refrigerant 558
climate system 619
Refueling
filling 405
fuel filler door, fuel flap 404
Regenerative braking 383
Remote immobilizer 236
Remote key 222
battery replacement 228
connecting to driver profile 134
detachable key blade 233
loss 232
Range 227
Remote updates 551
Reporting safety defects 46
Resetting door mirrors 164
Resetting settings 130
change of owner 130
Driver profile 136
Resetting trip odometer 89
Road Sign Information 262
activate/deactivate warnings 265
activating/deactivating 263
display 263
limitations 266
Sensus Navigation 264
speed camera information 264
Speed warning 264
Road trip 403
Roll-over protection 255
Roll Stability Control 255
Roof load, max. weight 615
Run-off Mitigation 319
S
Safety 44
pregnancy 45
Safety belt, see Seat belt 49
Safety defects, reporting 46
Safety mode 64
starting/moving 65
Sealing compound 522
Seat, see Seats 178
Seat belt reminder 54
Seat belts 49
Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
gency locking retractor 68
buckling/unbuckling 50
pregnancy 45
seat belt reminder 54

INDEX
634
seat belt tensioner 52
securing child restraint systems 70,
72, 75
Seat belt tensioner 52
resetting 53
Seats
heating 203, 204
manual front seat 178
power front seats 179
store position 180, 181
whiplash protection 48
Security code 249
Sensors
air quality 195
Camera unit 362
climate 191
Radar unit 359
Sensus
connection and entertainment 30
Sensus Navigation
Road Sign Information 264
Service position 605
Service program 548
settings
Categories 131
contextual 129
resetting 130
Shiftlock 387
Side airbag 63
Side Impact Protection System 63
SIM card 482
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 63
Sirius Satellite radio
Travel link 444
SiriusXM® Satellite radio
traffic information 440, 441, 442
Ski hatch 540
Slippery conditions 403
Slippery road conditions 403
Snow chains 521
Software updates 33
Sound experience 429
Sound settings 428, 471
phone 472
playing media 450, 451
text message 471
Spare tire 518
handling 519
Speed camera information 264
activating/deactivating 265
Speed symbols, tires 504
Spin control 255
Stability and traction control system 255
sport mode 256, 257
Symbols and messages 258
Stains 589, 590, 591, 592, 593, 594
Start/Stop
deactivate 395
Driving 394
limitations 396
vehicle function 394
Start and lock system
type designations 236
Start battery 410, 565
overload 410
Start engine 370
Starting the engine
after a collision 65
Start the vehicle 370
Steering assistance at risk of collision 318
Steering power level, see Steering wheel
resistance 254
Steering wheel 186, 187
heating 204, 205
keypad 186
paddle 186
steering wheel adjustment 187
Steering wheel keypad 186
Steering wheel paddles 386

INDEX
635
Steering wheel resistance, speed-
dependent 254
Stone chips and scratches 601, 602, 603
Stop/start function 394
Storage compartments 532
center console 533
glove compartment 535
sun visor 537
Stored speed 294
Sunroof
pinch protection 160
Sun shade
panoramic roof 165, 169
pinch protection 160
Sun visor 537
mirror lighting 157
Support battery 567
Symbols
dynamic 84
indicator symbols 92
warning symbols 92
Symbols and messages
center display's status bar 120
parking climate 218
system updates 551
T
Tailgate
closing and locking using button 245
locking/unlocking 226, 240
open/close with foot movement 247
unlocking from inside 243
Technician certification 38
Temperature
adjusting 210, 211
perceived 192
Temporary Spare 518
Temporary tire sealing system 522
Terms and conditions
services 35
users 485
Time interval to the vehicle ahead 295
Tires
age 500
designations 504
direction of rotation 502
economy and wear 500
glossary of terms 503
inflation pressure table 621
pressure 621
recommended 500
removing and installing 514
rotation when changing 500
specifications 504, 621
speed rating 504
storage 500
tread wear indicator 503
winter tires 520
Tire sealing system 522
Inflating tires 527
use 523
Tire tread 503
Tools 516
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems) 76
Top view 128
Total airing function 222
Towbar 413
removable, attaching, installing,
mounting 413
removable, removing, detaching 413
Towing 418
Towing capacity and towball load 616
Towing eyelet 419
TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem 509
Traction control 255
Traffic information 435

INDEX
636
Trailer
driving with a trailer 414
Lamps 417
swaying 416
Trailer Stability Assist 256
trailer 416
Trailer stabilizer 256, 416
Trailer towing
trailer hitch 413
Transmission 383
automatic 384, 388
Transmission fluid
grade 618
Travel Link 444
Fuel 447
Notifications 446
Sports 448
weather 445
Tread depth 503
winter tires 520
Tread wear indicator 503
Trip computer 87
display in instrument panel 88
Trip odometer 87
Trip odometer resetting 89
Trip statistics 90
settings 90
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control 276
City Safety 313
TSA - Trailer Stability Assist  416
Tunnel detection 149
Turn off engine 372
Turn signals 152
Type approval
HomeLink
®
424
radar system 360
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 506
Units 128
Unlocking
settings 226
with key blade 234
USB
socket for connecting media 456
V
Vehicle care  594, 596, 597, 598, 599,
600
leather upholstery 592
Vehicle Event Data 33
Vehicle functions
in the center display 118
Vehicle key bat. low 228
Vehicle modem
connecting vehicle to Internet 481
settings 482
Vehicle recovery 421
Vehicle status 552
inflation pressure 512
Vehicle upholstery 589, 590, 591, 592,
593, 594
Vehicle weight 615
Ventilation 196, 197
Video 453, 455
settings 454
Voice control 138
climate 192
phone 141
radio and media 142
settings 142
use 139, 141, 142

INDEX
637
VOL mark 500
Volvo ID 26
create and register 27
W
Warning lights
Adaptive Cruise Control 293
Pilot Assist 293
stability and traction control system 255
Warning sound
parking brake 380
warning symbols 92
Warning symbols
safety 44
Warranties 548
Washer
headlights 173
rear window 174, 175
washer fluid, filling 606
Windshield 173
Washer fluid 170, 606
Washer nozzles, heated 170
Waxing 595
Weights
Curb weight 615
Wheel bolts 517
Wheels
cleaning 600
removing and installing 514
Snow chains 521
Wheels and tires
Load index and speed symbol 504
Whiplash protection 48
Whiplash Protection System 48
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 48
Wi-Fi
connecting vehicle to Internet 480
delete network 484
sharing Internet connection, tether-
ing, hotspot 483
technology and security 485
Windows and glass 160
Windshield washing 173
Windshield wipers 170
rain sensor 171, 172
Winter driving 403
Snow chains 521
winter tires 520
Wiper blade 170
replacing 603, 604
service position 605
Wiper blade and washing fluid 170
WPC 473, 474